Home

There - Wasp Barcode Technologies

1. General Location Settings Assembly Infomation Additional Manage Suppliers Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Type Item Number Inventory Quantity Always Scrap Stocking Unit Total In House Description 1 00 C To select items to include in your Assembly Item 97 1 2 InventoryControl Printable Help In the Type drop down select Inventory Non Inventory or Assembly General Location Settings Assembly Info ltem Number ry Non Inventory Assembly aan MO D In the Item Number field select which item you want to add to this assembly If you select Full List the Item List will be filtered by the Type you selected i e if Non Inventory is selected only non inventory items will appear on the Item List Assembly Information Additional Manage Supp General Location Settings Type Item Number D ltem Number Description 1002 1003 1005 1006 lt More gt For Full List lt New gt Create New When you tab out of the Item Number field after selecting an item the Description Stocking Unit and Total In House fields will populate with the information for that item Enter the Quantity you want included in this Assembly Item This number represents how many of this items is included with each build of this Assembly Item Example Assume this Assembly Item is a cabinet For each cabinet you
2. E User can access all current and future sites Save l Cancel ee Keep in mind that you should set up each worker with his or her own user name and password You can use the Copy User feature Edit gt Copy User to quickly add profiles for users with the same settings This allows you to retain the privileges you have selected after entering a new User Name and Password 29 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 4 Setting Up Sites and Locations Business Examples Note For step by step instructions on adding sites please refer to the topic Creating New Sites For step by step instructions on adding locations please refer to the topic Creating New Locations Business Type Distributing Multiple Sites Multiple Locations Sebastian s Distributing has two warehouses Each warehouse contains various bins shelves etc that will physically contain the inventory Since this business has multiple warehouses each warehouse can be setup as a Site then multiple locations can be created within each site to represent the specific areas where inventory will be stored They want to set up their site names based on the city where the warehouse is located and their location names based on where the inventory is kept within the site However they also want the ability to scan their sites locations using the handheld barcode scanners so they know the site locations should be a short combination of numbers and characters Since
3. This message displays when you enter a Supplier that is not currently in the mobile device database in the Supplier field For more information on adding suppliers on the mobile device please refer to Windows Mobile Device Adding Suppliers 491 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 21 Glossary Adjust This term refers to adjusting the quantity of inventory at a specified location Adjust is like a mini Audit and will update the quantity using FIFO First In First Out to make the total equal to the quantity you enter here The Adjust function is useful if too much or too little quantity is accidentally entered for an item on a mobile device for example inventory is lost found broken etc and you need to quickly correct the quantity for that item Adjusting is different from an Audit in that the Audit function makes other functions of the software such as adding inventory unavailable to ensure inventory is not added or removed while you are doing the counts All features are still available when adjusting inventory Archive The Archive Transaction feature allows you to archive inactive transactions prior to a specified date Archiving old information keeps your database running quickly and efficiently Assembly Item Pro and Enterprise versions only Assembly items are created when you combine two or more existing items to create a new item You will use the Assembly item type when you want to build several of
4. 2 Return to the desktop on your mobile device close all programs Directly below the date the screen should display WiFi lt status gt The status will change from Not Connected to Connecting to network name When it is connected the screen will display WiFi lt your network name gt Note If your screen does not display WiFi lt status gt make sure you have enabled wifi on this device 3 Now you can log into InventoryControl RF from Start gt Programs gt InventoryControlRF or by clicking the icon on your desktop 20 10 3 WDT1200 1250 1200I and 1250II Tip WPA1200II Connectivity Status to Bluetooth Printer Please note that the Bluetooth connection status may display Not Connect or Disconnected anytime you are not actively printing When you print the connection will automatically change to Connected 20 10 4 Other Devices For devices not supported by Wasp Barcode Technologies please refer to the device manual for information on enabling WIFI 435 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 11 Using InventoryControl and InventoryControl RF 20 11 1 Windows Mobile Device About Screen The About screen displays basic information about the version of InventoryControl installed on your device Viewing the About Screen To open the About screen select Help gt About InsentorscControl dReceive The About screen displays InventoryControl Version 6 0 Build 6 0 04282011 Allow Negati
5. Below is an example of the Item Stock Level List Click the View Report button at the bottom of the screen to display the Reorder Report Report Viewer ox CR KUKI gt m 2 Boh K Y BusinessObjects Di 1No Trackby Main Report D 2 No Trackby Req D 3 ANAN D 4 Serial 0 5Lot Item Reorder by Location Report 6 DateCode Item Number 1 No Trackby D 7 DateCode Description 1 No Trackby D 8 No Track All Site Location Total Available Min Stock Level Reorder Orv D 9 Pallet Site 1 LOC4 0 00 10 00 10 00 Site 1 LOCS 0 00 10 00 10 00 Site 2 Loc 0 00 10 00 10 00 Total 0 00 30 00 Item Number 2 No Trackby Req Description 2 No Trackby Req Site Location Total Available Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Site 1 Locl Site 1 LOC4 Site 1 LOCS Site 2 Loc Total a 40 0 Item Number 3 AIWAN J Description 3 AWAN 7 Site Location Total Available Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Reorder Op Locl LO 10 00 10 00 0 0 10 00 10 00 10 00 10 00 Total 1 40 00 Item Number 4 Serial Description 4 Trackby Serial Site Location Total Available Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Reorder Op Site 1 Loc 2 00 10 00 50 00 10 00 Site 1 LOC4 1 00 00 10 00 Site 1 LOCS 0 00 00 10 00 Site 2 Locl 0 00 0 10 0 Total 1 00 40 00 7 18 2007 Page 1 of 3 Current Page No 1 Total Page No 3 Zoom Factor 75 J You can use this report to ai
6. For an example of the Purchase Order List please refer to the Purchase Order List Example topic For detailed information on using the list screen please refer to the Working with Lists topic 2 When you begin to receive inventory for the purchase order you will enter the quantity received for each item on the Receive screen Receive Pick menu gt Receive Inventory for an item can be marked as received on the PC s Receive screen or on the mobile devices This screen allows you to enter quantities received by location and can optionally show you costing information as well Receiving inventory on the Receive screen adds inventory to that item Purchase orders that have some items received have a status of In Process If the order becomes overdue it will have a status of In Process Overdue For detailed information on the Receive screen please refer to the Receiving Inventory topic For detailed information on receiving inventory on the WDT2200 please refer to WDT2200 Receiving Inventory For detailed information on receiving inventory on a Windows Mobile Device please refer to Windows Mobile Device Receiving Inventory 3 After the order is fully picked it has a status of Completed 187 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 2 Creating a New Purchase Order This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest
7. Formatting Purchase Order and Pick Order Numbers 1 From the Main screen click the Receive Pick icon The Receive Pick menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Receive Pick menu click Number Formats A menu appears allowing you to select to customize Purchase Order Numbers PO Number or Pick Order Numbers Order Number E PO Number Vey E Order Number He Customize Numbers HECKER 3 Click on Purchase Order Numbers or Pick Order Numbers depending on what you want to customize The screen for these two are identical so for this example we are going to select PO Numbers The Define PO Number Format screen appears 210 InventoryControl Printable Help 2E Define PO Number Format Please define the PO Number Format below Purchase Order Number a k a PO Number is an alpha numeric combination of up to 38 characters Please specify its formation below Type Value Length Type e Add Replace The PO Number will look like this Total Characters 0 4 Select the type of value you are entering from the Type drop down list Your options are e Text This option enters text or numeric data into the number If you select Text a text field appears allowing you to enter the text you want to appear in the number Type Text Text 7 Add Replace e Date This option inserts the date into the number If you select Date a format field
8. Move 123 Monitor Location ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next 347 InventoryControl Printable Help An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Move for this Item to more than one Location Values entered for Item PO and Supplier if any will remain locked while looping on Location after entering them for the first Add Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a Qty of 10 were entered this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Add PO Supplier and Tracked By values if any for this second Add will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop if any 123 Qty Location Total Qty 10 00000 F4 Done While looping on Location all that is required for each Move are values for Qty and Location The Total Qty field is incremented each time a Move is submitted while looping Press the ENT key to submit the Move transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop Looping on Item Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the following example F3 was pressed when prompted for Item Move Item i Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Above the asterisk indicates the intention to loop on Item Values entered for Location PO Suppl
9. 00001 i Item 1001 i Site Site 1 i Location Location 2 i EA Oty Pick ESE gt 12 14 PM Lo E Enter the Quantity of the Item to be picked If you enter a higher quantity than is indicated on the Pick Order a warning will appear but you will be allowed to enter the higher quantity if you so choose Order 00001 i Item 1001 i Location Location 2 i st i Y Pick S0 b 12 15 Pm G S Note Notice that this is in eaches When all required information is entered tap OK The Item s is marked as Received and the Receive screen resets ready for the next Item to be received Tapping the Reset button clears all fields and restores all available fields to the Receive screen 472 InventoryControl Printable Help display 9 When you are finished with the Add screen tap Close to return to InventoryControl main menu See the Windows Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 20 11 17 Windows Mobile Device Adjusting Inventory Quantities The Adjust function is used to modify the inventory quantity for existing Items Inventory amounts can also be adjusted at the PC See the Adjusting Inventory topic for more information The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings Adjusti
10. 16 1 Importing Into the Database Import allows you to bring data into the program s database from external sources such as CSV or TXT files This allows you to quickly add information to your database rather than having to manually add it when you are initially setting up your software Data must be imported into the database in the following order Site Locations Suppliers Manufacturers Customers Items Inventory Oo a Kam Samples for each import type are installed in the InventoryControl Import Samples folder Use these samples to verify you have the correct data and format This topic covers Tips for Importing Data How to Import Data Required Fields Handling Import Errors Notes on Importing Inventory 16 1 1 Tips for Importing Data e Do not attempt to use Import to modify existing records e Imported data will be truncated if field lengths exceed those within the program s database Data Types and Sizes for each Table that can receive data via Import are documented in the Database Properties topic e f your data normally resides in a different data format you must first use your existing database software s File gt Export or File gt Save As function to translate the data to a csv or ixt file e You must strip out all currency symbols including but not limited to these examples or a if you are about to import them into a numeric field such as Cost List Price etc They 256
11. Audit Item 9999999 Entry not found Scan or key in value and press Ent ESC Menu If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item Scan or key in a Location value The Location field is required for all Audit transactions Audit 10007 Monitor Location AREA 2 ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next Enter a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field or Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field or Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field without first providing a Location value the following message will be displayed Please scan or key in Location ESC Exit Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Location value As shown below if you enter a Location that s not currently in the PDT database you will be prompted to accept or reject the entry as a new value to be added to the database The currently selected Source Site will be displayed when you are about to create a new Location 337 InventoryControl Printable Help Site Warehouse 2 New Location Area 7 ENT OK ESC Cancel If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press the ESC key to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other tha
12. Check In The Check In screen allows you to check in or make available inventory that has previously been Checked Out to one or more customers While checking in does not actually add inventory to an item it does free up that inventory to be checked out to another customer if needed or to be included in a pick order For more information on the Check In screen please refer to the Checking In Inventory topic Check Out The Check Out screen allows you to check out or assign inventory to a customer for a specified length of time For more information on the Check Out screen please refer to the Checking Out Inventory topic Adjust The Adjust screen allows you to modify the quantity of existing items Adjust is like a mini Audit and will update the quantity using FIFO First In First Out to make the total equal to the quantity you enter here The Adjust function is useful if too much or too little quantity is accidentally entered for an item on a mobile device for example inventory is lost found broken etc and you need to quickly correct the quantity for that item Adjusting is different from an Audit in that the Audit function makes other functions of the software such as adding inventory unavailable to ensure inventory is not added or removed while you are doing the counts All features are still available when adjusting inventory For more information on the Adjust screen please refer to the Adjusting Inventory topic A
13. Check Out 4 Delete v Disassemble Please select the sites that Pat Example can access Select All Select None Site Description For this Admin user make sure to select this checkbox V User can access all current and future sites Save Cancel Help l Close 27 InventoryControl Printable Help Step 2 After adding sites and locations continue adding users When she has completed entering her sites and locations Pat continues setting up security profiles for her employees who will be using InventoryControl She oversees a supervisor at each of her two warehouses which are her sites Each supervisor will need to occasionally log on to the PC to perform basic functions such as manually adding removing or adjusting inventory performing audits checking inventory in and out to customers etc and also creating pick orders and purchase orders as needed The supervisors need access to most of the system but do not need full administrative privileges as they will not be creating users backups or run reports Each of these users should have access only to the warehouse were they work Below is an example of the supervisor s Security screen 3 Security Privileges File Edit User List Security Settings Admin User ey En Example Pat Privileges Select All Select None Rumigan Joe J Add Inventory 2 Edit 7 Adjust Inventory 7 Labels Administration Privilege V Move Allow Mobile Device Lo
14. InventoryControl Printable Help you will need to decide which stocking unit to use For example if you have Rope as an item and it costs you 0 12 a foot you would enter 12 in the Cost field and Feet as the Stocking Unit entered on the Additional tab If you rarely sell the rope in exact multiples of feet you may want to enter your Stocking Unit as Inches since this is the lowest unit measured and enter your cost per inch in the Cost field It is up to you how you want to calculate this however you should make sure that the Cost you enter is the cost for one whole Stocking Unit either Feet or Inches in our example Keep in mind that you can enter a new cost on the Add Inventory screen if you purchase this item at a discount For a detailed description for using Cost Tracking and Average Costing please see the topic Using Cost Tracking and Average Costing Select how you want InventoryControl to calculate cost for this item Options are Legacy Method This is the method used in previous versions of InventoryControl The legacy method uses FIFO and manages cost by location and track by level Note If you upgrade your version of InventoryControl to version 6 which contains additional methods all existing items will be imported with the legacy method You can change to a new option on the Edit Item screen Moving Average When this method is used the average cost of a particular item is recalculated based on each purchase
15. The Total In House counter is the Total Available less the Total Checked Out The Total On Order counter is the quantity of this item that is currently included on an active Pick Order e The Total Buildable is the quantity that can be built of this Assembly Item based on the inventory levels of the component items e The Committed counter is the number of this Assembly Item that has been committed to a pick order 7 2 3 Location Settings Tab When you have completed the General Information tab click the Location Settings tab This tab allows you to enter all locations where this item will be in inventory and to designate a primary location You can assign items to more than one location This tab uses the List functionality for grouping ordering filtering and deleting 95 InventoryControl Printable Help General Location Settings Assembly Infomation Additional Manage Suppliers Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Fitter Group By Delete To finish adding a new record please press enter key or down arrow button Click on Filter toolbar button to bring up filter row and to bring up group row please click on Grouping toolbar button Site Location Quantity Max Stock Level Min Stock Level Reorder Qty 0 00 0 00 0 00 Primary Location Record iq 4 ofo DP bi gt Help Save l Close Complete the fields on this screen as described below e Primary Location Select this checkbox
16. Tool tip CheckOut Audit Adjust PurchaseOrder PickOrder Inventory Request Now the custom Label Stock will continue to appear on all screens instead of the default Label value Item Number but the custom Tool Tip will only be displayed where this field occurs within all of the Inventory transactions 251 InventoryControl Printable Help The scope of the custom Tool Tip for this field could be narrowed further by selecting a single Inventory transaction such as Remove from the Form drop down list 3 Now select if you want this field to be Visible and or Required De selecting the Visible option completely removes the field from the forms where it occurs This can be used to streamline data input operations by removing the distraction of unused fields The label will still be visible while the Edit Labels option is turned on Selecting the Required option makes data entry mandatory for transactions that use the field being customized The Visible option will be grayed out when the Required option is selected Required fields must be visible Some customizable fields must be both visible and required for the software to perform correctly In this case the Visible and Required checkboxes will be disabled 4 Click OK to save your changes 15 8 2 Resetting Field Names to their Default Values You can quickly restore the default values for all editable fields by following the instructions below 1 From the M
17. 0070413 0000010005 04 13 2007 123456 com System ID UBS Ei 5 16 2007 0070413 000001 0007 04 17 2007 abcdef com System ID Federal Express 5 25 2007 0070413 0000010006 04 13 2007 12345 com System ID DHL 05 25 2007 5 28 2007 0070521 0000010001x 05 21 2007 com System ID 05 22 2007 5 30 2007 0070420 000001 0000x 05 20 2007 com System ID Airborne 5 31 2007 0070517 0000010000 lt 05 17 2007 98765 com System ID Airbome 05 23 2007 6 1 2007 0070511 000001 0000x 05 11 2007 ref 3 100 James Bond FedEx Overnight 0070508 000001 0000x 05 08 2007 123456 com System ID Airbome Record Iq 4 10f 10 gt NM Help Close Notice the red flags next to some of the orders on the list These red flags indicate that the order is past due The status may be New Past Due or In Process Past Due Overdue orders will appear at the top of the list by default but you can reorder the list as needed The Pick Order List screen allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print the list of Pick Orders For detailed information regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 180 InventoryControl Printable Help 11 5 Picking Orders This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen When a pick order is actually bei
18. General Location Settings Additional Manage Suppliers Assembly Information Attachments Picture Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Item Number Alt Item Number Description Category e Checkout Lenath Manufacturer e Type Assembly X ltem To Be Tracked By Serial Number Ei F Lot Date Code Pallet Require the user to fill out Ref Supplier Customer Cost j Cost Method Moving Average e List Price H Average Cost Sale Price Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Reorder Oty Note that in addition to the usual tabs that appear on the Create New Item screen there is also a tab labeled Assembly Information 90 InventoryControl Printable Help 7 2 2 General Information Tab The General Information tab is where you will enter the basic information about the item Please see the screen shot above for an example of this tab Enter the appropriate information in the fields provided The Item Number is often available on a barcode label already attached to the item such as a UPC code or SKU number Using an existing barcode for the Item Number allows you to scan or manually enter the number from each item as it comes in without having to print and affix your own barcode inventory item labels Item numbers in InventoryControl cannot exceed 31 characters Do not use a description as
19. This product is fully registered Please only enter additional user license keys below Serial Number 3 Enter anew Serial Number to add additional features such as additional mobile device licenses 4 Click OK or click Cancel to exit without updating Exit and restart the software to use the new key If you use this form to upgrade from the Demo version to a Licensed version of this software the License Key you enter here will be displayed on the About screen If you use this form to increase the number of Mobile Devices InventoryControl will support your original License Key will continue to be displayed in Help gt About but it will display the new number of mobile devices permitted 44 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 6 Selecting Sites InventoryControl allows you to work with more than one Site and multiple Locations within each Site At any time you can limit all your transactions to a specified Source a specified Destination or allow transactions at All Sites These are chosen on the Select Site screen Note for WaspNest Inventory Users WaspNest Inventory only allows for one Site For information on the benefits of upgrading WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Keep in mind that you can only select sites to which you have been given access in Security Selecting a Source on the Select Site screen determines the locations available in the Location f
20. 1 Enter the Item you want to check in Click the i icon to search for a item 2 Enter the Customer to whom this piece of inventory was checked out Click the i icon to search for a customer 3 Enter the Site and Location into which you want to check in this item Click the i icon to search for a site or location 4 Enter any track bys you have set up for this item 5 Enter the Quantity you want to check in You cannot check in more than you have checked out to the selected customer 6 If you are printing receipts enter the number of receipts you want to print 7 Click OK to check out the selected item 20 11 11 Windows Mobile Device Moving Inventory The Move function is used to move inventory quantity from one Location to another This allows you to move inventory quantity for an item from one Location to another When you create an item you can add which locations it may be When you then add inventory quantity to the item you select in which location that quantity will reside The Move function allows you to move that inventory from the originally assigned location to another By moving inventory in the software you can easily keep accurate records of where all of your inventory is currently located If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled on the Options screen you can also move more quantity than is available at the source Location For more information on this option please refer to the
21. 2 Build your Assembly Item This is a similar process as Adding Inventory to other item types In this process you will tell InventoryControl how many of this Assembly Item you want to build 88 InventoryControl Printable Help InventoryControl will check the on hand amounts for each item included in the build to make sure you have enough to complete the desired amount After the build is complete the on hand amounts for each item included in your Assembly Item will be reduced by the number built and the on hand amount for the Assembly Item will be increased 7 2 Creating an Assembly Item This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Assembly Items are used when you want to combine two or more existing items into one new item We recommend you read the Assembly Overview topic before you begin creating Assembly Items This topic discusses Accessing the New Assembly Items Screen General Information Tab Location Settings Tab Assembly Tab Additional Information Tab Manage Suppliers Tab Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Tab Saving the New Item 89 InventoryControl Printable Help 7 2 1 Accessing the New Assembly Item Screen 1 From the Main screen select New gt Item gt Assembly The Create New Item screen appears
22. 2 On the Receive Pick menu click the Manage Ship Methods icon The Ship Method List appears displaying all shipping methods entered into the system 3 Highlight the desired listing then select the function you want to perform Options are 207 InventoryControl Printable Help Delete This deletes the highlighted shipping method from the database When you select this option a confirmation message will appear Select Yes on the confirmation message to delete the method It will no longer appear in the Shipping Methods drop down list Note that you cannot delete the standard shopping methods that came preloaded in InventoryControl Print Allows you to print the Ship Method List When this option is selected a standard Page Setup screen appears allowing you to enter margins An example of this screen is shown below Page Setup xs Paper Size Letter 8 x 11 in Source Auto Select z Orientation Margins inches a Portrait Left 1 Right 1 Landscape Top 1 Bottom 1 Cancel Click the OK button on the Page Setup screen to print the list The list will print to your default printer Export Allows you to export the Ship Method List to an external text file When the Export option is selected a screen appears allowing you to specify where the exported data will be saved on your computer An example of the Export screen is shown below 208 InventoryControl Printable Help Sa
23. 20 11 1 Windows Mobile Device About Screen 0 cceeecceceeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaaeeseeeeseaeeesaaeeseneessaees 436 20 11 2 Windows Mobile Device Site Conftguraton 437 20 11 3 Windows Mobile Device Pinning Fields 438 20 11 4 Windows Mobile Device Adding New Customers sessessseesssrssrrssrrssrissrrsssrnssrrssrrssrrssrns 439 20 11 5 Windows Mobile Device Adding a New Location 440 20 11 6 Windows Mobile Device Adding New Guppliers 442 20 11 7 Windows Mobile Device Adding Inventory ccccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeecaaeeesaeeneaeeeeaees 443 20 11 8 Windows Mobile Device Details Gcreen 446 20 11 9 Windows Mobile Device Checking Out Inventonm 448 xii 20 11 10 Windows Mobile Device Checking In Inventory 0 0 ceceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeaeeneaees 449 20 11 11 Windows Mobile Device Moving Inventory ee ee eeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeneaas 450 20 11 12 Windows Mobile Device Removing Inventory 0 0 cece eeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaas 453 20 11 13 Windows Mobile Device Removing a Kit Hem 458 20 11 14 Windows Mobile Device Receiving Imventonm 461 20 11 15 Windows Mobile Device Picking Items for Orderg 465 20 11 16 Windows Mobile Device Picking Kit Hems eee cece ee eeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeneaae 468 20 11 17 Windows Mobile Device Adjusting Inventory Quantities c cece eeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeeees 473 20
24. 266 InventoryControl Printable Help 16 3 Related Data Fields Location Table Supplier Table Manufacturer Item Table Inventory EI EI Site Site Location Location Supplier Code Supplier Code Supplier Code Name Manufacturer Item Number Item Number The chart above shows the related data fields that exist within the database tables The chart should be interpreted from left to right e f you will be importing data into both the Location table and the Inventory table The same values that reside within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Location table s Site and Location fields must also occur within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Inventory table s Site and Location fields The actual Import file used for the Location import does not have to be used for the Inventory import It s the Site and Location values themselves which must be the same in both Imports to create the proper connections between the Location and Inventory tables If while importing Inventory data a previously unknown Site or Location value is read a new Site and or Location will be created using the new value the Inventory record being imported will not be associated with an existing Site and Location e f you will be importing data into the Supplier table and the Item table or into the Supplier table and both the Item and Inventory tables The same values that reside within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the
25. Available Qty Gem Site 1 Loc 1 80 00 20 00 4 Enter the date these items are to be shipped in the Ship Date field 5 You can optionally type in notes for this order in the Notes screen 6 How you can mark the items as picked Select the checkbox next to the item you are picking KR Type Item No UOM Description Requested Oty Previously Picked Qty Quantity MANUAL Paper 3 00 0 00 0 00 INVENTORY 200 i i 1234 00 TT NON_INVENTORY Print Paper Printer Papers 109 00 0 00 0 00 The Quantity field becomes enabled allowing you to enter the quantity you picked You must mark these items as picked from one or more locations by clicking the plus sign in front of the listing Type Item No UOM Description Requested Oty Previously Picked Oty Quantity EI M MANUAL Paper 3 00 0 00 0 00 C INVENTORY 200 Pendant 1234 00 0 00 0 00 Location Available Qty Quantity 5076 00 0 00 1233 00 Type Item No UOM Description Requested Qty Previously Picked Oty Quantity EI C NON_INVENTORY Print Paper Printer Papers 109 00 0 00 0 00 A box appears allowing you to select a Location and a Quantity for that location The Available Qty is also shown so you can easily see how many of this item are available at this location You can select options to be performed upon clicking Save from the On Save section Options are e Print Packing Slip Copies Prints the packing slip containing all items picked
26. Bh ast pe S 5 On the Pick Kit screen enter the Item number of the component item you want to pick or click the i icon to search Pick Kit Can op mmaa If you click the search icon the following Kit Info screen will appear allowing you to select a component item Only items contained in the selected Kit will appear on this screen 470 InventoryControl Printable Help Kit Info Item Total Qty 104 1 106 1 Undo Cancel BY mie Spaz em A S The Kit Info screen displays all component items for this Kit item The Item is the item number of the component item The Total Qty is the total quantity of this item in this kit multiplied by the quantity you want to pick If there are 5 items in the kit and you have indicated you want to pick 12 60 will display here 5 x 12 60 If there are 10 items in the kit and you want to pick 12 120 will display here 10 x 12 120 Undo will undo all of the transactions for that component item and reset the quantity processed back to zero Doubleclick on the desired item The Remove Kit screen will reappear with the selected item populated in the Item field Enter the Site and or Location from which the item is being picked If you have selected a Primary Location for this item on the Add Edit Item screen the Site and Location fields will automatically populate You can change these fields if needed 471 InventoryControl Printable Help Order
27. Click Yes to continue without printing labels Click No to print the designated number of labels 139 InventoryControl Printable Help 9 3 Removing Inventory The Remove Inventory screen allows you to remove quantity from any item in the database This can be considered the same as shipping inventory You can designate which customer this inventory was shipped to on this screen Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item Items must first be imported or entered on the Add Item screen before you can add quantity or remove quantity Inventory is also removed when you pick items for a Pick Order Applies to Pro and Enterprise Versions only For further information on Picking Orders please refer to the topic Picking Orders The Remove function uses FIFO First in First Out to determine what inventory is removed first If you Add 5 of Item 123 to Location Bin 1 for example then another 5 come in on another day you will have ten of that item When you later remove 3 of Item 123 the first set of 5 will be subtracted from inventory before the second set Removing Inventory from an Item 1 From the Main screen click the Inventory icon The Inventory menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Inventory menu click the Remove icon The Remove screen appears OR 1 From the Main screen select Lists gt Item The Item List appears 2 On the Item List highlight an item in the grid then click the Remove ic
28. E ltem Number Description 1002 1003 1005 1006 lt More gt For Full List lt New gt Create New ege T S e WS we E Bim When you tab out of the Item Number field after selecting an item the Description Stocking Unit and Total In House fields will populate with the information for that item 3 Enter the Quantity you want included in this Kit Item 4 Press Enter to access a new line and enter another Item then repeat the steps above Note The cost will be calculated and updated based on your selections on this tab unless you have checked the Do Not Override Cost on the General Tab checkbox located at the bottom of the Kit Information tab 167 InventoryControl Printable Help 10 2 3 Additional Information Tab When you have finished entering information on the Kit Information tab click the Additional tab The Additional Information tab provides optional fields where other information about the Item can be recorded An example of this tab is shown below General Location Settings Additional Manage Suppliers Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates ltem Measurements Stocking Unit Dimension Unit Width Weight Unit Manager File Reference Notes Hep Length Height Weight Add Notes Save j Close J Complete the fields on this tab as described below Stocking Unit is the portion by which the quantity will be tracked At the item level this should be Eac
29. If you deselect the Yes checkbox the list will not appear and the emails will automatically be sent to every address on the list 15 6 23 Packing Slip CC Emails You can enter email address here to which a copy of the slip will automatically be sent if you have the Email Packing Slip checkbox selected on the Pick screen The CC email addresses are in addition to any email addresses selected on the Pick screen Email Destination List see above 15 6 24 Pick Order CC Emails You can enter email address here to which a copy of the order will automatically be sent if you have the Email On Save checkbox selected on the Create New Pick Order screen The CC email addresses are in addition to any email addresses selected on the Create New Pick Order screen Email Destination List see above 15 6 25 Purchase Order CC Emails You can enter email address here to which a copy of the order will automatically be sent if you have the Email On Save checkbox selected on the Create New Purchase Order screen The CC email addresses are in addition to any email addresses selected on the Create New Purchase Order screen Email Destination List see above 15 6 26 SMTP Password If your SMTP server requires authentication to send outgoing mail enter the password here If it does not require authentication leave this field blank 15 6 27 SMTP Port Enter the SMTP mail server listening port here The default port is 25 15 6 28 SMTP Server Ente
30. Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Purchase orders can be created in InventoryControl and emailed directly to your supplier or printed for faxing or mailing We recommend you review the topic Purchase Orders Receiving Overview before using the purchase order feature for the first time Creating New Purchase Orders 1 From the Main screen select New gt Purchase Order OR From the Main screen select Lists gt Purchase Order On the Purchase Order List click the New icon The Create New Purchase Order screen appears E Create New Purchase Order Ce e Jee Shipping Information Supplier PO Number o 1 Ka 00001 l Generate Status New Supplier Address Ship To Address Notes Supplier Billing Receiving Address L o A Supplier Reference Number Order Date Due Date Ship Method Pay Method W xm o DI o W H DEI Line Item Details Type Item No Description Supplier SKU Ordered Qty Order Unit Cost Line Total kel M Inventory 101 101 101 1 00 Each 10 00 10 00 Grand Totals 10 00 Help Items at Minimum Stock Level E PrintOnSave 1 Email On Save Save Close Notice that the screen prominently displays the status as New based on the stage the purchase order is in This status message changes 188 InventoryControl Printable Help Possible statuses are e New This always displays when creating a new order
31. MMMM dd yyyy Friday June 27 2003 you can use any of the mdy alphabetic formats shown above but you can not use any of the dmy or ymd formats Valid Numeric datetime Formats for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 characters enclosed in brackets are optional number separator number separator number time time 0 4 15 19 96 mdy 0 4 15 19 96 mdy 0 4 15 19 96 mdy 04 19 96 15 myd 15 0 4 19 96 dmy 15 19 96 0 4 dym 19 96 15 0 4 ydm 19 96 04 15 ymd Slash marks hyphens or periods may be used as separators d Any of the numeric datetime formats shown above may be used as long as the format you select conforms to the year month and date sequence exhibited by the Short Date format in effect on your PC This can be found at Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Regional Options gt Date tab gt Short Date format For example if your Short Date format as shown in Regional Options is M d yyyy 6 27 2003 you can use any of the mdy numeric formats shown above but you can not use any of the dmy ydm ymd myd or dym formats decimal Fixed precision and scale numeric data from 10 38 1 through 10438 1 Precision specifies the maximum total number of decimal digits that can be stored both to the left and to the right of the decimal point Scale specifies the maximum number of decimal digits that can be stored to the right of the decimal point Size i
32. Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Receive Pick Menu groups functions for receiving inventory from purchase orders and shipping pick orders into one location You can also manage your shipping methods and payment methods from this screen as well as customize automatically generated purchase order and pick order numbers Receiving can be done either through the PC or on the mobile devices and adds inventory to your database Pick orders are orders to pick and ship inventory to a customer thus removing the inventory from your database To Access the Receive Pick Menu 1 On the Main screen click the Receive Pick icon The Receive Pick menu appears at the bottom of the screen Ed InventoryControl TestCo laes File Tools Help Receive Pick d Inventory List Forms X kA Wa EJ Administration Reports Receive Pick Mobility Customize Numbers Manage Ship Manage Payment Methods Methods Receive Receive Pick shari lt All gt 2 Click on any of the Receive Pick Menu icons to go to that function Detailed descriptions of the options found on the Receive Pick Menu are provided below e Receive The Receive function allows you to receive inventory from a purchase order This adds inventory to an item in the same way you manually add inventory via the Add Inventory screen accessed fro
33. Optionally enter a Customer Item 1001 i Site Site 1 i Location Customer Oty zis A ola a m giz 3 MN bd ie Ss Remove SB 4 00 PM A E 5 Enter the Quantity of the Item to be removed Remove Item i Ste i Location i Customer i Qty a Remove Eas 4 01 PM A E 6 When all required information is entered tap OK The Item is removed and the Remove screen resets ready for the next Item to be removed Tapping the Reset button clears all fields and restores all available fields to the Remove screen display 7 When you are finished with the Remove screen tap Close to return to the InventoryControl main menu 7 See the Windows Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 456 InventoryControl Printable Help 457 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 11 13 Windows Mobile Device Removing a kit Item This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only The Remove Kit function allows you to remove a kit item which means removing quantity from the component items from your database This can be considered the same as shipping inventory You can designate which customer this inventory was shipped to on this screen Kit Items can also be removed at the PC See the Removing Kit Items topic for more information Note If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see a warning message if you attempt to
34. Pick screen Notes Picks can also be done at the PC Manual items cannot be picked on the mobile devices Please refer to Creating a Pick Order for more information on Manual items Make sure the PDT s date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions If Source and or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT Please use the Site Config function to Select Source and Destination Sites ESC Exit Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function For more information on configuring sites on the PDT please refer to the topic WDT2200 Configuring Sites The topics discussed in this section are Picking Inventory Looping on Serial Number Looping on Location Looping on Item Number Looping on Track Bys Other than Serial Number Picking Inventory 1 From the Main Menu press 9 The Pick screen appears Pick Order Scan or key in value and press Ent 367 InventoryControl Printable Help Press ESC for Menu Enter the Pick Order number then press the Ent key Press ESC to return to the Main Menu Pick Order 00001 Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Enter the Item Number you are picking then press Ent Press ESC to return to the Main Menu Pi
35. Saving the New Item 10 2 1 Accessing the Create New Items Screen 1 From the Main Screen select New gt Item gt Kit The Create New Item screen appears 163 InventoryControl Printable Help ZE Create New Item General Additional Kit Information Attachments Picture Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Item Number 1 Alt Item Number Description Category v Checkout Length Manufacturer v Type Kit Z Cost Cost Method Moving Average List Price Average Cost Sale Price Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Reorder Oty Help Save Close Note that in addition to the usual tabs that appear on the Create New Item screen there is also a tab labeled Kit Information 10 2 2 General Information Tab The General Information tab is where you will enter the basic information about the item Please see the screen shot above for an example of this tab Input the appropriate information in the fields provided The Item Number is often available on a barcode label already attached to the item such as a UPC code or SKU number Using an existing barcode for the Item Number allows you to scan or manually enter the number from each item as Item Number lit comes in without having to print and affix your own barcode inventory item Required labels Item numbers in InventoryControl cannot exceed 31 characters Do not use a description as the item number You should enter a numeric value in the Item
36. Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a Qty of 10 were entered this screen is ready to receive inputs for 321 InventoryControl Printable Help another Add PO Supplier and Tracked By values if any for this second Add will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop if any 123 Qty Location Total Qty 10 00000 F4 Done While looping on Location all that is required for each Add are values for Qty and Location The Total Qty field is incremented each time an Add is submitted while looping Press the ENT key to submit the Add transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop Looping on Item Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the following example F3 was pressed when prompted for Item Add Item Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Above the asterisk indicates the intention to loop on Item Values entered for Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By fields other than Serial Number will remain locked after entering them for the first Add Qty ltem Count 25 F4 Done Above having pressed F3 when prompted for Item and then having entered the item number and values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a value of
37. any Tracked By s and a Qty of 10 were entered this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Pick PO Supplier and Tracked By values if any for this second Pick will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop if any 123 Qty Location Total Qty 10 00000 F4 Done While looping on Location all that is required for each Pick are values for Qty and Location The Total Qty field is incremented each time a Pick is submitted while looping Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop 377 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on Item Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the following example F3 was pressed when prompted for Item Pick Item Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Above the asterisk indicates the intention to loop on Item Values entered for Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By fields other than Serial Number will remain locked after entering them for the first Pick Qty Item Count 25 F4 Done Above having pressed F3 when prompted for Item and then having entered the item number and values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a value of 25 for Qty this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item inputs for the second Pick The Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Pick transactio
38. box for that section and only that data will be sent to the mobile device Please refer to the Searching for Information topic for more information on the Find screen Select the Minimally Required checkbox to only send data that is required for normal operation For example if you select to send all Items but don t want to send all locations only those locations designated as Primary Locations for individual items will be sent Or if you don t want to send all Suppliers but some Suppliers are entered on the Item screen Managing Suppliers tab for items only those suppliers entered on the Item screen will be sent Tips for Filtering Information The default values apply no filtering to your data All Items will be selected including those which are not yet in a Location Site 404 InventoryControl Printable Help Source Specify lt all gt or one of the Sites listed in the drop down list This determines which Sites will be shown in the Source Site list on the mobile device This is the Site for all inventory transactions to be performed by the device If you want the device s database to include Items at more than one Site select lt all gt You can only select ALL or 1 specific site For example if you have 5 sites you cannot select 2 to be a Source You can either select 1 or all Destination If more than one Site is defined on the system and you have selected a specific Site in the Source Site field you can select one o
39. database and any changes additions you make on the mobile device will immediately update the database For information about using a wireless connection please refer to the topic Using a Mobile Device with a Wireless Connection The following topics will guide you through the different required synchronization procedures e Setup Mobile Device e Create Database e Send Data to PC 393 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 8 2 Batch Windows Mobile Device Setup the Mobile Device This is the first step in sending the InventoryControl database to your mobile device Note This applies to batch devices only If you are using a wireless connection you will not need to manually send information to the mobile device Your mobile device will be connected directly to the database and any changes additions you make on the mobile device will immediately update the database and vice versa For information about using a wireless connection please refer to the topic Using a Mobile Device with a Wireless Connection Setting Up the Mobile Device 1 On the InventoryControl Main screen click the Mobility icon A menu will appear allowing you to select which device you will be working with If you have only one type the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen Create Mobile Send Data To Get Data From Process Mobile On the Mobility Menu select Setup Mobile Setup Mobile The Wasp Mobile Device Commu
40. lt all gt For example From lt all gt used with To Bin 100 would select every bin up through Bin 100 Hem Number 297 InventoryControl Printable Help From Specify lt all gt or click the Hand icon to find a specific Item Number that will establish the first valid value in a range of Item Numbers The last 10 Item Numbers used will be also be listed in the From drop list To Specify lt all gt or click the Hand icon to find a specific Item Number that will establish the last valid value in a range of Item Numbers The last 10 Item Numbers used will be also be listed in the To drop list Include Items not in a Location This is an option that is turned on and grayed out when no filtering is applied When filtering is applied in one or more of the above fields this option becomes user controllable It allows you to include in the mobile database Items which are not yet in a Location in addition to those selected via the filters specified This can be employed when you expect to use the mobile device to Add quantity for Items that have never been inventoried before The mobile device user can specify previously defined Locations or create new Locations while adding the previously Location less Items Click OK when you have finished specifying filter criteria You will see this message Create Database f re you sure you want to create the mobile database If you have created mobile database before it will be replac
41. respectively To reposition a filter fragment in the Filter Expression panel click on it then click either the Move Up or Move Down button You may edit a filter fragment by first selecting the fragment in the Filter Expression list The values of the filter fragment populate the seven input fields Update any of these fields then click Replace to update the selected filter fragment in the Filter Expression list 7 Click the Check button to check the syntax of the Filter Expression 8 Click the Find button to start the search process When complete a list will be displayed showing all the records that match your criteria 2 All searches are case insensitive 7 To search for a specific date build your filter expression to include a time range of 12 00am to 11 59pm for the given date For example the filter expression Date gt 12 25 02 12 00am to 290 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 25 02 11 59pm will return all records that have the date 12 25 02 9 Click the Simplified button to revert to the standard Find screen Chapter 19 WDT2200 19 1 WDT2200 Setup the Device The Wasp WDT2200 Communication Wizard allows you to setup your Wasp WDT2200 PDT for use with InventoryControl filter the database to be used on the PDT and transfer data to and from the PDT Note The WDT2200 must be powered on and connected to the PC s serial port before proceeding Setting Up the Device 1 On the InventoryControl Main scree
42. sssssesseessrsssressrnssrnssrnssrnnssrnsrnssrnssrnssrnssrnnsnns 389 xi 20 7 Windows Mobile Device Entering Alphanumeric Data 392 20 8 Setup and Synchronization Information cccccceceeseeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseaaeeeeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeeeaes 393 20 8 1 Batch Windows Mobile Device Gvpnchrontzatton 393 20 8 2 Batch Windows Mobile Device Setup the Mobile Device 394 20 8 3 Batch Windows Mobile Device Sending the Database from the bt 403 20 8 4 Batch Windows Mobile Device Retrieving Data from the Device 409 20 8 5 Batch Pending Uploads Green 411 20 8 6 Batch Mobile Devices Pending Uploads Edit Transactions cccccccseeeeeeeeeeteeteseeeeenees 415 20 9 Wireless DEVICES eegne eit eed Ae eee ceeded aden tend 418 20 9 1 Windows Mobile Device Wireless Setup cccceceeececeneeeeeaeeeeeeeecaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeesaeesenaeeeeaees 418 20 9 2 Enabling InventoryControl RF to Communicate with your Network Pinter 421 20 10 Tips for Setting Up and Using Windows Mobile Devices sssnnnsssnnnessnnnnsenrnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnne nn 426 20 10 1 WDT3200 320011 3250 and 325011 pe 426 20 10 2 WPA1000 and WPA1OOOII TIDS essin etira ataa eran aaa aeaa enaa aaa arsaa aain 429 20 10 3 WDT1200 1250 12001 and 12b01 cece cece eeeeee cece eeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeseeeeeseeeeesaeesseeeeeaees 435 20 11 Using InventoryControl and InventoryControl RF ccecccececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeseaeeeseaaeeeeneeseas 436
43. wg Help OK Cancel 45 InventoryControl Printable Help By default all locations are allowed in all functions This is designated by choosing lt all gt in both the Source and Destination fields as shown above 2 Select the Source and Destination Site to which you want to limit transactions All locations you have entered in the system will appear in the drop down lists 3 Select OK to save your changes 4 6 2 Source and Destination Examples Example 1 If you want to limit the available locations for adding removing checking in out adjust and auditing inventory to one location in this example Warehouse1 you would select that location in the Source field as shown below Select Site s Source Warehousel Destination lt all gt Help OK Cancel In the above example inventory can be moved from a location within Warehouse 1 to any other location at another site Example 2 If you want to limit the available locations for adding removing checking in out adjust and auditing inventory to one location in this example Warehouse1 and you want to limit move destinations to one site in this example Warehouse2 you would select Warehouse in the Source field and Warehouse in the Destination field as shown below Select Site Eza Source Warehouse1 x Destination Warehouse2 d D el oe area 46 InventoryControl
44. which is normally set to Active are required You can optionally enter a Title Department Manager and or Email address If you mark this employee as Inactive in the Status field Inactive will appear next to his her name in the User List 3 Click OK to save the new user information You will be returned to the Security Privileges screen which will now display the new user s profile 7 Ks Security Privileges b s File Edit User Ust Security Settings Admin User m 5 Select All Select None al E Audit s Mobile Device Data F Remove Inventory F Reports Please select the sites that Roger Dodger can access Select Al_ Select None Site Description 100 200 300 7 User can access all curent and future sites Save Cancel Help Close All privileges and sites are initially disabled when you enter a new user This means the user will not be able to access anything in the system You must select which features you want the user to be able to access by selecting the desired checkboxes in the Privileges screen For example in the screen shot below the user Roger Dodger was given access to Add Inventory Adjust Inventory and Delete and to Site 200 232 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 3 Security Privileges x File Edit User List Security Settings Admin User vileges Select All Select N Dodger Roger Privileges elect Al EE bly dete 7 Disasse
45. 100 75 50 25 Customize M Search allows you to find all occurrences of a specified keyword within the displayed Report 222 InventoryControl Printable Help Find what Cancel Specify a keyword and click Find Next to find the next occurrence Y Filter allows you to create filters for the selected report using the Report Filter Setup dialog port Filter Setup Inventory By Location Report Do not filter this report Filter Setup Filter List Field Description Item Item v Operator Value No TrackBy ltem Testing lo e Once a filter has been applied the filter criteria will be displayed to the right of the Filter tool in the toolbar Y Filter Setup Description Item Item Monitor Depending on the number of transactions in your database the Report you have selected and the performance of your PC ReportViewer can remain blank for quite some time while it access the database and dynamically builds the Report for display 223 InventoryControl Printable Help 224 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 15 Administration 15 1 Administration Menu The Administration Menu groups tasks such as creating editing your company information Importing Exporting functions and maintaining security settings into one place Note All screen shots in this help file are of InventoryControl Professional Edition The screens and available f
46. 25 for Qty this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item inputs for the second Add The Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Add transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop 322 InventoryControl Printable Help While looping on Item all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item The Count is incremented each time an Add is done while looping 7 Press the ENT key to submit the Add transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop d When looping on Item all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be reset Looping on a Tracked By other than Serial Number Here for example F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing an Add for this Item Add 123 Monitor Pallet a ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Add for this Item for more than one Pallet Values entered for Item Location PO Supplier and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet after entering them for the first Add 123 Qty Pallet j Total Qty 30 00000 F4 Done Above having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first Add this screen is ready to receive i
47. 315 15 750 from the 15th 46 750 150 311 67 average cost 20 InventoryControl Printable Help The average cost is not 309 60 46 750 151 Since there is no way to edit the cost of an add or receive after it is processed InventoryControl ignores the 0 cost adds If an item is accidentally added at 0 cost the average and valuation would be incorrect until that item is removed through FIFO If you do want 0 cost items to be included in the average you can add them at 0 01 Although this would not produce an exact average or valuation it would have the same effect as averaging in 0 cost items over time Inventory that is added using the Adjust screen is added at the average cost for that item at the time of the adjustment This way the average is not affected since in most cases the cost of that item is not known Inventory valuation includes the zero cost items when it calculates The valuation is the number of units times the average price 311 67 x 151 scanners 47 062 17 How is Cost Handled when Receiving against a Purchase Order If you have the Pro or Enterprise version you can create a purchase order PO and receive against that PO When you do this the stocking unit s cost is calculated from the cost that is on the PO Please refer to Purchase Orders Overview for more information on using Purchase Orders How is Cost Handled When Adding and Receiving on the Mobile Devices If you are adding inventor
48. 381 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 The quantity ordered for this item on the PO will appear followed by the order unit quantity The order unit quantity is the unit of measure used by this supplier for shipping purposes In the example below 100 boxes were ordered each box contains 10 items and 1 is being received Receive 1001 Monitor PO Qty 100 0000 box 10 0000 1 ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next Note If this item has any track bys set serial number date code pallet etc you will required to enter those prior to entering a quantity If this item is tracked by Serial Number the quantity is limited to 1 6 Press F4 to complete the transaction Looping on Serial Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key An asterisk displays next to the looped field If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item the Qty field will be set to 1 A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number Looping will determine the final count for this Receive transaction as you scan or key in one or more Serial Numbers for this Item 1000066 Qty 1 SN Count 0 F4 Done As each SN is keyed in or scanned the Count will be increased Press ENT after inputting each serial number Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Receive screen Notes e When an Item is tracked by Serial Number you can only loop on Serial Number e When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number you can use F3 to
49. A Ska 5 00 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Dock New 18 00 2 22 2007 3 23 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Dock New 1 00 3 5 2007 3 5 2007 pol234 deBoulle 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch RRR RRR1 10 00 3 5 2007 3 5 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Dock ai 1 00 3 23 2007 3 23 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Dock L2 55 00 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 10 100 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A 20 999999 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 100 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A An 10 00 5 23 2007 5 23 2007 100 1000028 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A A L11 1 00 5 5 2007 100002a Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Rest LOCI 20 00 5 5 2007 1000028 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch WilYouEx LocLonge 22 00 5 5 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch WH L10 3 00 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 30 5 5 2007 100 100022 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A A Loc1 12 00 2 22 2007 2 22 2007 1000224 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A amp Loc3 41 00 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 150 1000224 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Dock KK 10 00 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 i E NA th Beete The Inventory List allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print a list of Inventory For detailed information regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 124 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 4 Site List Example The Site List displays all sites you have set
50. Administrators to add users to the system set user privileges assign users to specific sites and delete users For detailed information on this screen please refer to the Security Privileges topic Note This option is not available in WaspNest Inventory Import Export Import Export allows you to import data into the database from an file or export data to an external file Importing data from an external text or csv file is a quick way to setup your software For detailed information on Importing please refer to Importing Into the Database For detailed information on Exporting please refer to Exporting to a Text File Backup Restore The Backup and Restore functions allow you to quickly backup your entire inventory database or restore the database as of the last backup Backing up your database regular is critical to maintaining your business continuity in the event of a system failure If you backup regularly you can easily restore the database and minimize disruption to your business For detailed information on these functions please refer to the Backup Database topic or the Restore Database topic Note Backup and Restore is not available in the Enterprise version of InventoryControl 226 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 2 Company Information Screen The Company Information screen allows you to enter or update information about your business The name entered in the Company Name field on this screen is used as the applicatio
51. By Serial Number Date Code 4 Lot 4 Pallet 4 Transaction Code x ml ba Notes Help OK 3 Enter a Transaction Code optional This field allows you to type in a value or select a previously entered code that describes the transaction 4 Enter Notes optional This field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction 5 After you have entered all information on the screen click the Audit button The audit transaction will be added to the Pending Transaction List The Audit button is not enabled until a valid value is entered in the Item Number field and the Location field 6 After reviewing the Pending Transaction List click the OK button to post the audit transactions to your database You can highlight an item in the Pending Transaction List and click the Remove button to remove it from the list You can select the Remove All button to remove all pending transactions from the list Audit s pending transactions are handled differently than other inventory transactions All pending transactions are listed those just added as well as those previously added They do not go away until they are reconciled or removed from the list 7 Repeat these steps for each item for which you want to update quantity After you have finished updating quantity for all audited items and downloaded any audit data from the mobile devices if used you are ready to review the Not Counted Ite
52. By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen Since you can only check out existing quantity if the Tracked By item you are checking out is not in the list make sure you have the right tem Number and Location The Tracked By fields will only show values that are possible for the selected Item Number and Location If an item with a given Serial Number is not in the list it may be Checked Out and thus not removable If you still do not see the Tracked By information you expect you should make sure the selected Item Number at the selected Location exists and has quantity Also check that you are using the right Site 154 InventoryControl Printable Help 6 Complete the Due Date fields If you choose the default Return Date it is calculated by adding the number of days specified in the item s Checkout Length field to today s date The Checkout Length is set on the Create New Item screen and edited on the Edit Item screen You can override the default return date by selecting the Custom or None button Custom allows you to specify a return date by entering it in the Custom Date field None allows a customer to check out inventory for an indefinite period of time The Notes screen allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction 7 After you have entered the inventory information on the Check Out screen click
53. Cost Ref 10 00 L Date Acquired Custom Thursday March 17 2011 18 InventoryControl Printable Help If your cost for this add is different from the cost on the item record you can change the cost on the Add screen to represent the actual cost For example if you purchased these 20 scanners for a discount change the Cost on the Add screen before you add the items In the example below the user received a 50 00 discount on the whole order for ordering 20 scanners so the Cost entered on the Add screen should be 297 50 20 scanners x 300 6 000 50 5 950 20 scanners 297 50 per scanner You are still putting the individual scanner price into the Cost field and you must do the math to make sure it is the correct price Tips Since there is limited space on the reports and screens we suggest you always put in an abbreviation for the stocking unit If you don t enter a cost when you add items or if you put in the wrong cost there is no way to edit that transaction and change the price after it has been completed Changing the cost on the Add screen does not change it on the Edit Items screen The next time you add Barcode Laser Scanners for example the cost will still default to 300 If you want to change the default cost you can change the cost on the Edit Item screen by going to Main Screen gt Lists gt Item On the Item List select the item you wan to change and then click the Edit butto
54. Create Mobile Database For WindowsCE This step allows you to specify filters for a subset of the InventoryControl data The filter will then be used to generate the mobile database which will be loaded onto the mobile device The performance of the portable device is improved by sending down only the data you need for impending tasks Specify Filters Site Customer Gource wl A Minimally Required Destination e Supplier s Al O Minimally Required Location Al Specify Filter Purchase Order All Specify Filter E O Minimally Required Lei None Item Number All O Specify Fiter Pick Order A O Specify Filter O None C Include Items not in a Location Step 1 of 2 lt Back Next gt Cancel This tab allows you to filter the information that will be sent to the mobile device if desired Filtering helps save memory space on the mobile device by allowing you to select only the data you need to load onto the device as opposed to loading all available data You can load all data if desired Select the Site Location Item Numbers Customers Suppliers Purchase Orders Pro and Enterprise Versions Only and Pick Orders Pro and Enterprise Versions Only to be downloaded to the device then click OK Select the Specify Filter button if you will be limiting the data Click the Hand icon to access the Find screen to search for data The data you select on the Find screen will be entered in the text
55. Custom Text 2 Custom Text 3 Custom Text 4 Custom Text 5 Custom Text 6 Custom Text 7 Custom Text 8 Custom Text 9 Custom Text 10 Close Help Save 253 InventoryControl Printable Help Note The fields seen above are not visible when the Edit Field Names option is turned off and no customizations have been applied Custom Numbers fields will accept values ranging from 999999999999999 9999 to 999999999999999 9999 Custom Dates will be displayed in the same format as found elsewhere in the product day of the week month dd ccyy Example Here with the Edit Field Names option enabled we have clicked on the Custom Text 1 label on the Custom Texts tab of the Create New Customer screen to edit it The Form field is grayed out because this label only occurs on the Customer screen ZE Customize Field ve New Name Premium Form ieee Tool tip Enter Y if this is a Premium account E Visible Required Set To Default Hap Go Cance Click OK to save the customization or Cancel to abort When the Edit Field Names option is subsequently disabled the Customer Screen Custom Texts tab appear as shown below 254 InventoryControl Printable Help General Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Texts Premium This field will also be seen in the Edit Customer screen 255 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 16 Importing Exporting
56. Customize Numbers This feature allows you to customize the format of Purchase Order Numbers and Pick Order Numbers that the software automatically generates when creating a new Purchase Order or Pick Order For detailed information on this feature please refer to the Customizing Numbers topic 201 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 9 Managing Payment Methods This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen This function accesses a screen that allows you to delete export or print shipping methods you have entered into the system via the Payment Method field on the Create New Purchase Order screen This topic discusses Adding Payment Methods Deleting Printing Exporting Payment Methods 12 9 1 Adding Payment Methods Note Payment Methods can also be added on the Create New Purchase Order screen by typing ina new method in the Payment Method field 1 From the Main screen click the Receive Pick icon The Receive Pick menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Receive Pick menu click the Manage Payment Methods icon The Payment Method List appears displaying all payment methods entered into the system 202 InventoryControl Printable Help ke aen ergoe e LS e Cap ow J Delete Print Export To File Pay Method 2 10 Net 30
57. Device Connection The wizard has failed to find a Windows Mobile CE device connected to the PC Search For Device Step 1 of 2 Back New User currently logged on Admin Mobile device type UNKNOWN DEVICE Click Search for Device to enable InventoryControl to search for your mobile device Click Next to continue 2 The next screen is the Windows CE Printing Setup screen shown below This screen allows you to enable printing from your wireless device 420 InventoryControl Printable Help Wasp Mobile Device Communication Wizard te amp Ex Setup Mobile Device WindowsCE Printing Setup The program has automatically detected the device attached via ActiveSync Please finish the rest of the setup options Do you plan to print from the mobile device Yes No Yes will be printing with a network printer Yes will be printing with a Step 2 of 2 Help lt Back Cancel Mobile device type WindowsCE User currently logged on Admin First select Yes or No under the question Do you plan to print from the mobile device If you select No the Finish button will become enabled Click Finish to complete the setup process If you select Yes select one of the following options Yes I will be printing from a network printer select this option if you will be printing to a printer on your network You do not need to do anything else to enable printing Click Finish to complete the setup proces
58. ESC to return to the Main Menu Pick Order 00001 Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu 3 Enter the Item Number you are picking then press Ent Press ESC to return to the Main Menu Pick Item 123 Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu If the Item entered is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again after you press Ent If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item after you press Ent 4 Enter the Quantity This is how many Kits you want to pick Pick Kit 123 123 Description Qty 12 ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next 5 Next a screen will appear allowing you to scan or enter the component items for this kit item Scan the Item Number or use the F1 F4 keys to browse through a list of the component items Press F2 to clear your selection Scan Select Item 1001 Rem Qty 12 Total Qty 30 ESC Cancel Ent OK F1 F4 Browse F2 CLR Rem Qty represents how many Kits you have picked so far and the Total Qty is how many of that component item you have picked For example if you have 5 of item 1001 contained in Kit 123 then the Total Qty would be 12 x 5 60 Continuing this example if you pick more than 60 a warning will appear that you are picking more than indicated on the Pick Order You can 374 InventoryControl Printable Help continue but the discrepancy will be caught when you
59. EXAMP TEE 126 8 6 Customer Det Evample eene eebe eege suetet iabadule tata Ee eeh 127 8 7 Maniifacturer Listo uersnr deuenia even devi nen eels GENEE Aan anes dev avin ENEE 128 SS Supple E EE a eat en eee eee E ct eae tel 129 8 9 Pick Order List Example iis menma cnini ARENS anil aed Ge ie 130 8 10 Purchase Order List Example sssssesinesinessnsennssrrsssrnsrnsnnsstnnstnnstnsstnsnrennstnsstnsntesntenstennnnnnnn nnen nnt 131 8 11 Transaction List Exam ple ieai eerren Ee aE E ERRIA EENE jdeanednacaadeaaiacnaedesddeanaduscaateaienamensiats 132 Chapten 9 InVentory etai eitea eee tate eae aa anane aaa aa aea rat i ea i eee thes 133 St Inventory Me Muli eg eekg ges EAE EE acess citaneafexadaenedetdagenectsanica ge ee 133 9 2 Manually ele ue Old Ce TEE 135 9 3 REMOVING INVENTORY TEEN 140 9 4 Moving INVONtOly EE 144 9 5 Checking In INVENtONy EE 148 9 6 Checking Out Iomentonm ssis ed iieiea diigi iei a iiei iiia iiaia kiani ig aia ta iiai dan 152 9 7 Adjusting Inventory Amounts 156 GE AGJUSUNG INV SIO hy EE 156 9 7 2 Duplicate Serial Numbers Warmimg 160 Chapter 0 Kit tems r a a a des a a geed deed 161 10 1 Kitting e EE 161 110 2 Greating a Kit CT EE 163 10 2 1 Accessing the Create New Items Screen ccceesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaaeeeeaaeeeeneesaas 163 10 2 2 Kit Information Tab 166 10 2 3 Additional Information Tab 168 10 2 4 Custom Text and Custom Numbers and Dates Tab 169 10 2 5 Saving the New We
60. Fiter Toggle Checkin Check Out Move Add Remove Print ExportToFile Group Bn Show Hidden Columns Item Number Item Description PO Date Code Supplier Code ton 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 00 172122002 1 1 2002 100 tem tracked by Everything A D0 14142002 1 1 2002 100 tem tracked by Everything 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 100 tem tracked by Everything 14142002 17 1 2002 100 tem tracked by Everything 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 100 tem tracked by Everything 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 100 tem tracked by Everything 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 3 5 2007 3 5 2007 deBoulle 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 3 5 2007 3 5 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 00 3 23 2007 3 23 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch L2 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A Aff 00 5 23 2007 5 23 2007 100002a Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A ALN H 5 5 2007 1000024 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Rest LOCI 5 5 2007 1000024 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch WilNouEx LocLonge 5 5 2007 1000024 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch
61. For detailed information regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 129 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 9 Pick Order List Example This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Pick Order List displays all active pick orders entered in the system Active pick orders are those that have a status of New New Over Due In Process or In Process Over Due Below is an example of the Pick Order List ZE Pick Order List fo bojes Tools Pwr Tr A H Filter New Edit Delete Print ExportTo File Group Bu Show Hidden Columns Due Date Order Number Order Date Reference No Customer No Customer Name Ship Via Ship Date 4 18 2007 0070413 0000010001 04 13 2007 James Bond Pm 4 22 2007 0070413 0000010004x 04 13 2007 1234 com222 UBS a 4 23 2007 0070413 0000010005 04 13 2007 123456 com System ID UBS Ei 5 16 2007 0070413 000001 0007 04 17 2007 abcdef com System ID Federal Express 5 25 2007 0070413 0000010006 04 13 2007 12345 com System ID DHL 05 25 2007 5 28 2007 0070521 0000010001x 05 21 2007 com System ID 05 22 2007 5 30 2007 0070420 000001 0000x 05 20 2007 com System ID Airborne 5 31 2007 0070517 0000010000 lt 05 17 2007 98765 com System ID Airbome 05 23 2007 6 1 2007 0070511 0
62. From even though lt all gt is used for To For example From Bin 50 used with To lt all gt would select Bin 50 through whatever the largest Bin number is Similarly a specific value can be used for To in combination with From lt all gt For example From lt all gt used with To Bin 100 would select every bin up through Bin 100 Item Number From Specify lt all gt or click the Hand icon to find a specific Item Number that will establish the first valid value in a range of Item Numbers The last 10 Item Numbers used will be also be listed in the From drop list To Specify lt all gt or click the Hand icon to find a specific Item Number that will establish the last valid value in a range of Item Numbers The last 10 Item Numbers used will be also be listed in the To drop list Include Items not in a Location This is an option that is turned on and grayed out when no filtering is applied When filtering is applied in one or more of the above fields this option becomes user controllable It allows you to include in the mobile database Items which are not yet in a Location in addition to those selected via the filters specified This can be employed when you expect to use the mobile device to Add quantity for Items that have never been inventoried before The mobile device user can specify previously defined Locations or create new Locations while adding the previously Location less Items After you have made your filte
63. Information Entering sseeeseeae 227 Connections Troubleshooting Wireless CONMOCTION as ste sisthesks reyctieel cocexteresshadasyaes 426 Copying User Security ccccecessseeeeeeenees 230 Cost Tracking 2 aise sds hive tee 16 Costing Average Costing sssesssssenseee na 16 Costing Cost Tracking 16 Costing Using in InventoryControl 16 Counting Inventory cceecceeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeees 278 Creating Kit eme 84 163 Creating New Assembly Hemes 89 Creating New Cusiomers ssssnssssenneneerneee enea 57 Creating New Wiems 60 Creating New Locations 74 496 InventoryControl Printable Help Creating New Manufacturers sasssneeeeneeen 76 Creating New Pick Orders ssassnssnnnenaene 175 Creating New Sites 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 55 Creating New Suppliers cceeeseeeeeeees 80 Custom Fields Using ssssssssnnnnennnnaeeeea 22 253 Customer List Example 127 Customers Adding New on the WMD 439 Customers Creating New 57 Customers Editing ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 86 Customizing Numbers ss ssssssssnssssnnsseenneeeeee 210 Customizing Pick Order Numbers 210 Customizing Purchase Order Numbers 210 D Data Cycle Windows Mobile Device 386 Data Cycle Wireless Device 0sn1000111 386 Data fields Related ccceccccseeeeeseeee 267 Database Backing Up 236 Database C
64. InventoryControl Printable Help are permissible in text fields e Commas sometimes used as thousands separators should be removed from numeric fields e Commas are permissible in text fields only when residing within a pair of double quotes which will cause them to be treated as normal text not as field delimiters e f you intend to import data to all available tables make sure you import in the order specified above It is also a good idea to review the information found in the Related Data Fields topic before proceeding with importing information 16 1 2 How to Import Data In the example below we will show how to import Locations The steps are the same for importing all other types of information 1 From the Main screen click the Administration icon The Administration Menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Administration Menu click Import The Import Wizard Step 1 Origination and Destination Data screen will appear 3 Import Wizard Ex Step 1 Origination and Destination Data Choose the text file to import and the table where the data will be added Import file ZS l To table el Help Cancel 3 Enter the location and file name of the file you want to import or click the button located to the right of the Import File field to search for a file Then select the table to which you want to import data from the To table drop down menu 257 InventoryControl Printabl
65. ItOMS 00 0 cece eeeeeeteeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 89 Assembly Items Building eee 103 495 InventoryControl Printable Help Assembly Items Disassemblmg 107 Assembly Items Editing ccceeeeeeees 84 Assembly Items Examples 88 Assembly Items Overview sses 88 Audit Flow Overview sesser 278 Audit Reports A 278 Audit Screen Ueimg 278 Auditing Inventory using the WMD 477 Auditing Your Inventory sses 278 Automatic Customer Number Setting 238 Automatic Item Numbers Setting 238 Automatic New 238 Automatic Notification of Low Order Items 238 Automatic Serial Numbers n 73 Average Costing cccccsseeeeeeeseteeeteeeteeeeees 16 B Backing Up the Database 0s0sseneneeeeeenneaa 236 Barcode Best Practices A 9 Best Practices AA 9 Build Assembly Green 103 Building Assembly Items eee 103 Business Examples Overview 0 cce 25 Business Examples Setting up Suppliers 32 CG Changing Your Password 42 Check for Alerts AAA 52 Check for Software Updates 238 Check in on Windows Mobile Device 449 Check Out Windows Mobile Device 448 Checking for Software Updates 000000s0 49 Checking In Inventory sses 148 Checking Out INVentory cceceeeeeeeeeeees 152 Close New Form cccscceeeceeceteeseceeeeneeeeees 238 Companies Examples seeeeeeeeeeeeeneenenn 25 Company
66. Item you entered is tracked e A Pallet that does not exist has been entered in the Pallet field If a Pallet is required you must enter the Pallet by which the entered Item Number is tracked 488 InventoryControl Printable Help Search Messages Please select one record from the list and click OK button to return to previous form This message displays if you do not select any record in the Search screen and then tap OK You must either select a record in the Search screen then tap OK or tap Cancel to exit the Search screen without selecting a record List area in Search screen is empty no choices presented Search Gustomers ad Customer Customer Na Y Search Cus e 5 4 14 PM L S If you click the Search icon next to a field in any screen in the mobile version of InventoryConitrol and the Search screen offers no list of choices then no data for this field has been downloaded from the PC You can add three types of records on the mobile device Locations Suppliers and Customers For other records you must add data from the PC side then send the new data to the mobile device Topics Related to Adding Data from the PC Side Create New Purchase Order Create New Pick Order Create New Item Create New Manufacturer Create New Site 489 InventoryControl Printable Help Serial Number Messages Serial is not valid This message displays if The Item Number you entered is tracked by Seria
67. Kits you want to remove Remove Kit 123 123 Description QTY 12 ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next Next a screen will appear allowing you to scan or enter the component items for this kit item Scan the Item Number or use the F1 F4 keys or the arrow keys to browse through a list of the component items Press F2 to clear your selection Scan Select Item 1001 Rem Qty 12 Total Qty 30 ESC Cancel Ent OK F1 F4 Browse F2 CLR Rem Qty represents how many Kits you have removed so far and the Total Qty is how many of that component item you have removed For example if you have 5 of item 1001 contained in Kit 123 then the Total Qty would be 12 x 5 60 360 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 Scan or key in a Location value Note If this is a non inventory item you will be taken directly to the Quantity screen See Step 6 Remove 123 Item Description Location AREA 2 ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next The Location field is required for all Remove transactions Enter a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field or Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field or Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen If you press F4 to advance to the next field without first providing a Location value the following message will be displayed Please scan or key in Location ESC Exit Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Location value No
68. L10 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 5 5 2007 100022 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A Loc1 2 22 2007 2 22 2007 1000228 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A Loc3 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 1000228 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch KK 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 dana GEET Pina inans Fina inna Record I4 4 UO 65 b NM lt i KKK KEE or o be Ka 2 22 2007 3 23 2007 29 S De 8 1 1 Section A Toolbar Z A amp euuer i pD Fiter Toggle Checkin Check Uu Move Add Remove Print Export To File Group Bu Show Hidden Columns Note The Check In Out functions do not apply to WaspNest Inventory 113 InventoryControl Printable Help The toolbar at the top of the list screen provides quick access to a variety of functions and also allows you to customize how the information on the list is displayed Each of these functions is described below Button Desoripton Cd Filter accesses the Find screen allowing you to quickly lookup information For more information on the Find screen please see Searching for Information Toggle The Toggle button is enabled after you have used the Filter feature to limit the list to certain information Click the Toggle button to view all listings again For instance if you have filtered your Item List to display only items with Monitor in the description field you can click the Toggle button to display all items on the list again Click Toggle again and the list will again be filtered by your
69. Level Enter the maximum number of this item that you want to have in stock for the selected site and location This number can be 0 or a positive number negative numbers are not allowed Min Stock Level Enter the minimum number of this item that you want to have in stock for the selected Site and Location This number can be 0 or a positive number negative numbers are not allowed Reorder Qnty Enter the number at which you want to reorder this item for the selected Site and Location You can set an option in the software so that the system warns you at login of any inventory items that have hit their reorder quantity For further information on setting this option please refer to the Options Screen topic After you have completed all fields hit ENTER to begin a new line Your screen will look similar to the following after hitting ENTER F off GC Fitter Group By To finish adding a new record please press enter key or down arrow button Click on Filter toolbar button to bring up filter row and to bring up group row please click on Grouping toolbar button Primary Location Site Location Quantity Max Stock Level Min Stock Level Reorder Qty v Delete 20 100 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 00 0 00 0 00 EA 7 2 4 Assembly Tab This is the tab where you will indicate which items you want included in this Assembly Item You can select any Inventoried Non inventoried and or Assembly item
70. Location at the Source Site that denotes the last in a range of Locations that will be included in the mobile database The last 10 Locations used will also be listed in the To drop list Specifying lt all gt will include all Locations for the specified Destination Site in the mobile device Database A specific value can be used for From even though lt all gt is used for To For example From Bin 50 used with To lt all gt would select Bin 50 through whatever the largest Bin number is Similarly a specific value can be used for To in combination with From lt all gt For example From lt all gt used with To Bin 100 would select every bin up through Bin 100 Item Number From Specify lt all gt or click the Hand icon to find a specific Item Number that will establish the first valid value in a range of Item Numbers The last 10 Item Numbers used will be also be listed in the From drop list To Specify lt all gt or click the Hand icon to find a specific Item Number that will establish the last valid value in a range of Item Numbers The last 10 Item Numbers used will be also be listed in the To drop list Include Items not in a Location This is an option that is turned on and grayed out when no filtering is applied When filtering is applied in one or more of the above fields this option becomes user controllable It allows you to include in the mobile database Items which are not yet in a Location in addition to th
71. Menu click the Add icon The Add screen displays Item i Site I Location hi i Supplier i Date Code Serial Pallet ge Add EE 3 21 Pm DA Note On the Add screen you can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering Alphanumeric Data on the Windows Mobile Device for details or use the Search function 443 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Enter the number of the item to which you want to add inventory in the Item field Item 1001 i Location fs Supplier Fc a Add EI 3 23 Pm DA In the example above one Item 1001 is being added to Site 2 Location 1 After the Item Number is entered the Add screen displays only the fields that are necessary for adding this particular Item For example if you enter an Item that is tracked by serial number the Serial No field will remain on the screen but other fields such as Date Code and Pallet will no longer display Exception The PO and Supplier fields will always display in the Add screen even if the Item you entered is not tracked by these fields 3 Enter the Site and Location to which the Item is to be added Item 1001 Site Site 2 Location Locption a PO Supplier Oty Y Add EI 3 26 rw A S 444 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 Enter the Quantity of the Item to be added Item i Site i Location i Supplier i Qty 23 Ada E 3 27 rw A S Note If the Item Number you are adding is tr
72. Mobility 155 Audit Reconcile End With Audit Mode Active you should next create mobile databases and download them to mobile devices if you will be using mobile devices for the audit If you are using a wireless device you will not need to download the database 5 Now you can begin entering counts manually on the PC or on the mobile devices via the Audit screen For information on using the Audit screen on the mobile device please refer to the Working with Mobile Devices section of this help file WDT2200 Auditing Inventory Windows Mobile Device Auditing Inventory 17 4 Using the Audit Screen Now that you have started the Audit Mode on the PC and optionally downloaded the audit database to your mobile devices you can begin your counts To enter your counts on the PC 280 InventoryControl Printable Help 1 On the Inventory menu click the Audit icon this is the same icon you clicked to begin the Audit Mode The Audit screen appears IS Audit SSC Data Pending Transaction List 0 ltem Item Number 4 Quantity 1 0 4 Description Location 4 Track By Serial Number Date Code rT Lot 4 Pallet 4 Transaction Code 4 Notes alg L Audit Help OK Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin HU button located to the right of the field you want to lock This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Adds at one Location for example Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one re
73. No Supplier Ship Method Pay Method e IP P0070 00020 3 2 1200 Tiffany amp Co Federal Expre 1 10 Net 30 Pa 5 1 2007 PO P0070515 0000010 05 01 20 100 Tiffany amp Co Airborne Due on Rec Pa 5 1 2007 PO 1 057 09 20 123 100 Tiffany amp Co US Mail 1 10 Net 30 Pe 5 17 20 PO 10 05 17 20 10 100 Tiffany amp Co US Mail Net 30 6 1 2007 PO P0070523 0000010 05 23 20 ref 4 150 Bachendorf s Jewelers US Mail Net 15 6 1 2007 PO PO070523 0000010 05 23 20 ref 5 30 CostCo DHL 1 10 Net 30 6 1 2007 PO PO070523 0000010 05 23 20 ref 6 deBoulle deBoulle Diamond and Jewelry FedEx COD 7 11 20 PO 20 05 17 20 Wasp Costeo 20 30 CostCo FedEx Overn COD 8 17 20 PO 20 05 17 20 30 30 CostCo US Mail Net 30 PO 2 05 15 20 100 Tiffany amp Co PO 3 05 17 20 Test Long Supplier This is a long Supplier Name to test the L PO 4 05 17 20 Test Long Supplier This is a long Supplier Name to test the L Po P 05 17 20 Test Long Supplier This is a long Supplier Name to test the L PO PO070323 0000010 03 23 20 123 100 Tiffany amp Co Federal Expre 1 10 Net 30 PO PO070323 0000040 03 23 20 1000 100 Tiffany amp Co Federal Expre 1 10 Net 30 PO P0070327 1 03 27 20 100 Tiffany amp Co Federal Expre 1 10 Net 30 PO P0070329 03 29 20 100 Tiffany amp Co Federal Expre 1 10 Net 30 PO POO70515 0000010 05 15 20 999 100 Tiffany amp Co Airborne Net 15 Record Iq 4 10f 18 gt pl Help Close Notice
74. Now you can mark the items as received Select the checkbox next to the item you are receiving Type ltemNo Description Ordered Qty Recv d Qty Quantity UOM Cost Grand Totals E HINVENTORY 400003 18 0000 mmm 500 00 0 00 0 00 The Quantity field becomes enabled allowing you to enter the quantity you received In the example above you would enter however many cartons of this item you received You must mark these items as received into one or more locations by clicking the plus sign in front of the listing 195 InventoryControl Printable Help Type ltemNo Description Drdered Oty Recv d Oty Quantity UOM Cost Grand Totals Gal INVENTORY 400003 18 0000 0 0000 O carton 500 00 0 00 Location Quantity Type ltemNo Description Ordered Oty Recv d Oty Quantity UOM Cost Grand Totals 0 00 A box appears allowing you to select a Location and a Quantity for that location Please be aware that quantities entered here are broken into Eaches For instance in the example above 18 cartons of Item 400003 were ordered Assume there are 200 items per carton When you enter 5 in the Location Quantity field you are telling the system that 5 items from a carton were received into this specific location rather than 5 cartons being received If you wanted to receive 5 cartons into this location you would need to enter 1000 5 x 200 7 After you have entered quantity amounts for all items you are receiving you ca
75. Number will remain locked after entering them for the first Remove Qty ltem Count 25 F4 Done 356 InventoryControl Printable Help Above having pressed F3 when prompted for Item and then having entered the item number and values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a value of 25 for Qty this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item inputs for the second Remove The Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Remove transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop While looping on Item all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item The Count is incremented each time a Remove is done while looping 7 Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop d When looping on Item all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be reset Looping on a Tracked By other than Serial Number Here for example F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing a Remove for this Item Remove 123 Monitor Pallet ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Remove for this Item for more than one Pallet Values entered for Item Location PO Supplier and any other Tracke
76. Number field A description of the item can be entered in the 164 InventoryControl Printable Help Description field Automatic Item Numbers If you have the Automatic Item Numbers option selected on the Options screen the Item Number field will appear populated with the next number in the sequence For example if you just created item number 1001 the next number will be 1002 For further information on this option please refer to the Options Screen topic A Category is an optional classification you can give to your items This provides you with another way to group your items For example you could create a Category called laptops and assign that category to any laptop items you have You might have multiple items representing different makes and models of laptops If you assign the category Laptops to all of those items you can then Category group your list by Category and quickly see all laptop items You can create new Categories by typing in the desired name in the Category field You will receive a message asking if you want to save the new Category Select Yes to save Categories you have already created will appear in a drop down list Checkout Length Check Out is not allowed for Kit items This is the entity that manufactured the item This field is optional and provides another way to sort and group your items When a new Manufacturer is typed into the Manufacturer field you will receive a message asking if you wan
77. Options Screen topic when moving an Item the From Site and the To Site must be different For example you cannot move an Item from Site 100 Location 13 to Site 100 Location 13 Inventory can also be moved at the PC See the Moving Inventory topic for more information Moving Inventory 1 From the Main Menu tap the Move icon The Move screen displays 450 InventoryControl Printable Help Item i Ja From Site i From Loc i To Site i A To Loc fs i Date Code Ir Serial Ir Pallet ZY Move SB 3 32 Pm DA Note You can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering Alphanumeric Data on the Window Mobile Device for details or use the Search function In this example a quantity of Item 1001 is being moved from Site 1 Location 2 to Site 2 Location 3 Enter the Item Number in the Item field Item i From Site i From Loc Kass i To Site i To Loc i Y Move SE ss rm DA Note that once the Item Number is selected the Move screen displays only the fields that are necessary for adding this particular Item For example if you enter an Item that is tracked by serial number the Serial field will remain on the screen but other fields such as Date Code 451 InventoryControl Printable Help and Pallet will no longer display If you enter an Item that is not tracked all tracking fields PO Supplier Lot Date Code Serial and Pallet will no longer display 3 Enter the Site
78. Printable Help Example 3 If you want to limit the available locations for adding removing checking in out adjust and auditing inventory to one location in this example Warehouse2 and you want to limit move destinations to locations in the same site you would select Warehouse in the Source field and Warehouse2 in the Destination field as shown below Select Site Lx Source Warehouse Destination Warehouse Z ES Gea 47 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 7 Logging Out Logging Out allows the current user to log out of the system so another user can log in if needed 1 From the Main Screen click File gt Log Out The Log On screen appears allowing another user to log in Tanya Hii ad 2 Enter a valid User Name and Password and press OK to log on again or click Cancel to exit Note You can also log in as a different user by going to Administration gt Security gt Log in as Different User 48 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 8 Checking for Software Updates By default the software will check for updates to the application and notify you if a more recent version is available when you login to the system You can then access the Updates website and download the latest version This ensures you are always working with the most up to date version available to you This feature is turned on by default InventoryControl must be installed on a machine with Internet
79. SN is keyed in or scanned the Count will be increased Press ENT after inputting each serial number When looping on serial number note that the Qty field displays how many serial numbers exist for this item and how many you have entered so far In the example above 4 serial numbers have been entered out of a possible 100 4 100 You can press F2 to display the last serial number entered Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Pick screen Notes e When an Item is tracked by Serial Number you can only loop on Serial Number e When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping 376 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on Location Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Pick for this Item Pick 123 Monitor Location ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Pick for this Item to more than one Location Values entered for Item PO and Supplier if any will remain locked while looping on Location after entering them for the first Add Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location PO Supplier
80. Select Trusted from the drop down and enter the pin number again From the same drop down menu select Active To find the COM port for the printer varies per mobile device navigate to Start gt Programs gt Windows Explore Double click on the Windows folder Select Details from top right drop down Scroll to file BTMAN double click it and select the Scan Device tab 427 InventoryControl Printable Help 9 Double click the Bluetooth printer From the resulting drop down menu select Serial Port The COM port selected for the device will display along with the Baud Rate Error System Net Sockets Socket Exception An error message is available for the exception but cannot be displayed because these messages are optional and are not currently installed on this device Please install NETCFv35 Messages EN wm cab to Windows Mobile This is a connection error meaning the device cannot find the network To enable the device to locate the network perform the follow steps 1 On the mobile device navigate to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel 2 Double click Wifi icon at bottom of the Control Panel screen The Summit Client Utility screen appears 3 On the Main tab the first tab on the screen select the Admin Login button 4 Enter your password in the password field On the Profile tab the Configure button at bottom will become enabled after you login as Admin 5 Select the Scan button and your network should app
81. Selecting a Label Printer To Print Labels 1 With the desired List screen open Location or Item highlight the listing you want to print You can select multiple listings by holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard while clicking on listings Click the Print Tags Labels button on the toolbar FE lem ist So Tools a CS Fa vers a gt wi gt of ZS ao amp vund OD J e Filter New Edit Delete Duplicate Checkin Check Du Move Add Remove Print ExportToFile GroupBy Hidden Columns Print Labels Item Number Description Total Available Total Checked Sa HP Laptop DI The following screen appears Number Of Label Copies ea Enter the number of copies of the selected labels you want to print The total number of labels to be printed will be displayed 7 1 label s will be printed Preview Enter the number of copies of the selected labels you want to print If you want to view a preview of how your label will appear check the Preview box Click the OK button 218 InventoryControl Printable Help 219 Chapter 14 Reports 14 1 Report Selection InventoryControl Printable Help This software comes with many built in reports to help you maintain your inventory Selecting a Report 1 From the Main screen click the Reports icon The Reports screen appears 3S Reports Report list E E Customer Reports SJ Customer By ID Report lt J Customer By Name Re
82. Serial Number Cost 415 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Make changes to the enabled fields as necessary 3 Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to return to the Pending Transactions screen without making changes Edit Transactions Kit Items The steps for editing Pick or Remove Transactions containing Kit Items is slightly different 1 The process is the same for uploading these transactions If you want to edit it on the Step 3 Transactions screen click on the component item of the Kit item you want to edit and select Edit Transaction Pending Transaction Step 3 Transactions Select transaction to be posted to the database gO SE Accept Type Item Quantity EI Pick 2 From 1 00 __ Type Item Quantity From To D To Customer Supplier Customer Supplier Record H 4 Joi gt Mal Help lt Back Finish Cancel 2 The Edit Transactions screen shown below appears 416 InventoryControl Printable Help Edit Transactions fo al Trans bate Monday Septembar 23 2008 E Change the Quantity or Location then click the Replace button or Remove in the case of a Remove transaction The screen now shows your changes Click Save on the Edit Transactions screen to save your changes and return to the Step 3 Transactions screen 417 InventoryControl Printabl
83. Supplier table s Supplier Code field must also occur within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Item or Inventory table s Supplier Code field The actual Import file used for the Supplier import does not have to be used for the Item or Inventory import It s the Supplier Code values themselves which must be the same in both Imports or in all three Imports to create the proper connections between the Supplier and Item tables or between the Supplier Item and Inventory tables 7 If while importing Item data a previously unknown Supplier Code value is read a new Supplier Code will be created using the new value the Item record being imported will not be associated with an existing Supplier Code d If while importing Inventory data a previously unknown Supplier Code value is read a new Supplier Code will not be created using the new value the Inventory record being imported will be rejected 267 InventoryControl Printable Help e If you will be importing data into both the Manufacturer table and the Item table The same values that reside within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Manufacturer table s Name field must also occur within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Item table s Manufacturer field The actual Import file used for the Manufacturer import does not have to be used for the Item import It s the Name and Manufacturer values themselves which must be the same in both Imports to creat
84. The user will be able to Check Out inventory Delete The user will be able to delete records Disassembly The user will be able to disassemble Assembly items Edit The user will be able to make changes to records Labels The user will be able to create labels Move The user will be able to Move inventory to another location New The user will be able to create new items suppliers etc Pick The user will be able to pick inventory from pick orders on the Pick screen Process Mobile Device Data The user will be able to process and apply transactions that have been downloaded from a mobile device Receive Inventory The user will be able to mark inventory as Received from purchase orders on the Receive screen Remove Inventory The user will be able to manually Remove inventory WDT2200 The user will be able to use a WDT2200 mobile device to perform transactions 235 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 4 Backing up the Database Note for Enterprise Users The Backup feature is not available in the Enterprise version You must use SQL to perform backups Backing up your database is an important maintenance step that should be performed on a regular basis Having a current backup helps to minimize data loss in the case of a system shut down or power failure If you do experience a catastrophic system failure of some kind having a current backup ensures you can quickly restore the most recent database For information on re
85. a Pick Ir 1209 pm A Note On the Pick screen you can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering Alphanumeric Data on the Windows Mobile Device for details or use the Search function 465 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Enter or search for the Order that contains the item you are picking Order Dro i poor Ld Re Date Code a Ld inn I gt 12 13 PM A E 3 Enter the number of the item you are picking in the Item field Pick Order i Item i Location C i Pick BiG 12 13 rm G E In the example above one Item 1001 is being picked 4 Enter the Site and Location from which the item is being picked If you have selected a Primary Location for this item on the Add Edit Item screen the Site and Location fields will automatically populate You can change these fields if needed 466 InventoryControl Printable Help Order 00001 i Item 1001 i Site Site 1 i Location Location 2 i EA Oty E Z7 Pick S 1214 Pm GA Enter the Quantity of the Item to be picked If you enter a higher quantity than is indicated on the Pick Order a warning will appear but you will be allowed to enter the higher quantity Order 00001 i Item 1001 i Location Location 2 i st i 2Y Pick S0 b 12 15 Pm E Note Notice that this is in eaches When all required information is entered tap OK The Item s is marked as Received and the Recei
86. and Average Costing please click here Select how you want InventoryControl to calculate cost for this item Options are Legacy Method This is the method used in previous versions of InventoryControl The legacy method uses FIFO and manages cost by location and track by level Note If you upgrade your version of InventoryControl to version 6 which contains additional methods all existing items will be imported with the legacy method You can change to a new option on the Edit Item screen Moving Average When this method is used the average cost of a particular item is recalculated based on each purchase Cost is calculated on the item level FIFO When this method is used the inventory that is added first is removed first Cost is calculated on the item level LIFO When this method is used the inventory that is added last most recently is removed first Cost is calculated on the item level For a detailed description for using Cost Tracking and Average Costing please click here This is a calculated value that averages the cost paid for the current Quantity This will be blank when you are entering a new item but will appear when you are viewing the Edit Item screen for an item that has inventory quantity If you have 20 quantity of this item at cost 10 00 and add another 30 quantity at cost 8 00 Average Cost 20 x 10 00 30 x 8 00 50 8 80 Removes are calculated using the inventory calculation method
87. and Location from which the Item will be moved Item i From Site i From Loc i To Site E i To Loc EE i Y Move SE 3 35 Pm GA 4 Enter the Site and Location to which the Item will be moved Item i From Site i From Loc i To Site i To Loc i Reset OR Y Move EE 3 36 Pm 5 Indicate the Quantity of the Item that will be moved 452 InventoryControl Printable Help Item 1001 i From Site Site 1 i From Loc Location 2 i To Site Site 2 i To Loc Location 3 i Oty Reset ebe lob ne 6 When all required information is entered tap OK The Item is moved and the Move screen resets ready for the next Item to be moved Tapping the Reset button clears all fields and restores all available fields to the Move screen display 7 When you are finished with the Move screen tap Close to return to the InventoryControl main menu 2 See the Windows Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 20 11 12 Windows Mobile Device Removing Inventory The Remove function is used to remove quantity from any Item that has quantity recorded in the database Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item Notes regarding the Allow Negative Quantities option e If this option is enabled on the PC s Options Screen you can enter a Quantity larger than the actual amount currently shown in the mobile database for that inventory Item If the optio
88. and even small medical veterinarian businesses who want to track pharmaceuticals and other supplies Brady s Bargains is a mid sized antique reseller with one site and two locations the storage area and the sales floor They currently do not have an inventory program and have been keeping up with inventory manually using Excel spreadsheets They will not be creating purchase orders or pick orders and do not need the ability to assign multiple suppliers to an item therefore they have chosen the Standard version of InventoryControl In addition Brady s Bargains will not be using mobile devices they will be inputting information directly into the PC This shop will be using InventoryControl in conjunction with QuickBooks for their accounting needs and with an unrelated POS system It is important to note that though InventoryControl does have scanning capabilities and tracks inventory it is not a POS system and does not perform inventory billing 26 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 3 Setting Up Security Privileges Business Example Note For step by step instructions on adding users please refer to the topic Adding Users Editing Security Data Business Type All This example can apply to all business types and InventoryControl versions Step 1 Prior to adding sites create at least one admin user Sebastian Distributing has two warehouses into which they receive goods from suppliers They then ship those goods to carious customers arou
89. appears RS Change Password ES User Name Old Password New Password Confirm New Password Help OK Cancel Enter your old password your new password then confirm your new password As passwords are typed asterisks will be displayed Passwords are case sensitive Click OK to save your changes 42 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 5 Update License Screen The Update License screen allows you to enter a regular License Key to upgrade from the Demo version or an Update License Key to increase the number of Mobile Devices InventoryControl will support You can also view the install serial number and activation code information Updating License s 1 From the Main Screen click Help gt Update License The Update License screen appears 2 Ifthe program has not yet been activated you will be prompted to enter an Activation Code now Please enter cn Activation Coce to activa e this product http www waspbarcode com reqister reqister asp Serial Nunber Aclivation Code Ca Click on the registration link that appears above the serial number and then complete the information on the Wasp support page An email will be sent back to you that contains the Activation Code Type this code back into the Activation Code field then click OK to activate the program If the program has been activated the following screen appears 43 InventoryControl Printable Help z Update License
90. appears allowing you to select how you want the date to appear mm dd yy etc Type Format Date x Add Replace ddmmyyyy The PO Number will look like this mmddyy Total Characters 0 ddmmyy e Counter This option inserts a sequential counter into the number If you select Counter fields appear allowing you to select how many digits you want to appear in the counter and at what number the counter should start In the example below we entered 5 in the Digits field and 2 in the counter field This means the counter will display up to 5 digits and begin counting at 2 211 InventoryControl Printable Help Type Digits Starting From gt Counter e 5 2 t Add 5 When you have chosen your Type and entered the required values select Add Your entries will appear in the grid at the top of the screen and an example of how your number will look appears in the screen at the bottom of the screen ZS Define PO Number Format Lo je Please define the PO Number Format below Purchase Order Number a k a PO Number is an alpha numeric combination of up to 38 characters Please specify its formation below Type Value Lenath Delete Text PO 2 Move U Date MMddyy 6 Counter 00001 5 Text hello 5 Type Digits Starting From Counter X 5 2 Add The PO Number will look like this Total Characters 19 PO052907 00001hello Help o Cancel 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you h
91. be listed in the Move To list This field will be grayed out with a value of lt all gt as shown above if only one Site is defined in InventoryControl or if a value of lt all gt has been specified for the Source Site If a specific Site has been selected for the Source Site that same site will be the default value for Destination Site but you can change the Destination Site to a different value using the drop down list Source Site Destination The Source The Site Sites Listed in Destination the WDT2200 Sites Listed Site in the Configuration WDT2200 will Include Site Configuration will Include 296 Location lt all gt This value is forced to lt all gt when there is only one Site setup in the system A Specific Site A Specific Site lt all gt This value is forced to lt all gt when lt all gt is specified as the Source Site Destination Site is the Same as the Source Site A Different Site All Sites The Specified Source Site The Specified Source Site InventoryControl Printable Help All Sites The Same Site The Specified Destination Site gt As an example if you have more than two Sites and want to be able to move inventory from Site 1 to Site 2 and from Site 1 to Site 3 on the mobile device you will have to create a mobile database for Source Site 1 and Destination Site 2 transfer the database to the mobile device use the device for those Moves send the i
92. be used to track its movement through your inventory For a more detailed explanation of tracking fields please refer to the topic Identifying Tracking Needs When you are creating your item it is important that you determine how you want to track each item Typically small items that are all the same may not need to have any Track Bys selected Items such as printers may need to be tracked by Serial Number so returns and maintenance can be properly tracked Medical supplies or food may need to be tracked by Date Code and or Lot If you choose to track by one or more of these fields you will be prompted to complete them each time you perform a transaction such as check out move remove add etc on this item For example if you are tracking item 2233 VZ Laptop by serial number Now you want to move a quantity of 5 of this item from on location to another You will be prompted to enter a unique and valid serial number for each laptop you are moving so that your inventory can be accurately tracked Tracked By options cannot be changed after you add inventory to the item If you need to change a tracked by item you will have to remove all inventory from that item delete the item and create a new record Item to be Tracked By Serial Numbers Equipment such as must be unique printers and radios or Serial for each item anything for which you Number and limit you to need to know which managing one specific item you are item at a time us
93. be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly remove inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field The Move button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these remove transactions to the Pending Transaction List Clicking the F button will unlock the field Complete the Item Fields To Move inventory first enter the Item Number of the item you want to move To enter an Item Number you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop down list to select an existing item from the 10 items shown or use lt more gt to select an item from the Item List When you enter an item number the Item Number field is populated as well as the Description and the following fields are enabled e From Location filtered by Site e Quantity unless the item is Tracked By serial number then the quantity defaults to 1 and cannot be changed e To Location e Any of the associated Track By fields Serial Number Date Code Lot or Pallet A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the Item is created e Notes Below is an example of the Move screen with the fields enabled 145 InventoryControl Printable Help KA Move xX Data Pending Transaction List 0 ltem Item Number 100022 BR Quantity 1 00 SA Description Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Maximum 12 0000 From Location A Locl a Track By Serial Number Date
94. can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering Alphanumeric Data on the Windows Mobile Device for details or use the Search function 2 This screen consists of two sections Filter and Search Results The Filter section is expanded by default To open or close a section click on the blue arrow that precedes the section name If the arrow is pointing down zite that section is expanded as the Filter section is in the Details screen example above If the arrow is pointing right Search Results that section is collapsed as the Search Results section is in the Details screen example above Select the data you want to view by entering Filter information then tapping the Inventory or Transactions buttons Keep in mind that after you enter an item number the fields on the screen may change For instance if you enter an item number that is tracked only by Serial Number Lot Date Code and Pallet fields will disappear because you do not need to information in those fields for this particular item 446 InventoryControl Printable Help If you want to view all Inventory or all Transaction in the database click the Inventory or Transactions button without entering any filter information Transactions displays all events that have been performed on this device since the last sync Transactions can be used to verify if certain actions have been completed or to check that counts are correct Inventory can be used to locate item
95. continuing the setup process click the Next button at the bottom of the Setup WDT 2200 tab or click the Create PDT Database tab You must send the InventoryControl program to the device before you can send the database Please refer to the WDT 2200 Setting Up the Device topic for more information OR 294 InventoryControl Printable Help If you are creating a database for a device that already has the program from the InventoryControl Main Screen click the Mobility icon If you have more than one type of mobile device installed a menu will appear allowing you to select which device you will be working with If you have only one type the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen On the Mobility Menu select Create Mobile Send Data To Receive Data Process Mobile Setup Device Create PDT Database The Create PDT Database tab displays EE Ey Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Create Mobile Database For WDT2200 This step allows you to specify filters for a subset of the InventoryControl data The filter will then be used to generate the mobile database which will be loaded onto the mobile device The performance of the portable device is improved by sending down only the data you need for impending tasks Specify Filters Site Customer Source v Al O Minimally Required Destination S Supplier All O Minimally Required Locatio
96. could create a Category called laptops and assign that category to any laptop items you have You might have multiple items representing different makes and models of laptops If you assign the category Laptops to all of those items you can then Category jgroup your list by Category and quickly see all laptop items You can create new Categories by typing in the desired name in the Category field You will receive a message asking if you want to save the new Category Select Yes to save Categories you have already created will appear in a drop down list Checkout This field specifies the default period in days that this Item can be checked out Length to a customer This is the entity that manufactured the item This field is optional and provides another way to sort and group your items When a new Manufacturer is typed into the Manufacturer field you will receive a message asking if you want to save the value as a new Manufacturer Select Non inventory if you do not want this item to be inventoried or select Type Pro andiInventory to inventory this item This field will not appear on the Standard Enterprise version Versions Only Non Inventoried items are those items such as marketing pamphlets that you have on hand but do not want to track 62 InventoryControl Printable Help The Item To Be Tracked By section contains check boxes which determine whether the Serial Number Lot Date Code and or Pallet of an item will
97. divided into four sections Section A Toolbar Section B Left Hand Navigation Section C Main Functions Section D Context Sensitive Menu Below is an example of the Main screen Note The Receive Pick icon only appears on Pro and Enterprise Versions The Receive Pick and Mobility icons do not apply to WaspNest Inventory Feet gert File Tools CheckForAlerts Help Administration 38 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 3 1 Section A Toolbar The toolbar provides access to the following functions File Menu e Change Password Allows the user currently logged in to change his her password e Log Off Logs the current user off of the system e Exit Exits the system Tools Menu e Options Accesses the Options screen where you can customize how certain aspects of the software behave e Select Site Accesses the Select Site screen InventoryControl allows you to work with more than one Site and multiple Locations within each Site e Archive Transactions Allows you to store older data in an archive e Reset All Field Names This option resets any field names you have customized through the Edit Field Names function e Reset All Grid Settings This option resets all settings sorting grouping hidden columns you may have made to your list screens to their default settings Check For Alerts When selected an Alerts drop down list will appear displaying any alerts such as overdue items Help Menu
98. e Ignore Record When the audit is ended no action will be taken on this record Quantity amounts will stay the same for this item The system will behave as though this item was not audited The item will not appear on any audit reports You must remove those items you mark as Ignore Record from the Pending Transaction List tab on the Audit screen before you can end the audit After you have selected an action for all items on the list click the OK button to post the transactions to your database You are now ready to end the audit 284 InventoryControl Printable Help 17 7 Reviewing the Remainder of the Audit Reports This software contains several audit reports that allow you to review a variety of information Available reports are Accepted Audit Discrepancies Report Accepted Audit Result Report Audit History by Audit Date Audit History by Hem Number Not Counted Item Report Unreconciled Audit Discrepancies Unreconciled Audit Report These reports are accessed by click the Reports icon on the Main Screen The reports are viewed in the Reports Viewer For more information on viewing reports please refer to the Report Viewer topic 17 8 Ending the Audit The last step in the audit process is to end the Audit Mode session on your PC so all features are enabled To do this 1 On the Inventory menu in Audit Mode click the Reconcile End icon If you have not reconciled all transactions on the Complete Audit screen inc
99. eecseeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeees 291 WDT2200 Site Configuration 315 WDT3250Il Troubleshooting Wireless CONNECTION 00 0 ere ninaenda EEEk R R EARR AREE 426 Windows Mobile Device Check In Inventory449 Windows Mobile Device Check Out 448 Windows Mobile Device Data Cycle 386 Wireless Connection ccccccceseeeeseeteees 418 Wireless Mobile Device Data Cycle 386 Wireless Printing ccceecceeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeee 418 WMD About Green 436 WMD Adding Invemtonm 443 WMD Adding Locations eeeeeeeeeeeeee 440 WMD Adding New Cusiomers 439 WMD Adding New Suppliers 00 100sesseeea 442 WMD Adjusting Inventory 0 eeeee 473 WMD Auditing Inventorn eee 477 WMD Default Settings c eect 389 WMD Details Screen cceceeteeeeerteeee 446 WMD Device Gvnchronlzaton 393 WMD Enabling the Scanner s 389 WMD Entering Alphanumeric Data 392 Wmd Interface 387 WMD Moving Imventornm 450 WMD Picking Items 465 WMD Picking Kit Items c eeeeeeeeeeees 468 WMD Pinning Fields AA 438 WMD PRebootimg eeen 389 WMD Receiving Inventory s es 461 WMD Removing a Kit Hem 458 WMD Removing Inventory ssec 453 503 InventoryControl Printable Help WMD Retrieving Data from the Device 409 WMD Searching for Information 482 WMD Sending the Database from the PC 403 WMD Setu
100. es Task Scheduler On the Services screen scroll to Wasp Inventory Windows Service Right click on Wasp Inventory Windows Service and select Properties S 3 fo File Action View Help wm es AO0colBm gt mnu p i Services Local Wasp Inventory Windows Service Name ne _ Description Status Startup Type Log0n s Oh Thread Or ering S Provides or anual ocal Service Oh Thread Ord S Provid M Local S Fop the service TETP AutoConnect S ThinPrint p Manual Local Syste Z ase Services Enables acc anual ocal Service SA TPM Base S Enabl M l Local S UPnP Device Host ows Un anua ocal Service UPnP D H Allows UP M l Local S Week WS Ch User Profile Service This service Started Automatic Local Syste pia tetra ie SES es CE Virtual Disk Provides m Manual Local Syste ware Snapshot ware Sn anual ocal Syste TVM Snapsh VM Sn M Local Sy ke ware Tools Ser Provides su Starte utomatic ocal Syste vm Tools S Provid Started A Local Sy i Volume Shadow C Manages an Manual Local Syste i WebClient anual ocal Service TE WebCl Start Manual Local Ch Windows Ad Stop Manual Local Syste Ch Windows Au Pause arted Automatic Local Service Oh Windows Al REES arted Automatic Local Syste e Windows Be Restate Manual Local Syste Oh Windows Bi Manual Local Syste J Ch Windows Cz All Tasks Manual Local Syste Ch Windows C
101. for a Reason Code select the Search icon by the Reason field The Adjust Code screen displays 476 InventoryControl Printable Help a Adjust Code Positive Found Return Negative Breakage Lost a Adjust Code EE 3 10 PM Lo E The first three codes in the screen are used when quantities are being added The second three codes are used when quantities are subtracted e Positive Indicates inventory was added Found Indicates inventory previously missing has been found Return Indicates the inventory is a returned item Negative Indicates inventory was removed Breakage Indicates inventory is broken Lost Indicates inventory is missing Select a code and tab OK 7 When all required information is entered tap OK The item s quantity is adjusted and the Adjust screen resets ready for the next Item to be adjusted Tapping the Reset button clears all fields and restores all available fields to the Adjust screen display 8 When you are finished with the Adjust screen tap Close to return to InventoryControl main menu See the Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 20 11 18 Windows Mobile Device Auditing Inventory Audit allows you to count the quantity of one or more items in your inventory when in Audit Mode Before you can conduct an audit using the mobile device you must download a new database created while InventoryControl is in audit mode For
102. for this order Enter the number of copies of this packing slip you want to print in the field provided You can open a pick order and print one or more copies of the packing slip regardless of what state the pick order is in new issued To do this enter the number of copies you want to print then click OK All items picked for this order will be included on the packing slip regardless of the setting of the Packing Slip for Session option see Note below 182 InventoryControl Printable Help for more information on the Packing Slip for Session option e Email Packing Slip Sends an email containing this packing slip to the selected addresses If you have selected to view the Email Destination List selected on the Options screen the list will appear allowing you to select email address or change email addresses as needed If you have selected not to view the list the packing slip will automatically be sent to the email address listed in the Customer screen from the email address listed in the Company Information screen Please note that if the email addresses are not entered on the Customer or Company Information screens you will receive an error message when you try to send emails An email is also sent to any CC addresses designated on the Options screen You can choose to ignore the CC address by deselecting the checkbox next to the CC Addresses field on the Email Destination List In order for the email feature to work cor
103. found Scan or key in value and press Ent ESC Menu If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item Scan or key in a Location value Remove 123 Monitor Location AREA 2 ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next The Location field is required for all Remove transactions Enter a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field or Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field or Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen If you press F4 to advance to the Customer field without first providing a Location value the following message will be displayed Please scan or key in Location ESC Exit 352 InventoryControl Printable Help Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Location value Note If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see a warning message if you attempt to Remove quantity from a Location that does not exist in the PDT database The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to the PDT About screen New Locations can only be created during Remove when the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press E
104. have the same security privileges you can create one profile then copy it to other users streamlining the setup process To do this 1 2 On the Security Privileges screen highlight the user name you want to copy in the User List Select Edit gt Copy User Settings The Add New User screen appears Enter the name and personal information of the user you are adding then click OK on the Add New User screen You will be returned to the Security Privileges screen The user name you just added will appear in the User List and the Privileges will be those that you copied 234 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 3 6 Security Privileges Definitions Add Inventory The user will be able to manually add inventory to the system Adjust Inventory The user will be able to adjust inventory amounts Administration Privilege The user will be able to modify existing users Security Privileges and perform all functions in the system Allow PC Login The user will be able to login to the program Audit The user will be able to perform all audit functions Backup and Restore The user will be able to backup and restore the inventory database Be aware that Restore can cause a loss of data added to the database since the date and time of the backup file chosen Build Assembly The user will be able to use the Build Assembly function to add inventory to Assembly Items Check In The user will be able to Check In inventory Check Out
105. if the Total Available plus the quantity on order via Purchase Orders is less than the quantity needed for scheduled Pick Orders Committed Total Available On Order On the next page is an example of the Alerts menu 52 InventoryControl Printable Help The All New InventoryControl v5 File Tools Kit item s with incomplete info 2 P Assembly item s with incomplete info 8 Item s Past Due 1 New Purchase order s Past Due 1 Pick order s Past Due 1 Expired Item s 1 Item s Understocked By Location 2 Item s Understocked By Item Totals 2 Item s With Negative Quantity 1 53 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 11 Adding Notes Several screens in the software provide the option to add notes to the record Clicking on the Add Note button allows you to associate any comments you may have with the record you are creating or editing This is useful to keep comments associated with the record Add Note x Enter New Note Help OK Cancel Enter your notes in the text box then click OK to save and exit Notes are displayed along with the date time it was entered and the user name of the user who added it 54 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 5 Creating New Data 5 1 Creating a New Site Note You can only have one site in WaspNest Inventory The Create New Site screen allows you to add a new Site to your database Typically a Site is a building that contains one
106. if this will be the primary location at this site for this item A primary location can be selected for each Site you have setup in the system When you select a primary location when you Receive quantities of that item from a purchase order they will automatically be assigned to that location Also when you Pick quantities of that item for pick orders they will automatically be removed from that location You can change these locations when picking and receiving if necessary In addition the primary location will appear in any location fields on the Add inventory screen for example however you can change the location if needed Only one primary location can be selected per site e Site and Location Click in the box and select a Site and Location from the drop down list Only sites and locations you have previously selected will appear in this list Select More to view the Site or Location List You can also select New Location or New Site to access the Create New screen These represent the site and the location where the inventory will reside e Quantity This number is populated from the Inventory for this item This number displays how many of this item is currently in stock at the selected site and location When you first create your item this number will be zero After you build your Assembly Item this field will reflect the number you built which is the quantity in stock 96 InventoryControl Printable Help Max Stock
107. if your business calls one of the functions or fields something different than the default values or if you want to change the Tool Tip the text that appears when you hover the cursor over a field to provide special instructions to your users For example if your business refers to adding inventory as increasing inventory you may want to change the name of the Add field to Increase to avoid confusion for your employees For more information on the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic For more information on setting security privileges please refer to the Security Privileges topic Please see the Using Custom Fields topic for additional information about customizing this software This topic discusses Editing Field Names Resetting Field Names to their Default Values 15 8 1 Editing Field Names 1 When this option is enabled several field names throughout the program will appear in recessed boxes as seen below Note The Check In and Check Out options are disabled for WaspNest Inventory Sa amp Remove Move Check In Check Out Adjust Audit E Click on a recessed label such as Add The Customize Field screen appears Re Customize Field Es New Name Form Main Tool tip Click to add items into inventory Set To Default Hep K Cancel 250 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 You can change the text of the Label or field name and that field s associated Tool Tip or
108. in a new address type For example you could enter Warehouse 1 in the Address Type field Addresses Address Type State Corporate Address v Texas Address 1 Postal Code 123 Anywhere Road 75028 Address 2 Country City Flower Mound 2 If you entered a new address type a confirmation message will appear verifying that you want to add it to the database Select Yes on this message to save the new address type The new entry will now appear in the Address Type drop down menu on all screens on which you can enter multiple address types Create Edit Suppliers Create Edit Customers Create Edit Manufacturers 3 Enter the remainder of the address information then click OK You will be returned to the Administration Menu 4 Click the Company Info icon again The Company Information screen will reappear populated with the information you just entered 5 Select a different address type of the Address Type drop down menu or enter a new one The address lines Address 1 and 2 City State Postal Code and Country will clear while all other company information will remain on the screen 6 Enter the new address information then click OK Repeat these steps for each address type 228 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 2 3 Deleting an Address Type You can delete one or more addresses for your company by following the steps below The delete button is only enabled when you have selected one of the address types you entered It is
109. intention to loop on Item Values entered for Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By fields other than Serial Number will remain locked after entering them for the first Remove Qty Item Count 25 F4 Done Above having pressed F3 when prompted for Item and then having entered the item number and values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a value of 25 for Qty this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item inputs for the second Remove The Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Remove transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop While looping on Item all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item The Count is incremented each time a Remove is done while looping 7 Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop d When looping on Item all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be reset Looping on a Tracked By other than Serial Number Here for example F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing a Remove for this Item Remove 123 Monitor Pallet S ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Remove for this Item for more than one Palle
110. is checked a copy of this order automatically prints when you click the Save button Email on Save If this box is checked a copy of this order is automatically sent to the email address listed in the Supplier screen for this supplier when you click the Save button If you have selected to view the Email Destination List selected on the Options screen the list will appear allowing you to select email addresses or change email addresses as needed If you have selected not to view the list the order will automatically be sent to the email address listed in the Supplier screen from the email address listed in the Company Information screen Please note that if the email addresses are not entered on the Supplier or Company Information screens you will receive an error message when you try to send emails Below is an example of the Email Destination List F Email Distribution List From Don t show this dialog any more Help OK i Cancel An email is also sent to any CC addresses designated on the Options screen You can choose to ignore the CC address by deselecting the checkbox next to the CC Addresses 191 InventoryControl Printable Help field on the Email Destination List It is a good idea to send yourself or someone else internal to your company a copy of any orders you email to a supplier In order for the email feature to work correctly you must set your SMTP Server User Name and Password
111. item with this tr ackby specific in st ock ESC Exit If Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices is enabled any Tracked By value is allowed 354 InventoryControl Printable Help Press Esc to Exit the error message and then provide a Tracked By value that matches inventory in stock at the specified Location Looping on Serial Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key An asterisk displays next to the looped field If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item the Qty field will be set to 1 A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number Looping will determine the final count for this Add transaction as you scan or key in one or more Serial Numbers for this Item 1000066 Qty 1 SN Count 0 F4 Done As each SN is keyed in or scanned the Count will be increased Press ENT after inputting each serial number Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Remove screen Notes e When an Item is tracked by Serial Number you can only loop on Serial Number e When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping Looping on Location Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing a Remove for this Item Add 123 Monitor m Location ESC Cancel F1 P
112. left arrow keys then press the power key The Start Menu will be displayed lt lt START MEHU gt gt 1 SUPERUISOR 2 WARM START 3 COLD START d If you do not see the Start Menu shown above power off the PDT and repeat the key sequence described above 3 From the Start Menu select 3 COLD START by pressing the 3 key on the PDT WILL DELETE ALL DATA Are you Sure 1 ES 8 HO 4 Respond with 1 YES to delete all data by pressing the 1 key on the PDT The WDT2200 will be Cold Started and all data will be lost 308 InventoryControl Printable Help At the PC with the WDT2200 connected to your PC and powered on you must now perform a Setup Device on the PC to set your COM Port Settings and then Send Program to PDT before you can proceed to Create PDT Database 309 19 8 WDT2200 Setting the Date and Time InventoryControl Printable Help If the InventoryControl program and a database have already been transferred to the WDT2200 the InventoryControl Log On screen will be displayed when you first power on the PDT InventoryControl User Password If the WDT2200 displays the screen above when powered on jump to Instructions for Setting Date and Time on a WDT2200 That Already Has InventoryControl Installed OR If InventoryControl has not yet been loaded to the WDT2200 the default power on prompt will be displayed showing the ROM version and memory capacity WOT2268 U1 18 HEN 2568 KB gt I
113. link below A series of steps will appear guiding you through the set up process Each step provides a brief overview of the process along with a link or links to the help topics containing detailed how to and explanatory information 1 2 User Log On The Log On screen appears when InventoryControl is first started and when you select File gt Log Out ST A d N Inv ntoryControl Cancel Complete both fields then click OK to logon to the system InventoryControl Printable Help The User Name field is not case sensitive The Password field is case sensitive Asterisks will be displayed as you type the Password The first time you open InventoryControl you can enter the following information User Name Admin Password blank After log on the password can be changed via File gt Change Password The Admin account or any other account with Administration Privilege can use the Security Privileges screen to add Users set their privileges and reset their passwords For more information on adding users please refer to the Adding Users Editing Security Privileges topic 1 3 Using the Sample Company The Sample Company contains a set of data you can use to learn about InventoryControl You can practice working with the features and functions contained in the software using this data You can enter information into the Sample Company however when upgrading to a new version this data will be lost It is very
114. list of Locations For detailed information regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 126 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 6 Customer List Example The Customer List displays all customers you have setup in the software A customer is any person or entity to whom you check out receive or send pick inventory Note All screen shots in this help file are of InventoryControl Professional Edition The screens in other versions of InventoryControl and in WaspNest Inventory may differ For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen ZE Customer List o loea Tools co ee c en d gt PBPP AA f D Filter New Edit Delete Duplicate Check Out Print Export To File Group Du Show Hidden Columns Customer No Name Company Name Email Department Date Added Address 1 Address 2 City State Postal Code Country Mail i 12 20 2007 11112 5 21 2007 com Syste SystemlD Tech info systemid com 2 15 2007 100 Syst Pla Tx 75075 USA com2 Wasp sales waspbarcode com Sales 2 16 2007 1525 W Dal com222 Wasp sales waspbarcode com Sales 2 16 2007 1520 W Suite 22 Pla TX 75055 US 5500 Record I4 4 105 gt bi lt m l Help Close The Customer List screen allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print the list of Customers For detailed information
115. may take several minutes to finish depending on how many COM ports are available v COM Port Settings Serial Port Test Specified Settings PA BT 990990009 Parity E i Auto Detect COM Port Baud Rate Settings Stop Bits Change Portable Settings D Q c 9 G 3 a a ooo ooo Step 1 of 1 Km Ren Mobile device type WDT2200 User currently logged on Admin Click Auto Detect COM Port Settings A status screen appears as the system is detecting the default settings Auto Detect COM Port Settings Auto detecting COM1 Baud Rate 4800 Parity NONE Stop Bits 1 We The default settings are Parity None Baud Rate 19200 Stop Bits 1 When the system is finished looking for the settings they will appear in the fields 292 InventoryControl Printable Help Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Check Mobile Device Connection Auto detect COM port settings completes successfully This step also allows you to change the COM port settings which the W DT2200 is connected to Please make sure that the WDT2200 unit is properly connected to the PC COM port You may then select the desired baud rate and click the Change Portable Settings button to change the settings on the portable device COM Pott Settings SSC come K Test Specified Settings Parity NONE Auto Detect COM Port Baud Rate a30 4 Lk Settings Sto
116. more information on turning on the audit mode on the PC please refer to the topic Auditing Your Inventory For more information on creating the database please refer to the topic Windows Mobile Device Setup Mobile Device 477 InventoryControl Printable Help Inventory can also be audited at the PC e Switching to Audit Mode on the Windows Mobile Device e Returning to Normal Mode on the Windows Mobile Device Switching to Audit Mode on the Windows Mobile Device 1 To switch the device to Audit mode you must first start an Audit on the PC side and send the new database to the mobile device For information on this please refer to the topic Auditing Your Inventory 2 Next create a new mobile database then synchronize the database with the Windows Mobile Device The mobile version of InventoryControl opens in Audit mode Inyentorycontrol Tools Help a Inventory 3E 5 23 em E To perform an Audit select Audit The Audit screen displays 478 InventoryControl Printable Help Item i Site Cs Location Ki i Date Code Serial sway Pallet Trans Code S Y odp EI 5 23 Pm A Enter an Item Number Site and Location Item 1001 i Trans Code Qty I Y Audi EI 5 24 PM G SG 7 Note that once the Item Number is selected the Audit screen displays only the fields that are necessary for Auditing this particular Item For example if you enter an Item that is tracked by ser
117. need 2 long panels 2 short panels and one back piece and 6 screws When you enter the long panel item on this tab you will enter 2 in the Quantity field When you enter the screws item on this tab you will enter 6 in the Quantity field etc Select the Always Scrap checkbox if you want InventoryControl to always scrap or permanently remove the item from inventory during the Disassembly process You might use this option for a non inventory item such as a box used for packaging the Assembly Item If the Always Scrap checkbox is not selected the on hand amount for the item will be increased during Disassembly the item is assumed to be returned to inventory rather than removed after Disassembly 98 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 Press ENTER to access a new line and enter another Item then repeat the steps above Your screen will appear similar to the following after pressing ENTER General Location Settings Assembly Information Additional Manage Suppliers Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Quantity Always Scrap Stocking Unit Total In House Description Type Item Number H Inventory 1003 1 00 el 0 00 Test Item 3 Inventory 1002 1 00 E 7 00 Test Item 1002 Note The cost will be calculated and updated based on your selections on this tab unless you have checked the Do Not Override Cost on the General Tab checkbox located at the bottom of the Assembly Information tab 7 2 5 Additional Informa
118. new customers An automatically generated Customer Number will always be 1 greater than the value of the largest customer number currently in your database If you are using alphabetic or alphanumeric values as Customer Numbers the Automatic Customer Number option will still generate a numeric Customer Number beginning with a value of 1 if it does not exist already 15 6 6 Automatic Item Numbers This options allows you to enable automatic generation of an Item Number when you are creating a new item or when duplicating an existing item from the Item List An automatically generated Item Number will always be 1 greater than the value of the largest Item Number currently in your database If you are using alphabetic or alphanumeric values as Item Numbers the Automatic Item Number option will still generate a numeric Item Number beginning with a value of 1 if it does not exist already 15 6 7 Automatic New This option enables the automatic opening the New screen when an entered value Item Number for example is not in the database When the Automatic New option is enabled The Create New Item screen is opened if an unknown Item Number is entered on the Add Inventory Create New Purchase Order or Create New Pick Order screen The Create New Location screen is opened if an unknown Location is entered on the Add Inventory screen or in the To Location field of the Move Inventory screen The Create New Supplier screen will be ope
119. not apply to WaspNest Inventory Examples 40 InventoryControl Printable Help G g Backup Restore Administration Menu Company Info Security Inventory Menu Note Check In Check Out Assemble and Disassemble do not apply to WaspNest Inventory AS SSC GS B Remove Check In Check Out Disassemble Receive Pick Menu Note Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Manage Ship Manage Payment Pick Methods Methods Customize Numbers Receive Mobility Menu Note Mobility does not apply to WaspNest Inventory This example is of the WDT2200 menu The icons in this menu will look different if you are using a Windows Mobile CE mobile device but the options will be the same be D Mo Bb Setup Device Create PDT Database Send Data To Receive Data Process Mobile Reports Menu This icon opens the Select Report screen For more information on the Select Report screen please refer to the topic Selecting Reports 41 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 4 Changing Your Password This feature allows the user currently logged in to change his or her password Note for WaspNest Users This feature is not available in WaspNest Inventory For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Changing Your Password 1 From the Main Screen click File gt Change Password The Change Password screen
120. note 100 Tiffany amp Co 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 MOLES sree ens 200 Cartier Inc 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 notes NorthP m 265 InventoryControl Printable Help The Destination File Format screen allows you to specify the Field Delimiter of choice and whether or not to Include field names on first row Delimiters are used to separate the data items in a database the columns in the database table when transporting the database to another application For example a comma separated values file CSV file is one in which each value in the cells of a table row is delimited by and separated from the next value by a comma The beginning of a row is indicated by a new line character If the file name you specified in Step 1 uses the extension CN you must specify lt Commas gt as your field delimiter the default If you specified a file name with the extension of TXT in Step 1 you may use any of the field delimiters available in the drop list as long as the chosen character does not occur within the data itself Click the Finish button to perform the export On completion you ll receive a confirmation screen stating your export was successful You can confirm the export by opening and reviewing the csv or txt file you specified in Step 1 Exports can be performed from any of the program s tables Location Supplier Manufacturer Item Customer or Inventory
121. of measure used when ordering an item This may be box pallet etc This is different from the Eaches stocking unit For example jar may be the stocking unit but the supplier may ship the item in boxes containing 10 jars 493 InventoryControl Printable Help Site The Site is a broad term containing one or more Locations Inventory is assigned to the locations within the site For example you might create a Site labeled Warehouse 1 containing a Locations labeled Bin 1 and Bin 2 Stocking Unit This is the portion by which an item s quantity will be tracked This unit represents Eaches meaning how you want each item of this type to be measured Examples bag barrel basket block bottle box carton container drum gallon jar pack package pallet section tub vial etc You can designate a different stocking unit for each item in your system if desired Track By This feature does not apply to WaspNest Inventory This software allows you to track your inventory by several fields if desired Track By options are Serial Numbers Lot Date Code and or Pallet Tracking allows you to follow the movements of inventory from receiving adjusting moving checking out etc It is important that you determine how you want to track each Item Typically small Items that are all the same may not need to have any Tracked Bys selected Items such as printers may need to be tracked by Serial Number so returns and maintenance can be p
122. off hold down the CMD and left arrow keys then press the power key A START MENU will be displayed 311 InventoryControl Printable Help lt lt START MEHU gt gt 1 SUPERVISOR 2 WARM START 3 COLD START d If you do not see the Start Menu shown above power off the PDT and repeat the key sequence described above 4 From the Start Menu select 2 WARM START by pressing the 2 key on the PDT 5 The default power on prompt will be displayed showing the ROM version and memory capacity WOT2268 U1 18 HEN 2568 KB gt Press and hold the Command key until the following system menu is displayed 1 RUH 2 TER 3 COH 4 DIR 5 ERA 6 TYP 7 CPY 8 3ET 6 Press the 8 key to select 8 SET 7 Press the 1 key to select 1 DATE amp TIME 8 Overwrite the Date shown with today s date in the format mm dd yyyyy You can use the right arrow key to correct any entry errors or press the Enter ON to accept the current date and advance to setting the Time of Day 9 Overwrite the Time shown with the current time of day in the format hh mm ss using values of 0 through 12 for Midnight through Noon and 13 through 23 for the hours of 1 00 PM through 11 00 PM 10 Press the 5 key to select 5 EXIT 11 Press the 1 key to select 1 RUN from the system menu 12 Use the left and right arrow keys if necessary to select MISWDT EXE from the list of programs installed on the WDT2200 312 InventoryControl Printable Help lt RUN PRO
123. on a different PC Server than where you are running the software Enter an existing directory on the PC Server where the SQL database is installed this is where you installed the database during the initial installation process Make sure the user who will be performing the backups Administration Menu gt Backup has permission to the database If a location is not entered the Microsoft SQL Server backup directory will be used to store backups This is where the system will look for backup files when you try to restore the database as well If you specify a folder and SQL Server does not have rights to write to that folder you will receive an error message and the backup will fail It is your responsibility to give SQL Server the proper rights to write the backup in the specified folder For information on how to give permissions to a folder please refer to Wasp Technical Support Knowledge Base and Downloads on the internet By default if you do not have a remote connection to your database the backup folder is C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 1 MSSQL Backup 15 6 22 Always Show Email Destination List Select Yes to always have the list of email destinations appear when you select the Send Emails Upon Save on the New Purchase Order and New Pick Order or the Pick to email the packing slip screens This list allows you to select the email addresses to which the order will be sent 246 InventoryControl Printable Help
124. once before ending the audit To Reconcile 1 On the Inventory Menu in Audit Mode click the Reconcile End icon The Complete Audit screen appears 283 InventoryControl Printable Help Action Item Number Current Oty Audited Oty Location Serial Number Date Code Audited 100002 12 00 10 00 A ALT Audited Qty 200 0 00 4 00 DDKK 200 Audited Qty 1002 3 00 5 00 012 Location 012 Destination OK Cancel This screen lists all audit transactions and includes the following columns e Item Number e Current Quantity This is the quantity that was listed for this item in the system prior to the audit e Audited Quantity This is the quantity that you entered for this item on the Audit screen You can update this field on the Complete Audit screen by selecting the field and typing in a new number or by using the up or down arrow buttons next to the field e Location The location you selected for this item on the Audit screen e Serial Number Lot Pallet These appear populated only if this item is tracked by one or more of these fields Select from the Action column what action you want to take with the selected item Your options are e Audited Qty Selecting this option means the system will keep the audited quantity you entered for this item on the Audit screen e Current Qty Selecting this option means the system will keep the quantity that was listed in the system prior to the audit
125. only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings Picking Inventory on the Windows Mobile Device 1 From the Main Menu tap the Pick icon The Pick screen displays Order i Item i Site i Location i Date Code E Pallet Lot Serial Quantity Y Pick 3E gt 12 00 pm a Note On the Pick screen you can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering 468 InventoryControl Printable Help Alphanumeric Data on the Windows Mobile Device for details or use the Search function Enter or search for the Order that contains the item you are picking Order booo1 i bo L GE e Palet TC _ Pick Ee gt 12 13 Pm E Enter the number of the item you are picking in the Item field or click the i icon to search Pick Order Item i Location H i Pick QetQ gt nm rm G E 469 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 Enter the Quantity you want to pick This is the number of kits you want to pick Reset o _ Close in
126. out Next to be removed would be scanners from the 8th This also is how the average cost is calculated If the scanners on the 1st cost 300 each and the scanners on the 8th and 15th cost 320 and 315 each the average cost on the 16th would be 311 67 50 scanners x 300 15 000 from the 1st 50 scanners x 320 16 000 from the 8th 50 scanners x 315 15 750 from the 15th 46 500 150 311 67 average cost On the 17th you removed 60 scanners so the average cost will become 40 scanners x 320 12 800 from the 8th 50 scanners x 315 15 750 from the 15th 28 550 90 317 23 average cost Inventory valuation is calculated by multiplying the quantity by the average price The inventory value on the 16th is 46 000 or 150 x 311 67 After 60 are removed the inventory value is 28 550 or 317 23 x 90 Last In First Out LIFO When this method is used the inventory that is added last most recently is removed first 16 InventoryControl Printable Help 50 scanners x 300 15 000 from the 1st 50 scanners x 320 16 000 from the 8th 50 scanners x 315 15 750 from the 15th 46 500 150 311 67 average cost On the 17th you removed 60 scanners so the average cost will become 40 scanners x 320 12 800 from the 8th 50 scanners x 300 15 000 from the 1st 27 800 90 308 89 average cost e Legacy Method the method used in previous versions of InventoryControl This is the meth
127. regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 127 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 7 Manufacturer List The Manufacturer List displays all manufacturers you have setup in the system E Manufacturer List o fel Tools geb A D PYar S bh 0 Filter New Edit Delete Duplicate Print Export To File Group Bu Show Hidden Columns Name Email Web Site ContactName Address 1 Address 2 City State PostalCode County MailStop Pk e sy 2 Copy of JDS TEST2 Dell 1500 W 15th Dallas Dell Inc buyme dell com www dell com Round Rock Road Round Rock Texas 38283 Record HM 4 VOF 5 p WU IR EE r The Manufacturer List screen allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print the list of Manufacturers For detailed information regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 128 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 8 Supplier List The Supplier List displays all suppliers you have setup in the system 3 Supplier List Tools Ts oles PY arab P J Filter New Edit Delete Duplicate Print Export To File Group Bu Show Hidden Columns Supplier Code Name Email john cdw com 100 Tiffany amp Co 150 Bachendorf s Jewelers 20 TechData 200 Cartier Inc 30 CostCo 40 Walmart Record HM 4 UO 14 gt NM a 3 Close The Supplier List screen allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print the list of Suppliers
128. rest of the screen If a Supplier and or Ref is required for this item you can enter it now Similar to Tracked By fields the requirement that one or more of these fields be filled out is established at the time the item was entered on the Create New Item screen and can be edited on the Edit Item screen The Ref drop down list displays the last ten Ref s used The lt More gt option of the Ref drop down list displays all Ref s with active quantity 137 6 7 InventoryControl Printable Help The Supplier drop down list displays the last ten suppliers used The lt More gt option of the Supplier drop down list displays all suppliers that can be chosen active suppliers The No of Labels field determines the number of item labels that will be printed if the Print checkbox is checked The value in this field defaults to the Quantity field value The Notes field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction You can optionally enter the Customer if you want to track return information When you have finished entering information click the Add button to post the transaction to the Pending Transaction List All fields on the Add Inventory screen will be cleared and all but the Hem Number field will be disabled You can either select another item to be added to the Pending Transaction List or you can click Commit to submit the transaction s The Add button will not be enabled until all requi
129. saving by default displays only items picked in the current pick session If you want to pick multiple times and print a packing slip that displays all the picks for this pick order including items picked previously you can select to do so on the Options screen For example Assume Pick Order 001 a quantity of 5 for item ABC and a quantity of 4 for item XYZ Today pick 2 of item ABC and 2 of item XYZ and ship them The packing slip will display 2 ABC and 2 XYZ Tomorrow pick the other 3 of item ABC and 2 of item XYZ and ship them The packing slip has 3 ABC and 2 XYZ This would also be exactly the same if both picks and ships were done on the same day If however pick what have in the morning and dont ship it and a shipment comes in that day or the next and complete the order before shipping anything will want all of the items picked throughout the day to display on one packing slip To do this select Yes for this option 15 6 13 Transaction Code List This option affects what displays in the Transaction Code drop down lists on the Audit and Adjust screens You can choose to show only those transaction codes created by the currently logged in user or show all transaction codes regardless of who created them The options available are Logged In User Select this option to display the last ten transaction codes created by the currently logged in user The last 10 codes created by the current user will display All Users Sel
130. section below e Dimension Unit is the increment to be used for Length Width and Height Examples inch foot yard millimeter centimeter meter etc e Length is the length of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units 69 InventoryControl Printable Help e Width is the width of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units e Height is the height of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units e Weight Unit is the increment to be used for mass Examples ounce pound ton milligram gram kilogram metric ton etc e Weight is the mass of one Unit of Measure expressed in Weight Units e Manager is used to record the name of someone who manages this inventory item e File Reference is used to record the path to a relevant file that might be an image file documentation specifications etc This field does not function as a hyperlink It s just a static field where a filename or path and filename can be recorded e Add Notes allows you to record any additional information 5 3 5 Manage Suppliers Tab This tab allows you to identify which suppliers you will use for this item and enter detailed supplier information such as unit of measure Pro and Enterprise users can enter multiple suppliers for an item and mark one as the default or preferred supplier Standard version users can enter only one supplier for each item WaspNest Inventory users can enter only one supplier for each item General Location Set
131. the Complete Audit screen to review any discrepancies between your counts and what was in the system At the click of a button you can reconcile the counts or you can select certain transactions to accept or reject This software also comes equipped with several Audit Reports that allow you to review a variety of information at a glance The topics listed below are included in this section It is best to review these topics in order as they outline the flow of performing an audit Audit Flow Overview Beginning the Audit Using the Audit Screen Reviewing the Not Counted Items Report Reconciling Your Counts on the Complete Audit screen Reviewing the Remainder of the Audit Reports Ending the Audit 278 InventoryControl Printable Help 17 2 Audit Flow Overview The audit process in this software is broken into 7 steps 1 2 Gei NOOO Create a pre audit backup of your database Start the Audit Mode on the PC If you are using mobile devices create a database of the system while in audit mode and download it to the mobile devices to be used during the audit If you are using a wireless connection you will not need to download the audit database Your mobile device will connect to the database as usual Use the Audit screen or the mobile devices to enter counts and sync the mobile device data back to the PC Review the Items Not Counted Report Reconcile your counts entered in the Audit screen against the counts that were in
132. the InventoryControl database you will need to create and send a new database to your mobile devices Follow the instructions below to do this Note This applies to batch devices only If you are using a wireless connection you will not need to retrieve information from the mobile device Your mobile device will be connected directly to the database and any changes additions you make on the mobile device will immediately update the database For information about using a wireless connection please refer to the topic Using a Mobile Device with a Wireless Connection There are two separate procedures you must complete to successfully send data from the PC to the mobile device You must first complete the procedure on the PC side before you can finish the procedure on the mobile device side e PC Procedure e Mobile Device Procedure PC Procedure 1 On the InventoryControl Main screen click the Mobility icon A menu will appear allowing you to select which device you will be working with If you have only one type the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen er e Setup Mobile Create Mobile Send Data To Get Data From Process Mobile The Wasp Mobile Device Communication Wizard opens with the Create Mobile Database tab selected 2 On the Mobility Menu select Create Mobile 403 InventoryControl Printable Help Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC
133. the import file as needed and re import DO NOT re import after you have already imported inventory without first restoring the backup Re importing over existing inventory data will add more inventory to your items rather than fixing problem data Congratulations You are now on your way to populating your inventory database To add more Items to your database just return to Step 4 to setup your new Item then Add your inventory for that Item InventoryControl Printable Help 1 15 Step Eleven Print the Inventory by Location Report Print the Inventory by Location Report Printing the Inventory Location Report will allow you to check that your inventory has been entered correctly After you have added your inventory you are ready to begin using InventoryControl Now you can setup your mobile devices if needed and begin keeping track of your inventory InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 2 Introductory Materials 2 1 Barcode Best Practices In InventoryControl when you are asked for a number to identify sites customers items locations etc you should always use a short sequential set of numbers or numbers and characters Enter the full text description of the site or location in the description field not the number field These numbers can then be printed as a barcode and used to scan locations into mobile devices You should estimate the largest number of sites or locations you will have and pick a range of nu
134. the item you select in which location that quantity will reside The Move function allows you to move that inventory from the originally assigned location to another By moving inventory in the software you can easily keep accurate records of where all of your inventory is currently located You can only move inventory that is listed in the system as having a quantity greater than O quantity is added on the Add Inventory screen or when Receiving inventory Note The Track By section does not apply to WaspNest Inventory Moving Inventory to a Different Location 1 From the Main screen click the Inventory icon The Inventory menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Inventory menu click Move The Move screen appears OR 1 From the Main screen select Lists gt Item The Item List appears 2 Highlight the item for which you want to move inventory then click the Move icon The Move screen appears Ei Move Ea Data Pending Transaction List 0 ltem Item Number 4 Quantity 1 A Description Maximum 0 From Location A Track By Serial Number Date Code 4 Lot 4 Pallet 4 To Location xe Notes a IA ei Move Help Cancel 144 InventoryControl Printable Help To prevent fields from clearing click the Pushpin 4 button located to the right of the field you want to lock for subsequent transactions This is helpful when you have to perform multiple removes at one Location for example Pushpins can
135. the red flags next to some of the orders on the list These red flags indicate that the order is past due The status may be New Past Due or In Process Past Due Overdue orders will appear at the top of the list by default but you can reorder the list as needed The Purchase Order List allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print the list of Purchase Orders For detailed information regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 131 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 11 Transaction List Example The Transaction List displays all transactions add move remove etc that have occurred in the system along with the date of the transactions and the user who performed them Below is an example of the Transaction List E Transaction List E x Tools lt A m emm L Zi S OD off J ean Filter Print ExportTo File Group Bu Hidden Columns Print Labels Show Associated Trans Trans Date em Trans Type emm Item Number e Item Description Quantity em Entry Date Date Acquired 8 Due Date emm Cost 3 1 Add 104 Desktop Unit 200 2 0 011 3 8 2011 Remove Mouse 3 8 2011 3 8 2011 Remove 101 3 8 2011 3 8 2011 Remove 101 00 3 8 2011 3 8 2011 Add Desktop Unit 00 3 8 2011 3 8 2011 3 8 2011 Add Mouse 3 8 2011 3 8 2011 2 28 2011 Add 101 00 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 Add 101 00 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 Add 101 00 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 Add 101 DD 2 28 2011
136. the system Review the remainder of the Audit Reports End the Audit Mode 17 3 Beginning the Audit 1 2 3 On the Main screen click the Inventory icon The Inventory menu appears at the bottom of the screen On the Inventory menu click the Audit icon The following confirmation message appears Audit E Q Are you sure you want to start an Audit Click Yes to begin the audit If you are using the Pro or Enterprise version of InventoryControl a message appears reminding you to create a pre audit backup of your database if you have not already done so Select Cancel on the Backup Reminder message then to the Backup screen and create the backup now We recommend you create the backup file with a name similar to the following Pre Audit yyyy mm dd hh mm ss bkp This backup of your database can be restored later if necessary but you will lose any transactions completed since that backup For more information on creating backups please refer to the Backing Up the Database topic Select OK to begin the audit without creating a backup this is not recommended The screen will prominently display a message that Audit Mode is active and most of the Inventory menu will be disabled An example of the Inventory menu with Audit Mode activated 279 InventoryControl Printable Help is displayed below Audit AN Audit Mode Active Some functionality is restricted Inventory Administration Reports
137. their warehouses are located in Guthrie Oklahoma and Plano Texas they want the Site Description to be Guthrie Warehouse and Plano Warehouse The Site Codes are set up as numbers 100G for the Guthrie warehouse and 101P for the Plano warehouse They follow a similar pattern with their locations The Location Description details where and what the location is Guthrie Wrehouse Row A Shelf 01 Bin 00 and the Location Code is a scannable abbreviation of this GA0100 Although this business has only two sites it has many locations therefore they create a csv file of the sites and locations by exporting this information from the old inventory system and importing it into InventoryControl For details on importing refer to the topics Importing Into the Database and Import Specifics Database Properties After importing each site and location should be manually reviewed in InventoryControl to make sure all information is included Business Type Fleet Multiple Sites Multiple Locations with From To Sites Set on the Mobile Devices The owner of Rusty s Cable Company has narrowed down his options for setting up his sites and locations to two possibilities He can define the base garage as the site with each vehicle being a location along with a storage area setup as a location as well In this instance the site could be named Docking1 and the vehicles set up with names consisting of the abbreviation VEH followed by the last four digits of the VIN num
138. them on the screen 433 InventoryControl Printable Help 6 Click on your printer in the resulting list then click Next Settings Select a Bluetooth Device Cl Select a device to connect with and tap Next EA WWSSO0 HID 1 10 8e 46 97 4 8 WWSSO0 HID 1 10 8e 50 06 Pocket_PC EA WWSSOO HID 1 10 8e 47 34 EA WWSSO0 HID 1 10 8e 49 12 EA WWSSOO HID 1 10 8e 42 2b fa WWSSO0 HID V1 10 8e 4c 73 fg O00b0d8e4937 Cancel ES Next 7 Enter your Network Password in the Passcode field then click Next Settings an d 1 55 Enter Passcode Cl Enter a passcode to establish a secure connection with W WS500 HID 1 10 8e 46 97 Back Fa Next 8 Select the Serial Port for the printer and then select Finish 434 InventoryControl Printable Help Error Mobile device locks up If your WPA1000 locks up no keys work etc perform the following steps 1 Take the battery out of the mobile device 2 Insert a pin or a paperclip in the reset button located on the back of the device 3 While holding the pin in the reset button put the battery back into the device Error Receiving Connection Error when trying to access InventoryControl RF Make sure you allow time for the device to connect to your wireless network before you attempt to login to InventoryControl RF 1 After sending InventoryControlRF to the WPA1000 disconnect the cable from the computer if it is connected
139. to go to the Site Config function For more information on configuring sites on the PDT please refer to the topic WDT2200 Configuring Sites The topics discussed in this section are Receiving Inventory Looping on Serial Number Looping on Item Number Looping on Location Looping on Track Bys Other than Serial Number Tips for Speeding Up Data Entry 380 InventoryControl Printable Help Receiving Inventory 1 From the Main Menu press the 9 key The Receive screen appears Receive PO Scan or key in value and press Ent Pres ESC for Menu 2 Enter the PO number that contains the items you are receiving Receive PO 10007 Scan or key in value and press Ent Pres ESC for Menu 3 Enter the Item Number you are receiving Receive Hem 1001 Scan or key in value and press Ent Pres ESC for Menu If the Item entered is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again after you press Ent If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item after you press Ent 4 Enter the Location into which you will be receiving the item Note If this item has a designated primary location setup on the Create New Item or Edit Item screen on the PC then that location will appear by default You can change this location if needed A location must be entered Receive 1001 Monitor Location Location 1 ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next
140. to the database Bos Lt Accept Type ltem Quantity From To j Receive 1002 10 Site 2 L em Am 206 Am ZS WM w5 a 5 Cea C a This screen displays any pending transactions 5 Mark the transactions you wish to Accept by clicking the checkbox Here we have a Receive transaction that has been Accepted Each transaction completed on the mobile device is listed Any errors or A warnings are marked and you are allowed to accept or reject transactions or make changes to fix errors The Transactions toolbar has the following functions 413 InventoryControl Printable Help Select all transactions in the list for Acceptance DI De Select transactions in the list e Lei Display Error or Warning associated with the highlighted record This example shows an Add transaction that has been de selected because there is an Error associated with it Click on the Display Error Lei toolbar button to see details about this record s error This example shows an Add transaction that has been de selected because there is a Warning associated with it Move DARE record s warning Click on the Display Error Gi toolbar button to see details about this The Error or Warning Ay message associated with the selected transaction will be displayed in the XML Process Errors screen Click Close to return to the Pending Transaction screen The Display Error toolbar button will be GI grayed out when no record
141. unit used by the supplier when shipping this item This may be box pallet etc This is different from the Eaches stocking unit you entered on the Additional tab For example you may have entered jar for the stocking unit on the Additional tab but the supplier may ship the item in boxes containing 10 jars When creating purchase orders you would want to specify the Order Unit as box rather then jar or you could end up with 100 boxes of jars rather than 100 jars When you are done entering supplier information click the Custom Texts or Custom Numbers and Dates tab these tabs are optional Deleting Suppliers from an ltem 1 2 Highlight the supplier you want to delete from this item in the Supplier screen Click the Delete button 7 2 7 Custom Text and Custom Numbers and Dates Tab For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs see Using Custom Fields 7 2 8 Saving the New Item When you have finished adding information click the OK Save button The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen e When the Close New Form option is turned off Click Save to commit your entry or click Close to exit the form e When the Close New Form option is turned on Click OK to commit your entry and exit the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry 102 InventoryControl Printable Help For more information about the Options screen plea
142. until pick quantities are entered on the Picking Order screen If the order becomes overdue before it begins to be picked the status changes to New Overdue For detailed information creating pick orders please see the Creating a Pick Order topic The Pick Order now appears on your Pick Order List Lists gt Pick Orders From the Pick Order List you can Edit or Delete as long as the order is not in process the order as needed For an example of the Pick Order List please refer to the Pick Order List Example topic For detailed information on using the list screen please refer to the Working with Lists topic When the order is actually being picked that is the inventory is being readied for shipping to the customer the picked quantities for each item on the order are entered in the Picking Order screen Receive Pick menu gt Pick This can be done on the PC or on the mobile devices At this time the quantities are checked and you cannot pick more than you actually have in inventory For detailed information on picking orders on the PC please refer to Picking Orders For detailed information on picking orders on a Windows Mobile Device please refer to Windows Mobile Device Picking Items for Orders For detailed information on picking orders on the WDT2200 please refer to WDT2200 Picking Inventory for Orders Pick orders that have some items picked have a status of In Process If the order becomes overdue it will have a statu
143. want to lock This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Disassembles at one Location for example Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field The Disassemble button does not have to be clicked between each scan to post these transactions to the Pending Transaction List If any additional information such as serial numbers is needed for one or more sub items tied to this Assembly Item you will be taken to the Add screen so you can add this information See below for information on using the Add screen Clicking the F button will unlock the field 3 Inthe Item Number field enter the Item Number of the Assembly Item you want to Disassemble The drop down list will display the last five items selected Click More to view the Item List The Item List will be filtered to only show Assembly Items 4 If this Assembly Item is only in one location that location will appear in the Location field If the item exists in more than one location click the drop down menu and select More to view the Location List 5 Enter the quantity you want to disassemble The Maximum number that appears directly below this field indicates the amount of this item that you have in inventory You cannot disassemble more than you have in inventory Data Pending Transaction List 8 LO em Number 1007 EN Description
144. will have to create a mobile database for Source Site 1 and Destination Site 2 transfer the database to the mobile device use the device for those Moves send the information back to the PC then repeat the entire process beginning with by creating a second database to do Moves from Source Site 1 to Destination Site 3 Alternately if your device has enough memory to hold a database containing records for all of your Items at all Sites you can specify a Source value of lt all gt and then control Source Site and Destination Site on the mobile device see Windows Mobile Device Configuring Sites for more information 405 InventoryControl Printable Help Location From Specify lt all gt or use lt More gt from the drop list to find a specific Location at the Source Site that denotes the first in a range of Locations that will be included in the mobile database The last 10 Locations used will be also be listed in the From drop list Specifying lt all gt will include all Locations for the specified Source Site in the mobile Database To Specify lt all gt or click the Hand icon to find a specific Location at the Source Site that denotes the last in a range of Locations that will be included in the mobile database The last 10 Locations used will also be listed in the To drop list Specifying lt all gt will include all Locations for the specified Destination Site in the mobile device Database A specific value can be used for
145. wireless device 0 e 418 Printing Labels iirinn ege 218 Printing Labels Selecting a Pinter 214 Privileges Setting Security cceeeee 230 Profiles User Security Profiles 0 005 230 500 InventoryControl Printable Help Purchase Oder CC Email 238 Purchase Order FACH 198 Purchase Order List Example 131 193 Purchase Order Numbers Customizing 210 Purchase Order Receiving Overview 185 Purchase Orders Deleting 0eeeeeeeeeeeeees 199 Purchase Orders Edge 87 192 R Receive Pick Menu Overvlew eee 200 Receiving Inventory 0 eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetene 194 Receiving Inventory on the WDT2200 380 Receiving on the WMD 461 Reconciling Your Counts Auditing 278 Related Data Fields AA 267 Remote printing sseesssessesrreerinnesenrrneerennesens 418 Removing Inventory eessseeessesrsseernnse 140 Removing Inventory on the WMD 453 Removing Kit Items 170 Report Selection cccseesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 220 Report Viewer 221 Resetting the WDT2200 ossessi 308 Restoring the Database saseeseeeeeeeeeeene 237 S Sample Database 2 Search on the WMD osasse 482 Searching for Information 286 Security Adding Users seeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee eene 230 Security Copying User Profiles 2220 230 Security Editing Lsers 230 Security Inactive USES ceeesseeeee
146. with an Error or Warning symbol is highlighted Edit Transactions allows you to make changes to the values specified at the mobile device 6 Click Finish when you ve decided which transactions to Accept and marked them appropriately Pending Uploads will post the Accepted transactions to the InventoryControl database and then return to the Main Window 414 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 8 6 Batch Mobile Devices Pending Uploads Edit Transactions This function does not apply to WaspNest Inventory This screen is used when uploading a batch file from a mobile device Users with a wireless connection will not use this screen Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Edit Transactions screen allows you to make changes to the values specified for a transaction add remove etc before they are added to the database Users with a wireless connection will not use this screen Editing Transactions Edit Transactions containing Kit Items Editing Transactions 1 From the Pending Transactions screen click the Edit Transactions EY button The Edit Transactions screen appears 2 Edit Transactions Trans Type Item Number Location Site 2 Location 1 Quantity 10 00 Trans Date Thursday May 31 2007 Customer Supplier PO Pallet Date Code Lot
147. 0 00 20 00 F F 2 Non Inventory2 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F T 2234567890 TrackBy All Item 49 00 0 00 49 00 6 92 12 00 11 00 20 00 20 00 T F 3 Non Inventory2 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F T 3234567890 TrackBy Serial 8 2 00 2 00 0 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F F 4 Non Inventory2 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F f 4234567890 TrackBy Lot T 100 00 0 00 100 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 T F 5 Non Inventory2 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F T 5234567890 TrackBy DateCod 200 00 0 00 200 00 12 00 12 00 20 00 20 00 F T 6 TrackBy DateCod 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F T 6234567890 TrackBy Pallet 75 00 0 00 75 00 5 00 500 12 00 10 00 20 00 20 00 F ili 7 TrackBy DateCod 50 00 0 00 50 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F F 7234567890 Non Inventory 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F Ji 8 TrackBy DateCod 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F F 8234567890 Non Inventory2 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F T E TrackBy DateCod 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F Record HM 4 UO 18 gt M Gleis r The Item List screen allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print the list of Items For detailed information regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 123 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 3 Inventory List Example The Inventory List displays all items that have inventory quantity in th
148. 000 pieces of data you will automatically be taken to the Advanced Find screen For further information on the Advanced Find screen please refer to the Advanced Find topic BE Find KS Table Customer x Field Company Name Value Wasp ES Whole Word Only Find All Advanced Find mm fet teal 3 The Find screen contains three fields e Table is used to select the table you want to search e Field is used to select the field in the listed table to be searched e Value is the information for which you are searching Selecting the Whole Word Only checkbox will search the selected table based upon the your entire entry in the Value field Partial matches will be excluded from the search results 286 InventoryControl Printable Help Selecting the Find All checkbox disables the Field and Value fields The search results will display all of the records from the table selected in Search You can click the Advanced bution to go to the Advanced Find screen which provides you with more search options 4 Click the Find button to start the search When the search is complete a list will appear displaying all the records that match your criteria 7 All searches are case insensitive gt Your most recent Find criteria are saved and will automatically be loaded the next time you access the Find screen Examples For these examples assume that the Customer table is made up of three records con
149. 00001 0000x 05 11 2007 ref 3 100 James Bond FedEx Overnight 0070508 000001 0000x 05 08 2007 123456 com System ID Airbome Record Iq 4 10f 10 gt NM Help Close Notice the red flags next to some of the orders on the list These red flags indicate that the order is past due The status may be New Past Due or In Process Past Due Overdue orders will appear at the top of the list by default but you can reorder the list as needed The Pick Order List screen allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print the list of Pick Orders For detailed information regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 130 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 10 Purchase Order List Example This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Purchase Order List displays all active purchase orders you have in your system Active purchase orders are those that have a status of New New Over Due In Process or In Process Over Due Below is an example of the Purchase Order List SE Purchase Order List e LS x Tools rm comm vee ei A vVaw Be r D Fiter Toggle New Edit Delete Print Export To File Group Bu Show Hidden Columns Due Da Type PO Number Order Da Reference Num Supplier
150. 11 18 Windows Mobile Device Auditing Inventory 00 eeeneeeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeteaaeeeeeeaas 477 20 11 19 Windows Mobile Device Searching for Intormaton 482 20 12 Windows Mobile Device Troubleshooting A 485 ER lee EE e th aiiieek ata ities aii teeta eet raha ea tee tere thai ae 492 NEE 495 xiii InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 1 Getting Started 1 1 Introduction We recommend that you read the information found in the Introductory Materials section of this Help file and view the Getting Started prior to beginning setup of your system The Introductory Materials and video tutorials define key terms and explain concepts used throughout InventoryControl These materials provide valuable information to make the setup process smooth and simple In addition to explaining key terms and concepts the Introductory Materials provide tips for creating your inventory tracking system and provides real world business examples detailing how you can customize InventoryControl to work best for your needs You will also find information on recommended guidelines for creating barcodes in the Barcode Best Practices section As you work through the steps to set up your software you will find links to Business Examples These examples detail how different business types using different versions of InventoryControl setup their sites locations items etc After you have reviewed these materials click the Begin InventoryControl Set Up
151. 160 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 10 Kit Items 10 1 Kitting Overview This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Kit items are a group of items that are sold together but are still considered separate inventory items As opposed to Assembly Items you cannot add inventory move or check out in Kit Items While Assembly Items can be created in advance pre assembled and kept in inventory Kit Items are created at pick or remove time Kit Items vs Assembly Items While these two item types are used to accomplish similar goals the grouping of items they are used for different reasons Assembly Items are a collection of items that once grouped are considered to be a new single item The inventory quantities for the individual component items are reduced at the time the Assembly Items are built and the quantity for the Assembly Item is increased You can build several Assembly Items and keep them on hand in your inventory In addition you can move and check in out Assembly Items Kit Items are a collection of items that are sold together but are listed separately in the transaction similar to a bill of goods and continue to be tracked as separate items A Kit Item is created at the time of sale You cannot Add inventory in order to
152. 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 Add 101 00 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 Add 101 DD 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 Add 101 00 2 28 2011 2 28 2011 Record H 4C Jo 13 b bi lt m ee The Transaction List screen allows you to Filter Export or Print the list of Transactions For detailed information regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic The Associated Tranx button applies to Assembly and Kit Items only For more information about the Associated Tranx button refer to the Toolbar section of the Working with Lists topic Keep in mind that the list screens only display a maximum of 1000 rows If the dates for which you are looking are not shown in the list use the Filter function to display the records you need 132 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 9 Inventory 9 1 Inventory Menu The Inventory Menu groups tasks such as Adding Removing Moving Checking In Out Adjusting and Auditing inventory into one place The Checking In Out feature does not apply to WaspNest Inventory To Access the Inventory Menu From the Main screen click the Inventory icon The Inventory Menu appears at the bottom of the screen SE The All New InventoryControl v5 Lo IS sl Eile Tools Alert Help pr Inventory jew H Inventory isi Y d KR N Administration Reports H b Find R Labels Receive Pick Check In Check Out Inventory Admin lt All gt Click on any o
153. 31 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 5 Setting Up Suppliers Business Examples Note For step by step instructions on creating suppliers please refer to the topic Creating New Suppliers Business Type Distributing and Fleet Multiple Suppliers for Each Item Sebastian Distributing has established relationships with many different suppliers to obtain their goods Which supplier they use for a particular item varies depending on how much they are ordering and what Site warehouse they are ordering for Due to this they want to be able to associate more than one supplier with each item and be able to mark a preferred supplier for some items To do this they simply import the entire list of suppliers so they are all added to the database at once refer to the topic Importing into the Database Later after they add their items they can assign as many suppliers as needed to each item and designate one as the preferred supplier Since all of the suppliers are already in the database they can quickly select which suppliers to associate rather than having to enter each supplier manually They can even designate specific shipping unites of measure for each supplier to use for ordering the item Business Type Reseller One Supplier for Some Items Brady s Bargains has a list of suppliers from which they regularly receive certain items that they have been maintaining by hand They will manually input these suppliers on the Create New Suppliers scr
154. 31 16 3 3 Editing User Profiles on the Security Privileges Screen seeeeeeeeeeserieeresressrrssrresns 233 15 3 4 Making Users Inactive riiet an EEEE ii AEEA E a i E aA 234 vii 15 3 6 Security Privileges Definitions 235 15 4 Backing up the Database EE 236 15 5 Bestore the Database TT 237 1 5 6 OptlOnS EE 238 15 6 1 Accessing the Options Gcreen 240 15 6 2 Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices ccccceeeseeeeeee seer eeeaeeeseaeeseaeeesaaeeeeaaeeeeneeeaas 241 TSC SANW Over Pick EE ced ethno teva dade sania hit 242 1 5 6 4 Allow Over Receive ii iniviii ceeded et nile aaa aa da daa i einen nile tection 242 15 6 5 Automatic Customer Number ssssesesssesiessirssrrssirssinssirssitnstnsstnsttnssrnnstnnsnnnstnastnnnnnnnnnnnnn annt 242 15 6 6 Automatic Item Numbers AA 242 15 6 Z AuUtO Ee 242 15 6 8 Automatic Notification of Low Order tems 00 eccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaas 243 15 659 Decimal PlaCeS EE 243 15 6 10 Enforce Date Code as a True Date eeeeceeeceeeneeceneeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeceaeeeeaaeseneeesaeeesaeeseeeeeeaas 243 15 6 11 Item Cost When Add Inventory from Mobile Device 243 15 6 12 Packing Slip for Geselon E 244 15 6 13 Transaction Code List A 244 15 6 14 Check for Software Updates 244 E Re NOW FON KEE 244 15 6 1 6 Edit bieles T se fe le oa vaste a a sun eege Seefe SES EES e eet ue 245 15 02 LC Eemere ees ee e EES ees E 245 15 6 18 Previo
155. 44 Moving Inventory on the WDT2200 343 Moving Inventory on the WMI 450 N New Locations ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 New Manufacturers ccccceeseeeeseeeeeeeees 76 New Pick Order 175 New Gites AE 55 New Guppliers eneee eenen 80 New Customerg ccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeee 57 New Items eee eeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 60 Notes Adding A 54 Numbers Customizing s es 210 Numbers Customizing Pick and Purchase Order Numbers 210 O Options Screen ccccceceessceeeeesteeeeeeseeeeseaes 238 Orders Deleting Purchase and Pick Orders 199 P Packing Slip CC Emails cceeeeeeeeees 238 Packing Slip for SESSION cceeeteeeeeeees 238 Password Changing 42 Payment Methods Managing sseeeeseeeaa 202 Pending Uploads Screen sssssssnnnneneneenane 411 Pick Order Creating New 175 Pick Order CC Emails 0 cccceecceeeteeneeeees 238 Pick Order List Exvample 130 180 Pick Order Numbers Customizing 210 Pick Order Overview assesseer 174 Pick Orders Deletng eeen 199 Pick Orders Editing csceeeeeeees 86 179 Picking Inventory on the WDT2200 367 Picking Items on the WMD 465 Picking Kit Items on the WMD 468 Picking Orders HOW To 181 Pinning on the WMD AN 438 Previously Processed Mobile Data 238 Printers Gelectmg 214 Printing from a
156. A confirmation screen will appear that the data has been imported You can verify the import by going to the List screen Main Screen gt Lists and viewing the list for that type of information For example if you just imported Locations view the Locations List to verify the new information is there 260 InventoryControl Printable Help 16 1 3 Required Import Fields All tables have some required fields that must be mapped These are listed below Supplier Supplier Code Example Site and Location are required fields for importing Locations If you fail to map columns for the Location table s required fields you will receive this prompt The following fields are required for each object record that you are importing Please map ther and try again Location Site 16 1 4 Handling Import Errors If any of the information you just imported contains errors a message will appear when you click the Finish button telling you to check the error report Click OK on this message to view the Error report It is not uncommon to get an error like this when duplicates occur in your source data Duplicate errors can be ignored and the Import can be considered to have completed successfully For other error types find the records that are in error fix them make a new import file txt or csv containing only these records and do another Import Alternatively you can enter these records manually 261 InventoryControl Printable H
157. Add Item screen before you can add quantity to it Inventory is also added when you add inventory on the mobile devices For more information on adding inventory on the Wasp 3200 mobile device please refer to the topic Windows Mobile Device Adding Inventory For more information on adding inventory on the WDT2200 mobile device please refer to the topic WDT2200 Adding Inventory Note All screen shots in this help file are of InventoryControl Professional Edition The screens and available features in other versions of InventoryControl and in WaspNest Inventory may differ For more information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Pro and Enterprise Version Users Only Inventory is also added when you receive inventory from a purchase order For further information on receiving inventory on the PC please refer to the topic Receiving Inventory Pro and Enterprise Version Users Only Keep in mind that if you want to increase inventory amounts for Assembly Items you should use the Build Assembly feature rather than the Add feature Build Assembly will adjust the inventory amounts for all component items You can use the Add feature if you want to add inventory to the Assembly Item only without changing the inventory amounts for the component items such as in the case of a returned item Use the Add feature for this carefully so yo
158. Al Ti Ste 7 no track Site 1 Loc 1 1 00 6 18 2 6 18 20 1 20 00 100 00 7 no track Site 1 LOCH 1 00 6 1872 6 18 20 20 00 100 00 7 no track Site 1 Loc 1 3 00 6 1872 6 18 20 po 1 20 00 100 00 Hidden Hidden Columns The list allows you to hide columns by right clicking on a column label and Columns selecting Hide Column This enables you to hide information you do not usually need You can view the columns you have hidden by right clicking on any column and selecting Show Hidden Columns A pop up screen similar to the one below appears listing all columns that are not currently visible Hidden Columns Oldest Date Acquired You can return these columns to the full List screen by double clicking on a listing in the Hidden Columns screen and dragging it back to the column labels section on the List screen Show Assembly and Kit Items Only This button shows any transactions related to Kit or Assembly Associated Items For example Assembling an Item creates a Remove transaction for each component item Tranx and Disassembling an Item creates an Add transaction for each component item Removing a Transaction Kit Item creates a Remove transaction for each related item as well To view these transactions List Only highlight an Assembly or Kit Item and click the Show Associated Tranx button The Transaction List will display any transactions associated with the selected Assembly or Kit Item Below is an example of the Transaction List d
159. Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled Please see the Options Screen topic for more information on this option When a From location value has been entered press F4 or ENT to advance to the To location field 4 Provide the required To location value Move 1000052 Fence Rail To A2 ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next As shown below if a From or To Location value is entered that s not currently in the database you will be prompted to accept or reject the entry as a new value to be added to the database for the Source or Destination Site shown Site Warehouse 2 New Location Area 2 ENT OK ESC Cancel If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database at that Site press ESC to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the From location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction Press the ENT key to accept the new value or the ESC key to Cancel the creation of a new Location 5 If this Item does not have Tracked By enabled for the Date Code Pallet or Lot fields a screen like the one below will be shown prompting the entry of Qty Move 1000052 Fence Rail Qty ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next 345 InventoryControl
160. Assembly Item you will be taken to the Remove screen so you can add this information See below for information on using the Remove screen Clicking the F button will unlock the field In the Item Number field enter the Item Number of the Assembly Item you want to build The drop down list will display the last five items selected Click More to view the Item List The Item List will be filtered to only show Assembly Items Click New to create a new Assembly Item If one of the sub items has a default location that location will appear in the Location field If more than one sub item has a default location the field will appear blank You can change the Location by clicking on the field and entering a new location Now you can enter the quantity you want to build Note that the system tells you the maximum number you can build This number is based on how many of each sub item you on hand 104 InventoryControl Printable Help Data Pending Transaction List 0 ltem Number Description Location E Quantity 1 00 LA No of Labels Le ES You can optionally enter Cost This Cost reflects the cost of the entire Assembly Item including sub items You can optionally enter Notes If you setup any Track By fields when you created this Assembly Item the Track By section will be enabled These Track By fields are tied to the entire Assembly Item including sub items When you have entered all require
161. Auditing Inventory ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeceaeeesaaeseeaeeseaeeesaesseaeeeaaeeees 336 19 17 WDT2200 Moving NYEMO arsine REAA E NDER AEEA PEETER EEEE n AEAEE AE AAEE ES 343 19 18 WDT2200 Removing Inventory sssssesseessnosnnnssnussnnosrnosrnoennotnnstnnscnnseennsonnsonnncnnsstnssensstnssnensnnnt 351 19 19 WDT2200 Removing Kit ems 359 19 20 WDT2200 Picking Inventory for Orders ccecececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeseaaeseneeessaeeeas 367 19 21 WDT2200 Picking Kit Items 00 0 eee cece cence eecee cece ee eeeeeeceaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaeseeeeeeseaeeesaaeseeaeeeeneeees 373 19 22 WDT2200 Receiving Inventory eee eee ee eeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeaeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeaeeneeeaeeess 380 Chapter 20 Windows Mobile DeViC oo eee eeee cree cree cae eaeeeaae cage ceaeceaeseaessaeeseeeseeeseeeseaeeseeeaaeeaaes 386 20 1 Windows Mobile Device Data Cycle Batch Device No Wireless Connectont 386 20 2 Windows Mobile Device Data Cycle Wireless Connection eccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeteeeeeaes 386 20 3 Windows Mobile Device Interface ceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeneeceeeeesaaeeseaaeseeeeeseaeeeetaaeeeeeeeeaes 387 20 4 Windows Mobile Device Default Settings ccceecsceceeeeeeee cesses ceeeeeceaeeeeeaeseeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeeeesias 389 20 5 Windows Mobile Device Hebootmg A 389 20 6 Windows Mobile Device Enabling the Scanner
162. Code A Lot 4 Pallet 4 To Location M 4 Notes a 2 a i Move Help l Cancel You can use the drop down list of any enabled field to select an existing value for that field The To Location field is not enabled until the From Location information is entered Note If the Automatic New option is enabled on the Options screen the Create New Location screen will be opened automatically if an unknown Location is entered If the Automatic New option is turned off when an unknown Location is entered a prompt will ask if you want to use the Create New screen For more information on the enabling and disabling the Automatic New option please refer to the Options screen topic Complete the Track By fields Note Security does not apply to WaspNest Inventory As mentioned above the Track By fields are enabled based on the Item Number you enter If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item these fields will be disabled Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen Since you can only move existing quantity if the Tracked By item you are removing is not in the list make sure you have the right Item Number and Location The Tracked By fields will only show values that are possible for the selected Item Number and Location If an item witha given Serial Number is not in the list it may be Checked Out and thus not removable If you s
163. Cost is calculated on the item level Cost Method FIFO When this method is used the inventory that is added first is removed first Cost is calculated on the item level LIFO When this method is used the inventory that is added last most recently is removed first Cost is calculated on the item level For a detailed description for using Cost Tracking and Average Costing please see the topic Using Cost Tracking and Average Costing This is a calculated value that averages the cost paid for the current Quantity This will be blank when you are entering a new item but will appear when you are viewing the Edit Item screen for an item that has inventory quantity If you have 20 quantity of this item at cost 10 00 and add another 30 quantity at cost 8 00 Average Cost 20 x 10 00 30 x 8 00 50 8 80 Average Cost Removes are calculated using the inventory calculation method you specified For example if you are using the FIFO method if you later remove 5 5 of the 10 00 items will be removed first Average Cost 15 x 10 00 30 x 8 00 45 8 67 When calculating Average Cost the software does not include records that have an average cost of zero When you run an Inventory Cost Report the software 65 InventoryControl Printable Help does include zero cost quantities when calculating Total Cost This field specifies a manufacturer s list price for an item This field is for your information only
164. Due on Receipt Net 15 Net 30 Net 60 coD Test 22 Due on Receipt Help Save Cancel Hee _ WW 3 The last row on the grid is blank Click in the row and type in the new payment method 4 Press ENTER or the down arrow key on your keybord to go to the next new row and enter another payment method 5 Click Save to save your additions or Cancel to close the screen without saving 12 9 2 Deleting Printing Exporting Payment Methods 1 From the Main screen click the Receive Pick icon The Receive Pick menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Receive Pick menu click the Manage Payment Methods icon The Payment Method List appears displaying all shipping methods entered into the system 203 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 Highlight the desired listing then select the function you want to perform Options are e Delete This deletes the highlighted shipping method from the database When you select this option a confirmation message will appear Select Yes on the confirmation message to delete the method It will no longer appear in the Payment Methods drop down list e Print Allows you to print the Payment Method List When this option is selected a standard Page Setup screen appears allowing you to enter margins An example of this screen is shown below Page Setup xs Paper Size Letter 8 x 11 in 7 Source Auto Select z Orientation Margins inches Portr
165. Fingerprint Reader inch Dallas Customer com 4 Quantity 1 00 SE Maximum 1 0000 Track By Serial Number Date Code A Lot A Pallet A Check In Location A ALN 5 2 ee Notes R LA amp Check In Help Cancel The Maximum field displays the quantity of this item currently Checked Out To enter a customer you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop down list 149 InventoryControl Printable Help You can only check In inventory from a customer that was previously entered on the Create New Customer screen and only customers who have items checked out will appear in the Customer List After a customer is selected the customer information is displayed Complete the Track By fields As mentioned above the Track By fields are enabled based on the Item Number you enter If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item these fields will be disabled Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen If the item being checked in is tracked by Serial Number after the Serial Number is entered the default location in the Location drop down list will be the location from which the Item was checked out For items not tracked by Serial Number the default check in location is the first location of all the locations from which this customer has this item checked out For example if a customer has an it
166. GRAM gt MISWDT EXE Press the Enter Del when the screen above is displayed The InventoryControl Log On screen will then be displayed allowing you to continue operations with the new date and time settings 19 9 WDT2200 Main Menu The InventoryControl WDT2200 PDT Main Menu not in Audit Mode 1 Add 2 Remove 3 Move 4 Adjust 5 Details 6 Site Config 7 Logout 8 Receive 9 Pick 0 About Press the appropriate number key on the PDT to perform that function To Logout press the 8 key You will be returned to the Log On screen The Audit function is disabled when InventoryControl is not in Audit Mode The WDT2200 PDT Main Menu in Audit Mode Audit Mode 1 Audit 2 Details 3 Site Config 4 About 8 LOGOUT Press the appropriate number key on the PDT to perform that function To Logout press the 8 key You will be returned to the Log On screen The Add Remove Move and Adjust functions are disabled when in Audit Mode 313 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 10 WDT2200 Interface e op K St 23 ee G amp amp amp amp e ee LI The Wasp WDT2200 Keypad e Press and hold the power key to turn the unit On or Off Press and release the Alpha key to toggle between Alphabetic and Numeric input Cursor style in Alphabetic mode Cursor style in Numeric mode O e Double or Te an alphabetic key to obtain the second or third character e Use the
167. HE 418 InventoryControl RF Troubleshooting Wireless CONNECTION cceecceceeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeseneaeens 426 Item Cost When Add Inventory from Mobile DOVICG AE ED EEA TEA A EEAS 238 Item Labels Printing 0 00 0 ce ceeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 218 Item List Example cc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 123 Item Stock Level List Green 51 Items Adding Inventory To 135 Items Creating Kit Items 84 163 Items Creating New 60 Items Creating New Assembly Items 89 498 InventoryControl Printable Help tems Editing issis 84 Items Picking on the WMD 465 K Kit Items Creating cecceeeeeeeseeeeeeees 84 163 Kit Items Edming eenen ee nerens ereenn 85 Kit Items Picking on the WDT2200 373 Kit Items Picking on the WMD assen 468 Kit Items Hemoving 170 Kit Items Removing on the WMD 458 Kitting Overview eener 161 L Labeling Sites and Locations 12 Labeling Best Practices AA 9 Labels Printing from the List Screens 218 Licence Manager 36 Licenses Updating cceeeesteeeeeteeeeeee 43 EIFO woh eaters Oak ashen Gh aie 16 Lists Customer List Example seese eeaeee 127 Lists Inventory List Example seeeeeeee 124 Lists Item List Exvample 123 Lists Location List Example seeeeeeeeeen 126 Lists Manufacturer List Example 128 Lists Pick Order List Example 130 180 Lists Printing Label
168. In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Audit for this Item Audit 123 Monitor Location ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Audit for this Item to more than one Location Values entered for Item PO and Supplier if any will remain locked while looping on Location after entering them for the first Audit Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a Qty of 10 were entered this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Audit PO Supplier and Tracked By values if any for this second Audit will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop if any 123 Qty Location Total Qty 10 00000 F4 Done While looping on Location all that is required for each Audit are values for Qty and Location The Total Qty field is incremented each time an Audit is submitted while looping Press the ENT key to submit the Audit transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop 340 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on Item Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the following example F3 was pressed when prompted for Item Audit Item S Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC fo
169. Input Panel gt 8 Kavhnard Matwnrke and Cranmer lt i 2 D controt 3 gt i 5 12 Pm G S 3 Scroll down to locate the Scanner Settings icon Double Zap the Scanner Settings icon File View K xX Password PC Pocket Connection Controller A 2 Power Regional Remove Settings Programs m o O Scanner Storage Stylus Manager Q je J System Virtual Keys Volume amp Sounds x R Comrol WE 5 13 PM GA E The Scanner Control Panel displays 4 Tap the To Kpd tab 390 Scanner Gontrol Panel E Barcode Symbologies Barcode IDs Data Options E Data Editing E Magnetic Reading Options Scanning Options Di Power Management bi Miscellaneous Options The To Kpd tab displays Scanner Gontrol Panel Settings Test MERKE version Scan2Key service can route input From scanner port to keypad buffer so that all scan data input From scanner magnetic reader or proximity reader will be treated as they are just Y Start Scan2Key When Exit Scan2Key Settings Intercharacter Delay ms fi Shift Key Delay ms fi SE test To Kpd Version Tools Edit Mode Apply T x Er W Scanner gt Bi 5 14 PM L Tools Edit Mode Apply T x r HH Scanner SE 5 15 PM Lo E 5 Select the Start Scan2Key When Exit check box Make sure the check box has a check in it InventoryControl Printable Help 6 Tap the OK button in the upper right co
170. Inventonm eisa eect E EE AE E A EN NEATE KAARSEN 262 16 2 Exporting toa TE dE 263 16 3 Related Dala Fods aaea a a tee octet ted ace eet ted tee 267 16 4 le ele Me 269 16 4 1 Customer Import Format 269 16 4 2 Inventory Import Format 2 0 0 eeecee cece oeiee iea eE aeie TEE ONK e AEAEE A EEE RE 270 16 4 3 Item Import Format sses nieue iea aaa aaia Na Eaa aaan 271 16 4 4 Location Table Properties acccecsiccccctecdl revebtineedeeegar ceeded reeethiney ceases rectateneseevdarevedivenrevane ge 272 16 4 5 Manufacturer Table Properties ccccccecceeceeeeeeneeceeeeeseaaeeeeaeeseeeeecaeeesaaesseneeseeeeesiaeeseaeeeeaes 273 16 4 6 Supplier Table Properties 274 16 4 7 Data Type Definitions AA 275 Chapter 17 Performing an Audrt ce cecceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneseeeeeeeeseeeeeaeesaeecaeecaaecaaecsaeenaeeeeeeaaes 278 17 1 Auditing Your INVENtOry esakuna iR ee erri e AAEE ER AE A TEAR EE DAE EE AAR RET 278 172 fie T FOW OVAA a ar aar aa ra T a a aa a aaea aa Eaa Aaaa aa aaa an Oa auran TAr aa ASETE 279 17 3 Beginning Bun CR HEET E 279 17 4 Using the Audit Scree Mma EE 280 17 5 Reviewing the Not Counted Items Hepnort 283 17 6 Reconciling hue EC 283 17 7 Reviewing the Remainder of the Audit Reports cc ccccecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeaeeneneeess 285 17 8 Ending the Audit TEE 285 Chapter 18 Search FUNCIO e a Ear a na a aaar elated a aaa teeth shad ted eaaa a aariaa ented 286 18 1 Searching for Informatio
171. InventoryControl Printable Help Copyright 2011 Wasp Barcode Technologies 1400 10 St Plano TX 75074 All Rights Reserved STATEMENTS IN THIS DOCUMENT REGARDING THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS OR SERVICES ARE BASED ON INFORMATION MADE AVAILABLE BY THIRD PARTIES WASP BARCODE TECHNOLOGIES AND ITS AFFILIATES ARE NOT THE SOURCE OF SUCH INFORMATION THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE Wasp Barcode Technologies the Wasp logo InventoryControl and Labeler are registered trademarks and or trademarks of Wasp Barcode Technologies in the United States and other countries Other parties trademarks are the property of their respective owners Software activation system licensed under Patent No 5 490 216 Terms conditions features hours and contact information in this document are subject to change without notice Wasp is committed to providing great products and exceptional customer service Occasionally we may decide to update our selection and change our service offerings so please check www waspbarcode com for the latest information InventoryControl Install Key Printed on shipped material InventoryControl Registration Key Obtained from www waspbarcode com register Table of Contents Chapter T Ende nt WE 1 fa Blo Mrs U ai o EE 1 P27 USCR LOGON aii EE 1 1 3 Using the Sample Company 2 14 Set Up Cycle Overview ee teen lide de Wel tee diced ei die ees ENEE EES cn ne eed eee aves 3 1 5 Step One C
172. Item is tracked by Serial Number you can only loop on Serial Number e When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping 369 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on Location Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Pick for this Item Pick 123 Monitor Location ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Pick for this Item to more than one Location Values entered for Item PO and Supplier if any will remain locked while looping on Location after entering them for the first Add Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a Qty of 10 were entered this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Pick PO Supplier and Tracked By values if any for this second Pick will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop if any 123 Qty Location Total Qty 10 00000 F4 Done While looping on Location all that is required for each Pick are values for Qty and Location The Total Qty field is incremented each time a Pick is submitted while looping P
173. Items on hand Inventory amounts for the component parts are reduced when the Kit Item is Removed from inventory Assembly Item Example Sebastian sells modular cabinets Each cabinet is made of several different sizes of wood panels and hardware Sebastian tracks each piece used to build these cabinets as a separate piece of inventory in his system so he will know when he needs to reorder a particular size of panel or piece of hardware He builds several of each type of cabinet to have on hand to sell as well When he does this he creates an Assembly Item in InventoryControl that is made up of each piece of inventory used to build the cabinet InventoryControl will then deduct the on hand amount for each piece of inventory used in the assembly and increase the amount on hand of the assembled item The flow of Assembly Items is provided below 1 Create Your Assembly Item Use the Create New Item screen to create your Assembly Item When Assembly is selected as the Item Type there is a tab labeled Assembly on the Create New Item screen Use this tab to indicate what items you want to include in the built Assembly Item Keep in mind that after you create your Assembly Item the quantity for that item is zero and the on hand amounts for the included items have not changed As with other Items creating the Assembly Item simply tells InventoryControl basic information about the Assembly Item and indicates what other items you want included with it
174. Kit Item The Kit Item is added to your Item List 161 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Remove the Kit Item After the Kit Item has been picked and sold use the Remove function to remove the designated quantity from inventory At this time inventory amounts for the component parts will be reduced Detailed instructions on how to create Kit Items and Remove them are provided in the following topics Creating Kit Item Removing Kit Items 162 InventoryControl Printable Help 10 2 Creating a Kit Item This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Kit Items are used when you want to combine two or more existing items in order for them to be sold together Kit items are not kept or tracked in inventory you cannot add move check out etc We recommend you read the Kitting Overview topic before you begin creating Kit Items Note You can import the general information for a Kit Item but not the compositional information i e which items make up the component items If you import Kit Items you must then finish setting them up manually on the Edit Item screen This topic discusses Accessing the Create New Items Screen General Information Tab Kit Information Tab Additional Information Tab Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Tab
175. Li E a Location ann inn MM vuU A r D Quantity 1 00 Date Disassembled mee e ee 2008 St 6 The current date will appear in the Disassemble Date field You can keep this date or enter a different date on which the Disassembly will occur If you enter a future date the inventory counts for the Assembly Item and component items will not be affected until that date 7 If this Assembly Item is tracked by Serial Number enter it in the Serial Number field Remember that this is the serial number for the Assembly Item as a whole entered on the General tab of the Create New Edit Assembly Item screen 8 If this Assembly Item is tracked by Lot Date Code or Pallet enter those in the appropriate fields 108 10 You can optionally enter a Customer in the Customer field When you have completed the information on this screen click Disassemble InventoryControl Printable Help The Disassemble button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one Add is posted to the Pending Transaction List If any of the component items are tracked by serial number for example you will be taken to the Add screen after you click Disassemble e S FE Aad Eeer Data Pending Transaction List 1 You have selected to disassemble assembly item 1007 Quantity 1 The li
176. Monitor Location ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next The Location field is required for all Details transactions Enter a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field or Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field or Press ESC to cancel the transaction and return to the previous screen If you press F4 to advance without first providing a Location value the following message will be displayed Please scan or key in Location ESC Exit Press Esc to return and enter Location When a Location value has been entered the screen will appear as shown below 1000007 Monitor Total Qty 626 00000 ENT OK F4 Next Details first reports the Item s Total Qty across all Locations at every Site 4 Press F4 to display the next Details screen for this item 1000007 Loc 1 Qty at Loc 500 0000 TrackBy Qty 0 0000 Fi Prev ENT OK 326 InventoryControl Printable Help In the example shown above Qty at Loc has a value of 500 00000 showing that 500 of the 626 Total Qty are at Location1 The TrackBy Qty is 0 00000 because no Tracked By options are enabled entered or valid for this Item 19 14 2 Viewing Details for Items with One or More Tracked By Options Enabled When a Location value has been entered for an Item that has one or more Tracked By options enabled you will be given the opportunity to narrow the Details display by entering values for any of the Tracked By fields displayed on the conse
177. Network Name and Internet screen appears Select Next 8 A screen appears displaying Authentication WPA2 PSK and Data Encryption AES Enter your Network Key and click Next 9 Click Finish and then OK 10 Select the COM Ports tab from the bottom of the screen 11 On the COM Ports tab select New Outgoing Port 12 Highlight your bluetooth printer in the list and select Next 13 Select COM 7 and Secure Connection Tip Setting up Bluetooth and Printing to a Local Printer Make sure your Bluetooth printer is turned on and ready to connect before proceeding 1 Navigate to Start gt Settings gt Connections tab gt Wireless Manager 431 InventoryControl Printable Help Settings 4 q 11 08 X Q W Bluetooth Connections E eO Network USB to PC Wireless Cards Manager 2 On the Wireless Manager screen make sure Bluetooth is listed as turned ON Wireless Manager 7 11 10 X Bluetooth D On 432 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 At bottom of the Wireless Manager screen click Menu then Bluetooth Settings Wireless Manager 7 11 13 X puso Bluetooth Settings 4 On the Settings screen click on the Devices tab Settings 47 q 12 28 Dk Bluetooth Tap Add new device to search for other Bluetooth devices Tap on a device to modify its settings Add new de 5 Click Add new device The WPA1000 will search for other Bluetooth devices and display
178. Printable Help Key in the inventory Qty being Moved and press F4 or ENT to complete the Move transaction The Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than zero If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see the following message if you attempt to Move more quantity than that which is available for this Item at the specified From location Available 15 0000 Not enough qty avail able to complete the transaction ESC Exit Press ESC and enter a value that does not exceed the Available amount If the Item does have Tracked By enabled for Date Code Pallet or Lot fields a screen like the one below will be shown expecting input for each Tracked By field that s enabled before entering a value for Qty Move 100068 Paint Can Pallet ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field without first inputting a required Tracked By value a screen similar to the following will be displayed Please scan or key in Pallet ESC Exit Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value a Pallet in this example Note If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled any entered Tracked By value that does not match a value associated with inventory available at the previously specifie
179. Receive Data Process Mobile Setup Device Create PDT Database The PC to Mobile Device tab displays 300 InventoryControl Printable Help Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Send Data to WDT2200 This step will send mobile database to the portable device Once it is completed you should be able to start using the mobile device to collect data and perform transactions Please make sure that the mobile device is connected and powered on Click the Neu button to start sending data Step 1 of 2 Next gt Cancel If the specified filters produce no eligible Items or Sites no data will be transmitted to the PDT when a Send Data to PDT is attempted Make sure the WDT2200 is connected to the PC and powered on then click the Next button on the PC screen to proceed Note If you click the Next button while still logged in on the PDT the PC screen will prompt you to log out of InventoryControl on the PDT before proceeding After clicking Next the PC will transfer the database to the PDT 301 InventoryControl Printable Help Sending file ORDETAIL X01 20 more files to go DN When finished transferring the data the following message will be displayed on the PC 302 InventoryControl Printable Help Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Send Data to WDT2200 Data transfer complete You are now rea
180. Remove quantity from a Location that does not exist in the PDT database The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to the PDT About screen New Locations can only be created during Remove when the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press ESC to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings Removing Kit Items 1 From the Main Menu tap the Remove icon The Remove screen appears Remove Item Loo e i Site OOo Location i Customer i Date Code NEEN Serial Pallet Fc You can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering Alphanumeric Data for details or 458 InventoryControl Printable Help use the Search function 2 Enter the Item number y
181. SC to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings Enter a Customer Number then press F4 Remove 123 Monitor Customer 00001 ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next A Customer value might be required for this Item If not the Customer field can be left empty or a value may be entered optionally As shown below if a Customer value is entered that s not currently in the PDT database you will be prompted to accept or reject the entry as a new value to be added to the database The currently selected Source Site will be displayed when you are about to create a new Location Customer ACME New entry Press Ent To accept or ESC to Cancel ENT OK ESC Cancel If this Item does not have Tracked By enabled for the Date Code Pallet or Lot fields a screen like the one below will be shown prompting the entry of Qty Remove 100007 Paint Can Qty ESC Cancel 353 InventoryControl Printable Help Fi Prev F4 Next Key in
182. Space key to input a blank space e Use the Clear C key to backspace over a character entered in error e Press and release the CMD k key just prior to accessing any of the secondary functions or characters shown in yellow e Press the large yellow Scan key to activate the bar code scanner when input is needed for an inventory transaction 314 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 11 WDT2200 About Screen The About screen can be accessed by selecting the 7 key on the PDT Main Menu or the 4 key when the PDT is in Audit Mode About displays the current User the device s Serial Number and the current state of the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option InventoryControl C 2011 Wasp Barcode Technologies Build User Allow Negative ESC Exit Allow Negative T True indicates that the User is allowed to Remove or Move more quantity than is shown in Details for that Item This option is set on the Options screen on the PC For more information on this option please refer to the Options Screen topic Allow Negative F False indicates that Remove and Move transactions are limited to the quantity shown in Details for that Item Press the Escape key to return to the Main menu 19 12 WDT2200 Site Configuration When data for multiple Sites has been included in the mobile database the WDT 2200 s Site Config screen allows the PDT User to specify which of those Sites is to be used for inventory transactio
183. The fields will be exported in the order shown in the lt Field Selected list Table Supplier Fields available Fields selected Supplier Code Name Email Web Site Contact Name Custom Date 1 Custom Date 2 Custom Date 3 Data Preview of Table Supplier Supplier Code Name Email Web Site ContactName D Ham Winston Harry Winston deBoulle deBoullle Di d a 5 When you are finished selecting all the fields you want to use click the Up or Down buttons to sequence the fields in the desired order This is the order they will appear in your exported file The Preview window at the bottom of the screen displays how your file will look 6 Click Next to continue The Step 3 Destination File Format screen appears j 5 y D e Step 3 Destination File Format Select a delimiter to separate the fields in the export file A delimiter is a character used in the file to separate individual fields Export Format Field delimiter lt Comma gt X Include field names on first row Preview of data from table Supplier Supplier Code Name E mail Web Site Contact Name Custom Date 1 Custom Date errececcccccssesecssceee notes ze S Winston Harry Wion Dene o 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 1 no deBoulle deBoulle Diamond and Jewelry 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 000 150 Bachendorf s Jewelers 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000
184. Unit Length Width Height Weight Unit Weight Manager File Reference Notes Add Notes l Help i n Save i Close ma Complete the fields on this tab as described below e Stocking Unit is the portion by which the quantity will be tracked At the item level this should be Eaches meaning you should enter how you want each item of this type to be measured Examples bag barrel basket block bottle box carton container drum gallon jar pack package pallet section tub vial etc When entering the stocking unit you need to pick the smallest unit of measure that you will use to remove a whole item A good test to use when deciding what the stocking unit should be is to think about what your answer would be if you were asked to count how many of this item you have If the answer is 100 feet of rope feet or ft is the stocking unit If the answer is 20 scanners then each or ea is the stocking unit Each is common when the unit itself is not a standard unit of measure If the answer is 100 boxes of nails then box or bx is the stocking unit You will have the opportunity on the Managing Suppliers tab to enter the Order Unit used by the supplier for shipping purposes Box Pallet Lot etc This is useful if you purchase in larger quantities than you stock The Order Unit will be used when creating Purchase Orders rather than the Eaches UOM that is entered on this tab Please see the Managing Suppliers Tab
185. a Purchase Order the screen populates with the information from that order as shown below 194 InventoryControl Printable Help KE Receive ca JS ee Receiving Information Purchase Order Date Receipt Number P0070523 000001 0001 e 5 29 2007 Le H P0070523 0000010001 30 CostCo ref 5 5 23 2007 5 52 16 PM Type ltemNo Description OrderedQty Recv d Qty Quantity UOM Cost Grand Totals EI INVENTORY 400003 18 0000 0 0000 D carton 500 00 0 00 0 00 Record Iq 4 Of 1 b M On Save E Print Receipt E Close This PO Quick ScanEnty E Print Labels 1 1 Create Backorder if necessary Help Save Close Note In the example above the Show Costing Information option is enabled on the Options screen show costing information is displaying on the Receive screen If this option was not enabled the costing information would not appear on this screen For more information on enabling the Show Costing Information option please refer to the Options Screen topic Enter the date these items were received in the Date field You can enter previous dates but not future dates You can optionally type in a receipt number in the Receipt Number field If you receive this order in more than one shipment you can partially receive it and enter in each receipt number as you access the screen Previously entered receipt numbers if any will appear in the Receipt Number drop down list
186. abase The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to the PDT About screen New Locations can only be created during Pick when the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press ESC to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings Looping on Serial Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key An asterisk displays next to the looped field If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item the Qty field will be set to 1 A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number Looping will determine the final count for this Pick transaction as you scan or key in one or more Serial Numbers for this Item 1000066 Qty 1 SN Count 0 F4 Done F2 Last SN As each
187. abase for the Sites selected in Site Configuration Details is an abbreviated version of the functionality available in the PC s Inventory List Note Source and or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT Please use the Site Config function to Select Source and Destination Sites ESC Exit Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function For more information on configuring sites on the PDT please refer to the topic WDT2200 Configuring Sites 19 14 1 Viewing Details for Items with Tracked By options disabled 1 The Details function can be accessed by pressing the 5 key on the PDT Main Menu or the 2 key if the PDT is in Audit Mode The screen shown below appears Details Hem Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu 2 Press the PDT s ENT key after supplying an Item or press the PDT s ESC key to return to the Main Menu If the Item you enter is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again as shown below Details ltem 9999999 Entry not found Scan or key in value and perss Ent ESC Menu If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item 325 3 InventoryControl Printable Help Details 100007
188. ability to enter a Billing Address Receiving Address and or Shipping Address for your suppliers To enter multiple address follow the steps below a On the Create New Supplier screen enter your company name The default address type is Supplier Billing You can choose this option or type in a new address type b If you have entered a new address type the following screen appears 81 InventoryControl Printable Help The address type that you have entered is not in the database Do you want to create it Click Yes to add this address type to your database c Enter the remainder of the address information You can then enter another address type or continue completing the rest of the supplier information Repeat these steps for each address type 3 When you have finished entering data in the General Information tab click the Additional Information tab this tab is optional General Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Contact Person Information Contact Name Contact Phone Contact Ext Contact Cell No Contact Fax Notes Add Notes The Additional Information tab provides optional fields where you can record the 82 InventoryControl Printable Help manufacturer s Phone Extension Fax Cell No Home No and Email In addition you can create notes on this manufacturer on this tab by clicking the Add Notes button For information about the Custom T
189. access to check for updates You can turn off the automatic check and perform periodic manual checks or leave the option on and perform a manual check if desired This topic discusses Disabling the Automatic Version Check Feature Performing a Manual Check 4 8 1 Disabling the Automatic Version Check Feature 1 From the Main Screen select Tools gt Options The Options screen appears Ka Options Sall Inventory i aS Allow quantities to go negative on Mobile Allow Negative Quantities on Mobila Devices This option turns Quantity validation Automatic Customer Number on or off for all supported Mobile Devices Automatic Item Numbers Automatic New Automatic Notification of Low Order Decimal Places Support Check For Software Updates v Yes Check to turn option on Close New Form Edit Field Names Max Row Count Previously Processed Mobile Data Show Cost Information During Rece Show Warning Messages SQL Server Backup Location F mail 4 m Help OK Cancel 49 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Highlight the Check for Software Updates option and deselect the Yes checkbox Inventory Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Automatic Customer Number Automatic ltem Numbers Automatic New Automatic Notification of Low Order Decimal Places B Support Check For Software Updates Close New Form WwW Turn this option on to automatically check for software
190. acked by serial number the quantity Qty field must be 1 5 When all required information is entered tap OK The Item is added and the Add screen resets ready for the next Item to be added Tapping the Reset button clears all fields and restores all available fields to the Add screen display 6 When you are finished with the Add screen tap Close to return to InventoryControl main menu See the Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function Tips for Speeding Up Data Entry e When you create a new item if the Category Manufacturer UOM or any combination of pinnable fields will be used on a large number of items create one item with those fields then pin the fields Now the information will be retained in those fields so you don t have to keep re entering it for each new item 445 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 11 8 Windows Mobile Device Details Screen The Details screen is used to display Location and Quantity information for any Item in the mobile database for the Site selected You can also view transactions on this screen Details is an abbreviated version of the functionality available in the PC s Inventory and Transactions Lists To View Details 1 From the Main Menu tap Details The Details screen appears Details v Filter Item Site Location Lot Date Code Serial Pallet gt Search Results Inventory Ze berais SE 2 18 Pm DA S Note You
191. ain screen click Tools gt Reset All Field Names A message appears asking if you want to reset all field names to their default values Reset all Field Names x Do you want to reset all the field names to their default values Press OK to restore default values or Cancel if you want to keep the existing settings oi 2 Select Yes on the message All field names you have changed will return to their original values Note The Reset All Field Names option on the Tools menu is disabled if the Edit Field Names option is disabled on the Options screen or the user currently logged in does not have Administrative Privileges 252 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 9 Using Custom Fields InventoryControl allows you to create custom fields on your Items Sites etc This enables you to capture information that is specific to your business needs The Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs can be found on each of the following screens Create New Customer Create New Manufacturer Create New Item Create New Site Create New Location Create New Supplier Note The Edit Field Names option on the Options screen must be enabled in order to enter custom text numbers and dates For more information on the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic Below is an example of the Custom Texts tab found on the screens mentioned above General Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Texts Custom Text 1
192. ait Left 1 Righ 1 Landscape Top 1 Bottom 1 Cancel Click the OK button on the Page Setup screen to print the list The list will print to your default printer e Export Allows you to export the Payment Method List to an external text file When the Export option is selected a screen appears allowing you to specify where the exported data will be saved on your computer An example of the Export screen is shown below 204 InventoryControl Printable Help Save in 2 x 6 ki ES Er Ob Name ooo Size Type Date modif Recent Places A Admin A Public Computer A Network pe EE QB company Inventory File Folder File Folder d InstallReady Shortcut Ir Mee e Shortcut Shortcut 1 46 KB Computer Au e Network File name X Save as type Comma Separated files v Cancel Make sure you save this to a location you can remember You must also choose a name for your file on this screen After you have made your selections click Save to export your data A confirmation message will appear when your data has been successfully exported by the system 205 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 10 Managing Shipping Methods This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen This function accesses a screen that al
193. allows you to build your assembly item Building Assembly Items can be thought of as the manufacturing portion of the Assembly Item feature When you Build an Assembly Item the on hand amounts for the sub items are reduced by the number needed to make the Assembly Item and the on hand amount for the Assembly Item is increased Assembling Building Assembly Items increases inventory for the Assembly Item in the same way that Adding increases inventory for other item types Check In This feature does not apply to WaspNest Inventory Check in inventory means you are returning inventory that has been checked out or assigned to customer back into your on hand inventory Check Out This feature does not apply to WaspNest Inventory InventoryControl gives you the ability to check out or assign inventory to a customer for a specified or open ended amount of time This removes the inventory from your on hand amounts until it is checked back in Items that are checked out cannot be permanently removed from your inventory until they are checked back in 492 InventoryControl Printable Help Disassemble Pro and Enterprise versions only The process of Disassembling Assembly Items will reduce your inventory for the Assembly Item and increase your inventory of the associated sub items You will be Removing inventory for the Assembly Item and Adding inventory to the sub items unless the sub item has been marked to be scrapped Scrapping an item m
194. ally at or below the reorder point you could be faced with too little stock on hand to fulfill orders creating a costly back order situation Many business owners also know that getting accurate counts can be a time consuming task Note All screen shots in this help file are of InventoryControl Professional Edition The screens and available features in other versions of InventoryControl and in WaspNest Inventory may differ For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen With these issues in mind the software was designed with a built in audit mode that allows you to conveniently conduct audits at the PC and on one or more mobile devices while preventing access to such features as Remove and Add so that you can be assured you are getting accurate count comparisons Audit Mode allows you to check the counts of all your inventory while disabling the Add Remove Move Adjust and Check In and Check Out features to make sure inventory counts in the system do not change while you are performing the audit If you are using mobile devices you can use them simultaneously with the PC to perform an audit by downloading the database in audit mode to each device Audit Mode features a simple Audit screen that allows you to enter your counts for inventory in each location and compares these to the counts already in the system You can then view
195. and Enterprise Version only Pick Pro and Enterprise Version onlyl or Audit transactions when Audit Mode is active 6 Receive Data from PDT transfers all the PDT transactions to the PC along with any new Customers Suppliers or Locations the PDT User has created 7 Upload From Mobile Devices allows you to select and validate data for upload into the InventoryControl database If you make mistakes on the PDT the data can be modified before being accepted into the PC database 7 Steps 1 and 2 are typically done only once per PDT From then on steps 3 through 7 might be repeated multiple times 19 6 WDT2200 Logging On When you turn on the device loaded with InventoryControl the screen will appear as follows InventoryControl Users Password Key in a valid User and Password for this PDT pressing the Enter key after each InventoryControl PC Users who have the appropriate security settings can log on to any InventoryControl PDT Successful log on will take you to the PDT Main Menu 307 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 7 WDT2200 Resetting the Device The following steps can be performed to clear all data from the WDT2200 any inventory transactions not yet uploaded to the PC will be lost if the PDT is reset per the following instructions 1 Power off the WDT2200 by pressing and holding the power g key until no text is displayed on the screen 2 With the WDT2200 powered off hold down the CMD and
196. and is not included on any reports This field specifies the price at which you sell an item This field is for your information only and is not included on any reports List Price Sale Price Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Reorder Qty This field specifies the quantity at which you want to reorder inventory This field specifies the minimum stock level you wish to maintain for this item This field specifies the maximum stock level you wish to maintain Note The Minimum Stock Level Maximum Stock Level and Reorder Quantity fields found on this tab represent these levels at the item level only meaning these are the stock levels for this item throughout all locations This means if you have 4 locations these are the quantities you want to have spread out among those locations If you want to maintain these levels by location you can do so on the Location Settings tab described below The fields below only appear on the Edit ltem screen The Total Available counter is the sum of Total Checked Out and Total In House The Total Checked Out counter is the quantity of this item that is currently Checked Out The Total In House counter is the Total Available less the Total Checked Out The Total On Order counter is the quantity of this item that is currently included on an active Pick Order e The Total Buildable applies to Assembly Items only is the quantity that can be built of this Assembly Item based on the inventory level
197. ant represented by them A barcode s width is determined by the amount of numbers or characters represented by the barcode Some barcode scanners have a limited width that they can read If you have very long item numbers or location numbers you may need to reconsider the numbering scheme or the scanner you are using Also be aware that many of the less expensive barcode readers do not read barcodes that are bent at an angle too small or damaged Consider the possible disposition of your barcodes before choosing a scanner There are many different barcode formats or symbologies The different symbologies can be though of as different fonts The same characters are represented by different symbologies in different ways For example the two symbologies below represent the same information Whse1 Whs EN Rol These different formats exist to provide ways to compress more data into smaller space to represent a different set of characters or to enable scanning at different angles or distances InventoryControl uses the symbology called Code 128 for all the pre built labels All the scanners and mobile devices Wasp supplies can read Code 128 Best practices suggest you use Code 128 because it supports all numbers upper and lower case characters and most special characters It also reduces the size of most common barcodes Barcodes should be printed using a barcode printer or if you are using Wasp Labeler using a high quality laser or ink
198. ar to the one shown below appears 196 InventoryControl Printable Help Z Receive Quick Entry Item Number Description keyboard Line Item Details 4965814 keyboard 35642687 1 00 case 2 I Location WHSE1 A1A v Serial Number Lot Date Code Pallet Quantity 1 00 n Ordered Qty In Order Unit Recv d Oty In Order Unit Ces JS You can scan the barcode label on the item and the fields on the Quick Scan Entry screen will populate with the scanned information Click the Receive button then scan the next item and the screen clears and repopulates with the new information This is an easy method for quickly marking items as picked 197 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 6 Purchase Order FAQ What is the difference between the Shipping Unit of Measure and the Stocking Unit of Measure The Stocking Unit entered on the Create New Item or Edit Item screen Additional tab is the portion by which the quantity will be stored in your inventory This unit represents Eaches meaning it represents how you want each item of this type to be measured Examples are bag barrel basket block bottle box carton container drum gallon jar pack package pallet section tub vial etc The Shipping Unit entered on the Create New Item or Edit Item screen Manage Suppliers tab Pro and Enterprise versions only isthe unit used by the supplier when shipping this item This m
199. ase call Wasp Support and we will help you find an integrator InventoryControl Printable Help 1 5 Step One Create Users Add Admin User When you first log on to InventoryControl you will use Admin as the user name and leave the password blank This default user profile gives you access to everything in the system The first step you should take upon logging in is to create at least one additional admin user Administration gt Security The new admin user should have rights to all areas of the system You should also change the password for the default admin profile Since the default admin s password is initially blank it is important to change the password to prevent other users from logging in under this profile 1 6 Step Two Enter Company Information Enter Company Information Next you should enter your company s information Administration gt Company Info On the Company Information screen you will enter your company s name and any addresses needed for receiving shipping corporate correspondence etc The company name you enter on this screen will appear on all reports and in the title bar of InventoryControl In addition if you have the Pro or Enterprise version of InventoryControl the company name and addresses you enter will appear on Pick Orders and Purchase Orders created in the system When you set up your company information you should enter all addresses to which you might receive inventory ship inventory store in
200. at item at a specific location On the Create New Item screen you can assign the item to multiple locations and even designate one location as the primary location for this item The primary location will then pre populate the screen when removing adding receiving Pro and Enterprise Version Only and picking Pro and Enterprise Version Only this item If you are using the Enterprise or Professional version of InventoryControl you can also create items that are non inventory This is useful if you need to create an item for marketing pamphlets counter displays or anything you need to have on hand but don t necessarily want to include in your inventory amounts In addition you can create Kit or Assembly Items Please refer to the topics Assembly Overview and Kitting Overview for more information InventoryControl Printable Help If you already have item information contained in another database you may want to use InventoryControl s Import function rather than manually entering in this information For more information on importing locations please refer to the topic Importing Into the Database View Business Examples 1 13 Step Nine Print Item Labels Print Item Labels Labels can be printed directly from InventoryControl via the Item List screen at the time a new Item is created or you can access Wasp Labeler to edit or create new labels 1 14 Step Ten Add Inventory Add Inventory Now that your items have been created you are
201. atabase please refer to the Import Into Database topic This topic discusses Accessing the Create New Item Screen General Information Tab Location Settings Tab Additional Information Tab Manage Suppliers Tab Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Tab Saving the New Item 60 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 3 1 Accessing the Create New Item Screen 1 From the Main screen select New gt Item gt Inventory or Non Inventory OR From the Main screen select Lists gt Item On the Item List select the New icon Note For information on creating Assembly Items please see the topic Creating an Assembly Item Pro and Enterprise versions only For information on creating Kit Items please see the topic Creating a Kit Item Pro and Enterprise versions only The Create New Item screen appears Ka Create New Item General Location Settings Additional Manage Suppliers Attachments I Picture Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Item Number Alt Item Number Description Category e Checkout Length Manufacturer v Type Inventory Z ltem To Be Tracked By E Serial Number EI Lot F Date Code m Palet Require the user to fill out Ref E Supplier Customer Cost Cost Method Moving Average X List Price Average Cost Sale Price Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Reorder Qty Help Save Close 61 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 3 2 Genera
202. ave entered all types of data you want to appear in your number Your selections will appear in the number in the order they are displayed in the grid You can change the order by highlighting a listing in the grid and clicking the Up or Down buttons You can delete an item in the grid by highlighting it and clicking the Delete button 7 Click the OK button when you are finished formatting the number 212 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 12 Email Distribution List Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen If the Email on Save box is checked on the Create New Pick Order or Create New Purchase Order screen a copy of this order is automatically sent to the email address listed in the Customer screen for this customer for Pick Orders or to the email address listed in the Supplier screen for this supplier for Purchase Orders when you click the Save button If you have selected to view the Email Destination List selected on the Options screen the list will appear allowing you to select email addresses or change email addresses as needed If you have selected not to view the list the order will automatically be sent An example of this screen is shown below S Email Distribution List a From admin company com To email super com ES BCC Dont show this dia
203. ay be box pallet etc This is different from the Eaches Stocking Unit For example you may have entered jar for the stocking unit but the supplier may ship the item in boxes containing 10 jars In this example when creating purchase orders you would specify the Order Unit as box rather than jar or you could end up with 100 boxes of jars rather than 100 jars have the Standard version of InventoryControl Can I set up preferred suppliers for my items Standard version users are limited to one supplier per item so this is automatically your preferred supplier Pro and Enterprise version users can enter multiple suppliers for each item and select one as their preferred supplier What is the difference between the Reorder Quantity field found on the Create New Item or Edit Item screen General tab and the Reorder Quantity field found on the Create New Item or Edit Item screen Location tab The Reorder Quantity field on the General tab is the reorder quantity for the item throughout all sites and locations The Reorder Quantity field on the Location tab is the reorder quantity for the item at a specific location you can enter this quantity for each location that contains this item When you are creating purchase orders you can click the Items at Re Order Quantity button to see a list of items that have reached their minimum stock levels by location for the selected supplier You can then select which items to add to the purchase
204. backup the database Important Note The network version of the InventoryControl does NOT browse the file system on the local machine Instead of the local file system the file system on the machine where the database is installed will be displayed 236 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 5 Restore the Database Then software allows you to quickly restore a backup database This is usually used when there has been some type of catastrophic system loss and allows you to minimize downtime in your business by restoring the last saved database You can also restore over an existing database but keep in mind that restoring erases all data currently in your database and replaces it with the data in the backup including all inventory users and items If there is a chance you will want to recover transactions that have been entered since the backup was done it is a good idea to backup again before restoring Save the backup to a different file name than the one you are about to restore Note for Enterprise Users The Backup feature is not available in the Enterprise version You must use SQL to perform backups Restoring Your Database 1 From the Main screen click the Administration icon The Administration menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Administration menu click Restore The Restore Database screen appears Ki Restore Database Ex Restore From File Help OK Cancel 3 Enter the location and
205. be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field Clicking the Fi button will unlock the field 176 InventoryControl Printable Help Enter a Pick Order Number Each pick order is assigned a unique identifier consisting of an alpha numeric value up to 36 characters This number can be manually entered each time you create a new pick order or you can create a template that the software will use to automatically generate a number for you If you have set up a template click the Generate button to have InventoryControl create and assign an order number The template can contain any combination of custom text dates and or counters enabling you to create a unique identifier that is meaningful to your company For more information on setting up automatically generated Order Numbers please refer to the Formatting PO and Pick Order Numbers topic Enter a Customer in the Customer field You can scan a value into this field manually enter a value or click on the field to view a drop down list The list contains the last 10 Customers selected on this screen Select lt MORE gt to view the entire Customer List or click lt New gt to go to the Create Customer Supplier screen to add a new customer to the database When a customer is selected the Customer Address information automatically populates If the selected customer has more than one address entered for it you can select the Address Type from the drop down li
206. ber for that vehicle Alternatively each vehicle could be set up as a site with one location For example the site might be VEH plus the last four digits of the VIN such as VEH1234 with locations being the various bins and shelves within the vehicles The flexibility of the site location design allows companies such as Rusty s fleet business to conform the software to fit their needs Rusty has decided to set up his storage area as a site with locations of shelves and his vehicles as sites with one location because he knows that he can use the Site Configuration screen to make each mobile device specific to a vehicle The Site Configuration screen on the mobile devices allows him to designate one site as the From Remove Move Pick site and one as the To Add Mov e Receive site He can make the From and To sites the same sites if needed Since the usual transfer of inventory for his business flows directly to the vehicles via add receive then to the customer via remove he can set up the From and To sites as the specific vehicles When his employees then use the device any lists and searches are limited to the locations contained in that specific vehicle when adding or removing inventory If employees need to move inventory from the 30 InventoryControl Printable Help storage area to a truck they can quickly change the settings on the Site Configuration screen and make the From site the storage area Using the Site Configuration screen sa
207. bile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Receive Data From WDT2200 Download data failed with the following error s Transaction file from mobile device is empty This is normal only when no transactions have been performed on the mobile device since last successful data retrieval Step 2 of 2 If transactions were received from the PDT successfully you will receive a confirmation message Click Finish to close this dialog and return to InventoryControl or Click the Mobile Device to PC tab or the Back button to restart the dialog if you want to receive data from another PDT 305 InventoryControl Printable Help 7 When finished transferring data from one or more PDT s proceed to Upload From Mobile Devices 306 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 5 WDT2200 Data Cycle 1 The WDT2200 s Date and Time should be set first then Setup Device is used to define COM Port settings prior to transferring the InventoryControl program 2 Send Program to PDT transfers the InventoryControl program to the PDT 3 Create PDT Database builds a database for the PDT that can contain all the data in the PC database or a subset of the PC s records via the Filter Records dialog 4 Send Data to PDT sends the InventoryControl database to the PDT 5 Usethe PDT With both the InventoryControl program and the PDT database transferred to the PDT the PDT User can now use the PDT for Add Remove Move Adjust Details Receive Pro
208. bleshooting topic are listed below Click the subject that most closely matches what you are searching for Click the subject you want to troubleshoot Error Alert Messages listed in alphabetical order Customer does not exist Do you want to add this new customer Customer is not valid Item doesn t exist Location doesn t exist Do you want to add this new location Location is not valid Pallet is not valid Please select one record from the list and click OK button to return to previous form Quantity is not valid Serial is not valid Site does not exist Source and destination sites are set to be the same Supplier does not exist Do you want to add this new supplier The Adjust reason you entered is not valid The mobile device has unprocessed transactions There is not enough quantity in stock to complete the transaction Issues Search screen is empty no choices The Adjust Reason You Entered is not Valid This message displays when you have selected By Difference and you have not entered a Reason code You must either choose a Reason code or change your selection to By Count Quantity is not valid This message displays when you have either not entered a number in the Quantity field or you have enter alpha characters in the Quantity field 485 InventoryControl Printable Help Customer Customer is Not Valid This message displays if you leave the Customer field empty when it is a required fiel
209. c the New Records screen appears listing these You can accept or reject each of them If the new data was created in error you can also assign an existing value to take its place If no new Customers Suppliers or Locations were created by the mobile device User InventoryControl will skip this step On occasion you might notice that the number of new Customer Supplier or Location records displayed here in Step 2 are less than the quantity shown in Step 1 This can happen when an existing Customer Supplier or Location was not downloaded to the mobile device due to filtering done creating a mobile database When the mobile device user subsequently specifies a new Customer Supplier or Location while performing an inventory transaction the new mobile device record gets automatically mapped to the existing PC record between Steps 1 and 2 412 InventoryControl Printable Help The New Records toolbar has the following functions e Select all transactions in the list for Acceptance e DI De Select transactions in the list 2 Assign an Existing Value instead of creating a new record When this button is clicked a screen appears with a drop down list of existing locations from which a value can be selected Click OK after selecting the Existing Location you want to Assign from the drop down list 4 Click Next to continue The Transactions screen appears Pending Transaction Step 3 Transactions Select transaction to be posted
210. ccceeeeeeeeeeecececeeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeesaaeeesaaeseeneeeecaeeesaeenaeesenees 24 Chapter 3 Business Examples AA 25 3 1 About Our Business Examples nerusne nnana 25 3 2 Business Example Overviews ccccccceeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeaeeseaeeesaaeeeseaaeseaeeesaeeesaeenaeeeneees 25 3 3 Setting Up Security Privileges Business Example sseesssesssessiesressrrstntstrrstntstnnsnnnnsnnnnnnsnnssrnsnnt 27 3 4 Setting Up Sites and Locations Business Examples ccccccccssccecseseeeeceesneeeeeeeseeeesenaeeeeseseeesenaas 30 3 5 Setting Up Suppliers Business Examples cccccccecesesceceeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeesennees 32 3 6 Entering Items Business Examples eretier inke iena e ae era aea eree KN aE REAR EKEN EAEN 33 Chapter 4 PC Operation Basics 34 RRE Eo o OM EE 34 4 2 About the About Screen 00 ceeecceccceceneceeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaaessaaeecaaeeecaaesseaaesaneeesaaesseaaesseneessaeeseaeeeeaaeesnees 36 ME Ee CEET 38 4 3 1 Section AC Toolbat cicveiee siete ai ie ear ae a RiP a a ee 39 4 3 2 Section B Left Hand Naviogaton net 39 4 3 3 Section C Main FUNCtions cccccccceeeeeeeeee cece eeeaeeeeceee seas eeeeaae scenes caeeesaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaaeeeeaeeseaeeees 40 4 3 4 Section D Context Sensitive Menus ssssseesssesisssissrirssiissiesisstisstinttisstnsstnnttnnstnnntnnnntnnnennnt 40 lee 43 GE ue RE 45 AGA HOW to Select Sitesh vi duit E 45 4 6 2 Source and Destina
211. ce and is assigned 19601 This way the 195xx line of products is maintained and are easily identified with each other Recommended Barcode Ranges Sites 100 199 Manufacturers 500 599 Suppliers 1000 2000 Items 20000 and up 15 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 7 Using Cost Tracking and Average Costing FAQ What cost methods are used by InventoryControl InventoryControl provides four costing options Moving Average When this method is used the average cost of a particular item is recalculated based on each purchase Example You purchased 100 computers for 500 each When you have 10 computers left in stock you purchase 100 more but now your cost for the computers is 600 each InventoryControl will calculate the cost of this item as following Cost of original computers 10 x 500 5 000 Cost of new computers 100 x 600 60 000 The combined cost of all of the computers is 65 000 Average cost of all of this type of computer that you have in inventory 110 computers is 65 000 110 590 91 First In First Out FIFO When this method is used the inventory that is added first is removed first Example If you added or received 50 Barcode Laser Scanners on the 1st 8th and 15th you would end up with 150 scanners If on the 17th you remove 60 scanners all of the scanners that came in on the 1st and 10 scanners from the 8th would be removed because the scanners on the 1st were first in and therefore will be first
212. ch time you add inventory for this item whether manually using the Add Inventory feature or by Receiving Inventory This option is available when creating a new item on the Create New Item screen For complete details on creating a new item please refer to the Creating New Item topic 1 Click the checkbox to make the item you are adding or editing auto increment the serial number for each item added into inventory 2 If you are using alphabetic or alphanumeric values as Serial Numbers the Automatic Serial Number option will still generate a numeric Serial Number beginning with the value of entered in the Starting Number Field if it does not exist already 3 Click OK to set the options 73 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 7 Creating New Locations The Create New Location screen allows you to add a new Location to an existing Site or a new Location to a new Site Locations are places within a Site where inventory resides The site is usually a building but it might also be a fleet vehicle with one more bins that can be defined as inventory Locations within that vehicle For example a site might be setup as Building 1 with a location of Supply Closet A location is typically shorthand for a physical place such as a shelf in your warehouse Commonly used conventions include Location codes like this 010205 for Row Shelf Bin When you are setting up your software for the first time you may want to import your locations
213. ches Eric White Eric Williams etc LIKE WG matches LIKE matches a single Value is the information you are searching for This may included special characters for the Like or Not Like operators Logical is a Boolean operator that combines one or more filter expressions into a single logical group Boolean Operator AND OR Meaning gives you the intersection of two conditions gives you the union of two conditions 289 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 Enter the desired values for the seven Advanced Find fields to construct a filter fragment For example assume you make the following selections Table Customer Field Address 1 Operator Value 2205 Anywhere Road The Customer table will be searched for any instance of 2205 Anywhere Road appearing in the Address 1 field 5 Click the Add button after building each filter fragment The filter will appear in the Filter Expression list as shown in the example below Kaz Advanced Find Ee Filter Expression Table Customer Address 1 2205 Anywhere Road Parenthesis Field Address 1 X Operator e Delete Value 2205 Anywhere Road LO Geck _ Parenthesis Logical x Add Replace Simplified Help Find Cancel J 6 The Move Up and Move Down buttons allow you to move a filter fragment toward the top or toward the bottom of the list
214. ck Item 1002 Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu If the Item entered is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again after you press Ent If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item after you press Ent Enter the Location of this item then press F4 Press F1 to return to the previous screen and select a different item Pick 1002 Monitor Location 001 ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next Picks are always calculated in Eaches meaning the quantity in which you stock them as opposed to the quantity in which they are shipped to you which may differ Enter how many of this item you will be picking Pick 1002 Monitor EA Qty 1 ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next 368 InventoryControl Printable Help Note If this item has any track bys set serial number date code pallet etc you will required to enter those prior to entering a quantity If this item is tracked by Serial Number the quantity is limited to 1 6 Press F4 to complete the transaction Note If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see a warning message if you attempt to Pick quantity from a Location that does not exist in the PDT database The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to th
215. click Set to Default to reset the field and tool tip to its original name Note Some fields allow the you to edit the tool tip and not the label itself This is because some label names must remain fixed due to internal constraints The Form field is disabled as shown above for labels throughout the program except for some of the labels on the Create New Item screen The Form field for these few labels on the Create New Item screen permit you to specify custom tool tips for different Inventory screens like Add Remove etc The same label is used for each but the tool tips can be unique For example in the screen shot below we are customizing the Item Number label on the Create New Item screen Here the Form field is enabled and Item has been selected from the drop down list Ki Customize Field x New Name Stock Form Item Tool tip Enter stock number in this field Stock humber must be unique Set To Default OK Cancel The custom Label value Stock that we entered will appear on all screens instead of the default Label value Item Number and the custom Tool Tip value Enter Stock in this field Stock must be unique will appear on all screens as well instead of the original Tool tip Next we change the Form value from Item the default Form value shown above to Inventory_Transactions as seen in the drop down list below z Customize Field Ex New Name Stock Form
216. cutive screens Press F4 to advance to each field If an item has all four Tracked By options enabled all are available for inputting values which you can use to limit the TrackBy Qty that will shown in the Details display Input fields will only be displayed for those Tracked By options that are enabled for the Item specified 1 The Details function can be accessed by pressing the 5 key on the PDT Main Menu or the 2 key if the PDT is in Audit Mode The screen shown below appears Details Item Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Press the PDT s ENT key after supplying an Item or press the PDT s ESC key to return to the Main Menu If the Item you enter is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again as shown below Details ltem 9999999 Entry not found Scan or key in value and perss Ent ESC Menu If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item Details 10067 Mouse Pallet 33 ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next 327 InventoryControl Printable Help In the example above the Item specified has the Tracked By Pallet option enabled Having previously supplied the Item and a Location the can supply a Pallet number but doing so is optional Values you specify here will limit the TrackBy Qty shown on the Details display to some number less than or equal to the Qty value shown for the specified Location U
217. d You must enter a Customer in the Customer field Customer does not exist Do you want to add this new customer lt CUSTOMER NAME gt This message displays if you enter a Customer in the Customer field that does not currently exist in the mobile database For more information on adding customers please refer to the Windows Mobile Device Adding Customers topic Get Data from PC The mobile device has unprocessed transactions Please process them on the PC database first then you can get new database records from the PC side This message indicates there are database records that have been sent from the device to the PC but the data has not been processed on the PC side Be sure you have completed the entire Send PC Data process including processing the mobile device data in the Pending Uploads wizard Items Messages Item doesn t exist Hard Drive 500 Leaving the Item Number screen blank In screens where an Item Number is required you will receive this message if you leave the Item Number field blank and tap OK 486 InventoryControl Printable Help Locations Messages Location is not valid This message displays if you do not enter a Location in the Location field or too many characters have been entered in the Location field You must enter a Location in the Add Remove Move Adjust and Stage screens You can add a new Location on the mobile device if the one you need is not currently in the mobile devic
218. d By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet after entering them for the first Remove 123 Qty Pallet S Total Qty 30 00000 F4 Done Above having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first Remove this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Remove Item Location PO and Supplier values for this second Remove will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop 357 InventoryControl Printable Help While looping on this Tracked By field all that is required for each Remove are values for Qty and Pallet The Total Qty is incremented each time a Remove is submitted while looping 7 Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop When looping on a Tracked By field all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be restarted 358 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 19 WDT2200 Removing Kit Items This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only The Remove Kit function allows you to remove a kit item from the database This can be considered the same as shipping inventory You can designate which customer this inventory was shipped to on this screen Notes e Make sure the PDT s date and time are set correctly before perfor
219. d From location the following screen display will be displayed No item with this tr ackby specific in st ock ESC Exit 346 InventoryControl Printable Help If Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices is enabled any Tracked By value is allowed Press ESC to exit the error message and then provide a Tracked By value that matches inventory in stock at the From location Looping on Serial Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key An asterisk displays next to the looped field If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item the Qty field will be set to 1 A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number Looping will determine the final count for this Add transaction as you scan or key in one or more Serial Numbers for this Item 1000066 Qty 1 SN Count 0 F4 Done As each SN is keyed in or scanned the Count will be increased Press ENT after inputting each serial number Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Move screen Notes e When an Item is tracked by Serial Number you can only loop on Serial Number e When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping Looping on Location Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Move for this Item
220. d Source Site will be displayed when you are about to create a new Location Site Warehouse2 New Location Area 7 Ent OK ESC Cancel If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press the ESC key to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction Press the ENT key to accept the new location or the ESC key to cancel the creation of a new Location If this Item does not have Tracked By enabled for the Date Code Pallet or Lot fields a screen like the one below will be shown prompting the entry of Qty Adjust 100007 Monitor Qty ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next Key in the inventory quantity at this Location and press F4 to complete the Adjust transaction The Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than or equal to zero If this Item does have Tracked By enabled for Date Code Pallet or Lot fields screens like the one below will be shown expecting input for each Tracked By field that s enabled A Date Code is required for this Item 331 InventoryControl Printable Help Adjust 100007 Monitor Date Code ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next Key in or scan values for each o
221. d how each would commonly use this product Find the example company that most closely resembles your business and study the scenario included for it in each section of this document Remember that even though one the example companies may not exactly match your business these example are broad enough that at least one should encompass all or part of your business needs Each of the three companies uses a different version of InventoryControl The three versions are e Standard Contains a wide range of options to help you track your inventory including automatic notification of low stocked items check in out capabilities add remove feature tracking and audit as well as full access to mobile devices e Professional All of the features of the Standard version plus it allows for multiple PC s on the network to run InventoryControl Pick Order Purchase Order and Receiving capabilities are available along with the ability to assign multiple suppliers to each item e Enterprise The top of the line package Enterprise incorporates all of the benefits of the Professional edition and is installed on your company s SQL server Note Even though our example distribution company is using the Enterprise version of InventoryControl this does not necessarily mean that all distribution companies should use this version The version of InventoryControl used should be based on your business needs rather than your business type 3 2 Business Example Overv
222. d information Item Number Location and any required Track Bys the Build Assembly button will be enabled The Build Assembly button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one Remove is posted to the Pending Transaction List Click this button to continue building your item If no additional information Such as serial numbers is needed for any of the associated sub items you can click Commit at this point to complete the build process If additional information is needed for one or more items the Remove screen appears 105 10 11 InventoryControl Printable Help Sg FE Remove Lal ks Data Pending Transaction List 1 You have selected to build assembly item 1007 Quantity 1 The list below displays the items that will be removed to build your assembly item Type item Number Quantity Removed Qty Stocking Unit Description WA Inventory 1003 1 0000 1 000 Test tem 3 Inventory 1002 1 0000 0 Test Item 1002 Component Details ltem Number Serial Number DE 7 Description Lot DI Quantity ae Date Code D K 4 HEI Location Pallet 7 DI Maximum 0 00 Pin All Unpin All Remove iep Sencel This Remove screen displays all items tied to this Assembly Item Those items that appear checked as in the example above are ready to be built Items that are not checke
223. d need additional information usually a Track By In the Item Number field enter the Item Number or highlight an unchecked item in the display screen The selected item s information will populate the screen Enter any missing information usually a Track By such as Serial Number When you are tracking by serial number click on the Serial Number drop down to see a list of all unique serial numbers associated with the selected item You can also scan this information Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin 4 button located to the right of the field you want to lock This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Builds at one Location for example Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field This feature is especially useful when scanning serial numbers Clicking the F button will unlock the field 106 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 Click Next when you have completed entering the requested information You will be returned to the Assembly screen You can choose another Assembly Item to build or click Commit to commit your changes to the database When you click Commit the inventory quantities for the listed items will be reduced and the quantity for the Assembly Item will be increased by the number built 7 4 Disassembling Assembly Items Pro and Enterprise Versions Only N
224. d will be rejected Negative values for Quantity can also cause an Inventory record to be rejected e f one or more Tracked By or Require the user to fill out options are enabled for the Item Number specified in an Inventory record that fails to supply that information the record will be rejected For more information on these options please refer to the Create New Item topic 262 InventoryControl Printable Help 16 2 Exporting to a Text File This software allows you to create text files containing data from one or more fields within each of the program s tables For example if you want to create a text file of all of the manufacturers in your database the Export function allows you to quickly do this Data types and sizes for each table from which data can be exported are documented in the Database Properties topic How to Export Data 1 From the Main screen click the Administration icon The Administration Menu appears at the bottom of the screen On the Administration Menu click Export The Export Wizard Step 1 Origination and Destination Data screen appears Ea Export Wizard Step 1 Origination and Destination Data Choose the table to export and the destination text file PPP Export table Supplier To file C Users Admin Desktop Inventory Suppliers S uppliers csv a Help Next gt Cancel 3 Select the table from which you want to export from the Export Table drop
225. d you in creating purchase orders for the under stocked items 51 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 10 Alerts InventoryControl contains built alerts that you can display to tell you when action needs to be taken on certain items or orders in the system To access the Alerts feature select Check for Alerts from the Main screen Note for WaspNest Users Alerts are not available in WaspNest Inventory For more information on the benefits of upgrading please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The following is a list of Alerts that might appear on your system Kit Item s with incomplete info This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Assembly items with incomplete info This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Checked Out Item s Past Due Purchase Orders Past Due This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Pick Orders Past Due This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Expired Items This alert displays all items with expired date codes Items Understocked by Location Items Understocked by Item Totals ltems with Negative Quantity Items Understocked by Forecasted Item Totals This alert appears if InventoryControl determines items need to be re ordered taking into account the quantity available in house the quantity on order via purchase orders and the quantity scheduled to be removed via pick orders The alert appears
226. data you would then map from the TrackSer column to the Serial Number Track by field You could just as easily edit this TrackSer column to turn on Serial Number tracking for some items and not others by specifying values of yes or no as necessary In either case when you import the items mapping your TrackSer column to the Serial Number Track by field will correctly set the Tracked By Serial Number option for each item being imported This negates the need to manually edit each imported item s Item To Be Tracked By Serial Number option after importing the items True False T F Yes No or 0 1 columns can be added to your source data for any or all of the seven Map To fields shown above so that the Tracked By and Required options are set for each item at the time of import Each record added to an Auto Generated Number field takes the maximum number present in its column and increments this value by 1 For an import if the Employee table already has an ID field value that is equal to 100 and the Import Wizard recognized that your import file contains a value in a mapped column that is equal to or less than 100 it will present you with a Default Value of the first import record All subsequent imported records will increment this value by 1 If this condition does not exist the import will proceed with the values included in the import delimited text file 7 Click Finish when you are done mapping all the desired fields to the table
227. ded or removed while you are doing the counts All features are still available when adjusting inventory The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings Notes e An item tracked by Serial Number which has been Checked Out can not be Adjusted e Inventory adjustments can also be made at the PC using the Adjust screen e Make sure the PDT s date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions e Source and or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT Please use the Site Config function to Select Source and Destination Sites ESC Exit Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function For more information on configuring sites on the PDT please refer to the topic WDT2200 Configuring Sites The following topics are covered in this section Adjusting Inventory Looping on Serial Number Looping on Location Looping on Item Number Looping on a Track By other than Serial Number 329 InventoryControl Printable Help Adjusting Inventory 1 From the Main Menu press the 4 key Adjust Item 123 Scan or key in va
228. dentical to the New Purchase Order screen except all the information previously entered for the order appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Creating a Purchase Order topic 192 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 4 Purchase Order List Example This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Purchase Order List displays all active purchase orders you have in your system Active purchase orders are those that have a status of New New Over Due In Process or In Process Over Due Below is an example of the Purchase Order List Ki Purchase Order List fo toles Tools meme men Prave r 4 D Fiter Toggle New Edit Delete Print Export To File Group Bn Show Hidden Columns Due Da Type PO Number Order Da Reference Num Supplier No Supplier Ship Method Pay Method 3 IPO P0070323 0000020 03 23 20 Tiffany amp Co Federal Expre 1 10 Net 30 Pe 5 1 2007 PO P0070515 0000010 05 01 20 100 Tiffany amp Co Airborne Due on Rec Pa 51 2007 PO 1 05 09 20 123 100 Tiffany amp Co US Mail 1 10 Net 30 Pa 5 17 20 PO 10 05 17 20 10 100 Tiffany amp Co US Mail Net 30 6 1 2007 PO PO070523 0000010 05 23 20 ref 4 150 Bachendort s Je
229. designate a field that will be used for looping The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping 382 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on Location Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing a Receive for this Item Receive 123 Monitor Location ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Receive for this Item to more than one Location Values entered for Item PO and Supplier if any will remain locked while looping on Location after entering them for the first Add Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a Qty of 10 were entered this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Pick PO Supplier and Tracked By values if any for this second Pick will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop if any 123 Qty Location Total Qty 10 00000 F4 Done While looping on Location all that is required for each Receive are values for Qty and Location The Total Qty field is incremented each time a Receive is submitted while looping Press the ENT key to submit the Receive transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop Looping on I
230. detailed instructions on creating labels To access the help select Help gt Contents from the Wasp Labeler toolbar Note When saving new labels you have created with Wasp Labeler they will be listed with the default names shown on the Labels List The files will automatically save to the LAB files in the Labels folder under the folder where you installed InventoryControl If you are unsure where this is just use the Windows Find or Search command to locate the folder containing the file InventoryControl exe then save your LAB files in the Labels folder beneath it 13 2 3 Browsing to an Existing Label You may have custom labels you have already created that you want to access To do this 1 To browse to an existing label file LAB file from the Main screen click Labels A list of available labels will appear 2 Select Browse to Other Labels The standard Windows Explorer screen appears 3 Navigate to the desired LAB file and select it The label will open in Wasp Labeler allowing you to edit or print it 217 InventoryControl Printable Help 13 3 Printing Labels from the List Screens InventoryControl allows you to print Location and Item labels directly from the List screens The following List screens have label printing functionality Location List Print Location Labels Item List Print Item Labels Note You must select a label printer prior to printing tags from the List screens To do this see the topic
231. device Would you like to install it now Click Yes to install InventoryControl RF A progress bar similar to the one shown below will appear Sending files to mobile device please wait Not Responding NETCFv35 wee armv4 cab During the installation process you may see the screen shown below 418 InventoryControl Printable Help Please check your mobile device screen to see if additional steps are necessary to complete this installation Please do not install any of the programs to Flash Storage If the installation of NET Compact Framework says You must restart the device to complete installation please select Cancel on the device to continue at this moment Only restart the device when all programs have finished installing If you see this screen click OK and check your mobile device If additional steps are needed such as a reboot of the device instructions will be provided on your mobile device s screen When the installation is completed the following message appears The wizard has successfully installed the InventoryControl program on the mobile device After installation you will see the InventoryControl RF icon on the mobile device screen E My Device Recycle Bin Inventory Contra RF 419 InventoryControl Printable Help Note If InventoryControl RF cannot detect the device the screen will appear as shown below Setup Mobile Device Check Mobile
232. dicates the intention to loop on Item Values entered for Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By fields other than Serial Number will remain locked after entering them for the first Adjust Qty Item Count 25 F4 Done Above having pressed F3 when prompted for Item and then having entered the item number and values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a value of 25 for Qty this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item inputs for the second Add The Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Adjust transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop While looping on Item all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item The Count is incremented each time an Adjust is done while looping gt Press the ENT key to submit the Adjust transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop d When looping on Item all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be reset Looping on a Tracked By other than Serial Number Here for example F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing an adjust for this Item Adjust 123 Monitor Pallet S ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next 334 InventoryControl Printable Help An asterisk indicates the intention to do more tha
233. down menu Then select the file to which you want to export the data Here the Supplier table has been selected for import to an external file named Suppliers csv a comma separated values file Export also supports creation of TXT files 4 Click Next to continue The Step 2 Export Field Selection screen appears 263 InventoryControl Printable Help xaos a EE SES Step 2 Export Field Selection Choose the fields to export The fields will be exported in the order shown in the lt Field Selected list Table Supplier Fields available Fields selected a rp Email Web Site Contact Name Custom Date 1 qJ L Custom Date 2 Custom Date 3 z Data Preview of Table Supplier The Export Field Selection screen allows you to select which of the Fields available in the table you have chosen to pull data from will be exported to the specified file To select a field highlight a listing in the Fields available screen then click the eegen to add it to the Fields selected box Click the L button to add all of the available fields to the Fields selected box After adding one or more fields to the Fields selected box you can use the or buttons to return fields to the Fields available box The graphic below displays this screen with all Fields available selected 264 InventoryControl Printable Help pen 7 d HYNN Step 2 Export Field Selection Choose the fields to export
234. ds to the right of the Supplier screen are enabled 2 Select a Supplier Code from the drop down list You can also select New Supplier from the list to create a new supplier 3 Enter the SKU number for this item in the Supplier Item SKU field 4 Enter the description of this item given by the supplier in the Supplier Item Description field 101 10 InventoryControl Printable Help Enter the number of days lead time the supplier needs to process orders for this item in the Lead Time in days field The lead time is the time from the requisition date to the delivery date For example if you need the item by the 15th of the month and the supplier requires 5 days to deliver the order you would enter 5 here to ensure the order is sent to the supplier timely The Status field displays the supplier s current status Active or Inactive You can change the status by making a new selection from the drop down menu You can make this the default supplier for this item by checking the Make this the default Supplier while ordering this item checkbox Pro and Enterprise versions only When this is selected this supplier will automatically populate purchase orders for this item You can change the supplier on the purchase order if needed Any notes entered for this supplier will appear in the Notes section You can enter the supplier s unit of measure settings in the Order Unit Settings screen Pro and Enterprise versions only This is the
235. dy to use InventoryControl with the mobile device After you are finished working with the device you can click on the Mobile Device to PC tab to start retrieving the information that you ve collected on mobile device Step 2 of 2 Having received both the InventoryControl program and a database the PDT will now display the logon screen InventoryControl v4 User Password F1 About Once you ve entered values for User and Password you ll be able to perform against the downloaded database After performing inventory transactions on the PDT you can retrieve them on the Mobile Device to PC tab or Click Finish now to close this dialog and return to the InventoryControl Main Menu or Click the Back button to restart the Send Data to PDT dialog 303 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 4 WDT2200 Receiving Data from PDT The Receive Data from PDT function is used to transfer data from the PDT to the PC Receiving Data from the PDT 1 If you are continuing the setup process click the Next button at the bottom of the Create PDT Database tab or click the PC to Mobile Device tab You must create the mobile database before you can send it to the device Please refer to the WDT 2200 Creating the PDT Database topic for more information OR If you are creating a database for a device that already has the program from the InventoryControl Main screen click the Mobility icon If you have more than one type of mob
236. e Transaction Report There are also three optional tracking fields PO Supplier and Customer As mentioned above these fields are special fields for the Add and Remove functions that can be filled out but are not required unless you make them required when the item is created The required and optional track by fields can be renamed to reflect the names you use For more information please refer to the topic Editing Field Names After inventory is added to an item the selections you made to the four tracking fields cannot be changed without first removing all inventory from that item Make sure you specify what you want to track before adding inventory Make sure you print a label for each track by field you have selected to use and attach them to each item If the labels are not physically attached to each item it will be very difficult for you to keep track of which items should be tracked by a specific field 14 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 6 Labeling Items Just as every location should have a barcode each individual piece of inventory needs a barcode You should print your item numbers on labels and put them on each individual item before they are put away ona shelf You get the same time saving and accuracy benefits from labeling inventory items as you get from labeling the locations but on a greater scale Sometimes it is not feasible to have a label on each piece of inventory because the item is too small In thi
237. e PDT About screen New Locations can only be created during Pick when the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press ESC to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings Looping on Serial Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key An asterisk displays next to the looped field If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item the Qty field will be set to 1 A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number Looping will determine the final count for this Pick transaction as you scan or key in one or more Serial Numbers for this Item 1000066 Qty 1 SN Count 0 F4 Done As each SN is keyed in or scanned the Count will be increased Press ENT after inputting each serial number Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Pick screen Notes e When an
238. e if you enter 16 000 in the Maximum Number field 16 000 rows will be displayed on the Transaction List 15 6 18 Previously Processed Mobile Data When this option is turned on the software alerts you if you attempt to upload data from the mobile device to the PC when that data has previously been uploaded With this option turned on if you upload and process data from the mobile device to the PC and then attempt to upload and process that same data again in the Pending Uploads wizard a symbol displays in the Accept column indicating this data will not be processed again because it has already been processed Below is an example of the symbol that will appear 245 InventoryControl Printable Help When this option is turned off you still will not be able to re process data that has already been processed The drop down list in the first screen of the Pending Uploads wizard simply will not display the processed XML file 15 6 19 Show Cost Information During Receiving applies to Pro and Enterprise Versions Only When this option is enabled cost information will display on the Receive screen when you are receiving inventory from a purchase order This option is disabled by default To enable this option select the checkbox 15 6 20 Show Warning Messages This options allows you to enable or disable the display of warning messages 15 6 21 SQL Server Backup Location This option is useful if you have your database installed
239. e Contents Index Search Accesses this help file e Update Licenses Allows you to update your existing license s e Check for Updates When this option is selected the system will search for updates to the software and alert you if any exist You can then download the updates at your convenience the software automatically searches for updates at start up This option allows you to manually search for updates at other times Checking for Updates requires internet access 4 3 2 Section B Left Hand Navigation This software contains a menu on the left side of the Main Screen that provides access to the following features e New Displays a menu of all Create New screens Customer Locations Items etc Select which type of data you want to create from the menu e Lists Displays a menu of all Lists in the system Select which List you want to view from the menu For detailed information on using the list screens please refer to the topic Working with Lists 39 InventoryControl Printable Help e Find Displays a menu of data options from which to search Customer Locations etc Select which type of data you want to search A Find screen appears allowing you to quickly search for information e Labels Displays a menu of labels you can print Printing Labels utilizes the Labeler software that come bundled with your program For detailed instructions on using the Labeler software please refer to the Labeler help file accessible
240. e Help 20 9 Wireless Devices 20 9 1 Windows Mobile Device Wireless Setup InventoryControl RF allows you to setup a wireless connection between your mobile device if it is capable of a wireless connection and InventoryControl This allows you to update your InventoryControl database in real time rather than capturing data on the mobile device then having to sync that data back to the PC batch process You can perform all of the basic InventoryControl functions such as adding removing picking adjusting inventory etc You can also print from the wireless device to any printer label printer on your network Important Make sure you have enabled wifi on your mobile device before you perform the steps listed in this topic For help enabling wifi please refer to the topic Windows Mobile Device Tips for Setting Up and Using Mobile Devices Wifi There are only two steps to set up your wireless device for use with InventoryControl RF These steps are outlined below 1 From the Main screen click the Mobility icon The Mobility menu appears Select Windows Mobile CE Wireless The Wasp Mobile Device Communication Wizard Setup Mobile Device screen appears InventoryControl will automatically try to locate and connect to any wireless devices If a device is detected that does not already have InventoryControl RF installed the message shown below appears Information X a 1 The InventoryControl program does not exist on the mobile
241. e Help 4 Click Next when you are ready to proceed The Step 2 Field Delimiter screen appears 3E Import Wizard Step 2 Field Delimiter Select a field delimiter A delimiter is a character used in the file to separate individual fields Import Format Field delimiter lt Comma gt v 4 First row contains column headings Preview of data from C Users 4dmin Desktop Inventory Locations Locations cs Site Location Description T WH1 Warehouse d WH2 Warehouse F WH3 Warehouse Help l lt Back Cancel Delimiters are used to separate the data items in a database the columns in the database table when transporting the database to another application For example a comma separated values file CSV file is one in which each value in the cells of a table row is delimited by and separated from the next value by a comma The beginning of a row is indicated by a new line character 5 Specify the field Delimiter used in the file from which you are importing data This will always be a comma for csv files but any of the characters shown in the list box can be used with txt files The preview window at the bottom of the screen will show you if your selected Delimiter is correct by displaying each column the system finds in your file when using that Delimiter If all the data is in one column of the preview pane you have not selected the right Delimiter Select the First row contains column headings option only if the fir
242. e Help you want to lock This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Builds at one Location for example Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field This feature is especially useful when scanning serial numbers Clicking the E button will unlock the field Click Add when you have entered the requested information The item will now be check marked in the list Click Next to continue You will be returned to the Disassemble screen You can choose another Assembly Item to build or click Commit to commit your changes to the database When you click Commit the inventory quantities for the listed items will be increased and the quantity for the Assembly Item will be decreased by the number disassembled Keep in mind that if an item is marked as Always Scrap on the Create New Edit Item screen or you have selected the Scrap option on this screen the inventory for that item will not be increased 111 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 8 Using the List Screens 8 1 Working with Lists Note All screen shots in this help file are of InventoryControl Professional Edition The screens in other versions of InventoryControl and in WaspNest Inventory may differ For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Up
243. e Issued Once the purchase order is printed or emailed the status changes to Issued e In Process Once the order has started to be received via the Receive screen accessed from the Receive Pick menu the status becomes In Process and the Received Quantity will display for each item on the order e Overdue This status can appear for New or In Process orders that have passed the designated due date This orders will appear with a symbol on the Purchase Order List to alert you of their overdue status e Closed This status means the order has been completed and marked as closed Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin 4 button located to the right of the field you want to lock Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field Clicking the Fi button will unlock the field 2 Enter a supplier in the Supplier field You can scan a value into this field manually enter a value or click on the field to view a drop down list The list contains the last 10 Suppliers selected on this screen Select lt More gt to view the entire Supplier List or click lt New gt to go to the Create New Supplier screen to add a new supplier to the database When a supplier is selected the Supplier Address information automatically populates If the selected supplier has more than one address you can select the Addr
244. e Item entered is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again as shown below Move Item 99999999 Entry not found Scan or key in value and press Ent ESC Menu If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item Scan or key in a From location value Move 1000052 Fence Rail From A1 ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next The From and To fields are required for all Move transactions Enter a From Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field or Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field or Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen d If you press F4 to advance to the To location field without first providing a From location value the following message will be displayed Please scan or key in From ESC Exit Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required From location value 344 InventoryControl Printable Help Note If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices Option is disabled on the Options screen you will receive a warning message if you attempt to Move quantity from a location that does not exist in the PDT database The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the mobile database You can check the state of this option on the PDT by viewing the PDT About screen New Source Site From locations can only be created during Move when the
245. e Moving Inventory topic Add Applies to the Item and Inventory List screens only Highlight a listing then click the Add Inventory Inventory button or just click the button to access the Add screen The Add screen allows you to manually add quantity to items already entered into your database Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item Items must first be imported or entered on the Create New Item screen by selecting Lists gt Item List gt New before you can add quantity to it For more information please refer to the Adding Inventory topic Remove Applies to the Item and Inventory List screens only Highlight a listing then click the Inventory Remove button or just click the button to access the Remove screen The Remove Inventory screen allows you to remove quantity from any item in the database For more information please refer to the Removing Inventory topic Highlight a listing on the screen then click the Edit button The Edit screen appears allowing you to update and change information Accesses the New screen allowing you to enter a new Customer Item Manufacturer Site Supplier Purchase Order or Pick Order Duplicate Highlight a listing then click the Duplicate button The New screen appears with all fields populated with the information from the listing you copied Export to Export allows you to export the entire list to a comma delimited text file File What is a comma delimited file This is a
246. e Search Sites screen opens When searching for a Location note that you must first select a Site then the Location If you do not select a Site first the Search Location screen will be empty If more than 500 records are found the message will display asking if you want to continue or further refine your search criteria to limit the search results Click OK to go to the Find screen to refine your search To further refine your search select a search option from the drop down then enter full or partial information and tap Find Search Items By default InventoryControl RF searches using All of the search options Please note that InventoryControl and InventoryControl RF contains partial search capability For example if you are searching for item 1234 and enter 123 the application will return all items that contain the numbers 123 in the Item Number field If your entry returns no results you can clear the search field then tap Find to display all records 483 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 Select the Item you want then tap OK The Search screen closes and the item you selected displays in the appropriate field Item 1001 i Location ens Supplier Qty r Add EE 5 07 ans 484 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 12 Windows Mobile Device Troubleshooting This topic covers error messages and issues that may arise while using the Windows Mobile Device The subjects currently covered in this Trou
247. e Using Custom Fields When you have finished adding information click the OK Save button The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen e When the Close New Form option is turned off Click Save to commit your entry or click Close to exit the form e When the Close New Form option is turned on Click OK to commit your entry and exit the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry For more information about the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic 75 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 8 Creating New Manufacturers The Create New Manufacturer screen allows you to add a new Manufacturer to your database A Manufacturer is typically the company or organization that creates an item you will inventory Ha Manufacturer is also your Supplier for an Item it is best to setup the company in the software as both a Manufacturer and a Supplier When you are setting up your software for the first time you may want to import your manufacturers rather than adding them one at a time through this screen For information on importing information into your database please refer to the Import Into Database topic Adding a New Manufacturer 1 From the Main Screen click New gt Manufacturer OR From the Main Screen click Lists gt Manufacturer Then click the New icon on the Manufacturer List The Create New Manufacturer screen will appear Ea Create Ne
248. e database Location does not exist Do you want to add this new location lt LOCATION NAME gt This message displays if you enter a Location that does not exist in the mobile device database Click here if you want to add this Location to the database Move Messages Source and Destination sites are set to be the same Destination site and location needs to be different than the Source Site and Location This message indicates you selected the same Site and Location for both the Source from which you were moving the Item and the Destination to which you were moving the Item You cannot have the same Site and Location for both the Source and the Destination You must either change the Site and Location in the From Site and From Loc fields or change the Site and Location in the To Site and To Loc fields For example if you entered Site 201 and Location A20 in both the Source and Destination Site Location fields you are trying to move an Item from its current Location to its current Location If the Item is currently located at Site 201 Location A20 to move it to another site you must enter a different Destination such as Site 100 Location B13 487 InventoryControl Printable Help Pallet Messages Pallet is not valid This message displays if e The Item Number you entered is tracked by Pallet and you have not entered a Pallet in the Pallet field e The Pallet you entered is not the correct Pallet by which the
249. e finished doing Audits even just for an afternoon of counting during a week long Audit the Counts can be uploaded to the PC please refer to the topic WDT2200 Receiving Data from the PDT for more information Multiple PDTs can upload their counts multiple times throughout the Audit Mode period When the PC is no longer in Audit Mode you can create another mobile database to send to the PDT This will return the PDT to its normal mode Looping on Serial Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key An asterisk displays next to the looped field If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item the Qty field will be set to 1 A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number Looping will determine the final count for this Audit transaction as you scan or key in one or more Serial Numbers for this Item 1000066 Qty 1 SN Count 0 F4 Done As each SN is keyed in or scanned the Count will be increased Press ENT after inputting each serial number Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Audit screen Notes When an Hem is tracked by Serial Number you can only loop on Serial Number When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping 339 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on Location Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key
250. e in stock for the selected site and location This number can be 0 or a positive number negative numbers are not allowed e Reorder Qnty Enter the number at which you want to reorder this item for the selected Site and Location You can set an option in the software so that the system warns you at login of 67 InventoryControl Printable Help any inventory items that have hit their reorder quantity For further information on setting this option please refer to the Options Screen topic After you have completed all fields hit ENTER to begin a new line Your screen will look similar to the following after hitting ENTER y AS Filter Group Du Delete To finish adding a new record please press enter key or down arrow button Click on Filter toolbar button to bring ug please click on Grouping toolbar button Primary Location Site Location Quantity Max Stock Level Min Stock Level Reorder Qty Gite Loc 2 0 00 25 15 20 0 00 O 0 00 0 00 5 3 4 Additional Information Tab When you have finished entering information on the Location Settings tab click the Additional tab The Additional Information tab provides optional fields where other information about the Item can be recorded An example of this tab is shown below 68 InventoryControl Printable Help General Location Settings Additional Manage Suppliers Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates ltem Measurements Stocking Unit Dimension
251. e initial setup you can select Platform Program and Clean Database e If you already have a platform set up select either Program or Program and Clean Database e f you click the Install Programs button the Add Remove Programs screen will display Click the Install button A message displays You have chosen to send an empty database to the mobile device This will wipe out any data that currently resides on the mobile device Lost data cannot be recovered Click Yes to send the database A message displays regarding additional steps on the Windows Mobile Device 395 InventoryControl Printable Help Please check your mobile device screen to see if additional steps are necessary to complete this installation Please do not install any of the programs to Flash Storage If the installation of INET Compact Framework says You must restart the device to complete installation please select Cancel on the device to continue at this moment Only restart the device when all programs have finished installing 4 lf you are using Windows CE 5 you can click OK on this message and disregard it If you are using any other version you will need to click OK on this screen and follow the steps on the mobile device to continue You may receive this message again during the install Each time you receive it you will need to check the mobile device for additional instructions 5 When the install completed successfully you will se
252. e intention to do more than one Audit for this Item for more than one Pallet Values entered for ltem Location PO Supplier and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet after entering them for the first Audit 123 Qty Pallet i Total Qty 30 00000 F4 Done Above having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first Audit this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Audit Item Location PO and Supplier values for this second Audit will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop While looping on this Tracked By field all that is required for each Audit are values for Qty and Pallet The Total Qty is incremented each time an Audit is submitted while looping Press the ENT key to submit the Audit transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop When looping on a Tracked By field all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be restarted 342 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 17 WDT2200 Moving Inventory The Move function allows you to move inventory quantity for an item from one Location to another When you create an item you can add which locations it may be When you then add inventory quantity to the item you select in which location that qua
253. e orders can be created in InventoryControl when you need to order additional inventory from suppliers These orders can be emailed to the supplier and or printed upon creation and can be easily referenced and searched in the system When you receive shipment of the items on the purchase order the items can be marked as received either on the PC s Receive screen or on the mobile devices InventoryControl allows you to create purchase orders for e Inventory Items This item is already in your inventory database Use this to re order existing items e Assembly Items Assembly items are created when you combine two or more existing items or multiple quantity of one item to create a new item e Non Inventory Items This item is not listed as inventory in your database Use this to order items for which you do not want to track inventory such as marketing fliers or business cards e Manually Entered Items Use this option to add one time items such as shipping and handling to an order Be aware that manual items cannot be received on the mobile devices With a little advanced planning much of the purchase order creation process can be automated for you Setting up these four pieces before you begin creating purchase orders will speed the process e Setup preferred suppliers for your items Pro and Enterprise versions only then you can simply enter the item number on the purchase order and the supplier information will automatically appear on
254. e refer to the Create New Site topic 6 5 Editing Locations or a Site and Location The Edit Location screen allows you to modify an existing location This screen is accessed from the Location List by highlighting an location in the list then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Location screen is identical to the New Location screen except all the information previously entered for the location appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Create New Location topic 85 InventoryControl Printable Help 6 6 Edit Customer The Edit Customer screen allows you to modify an existing customer This screen is accessed from the Customer List by highlighting a customer in the list then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Customer screen is identical to the New Customer screen except all the information previously entered for the customer appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Create New Customers topic 6 7 Editing Suppliers The Edit Supplier screen allows you to modify an existing supplier This screen is accessed from the Supplier List by highlighting a supplier in the list th
255. e software Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item Items must first be imported or entered on the Add Item screen before you can add quantity to it The Check In and Check Out feature does not apply to WaspNest Inventory J Inventory igi Filter Item Number Checkin Check Out Move Item Description Add Site Remove Print Location Quantity PY amp amp ZHAS Tr Export To File Dp Oldest D Group By Latest Da Pallet Show Hidden Columns Lot pal Date Code Supplier Code es i Loc1 0 i on 100 Item tracked by Everything A 11 3 00 12 12 11 12 100 Item tracked by Everything Dock DN 1 00 12 12 12 100 Item tracked by Everything Dock LOC 1 1 00 12 12 12 100 Item tracked by Everything A 11 1 00 127172002 171 2002 12 12 10 12 100 Item tracked by Everything A 11 1 00 1 1 2002 171 2002 12 12 10 12 100 Item tracked by Everything A 11 1 00 1 1 2002 171 2002 12 12 10 12 8 100 Item tracked by Everything A 11 1 00 1 1 2002 171 2002 12 12 10 12 100 Item tracked by Everything A 11 1 00 1 1 2002 171 2002 12 12 10 12 100 Item tracked by Everything A 11 1 00 1 1 2002 171 2002 12 12 10 12 100 Item tracked by Everything A 11 1 00 1 1 2002 171 2002 12 12 10 12 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A 20 21 00 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A An 1 00 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A A L11 11 00 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch
256. e the following screen The wizard has successfully installed the InventoryControl program on the mobile device 6 Next the Printing Setup screen appears 396 InventoryControl Printable Help Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC WindowsCE Printing Setup The program has automatically detected the device attached via ActiveSync Please finish the rest of the setup options Do you plan to print from the mobile device Yes No Yes will be printing with a Step 2 of 2 l lt Back Next gt Cancel First select Yes or No under the question Do you plan to print from the mobile device If you select No the Finish button will become enabled Click Finish to complete the setup process If you select Yes select one of the following options Yes I will be printing from a network printer select this option if you will be printing to a printer on your network You do not need to do anything else to enable printing Click Finish to complete the setup process OR Yes I will be printing with a Laser Mobile Printer select this option if you will be printing to a laser mobile printer You will need to enter a COM Port and Baud Rate for this printer Click Finish to complete the setup process OR Yes will printing with a Receipt Mobile Printer select this option if you will be printing to a receipt mobile printer You will need to enter a COM Por
257. e the proper connections between the Manufacturer and Item tables gt If while importing Item data a previously unknown Manufacturer value is read a new Manufacturer will be created using the new value the Item record being imported will not be associated with an existing Manufacturer e f you will be importing data into both the Item table and the Inventory table The same values that reside within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Item table s Item Number s field must also occur within the Import Data Columns you choose to map to the Inventory table s Item Number field The actual Import file used for the Item import does not have to be used for the Inventory import It s the Item Number values themselves which must be the same in both Imports to create the proper connections between the Item and Inventory tables d If while importing Inventory data a previously unknown value for either Item Number Site Location or Supplier Code is read a new Item Number Site Location or Supplier Code will not be created using the new value the Inventory record being imported will be rejected Negative values for Quantity can also cause an Inventory record to be rejected Lastly if one or more Tracked By or Require the user to fill out options are enabled for the Item Number specified in an Inventory record that fails to supply that information the record will be rejected These errors will be listed in the Import Export Error Repor
258. e their site description a composite of the warehouse and truck number W1400T12 If you have a different buildings containing various rooms in which items will be stored make a composite name of the building and room number B201R10 You should always make the site number something that can be barcoded so that it can be printed and scanned See Barcode Best Practices 2 4 2 What is a Location For the purpose of keeping track of your inventory items your locations should represent the placement within the site If your site is a warehouse the locations are shelves or racks If your site is a building the locations may be offices If you have a fleet of trucks the locations may be containers in the truck When deciding how to label each location choose a numbering scheme that can be interpreted when reading just the label For example if you have 7 rows of 5 shelves each and each shelf has 4 levels your barcode label scheme should look like A010200 or Row A Shelf 01 Level 02 Bin 00 If you have inventory on trucks in containers the truck can be a site and each bin in the truck is a location Each bin should get a numeric location designation like 100 200 or 200 If you do not have locations within the truck each truck can be a location T1 T2 T3 Put a label on the inside of the truck door so the person moving inventory into the truck can just scan and move The label barcode should have the barcode and the human readable text description o
259. e toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic 86 InventoryControl Printable Help The Edit Pick Order screen is identical to the New Pick Order screen except all the information previously entered for the order appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Creating a Pick Order topic 6 10 Editing Purchase Orders Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Edit Purchase Order screen allows you to modify an existing purchase order This screen is accessed from the Purchase Order List by highlighting an item in the list then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Purchase Order screen is identical to the New Purchase Order screen except all the information previously entered for the order appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Creating a Purchase Order topic 87 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 7 Assembly Items 7 1 Assembly Overview This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgradi
260. eS 84 6 2 Editing KT ue AE 84 6 3 Editing dl 85 E Delt BEE 85 6 5 Editing Locations or a Site ANd Location 85 6 6 Edit GUSLOMON se sicci EE E A Leed eege egene Eden teed 86 Ge Elte Biel ET EE 86 6 8 Editing Manufacturers teccstiat ede slant a a ee ata ee dat eta 86 6 9 EGITING PICK OFGOLS EE 86 6 10 Editing Purchase Orders AA 87 Chapter 7 Assembly eme 88 71 Els Ve EE 88 7 2 Creating an Assembly Item i Eet aiiai aieia daa aa iia kaai aaa tein aE iaaa eiA iara aiie 89 7 2 1 Accessing the New Assembly Item Green 90 7 2 2 General Information Tab EE 91 122 3 LOCATION nde EE GEET 95 E ASSOMDIY TAD ET 97 7 2 5 Additional Information Tab 99 7 2 6 Manage Suppliers Tab 101 7 2 7 Custom Text and Custom Numbers and Dates Tab 102 7 2 8 Saving the New Hem AANEREN 102 7 3 Building Assembly Items ccecececeeeeeeeneeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeaee eases caaeeeeaaeseaeeesaaeeeeaaeseeeeeessaeeesaeseaeeeenees 103 7 4 Disassembling Assembly Hemes 107 Chapter 8 Using the List Screens eegen eara a aara aeaa ea RE aA aE baler a Aa a Aaa Sai 112 8 7 Working with LIStS EE 112 8 4 Section e Toolbar EE ite E EEN 113 8 1 2 Section B Contents Listrier arana aa veces aa a AA A E a e aA aeaa ried E i a Aea aa iaaa 119 8 1 3 Section C Buttons ninani nai a eeh dee den ea ae 121 8 2 kem ue 123 8 3 Inventory List Example aseseirrkn neerkeek EER EEK E EEE EEAO AREKE A AE ines Abde EdgegeeECd 124 S24 Site List ue EE 125 9 9 Location OST
261. eans that inventory will be reduced for that item during the Disassembly process You can mark the sub item as Always Scrap during the Assembly Item creation process so that it will always be scrapped when disassembled This is useful for packaging materials such as boxes that will not be returned to inventory FIFO An abbreviation for first in first out FIFO is a method employed in accounting for the identification and valuation of the inventory of a business This is the inventory method the system uses when adjusting or removing inventory FIFO assumes that the first goods added are the first removed Inventory Inventory is the amount or quantity you have of a particular item Inventory Item An inventory item is anything you want to track the location and quantity of The term item is used in InventoryControl to mean anything that is put into stock see Item entry below Item Items represent the actual material or good that you will have in your inventory For example you might create an Item entry for Mouse Wireless Then you can add inventory or quantity to that item If you are using the Enterprise or Professional version of this software you can also create items that are non inventory This is useful if you need to create an item for marketing pamphlets counter displays or anything you need to have but for which you don t need to track quantity Kit Item Pro and Enterprise versions only Kit items are a group of item
262. ear a Select your network and click the Configure button b Click the OK button The PSK password prompt appears c Enter your network password d Select the Commit button If your network does not appear a Click New b Type in your network name c Select Encryption Type WPA2 PSK d Click WEP keys PSKs e Enter your network password f Select the Commit button 428 InventoryControl Printable Help 6 On the Main tab select your network from the Active Profile list 7 Click OK The RF is now enabled Error Bluetooth Locks Up Your Bluetooth connection may become frozen if you have manually enabled Bluetooth Start gt Programs gt Bluetooth gt Bluetooth Power On then selected SCAN twice When Bluetooth locks up you will not be able to open a connection from Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Bluetooth or from Start gt Programs gt Bluetooth gt Bluetooth Manager If your Bluetooth connection becomes frozen follow the steps below Insert a pin or a paperclip in the reset button located on the front of the WDT3250Il This causes a warm boot of the mobile device Now Bluetooth gt Bluetooth Manager will open 20 10 2 WPA1000 and WPA1000II Tips TIPS Setting up a Wireless Connection Enabling Bluetooth and Printing to a Local Printer ERRORS Mobile Device Locks Up Receiving Connection Error When Trying to Access InventoryControl RF Tip Setting up a Wireless Connection To enab
263. eatures in other versions of InventoryControl and in WaspNest Inventory may differ For more information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen To Access the Administration Menu 1 From the Main screen click the Administration icon The Administration Menu appears at the bottom of the screen Ka InventoryControl TestCo Coy FoRS File Tools Help or Administration New g S Inventory List Forms KR N Administration Reports Find 1635754 E Labels Receive Pick Company Info Security Import Export Administration shati lt All gt 2 Click on any of the Administration Menu icons to go to that function Detailed descriptions of the options found on the Administration Menu are provided below e Company Info The Company Information screen allows you to enter or update your company information such as address phone and email The Company Name you enter on this screen will be used as the header for InventoryControl and will appear on all reports and pre defined labels The information on the Company Information screen should be filled out first when you are initially setting up the software For detailed information on this screen please refer to the Company Information Screen topic 225 InventoryControl Printable Help Security The Security Privileges screen allows users set up as
264. ecborat undid elas 16 PING caterer atthe a ieee ied 286 Find Advanced 288 Formatting Number Templates 00eaeassea 210 Formatting Pick Order Numbers saaa0snaa 210 Formatting Purchase Order Numbers 210 G Glossary oie tas eeh eene 492 Grids Working Wi 112 H Handheld Device Wireless Connection 418 Import Specifics 2 2 eee eeeseceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeee 269 Importing Related Data fields 0 06 267 Importing into the Database eee 256 Inactive USES oreen a i 230 Inventory Acddimg 135 Inventory Adding on the WDT2200 317 Inventory Adjusting eeeeeeeenee 156 Inventory Adjusting on the WDT2200 329 Inventory Adjusting on the WMD 473 Inventory Auditing eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeees 278 Inventory Auditing on the WDT2200 336 Inventory Check In on Windows Mobile Device Ed 449 Inventory How to Check Im 148 Inventory How to Check Out 152 Inventory Moving 144 Inventory Moving on the WDT2200 343 Inventory Picking on the WDT2200 367 Inventory Receiving asserere 194 Inventory Receiving on the WDT2200 380 Inventory REMOVING eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 140 Inventory Removing on the WDT2200 351 Inventory Removing on the WMD 453 Inventory List Example AA 124 Inventory Menu Overview sese 133 InventoryControl
265. eceive Automatic Customer Number Automatic Item Numbers Automatic New Automatic Notification of Low Order Items Decimal Places Enforce Date Code as a True Date Item Cost When Add Inventory from Mobile Device Packing Slip for Session Transaction Code List Support Options Check for Software Updates Close New Form 238 InventoryControl Printable Help Edit Field Names Max Row Count Previously Processed Mobile Data Show Cost Information During Receiving applies to Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Show Warning Messages SQL Server Backup Location Email Options Always Show Email Destination List Packing Slip CC Emails Pick Order CC Emails Purchase Order CC Emails SMTP Password SMTP Port SMTP Server SMTP SSL TSL SMTP User 239 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 6 1 Accessing the Options Screen From the Main screen select Tools gt Options The Options screen appears S Inventory A Allow quantities to go negative on the batch Mobile Devices E Negative Quantities on the batch Mobile Devi eech validation on or off for all supported i Allow Over Pick Allow Over Receive Automatic Customer Number i Automatic Item Numbers Automatic New Automatic Notification of Low Order Items i Decimal Places Enforce Date Code As A True Date Item Cost When Add Inventory from mobile device Packing Slip for Session Transaction Code List E Support b Check For Software Updates i C
266. ect this option to display transaction codes created by all users When you select this option you can also enter the number of transaction codes to show up to 30 15 6 14 Check for Software Updates When this option is enabled the system will automatically search for a newer version of the software when you log on to the system If a new version is found you will receive a notification and can then go to the Wasp website to download the new version This option is enabled when the Yes checkbox is selected This option is enabled by default You can disable the option by deselecting the checkbox Manual checks can still be performed via the Help menu For more information on manually checking for updates please refer to Checking for Software Updates 15 6 15 Close New Form When this option is turned on the Create New screen is automatically closed each time a new record is created 244 InventoryControl Printable Help When this option is disabled upon clicking the Save button on the Create New screen the entry will be saved the screen will remain open with the fields cleared ready for another entry Clicking the Close button will exit the Create New screen When this option is enabled upon clicking the OK button on the Create New screen the screen will close automatically Clicking the Cancel button on the Create New screen will exit the form without saving any entry made It might be desirable to turn this option off whe
267. ed PDT database to the PDT at this time The Create PDT Database screen will close The database you just created for the PDT can still be transferred later 6 You are now ready to send the database to the PDT For more information please refer to the WDT2200 Sending Data to the PDT topic 19 3 WDT2200 Sending Data to PDT The Send Data to PDT function is used to transfer data from the PC to the PDT You will need to create the mobile database first on the Create PDT Database tab before using this function For more information on creating the database please refer to the WDT2200 Creating the PDT Database topic Sending Data to the PDT 1 If you are continuing the setup process click the Next button at the bottom of the Create PDT Database tab or click the PC to Mobile Device tab You must create the mobile database before you can send it to the device Please refer to the WDT 2200 Creating the PDT Database topic for more information OR 299 InventoryControl Printable Help If you are creating a database for a device that already has the program from the InventoryConitrol Main screen click the Mobility icon If you have more than one type of mobile device installed a menu will appear allowing you to select which device you will be working with If you have only one type the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen On the Mobility Menu select Send Data To be b Si D Send Data To
268. ed by the new one that s about to be generated Click YES to proceed NO to cancel Click No if you want to return to the Filter Records dialog Click Yes if you want to proceed with creating the PDT database Several status bars will be displayed as the PDT database is created Depending on the filter criteria the database may take several minutes to create gt If you have not yet created any Location Supplier or Item data in InventoryControl or your Filter Records criteria exclude all the data you will receive the following message Create PDT database completed The criteria entered has resulted in no items being selected for the mobile databse Please click Back button to modify the criteria and try again If the above message is displayed click OK and then the Back button to restart the Filter Records dialog Finish creating your PC database before attempting another transfer to the PDT 298 InventoryControl Printable Help Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Create Mobile Database For WYDT2200 Create mobile database completed successfully Please click the Next button to proceed Step 2 of 2 lt Back Next gt 5 Click Next if you want to proceed to the PC to Mobile Device tab where you can send the database you just created to the device Click Back to restart the Filter Records dialog Click Cancel if you want to avoid transferring the newly creat
269. een before they add the items They can later manually associate the suppliers to an item using the Edit Item screen Manage Suppliers tab Since they are using the Standard version of InventoryControl they are limited to entering one supplier and one shipping unit of measure for each item 32 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 6 Entering Items Business Examples Note For step by step instructions on adding items please refer to the topic Creating New Items Business Type Distributing Items with Preferred Suppliers Sebastian Distributing has many items in their existing database so they will be importing their item information They also want to streamline the purchase order process for their employees Many items are typically ordered from the same supplier so they manually enter the preferred supplier information on the Manage Suppliers tab on the Edit Item screen for each item after the items are imported They also set up the preferred shipping unit of measure for each supplier on this tab By doing this the preferred supplier information and associated preferred unit of measure will appear on new purchase orders as soon as the item is added to the order Another time saving step they take is to make sure all Item Codes are scannable They enter the longer descriptive name in the Item Description field Business Type Fleet Items with Primary Locations Items are typically assigned to the same locations in Rusty s Cable Company The
270. efits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Edit Kit Items screen allows you to modify an existing kit item This screen is accessed from the Item List by highlighting a kititem in the list then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Kit Items screen is identical to the New Kit Item screen except all the information previously entered for the item appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Creating a Kit ltem topic When editing Kit items there are two points to keep in mind 1 You will need to sync the mobile device in order for the changes to be transferred 2 The change of configuration will not impact mobile transactions already done on the device 6 4 Editing Sites The Edit Site screen allows you to modify an existing site This screen is accessed from the Site List by highlighting a site in the list then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Site screen is identical to the New Site screen except all the information previously entered for the site appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen pleas
271. egarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 193 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 5 Receiving Inventory from Purchase Orders This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen When you begin receiving inventory on a purchase order you created in the system you will mark that inventory as received on the Receive screen This screen allows you to select which purchase order you are receiving on and to mark individual items on that purchase order as received into a specific location You can also optionally view costing information on this screen as well Receiving Inventory 1 From the Main screen click the Receive Pick icon The Receive Pick menu appears at the bottom of the screen On the Receive Pick menu click Receive The Receive screen appears K xe Receive Receiving Information Purchase Order Date Receipt Number 5729 2007 EN IblReceiptNumber Type Item No Description Ordered Oty Recv d Qty Quantity UOM Cost Grand Totals Record I4 4 jf o gt pi On Save Print Receipt Close This PO Quick Scan Entry Print Labels Create Backorder if necessary Help Save Close On the Receive screen select which Purchase Order you are receiving on from the drop down list When you select
272. el Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin HU button located to the right of the field you want to lock This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Adds at one Location for example Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field The Add button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these add transactions to the Pending Transaction List Clicking the E button will unlock the field Complete the Customer field To Check Out Inventory first enter a customer in the Customer field To input a Customer you can type or scan the value into the field you can use the drop down list to select an existing customer from the Customer List or select lt New gt from the drop down list to access the Create New Customer screen This will populate the Customer field as well as the Name Address and Phone fields Note If the Automatic New option is enabled on the Options screen the Create Customer screen will be opened automatically if an unknown Customer is entered If the Automatic New option is turned off when an unknown Customer is entered a prompt will ask if you want to use the Create New screen For more information on the enabling and disabling the Automatic New option please refer to the Options screen topic Complete the Item fields Next select the Item Number for the invent
273. eld Enter the code your company has defined for this transaction Item i Site Stez Ji Location i Trans Code fs Reason 8Y Adjust SE 3 09 em A S 5 Select either By Count or By Diff and enter an amount Click the down arrow in the By Count By Difference field to select one of these options By Count is used when a literal count has been made of inventory By Difference is used when you want to indicate the amount by which the inventory has increased or decreased For example if you have counted 15 of an item but the software indicates you have 16 select By Count and enter 15 If however the software indicates you have 16 items and you break one you can indicate this by entering By Diff and selecting a reason code that indicates breakage Keep in mind that you cannot enter negative numbers You must indicate whether the system should add or subtract quantity by selecting the appropriate Reason code Reason codes are defined for you later in this topic 475 InventoryControl Printable Help Item 1001 i By Diff a Adjust SE 3 10 Pm DA 6 The Reason field is only used when the adjustment is By Difference You do not need to use this field if you choose By Count If you do select By Difference in the Reason field you must enter a Reason Code Item Site Location Trans Code 55 Reason Breakage i 1001 i Site 2 i Location 3 i 2Y Adjust EI 3 11 Pm To search
274. elp 16 1 5 Notes on Importing Inventory The steps for importing inventory are the same as those listed above however there is some important information to be aware of when you are importing inventory e Importing data into the Inventory table is optional It is equivalent to manually adding inventory at the PC Quantity and Location data imported along with an Item Number increases Item quantities in the database You cannot remove inventory by importing negative quantities e The value specified in the Select Site screen From Site field can impact the Locations into which imported Inventory information will be recorded When something other than lt all gt is specified as your From site imported inventory will be put into Locations at the specified From Site If you have varying Site information you wish to import along with the Location and Quantity data for each Item Number you must make sure the From Site is set to lt all gt in Select Site before importing data into the Inventory table For further information on the Select Site screen please see the Select Site topic e item Number Quantity Site and Location are all required fields for Importing into the Inventory table If while importing Inventory data a previously unknown value for either Item Number Site Location or Supplier Code is read a new Item Number Site Location or Supplier Code will not be created using the new value Instead the Inventory record being importe
275. em checked out from three locations A B and C Location A will become the default location when the Item Number is entered Enter the Check In Location The locations included in the Locations drop down list are also limited by any other tracked by options that may have been enabled for this item Thus the listed locations will 1 Have an item Checked Out by the selected customer and 2 Match all other Track By options enabled for this item Using the previous example if the Track By Lot option is enabled and the Lot for the item at Locations A and B is 123 but the Lot for this item at Location C is 199 once you input 123 in the Lot field of the Check In screen only Locations A and B will be displayed in the Location drop list The default check in location can be replaced by selecting the location of choice from the drop down list lt More gt can be selected from the drop down list to select any location entering into the system This will cause the item to be Moved automatically to the selected location immediately after the check in Continuing with the example above if the item came from Location A but you want to check it into Location F click lt More gt and select Location F When the transaction is processed the item will be checked in to Location A and then moved to Location F automatically The Notes field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction Once you have entered the req
276. em you will inventory If a manufacturer is also your supplier for an Item it is best to add the company in the software as both a Manufacturer and a Supplier When you are setting up your software for the first time you may want to import your suppliers rather than adding them one at a time through this screen For information on importing information into your database please refer to the Import Into Database topic For examples of how specific business types setup their suppliers please refer to the topic Setting up Suppliers Business Examples Adding New Suppliers 1 From the Main Screen click New gt Suppliers OR From the Main Screen click Lists gt Suppliers Then click the New icon on the Supplier List The Create New Supplier screen appears 80 InventoryControl Printable Help ZE Create New Supplier Exes General Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Date Supplier Code Name Address Address Type Supplier Billing hd Address 1 Address 2 Mail Stop City State Postal Code Country Phone Fax Email Web Site Help Save Close 2 Enter information on this screen as needed The Supplier Code and Address Type fields are required all other fields are optional Supplier Codes cannot exceed 25 digits Make sure the Supplier Code is a number and the Supplier Description is the detailed description of the supplier The software provides you with the
277. en clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Supplier screen is identical to the New Supplier screen except all the information previously entered for the supplier appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Create New Supplier topic 6 8 Editing Manufacturers The Edit Manufacturer screen allows you to modify an existing manufacturer This screen is accessed from the Manufacturer List by highlighting a manufacturer in the list then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Manufacturer screen is identical to the New Manufacturer screen except all the information previously entered for the manufacturer appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Create New Customers topic 6 9 Editing Pick Orders Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Edit Pick Order screen allows you to modify an existing purchase order This screen is accessed from the Pick Order List by highlighting an item in the list then clicking the Edit button on th
278. en prompted for Location while doing a Remove for this Item Add 123 Monitor Location ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Remove for this Item to more than one Location Values entered for Item PO and Supplier if any will remain locked while looping on Location after entering them for the first Add Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a Qty of 10 were entered this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Add PO Supplier and Tracked By values if any for this second Remove will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop if any 123 Qty Location Total Qty 10 00000 F4 Done While looping on Location all that is required for each Remove are values for Qty and Location The Total Qty field is incremented each time a Remove is submitted while looping Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop Looping on Item Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the following example F3 was pressed when prompted for Item Remove Item S Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu 364 InventoryControl Printable Help Above the asterisk indicates the
279. en the transactions are Committed 8 Click Commit to submit the transaction s to your database 147 InventoryControl Printable Help 9 5 Checking In Inventory The Check In screen allows you to Check In inventory that has previously been Checked Out to one or more customers While checking in inventory does not actually add inventory quantity to an item it does free up that inventory to be checked out to another customer or to be included in a pick order Note for WaspNest Users This feature is not available in WaspNest Inventory For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Checking In Inventory 1 From the Main screen click the Inventory icon The Inventory menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Inventory menu click the Check In icon The Check In screen appears OR 1 From the Main screen select Lists gt Item The Item List appears 2 Highlight the item for which you want to check in inventory then click the Check In icon The Check In screen appears S Check In a Data Pending Transaction List 0 ltem Item Number Description Customer Quantity 10 Maximum 0 Track By Serial Number Date Code Lot Pallet Check In Location 4 Notes alg Check In 148 InventoryControl Printable Help Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pus
280. eneral Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Texts Premium Help Save l Close 23 InventoryControl Printable Help This field will also be seen in the Edit Customer screen 2 9 System Administrator Information Knowledge Base Available to Provide Answers and Solutions The Wasp Bar Code Knowledge Base is available to help you troubleshoot database issues To access the Knowledge Base go to www waspbarcode com support then select Knowledge Base Video Tutorials and Printed Manual The video tutorials can be found in the How to Videos folder and a PDF version of the printed manual can be found in the Quick Start Guides folder on your installation CD You can also access the video tutorials from the internet at www waspbarcode com videos Changing the System Administrator Password Can Affect Repair Installs The System Administrator database password must be blank If you change the System Administrator database password you will not be able to replace database files Supported Mobile Devices Data can be sent to the PC from any of the two supported devices the WDT2200 and Windows Mobile Devices including the WDT3200 WDT3200II and WPA206 24 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 3 Business Examples 3 1 About Our Business Examples Throughout the help topics you will see links to business examples These examples outline three hypothetical companies that represent generic business models an
281. er Location or Supplier drop down lists to open the Create New Item Create New Location or Create New Supplier screens Note If the Automatic New option is enabled on the Options screen the Create New Item Create New Location or Create New Supplier screens will be opened automatically if an unknown Item Number Location or Supplier is entered If the Automatic New option is turned off when an unknown Item Number Location or Supplier is entered a prompt will ask if you want to use the Create New screen For more information on enabling and disabling the Automatic New option please refer to the Options screen topic The No of Labels field determines the number of item labels that will be printed when the transaction is completed if the Print checkbox is selected The No of Labels value defaults to the Quantity value but can be modified The maximum number of labels for this field is 1000 The item label used for this function is named AddTransactionltemLabel lab and can be modified through the Labels interface 4 Complete the Track By fields As mentioned above the Track By fields are enabled based on the Item Number you enter If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item these fields will be disabled Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen Note The Track By fields are not available in WaspNest Inventory 5 Complete the
282. er screen allows you to modify an existing purchase order This screen is accessed from the Pick Order List by highlighting an item in the list then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Purchase Order screen is identical to the New Purchase Order screen except all the information previously entered for the order appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Creating a Pick Order topic 179 InventoryControl Printable Help 11 4 Pick Order List Example This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Pick Order List displays all active pick orders entered in the system Active pick orders are those that have a status of New New Over Due In Process or In Process Over Due Below is an example of the Pick Order List ZE Pick Order List fo bojes Tools Pwr Tr A H Filter New Edit Delete Print ExportTo File Group Bu Show Hidden Columns Due Date Order Number Order Date Reference No Customer No Customer Name Ship Via Ship Date 4 18 2007 0070413 0000010001 04 13 2007 James Bond Pm 4 22 2007 0070413 0000010004x 04 13 2007 1234 com222 UBS a 4 23 2007
283. er the Item Number of the item from which you want to remove inventory To enter an Item Number you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop down list to select an existing item from the first 10 Items shown there or select lt more gt to select an Item from the Item List You can only Remove quantity from items with quantity greater than 0 The Item Number list on this screen will not display or accept numbers that do not have quantity Entering an Item Number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description field and enables the following fields e Quantity unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number Set on the Add or Edit Item screens which fixes the Quantity to a value of 1 e Location e Any of the associated Tracked By fields Track by fields are not used for Kit items though the individual component items may have track bys e Customer e Notes You can use the drop down list of any enabled field to select an existing value for that field Note If the Automatic New option is enabled on the Options screen the Create New Customer screen will be opened automatically if an unknown Customer is entered If the Automatic New option is turned off when an unknown Customer is entered a prompt will ask if you want to use the Create New screen For more information on the enabling and disabling the Automatic New option please refer to the Options screen topic 4 Enter the Customer Select a Custo
284. er to Creating a Pick Order for more information on Manual items Note If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see a warning message if you attempt to Pick quantity from a Location that does not exist in the PDT database The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to the PDT About screen New Locations can only be created during Pick when the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press ESC to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings Picking Inventory on the Windows Mobile Device 1 From the Main Menu tap the Pick icon The Pick screen displays Order i Item O i Location i Date Code oo Serial Quantity
285. erprise Versions only For further information on Picking Orders please refer to the topic WDT2200 Picking Orders Notes e Removes can also be done at the PC using the Remove screen e Make sure the PDT s date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions e Source and or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT Please use the Site Config function to Select Source and Destination Sites ESC Exit Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function For more information on configuring sites on the PDT please refer to the topic WDT2200 Configuring Sites Topics discussed in this section are Removing Inventory Looping on Serial Number Looping on Location Looping on Item Number Looping on Track Bys Other than Serial Number Removing Inventory 1 The Remove function can be accessed by pressing the 2 key on the Main Menu Remove Item 123 Scan or key in value 351 InventoryControl Printable Help and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Press the PDT s Enter key after supplying an Item or press the PDT s ESC key to return to the Main Menu If the Item entered is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again as shown below Remove Item 9999999 Entry not
286. ers Pro and Enterprise Versions Only and Pick Orders Pro and Enterprise Versions Only to be downloaded to the device then click Next Select the Specify Filter button if you will be limiting the data Click the Hand icon to access the Find screen to search for data The data you select on the Find screen will be entered in the text box for that section and only that data will be sent to the mobile device Please refer to the Searching for Information topic for more information on the Find screen Select the Minimally Required checkbox to only send data that is required for normal operation For example if you select to send all Items but don t want to send all locations only those locations designated as Primary Locations for individual items will be sent Or if you don t want to send all Suppliers but some Suppliers are entered on the Item screen Managing Suppliers tab for items only those suppliers entered on the Item screen will be sent Tips for Filtering Information The default values apply no filtering to your data All Items will be selected including those which are not yet in a Location Site 398 InventoryControl Printable Help Source Specify lt all gt or one of the Sites listed in the drop down list This determines which Sites will be shown in the Source Site list on the mobile device This is the Site for all inventory transactions to be performed by the device If you want the device s database to include Ite
287. es given in the tables above to avoid truncation when using Import e Any field defined in the tables above that has a length of only one character expects one of the following values case insensitive o For False 0 F False No N o For True 1 T True Yes Y char Fixed length non Unicode character data with a maximum length of 8 000 characters datetime Date and time data from January 1 1753 through December 31 9999 with an accuracy of three hundredths of a second or 3 33 milliseconds Valid Alphabetic datetime Formats for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 date data characters enclosed in brackets are optional Apr 15 1996 mdy Apr 15 19 96 mdy Aert 1996 15 mdy 15 Aprfil 1996 dmy 15 Apr il J 19 96 dmy 15 19 96 apr il dmy 15 1996 april dmy 1996 APRIL 15 ymd 1996 15 APRIIL ymd Suggestion To avoid ambiguity use four digit years If the day is missing the first day of the month is supplied d Any of the alphabetic datetime formats shown above may be used as long as the format you select conforms to the year month and date sequence exhibited by the Long Date format in effect on your PC This can be found at Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Regional Options gt Date tab gt Long Date format 275 InventoryControl Printable Help For example if your Long Date format as shown in Regional Options is dddd
288. esc Site Loca Quantity Oldes Latest Pallet Lot PO Date Code Supplier Code Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Be ltem All Tr Site 1 iLoc 2 1 00 6718 2 6 18 2 i pal o no track Site 1 1 00 6 1872 no track Site 1 1 00 6 1872 no track Site 1 3 00 6 182 Creating Groups To create a new group click on a column header then drag it to the space indicated on the 116 InventoryControl Printable Help screen For example if you want to group information by Location click on the Location column header and drag it to the indicated space Item Number Item Desc Site L Quantity Oldes Latest Pallet Lot PO Date Code Supplier Code Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Location Loc 1 no track Site 1 Loc 1 1 00 6 18 2 6 18 20 1 20 00 100 00 if no track Site 1 Loc 1 3 00 6 182 6 18 20 po 1 20 00 100 00 Location Loc 2 wen Location LOCH 7 no track Site 1 LOCS 1 00 6 18 72 6 18 20 20 00 100 00 The screen now lists Location as one of your groups and the items are grouped according to what Location they are assigned You can create additional groups to further organize your information by continuing to drag and drop column headers By default the groups list information in ascending order Location 001 Location 002 etc You can change this to descending order by clicking on the group name Notice that after you click
289. ess Type from the drop down list After you enter the Supplier information you can click the Items at Minimum Stock Level button at the bottom of the screen The system will then check for any items for this supplier that are at or below their minimum stock levels and populate the purchase order with those items 3 Enter a Purchase Order Number Each purchase order is assigned a unique identifier consisting of an alpha numeric value up to 36 characters This number can be manually entered each time you create a new purchase order or you can create a template that the software will use to automatically generate a number for you If you have set up a template click the Generate button to have InventoryControl create and assign a PO number The template can contain any combination of custom text dates and or counters enabling you to create a unique identifier that is meaningful to your company For more information on setting up automatically generated Purchase Order Numbers please refer to the Formatting PO and Pick Order Numbers topic You should set up your numbers to contain a date field followed by a serialized count field at the very least 4 Select a Ship To Address using the drop down menu All address types you entered on the Company Information screen will appear in the list or you can select lt New gt to enter a new address Selecting lt New gt opens the Company Information screen allowing you to enter a new address For more
290. etting up your Supplier information here When the item is received InventoryControl will calculate the cost per item received 3500 20 175 00 You can enter multiple order units if needed When you are creating your purchase 71 InventoryControl Printable Help orders you can then select which one you want to use j When you are done entering supplier information click the Custom Texts or Custom Numbers and Dates tab these tabs are optional Deleting Suppliers from an Item a Highlight the supplier you want to delete from this item in the Supplier screen b Click the Delete button 5 3 6 Custom Text and Custom Numbers and Dates Tab For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs see Using Custom Fields 5 3 7 Saving the New Item When you have finished adding information click the OK Save button The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen e When the Close New Form option is turned off Click Save to commit your entry or click Close to exit the form e When the Close New Form option is turned on Click OK to commit your entry and exit the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry For more information about the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic 72 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 6 Automatic Serial Numbers You can choose to have the program automatically create and assign serial numbers ea
291. etwork printer you want to use on the Mobile Devices Wizard gt Windows CE Printing Setup screen 425 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 10 Tips for Setting Up and Using Windows Mobile Devices This section describes errors that may occur when setting up a wireless connection printing to a bluetooth printer and tips for getting various Wasp supported mobile devices up and running The information in this topic will help get you up and running with InventoryControl and InventoryControl RF on your wireless device For help with your device that is not related to InventoryControl or InventoryControl RF keep in mind that detailed instructions specific to your device can be found in the device manual The devices below are discussed in this section WDT3200 and WDT3250ll WPA1000 and WPA1000Il WDT1200 1250 1200ll 1250ll Other Devices 20 10 1 WDT3200 22001 3250 and 3250II Tips TIPS Enabling Bluetooth Setting up the 3200 and 3250II to Print to a Bluetooth Printer Setting up the 3200II to Print to a Bluetooth Printer ERRORS Bluetooth Locks Up Error Message System Net Sockets Socket Exception An error message is available for the exception but cannot be displayed because these messages are optional and are not currently installed on this device Please install NETCFv35 Messages EN wm cab to Windows Mobile Tip Enabling Bluetooth Navigate to Start gt Programs gt Bluetooth gt Bluetooth Power On 426 InventoryCont
292. ew icon The Create New Pick Order screen appears 175 InventoryControl Printable Help R Create New Pick Order kalkada Shipping Information Order Number Order Date Generate 6 19 2007 By LEI Status New Customer Due Date Notes DI o W A Customer Address Reference No D E3 Ship Via E Type Item No Request Qty Stocking Unit Description Inventory 1 00 Help Print On Save Email On Save Save Close Notice that the screen prominently displays the status as New This status message changes based on the state the order is in Possible statuses are e New This always displays when creating a new order e Issued Once the pick order is printed or emailed the status changes to Issued e In Process Once the order has started to be picked via the Pick Order screen accessed from the Receive Pick menu the status becomes In Process and the Picked Quantity will display for each item on the order e Overdue This status can appear for New or In Process orders that have passed the designated due date These orders will appear with a symbol on the Pick Order List to alert you of their overdue status e Closed This status means the order has been completed and marked as closed Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin 4 button located to the right of the field you want to lock Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can
293. exts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs see Using Custom Fields When you have finished adding information click the OK Save button The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen e When the Close New Form option is turned off Click Save to commit your entry or click Close to exit the form e When the Close New Form option is turned on Click OK to commit your entry and exit the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry For more information about the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic If a supplier with the same Supplier Code is found the message below will appear when you try to save Duplicate supplier code found Ex A supplier with the same supplier code already exists Please enter a different supplier code and try again Enter a different Supplier Code to continue 83 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 11 Creating a Kit Item Chapter 6 Editing Data 6 1 Editing Items The Edit Items screen allows you to modify an existing item This screen is accessed from the Item List by highlighting an item in the list then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Items screen is identical to the New Item screen except all the information previously entered for the item appears on the screen You can change any of this information For informa
294. f the Inventory Menu icons to go to that function Detailed descriptions of the options found on the Inventory Menu are provided below e Add The Add screen allows you to add inventory quantity to an item at a specified location This allows you to manually add quantity to an item rather than receiving the inventory through a fulfilled Purchase Order For more information on adding inventory please refer to the Adding Inventory topic For more information on receiving inventory please refer to the Receiving Inventory topic e Remove The Remove screen allows you to remove inventory quantity from an item ata specified location This allows you to manually remove quantity from an item rather than removing it through a pick order For more information on removing inventory please refer to the Removing Inventory topic For more information on pick orders please refer to the Creating Pick Orders topic 133 InventoryControl Printable Help Move The Move screen allows you to move inventory for an item from one Location to another When you add inventory quantity to an item you select in which location that quantity will reside The Move function allows you to move that inventory from the originally assigned location to another By moving inventory in the software you can easily keep accurate records of where all of your inventory is currently located For more information on the Move screen please refer to the Moving Inventory topic
295. f the Sites listed in the Destination drop down list This determines which Sites will be shown in the Destination Site list of the mobile device Site Configuration function and which locations will be listed in the Move To list This field will be grayed out with a value of lt all gt as shown above if only one Site is defined in InventoryControl or if a value of lt all gt has been specified for the Source Site If a specific Site has been selected for the Source Site that same site will be the default value for Destination Site but you can change the Destination Site to a different value using the drop down list Source Site lt all gt This value is forced to lt all gt when there is only one Site setup in the system A Specific Site A Specific Site Destination Site lt all gt This value is forced to lt all gt when lt all gt is specified as the Source Site Destination Site is the Same as the Source Site A Different Site The Source Sites Listed in the Mobile Device Site Configuration will Include All Sites The Specified Source Site The Specified Source Site The Destination Sites Listed in the Mobile Device Site Configuration will Include All Sites The Same Site The Specified Destination Site 7 As an example if you have more than two Sites and want to be able to move inventory from Site 1 to Site 2 and from Site 1 to Site 3 on the mobile device you
296. f the Tracked By fields pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field without first inputting a required Tracked By value a screen similar to the following will be displayed Please scan or key in Date Code ESC Exit Press ESC to exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value a Date Code in this example Looping on Serial Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key An asterisk displays next to the looped field If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item the Qty field will be set to 1 A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number Looping will determine the final count for this Adjust transaction as you scan or key in one or more Serial Numbers for this Item 1000066 Qty 1 SN Count 0 F4 Done As each SN is keyed in or scanned the Count will be increased Press ENT after inputting each serial number Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Adjust screen Notes When an Hem is tracked by Serial Number you can only loop on Serial Number When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping 332 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on Location Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the example below the F3 key was pre
297. f the location as well 2 4 3 Labeling Sites and Locations Every location where inventory can be stored in your warehouse should have a printed barcode securely attached near the location This is important because adding removing or moving inventory using the InventoryControl software requires a location All processes that require a location are both sped up and made more accurate if you use a barcode to identify each location Also using a consistent numbering scheme makes finding items in the warehouse much easier These labels can be stuck to the frame of the shelves attached to the bin put on a card and hung from the racks or even stuck to the floor as in the example below The first step for designing your labels is to decide on what type of label to print the barcode A variety of barcode label stock exists that can withstand any environment There are two kinds of barcode label 12 InventoryControl Printable Help printers Thermal transfer printers that work like an ink jet or laser printers that print by transferring ink from a ribbon to the label paper stock Direct Thermal printers do not have a ribbon but use heat to print onto a special label stock The thermal transfer printers are more expensive to operate but can print ona wider array of label stock and the labels last longer in various kinds of environments Direct thermal labels are cheaper but may fade if exposed to friction heat or direct sunlight Most barcode printers w
298. fied Source Site The Destination Sites Listed in the Mobile Device Site Configuration will Include All Sites The Same Site The Specified Destination Site 7 As an example if you have more than two Sites and want to be able to move inventory from Site 1 to Site 2 and from Site 1 to Site 3 on the mobile device you will have to create a mobile database for Source Site 1 and Destination Site 2 transfer the database to the mobile device use the device for those Moves send the information back to the PC then repeat the entire process beginning with by creating a second database to do Moves from Source Site 1 to Destination Site 3 Alternately if your device has enough memory to hold a database containing records for all of your Items at all Sites you can specify a Source value of lt all gt and then control Source Site and Destination Site on the mobile device see Windows Mobile Device Configuring Sites for more information 399 InventoryControl Printable Help Location From Specify lt all gt or use lt More gt from the drop list to find a specific Location at the Source Site that denotes the first in a range of Locations that will be included in the mobile database The last 10 Locations used will be also be listed in the From drop list Specifying lt all gt will include all Locations for the specified Source Site in the mobile Database To Specify lt all gt or click the Hand icon to find a specific
299. g the Make this the default Supplier while ordering this item checkbox Pro and Enterprise versions only When this is selected this supplier will automatically populate purchase orders for this item You can change the supplier on the purchase order if needed Any notes entered for this supplier will appear in the Notes section You can enter the supplier s unit of measure settings in the Order Unit Settings screen Pro and Enterprise versions only This is the unit used by the supplier when shipping this item This may be box pallet etc This is different from the Eaches stocking unit you entered on the Additional tab For example you may have entered jar for the stocking unit on the Additional tab but the supplier may ship the item in boxes containing 10 jars When creating purchase orders you would want to specify the Order Unit as box rather then jar or you could end up with 100 boxes of jars rather than 100 jars You can also enter the number of the item contained in each of the Order Units and the Cost of the Order Unit If you are tracking cost and have entered information in the Cost field General Tab and in the Stocking Unit field Additional Tab when you receive the item InventoryControl will do the math and will calculate the cost per item received For example if you order item Barcode Laser Scanners in boxes of 20 at 3500 but your stocking unit is each you need to specify the cost of a box of 20 when you are s
300. ge that you need to exit the InventoryControl application on the mobile device before proceeding 407 InventoryControl Printable Help 7 After checking to make sure the device is connected to your PC click Next A status bar will appear as the data is transferred A confirmation message appears after the transfer is complete Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Send Data to WindowsCE Data transfer complete You are now ready to use InventoryControl with the mobile device After you are finished working with the device you can click on the Mobile Device to PC tab to start retrieving the information that you ve collected on mobile device 8 Click Finish to close the Wizard screen Mobile Device Procedure On the mobile device you will see a message similar to the following x Click OK to process the data records from the PC to be inserted into the application database InyentoryGontrol Click OK to insert the records into the mobile database InventoryControl automatically starts on the device after the transfer See the Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 408 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 8 4 Batch Windows Mobile Device Retrieving Data from the Device The Send Data to PC function enables you to send data from the mobile device to your PC You will use this function after you have perf
301. gin 7 New 7 Allow PC Login Li Pick V Audit J Process Mobile Device Data Backup and Restore 2 Receive Build Assembly J Remove Inventory 2 Check In J Reports d Check Out V Delete d Disassemble Please select the sites that Joe Rumigan can access 1 SelectAl _ Select None Site Description EE FOE E User can access d current and future sites seven tance Help Close Within the warehouses there are several workers who will be using mobile devices to add and remove inventory and to perform audits These workers will use InventoryControl exclusively on the mobile device and will not need to log on to the PC These workers only need access to specific locations On the next page is an example of the warehouse worker s Security screen 28 InventoryControl Printable Help RA Security Privileges a Eile Edit User List Security Settings Admin User Doe John Privileges Select All l Select None Example Pat 7 Add Inventory E Edit Rumigan Joe rd Adjust Inventory NI Labels 1 Administration Privilege V Move F Allow Mobile Device Login W New E Allow PC Login F Pick 7 Audit E Process Mobile Device Data E Backup and Restore 14 Receiv E Build Assembly y V Check In E Reports 7 Check Out E Delete E Disassemble Please select the sites that John Doe can access Select All l Select None Site Description v 200 300
302. grading on the Main screen This software contains easy to use List screens that allow you to view and access a variety of information quickly Screens that use the list view are Customer Manufacturer Item Location Site Supplier Inventory Transaction Purchase Order and Pick Order Each of these screens can be accessed by clicking the Lists icon on the Main screen ch Customer Lists Manufacturer em Ep Item Find Ld Location EI Site Es Supplier Labels CA Inventory PA Transactions Fes Purchase Order D Dick Order Note These screens all function the same however individual options may vary for each screen This topic covers how to use all possible functions available on the list screens Keep in mind that not all list screens contain all functions mentioned here 112 InventoryControl Printable Help Below is an example of the basic list screen layout This is an example of the Inventory List This screen can be divided into three sections labeled A through C in the example below A Toolbar B Contents List C Buttons In addition to these menus there are also Context Sensitive Menus that appear when you right click on certain areas of the screen These provide another way to access many of the functions available in the toolbar These types of menus are also discussed later in this section Note The Check In Out functions do not apply to WaspNest Inventory TNT Inventory List PY amp ZS nn LT A
303. have multiple Kit Items on hand Inventory amounts for the component parts are reduced when the Kit Item is Removed from inventory Kit Item Example Here is an example of the workflow for creating a Kit Item John s Computer Store sells custom configured computers While he keeps all components monitors keyboards CPUs Printers etc in stock he tracks each of these as separate items When a customer buys a computer he or she designates which monitor is needed which printer etc John then creates a Kit Item in InventoryControl made up of the selected components The Kit Item goes onto his Inventory List with zero quantity and stays that way until he Removes it which would be the time of customer pick up or shipping At the time of Removal the quantity for each component item is reduced and the Kit Item is completely removed from the Item List Kit Items should not be confused with Pick Orders Pick Orders can contain many unrelated items Kit Items are a group of items that make up a new item as in the Computer Store example Kit Items can be included on Pick Orders Flow of Kit Items 1 Create the Kit Item Use the Create New Item screen to create your kit item When you access the Create New Item screen for Kit items there will be a tab labeled Kitting Information Use this tab to designate which items you want included in this Kit Item Keep in mind that inventory amounts for the component items are not changed when you create the
304. he Line Item Details section Complete this information as follows e Type Select the type of item you are ordering Options are o Inventory This item is already in your inventory database Use this to re order existing items o Non Inventory This item is not listed as inventory in your database Use this to order items for which you do not want to track quantity such as marketing fliers or business cards o Manual Use this option to add one time items such as shipping and handling to an order Manual items cannot be received on the mobile devices e Item Number Enter the Item Number of the item you want to order To enter an Item Number you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop down list to see the first 10 items in the database select lt more gt on the drop down list to see all items in the Item List When you enter an Item Number the Description field populates e Description This field populates after the item number is entered This field can only be edited if Manual was selected in the Type field If you need to change the description you can do so on the Edit Item screen e Vendor SKU This field populates after the item number is entered if a SKU was entered on the Add Edit Item screen for this vendor This field can only be edited if Manual was selected in the Type field 190 InventoryControl Printable Help Ordered QTY Enter the quantity you are ordering of this item Thi
305. he inventory will be checked back in The check out function is useful if you lease equipment to customers or have a need to temporarily loan out inventory Note for WaspNest Users This feature is not available for WaspNest Users For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen You can only check out inventory that has been added This means that when you create an item you must add inventory quantity to it before you can check out that item to a customer Remember that inventory is the amount or quantity of an item You can add inventory to an item either on the Add Inventory screen or by Receiving inventory Checking Out Inventory 1 From the Main screen click the Inventory icon The Inventory menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Inventory menu click the Check Out icon The Check Out screen appears OR 1 From the Main screen select Lists gt Item The Item List appears 2 Highlight the item for which you want to check in inventory then click the Check Out icon The Check Out screen appears 152 InventoryControl Printable Help IS Check Out Ea Data Pending Transaction List 0 Customer Customer X A Item Item Number II Quantity 00 A Description Maximum 0 Location 4 Track By Serial Number Date Code 4 Lot A Pallet 4 Due Date Notes alg Check Out Help Canc
306. he item you are receiving in the Item field Receive PO 00001 Item 1002 gt Details box 10 10 Location fs i Ze Receive Ze r 12 03 rm A In the example above Item 1002 is being received The Details section displays the shipping unit of measure how many of the item is contained in the shipping unit of measure eaches and the cost information Cost only displays if the Show 462 InventoryControl Printable Help Costing Information During Receive option is enabled on the PC Options screen For more information on this option please refer to the Options Screen topic You can expand the Details section by tapping the blue arrow next to word Details If there is more than one possible order unit the Details section will open automatically and you must pick one of the UOM entries to receive An example of the expanded section is shown below Receive PO 00001 i Item 1002 i Details box 10 10 Tee box 10 i 2Y Receive ESE gt 12 09 PM Lo E In this example each box contains 10 items and costs 10 per item 100 00 per box Enter the Site and Location into which the Item is to be received Receive PO 00001 Item 1002 i gt Details box 10 10 Location Y Receive EE 12 08 Pm La E 463 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 Enter the Quantity of the Item to be received Keep in mind that you should enter the Order Unit of measure here For instance if you are receive 1 box of 10 en
307. he number of decimal places allowed when a value was stored the value will be displayed with trailing zeros For example if a value of 25 5 was stored when Decimal Places was set to 1 it will be displayed as 25 500 if Decimal Places is later set to 3 If the number of decimal places currently allowed is Jess than the number of decimal places allowed when a value was stored the value as displayed will be rounded For example if a value of 25 5 was stored when Decimal Places was set to 1 it will be displayed as 26 if Decimal places is later set to 0 Values rounded for display at the currently specified number of Decimal Places will retain their original number of decimal places as stored in the database Enter a value within the range 0 through 4 15 6 10 Enforce Date Code as a True Date When this option is selected any dates entered into InventoryControl must be in the format mm dd yyyy 15 6 11 Item Cost When Add Inventory from Mobile Device Turn this option on to use the item s average cost when adding from a mobile device Leave this option off default to use the item s set cost when adding from a mobile device Average Cost is the cost of an item over time including any discounts price increases etc The Item Cost is the value you have entered on the Create New Edit Item screen gt General Tab 243 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 6 12 Packing Slip for Session The packing slip that can be printed and or emailed upon
308. hes meaning you should enter how you want each item of this type to be measured Examples bag barrel basket block bottle box carton container drum gallon jar pack package pallet section tub vial etc You will have the opportunity on the Managing Suppliers tab to enter the Order Unit used by the supplier for shipping purposes Box Pallet Lot etc The Order Unit will be used when creating Purchase Orders rather than the Eaches UOM that is entered on this tab Please see the Managing Suppliers Tab section below Dimension Unit is the increment to be used for Length Width and Height Examples inch foot yard millimeter centimeter meter etc Length is the length of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units Width is the width of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units 168 InventoryControl Printable Help Height is the height of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units Weight Unit is the increment to be used for mass Examples ounce pound ton milligram gram kilogram metric ton etc Weight is the mass of one Unit of Measure expressed in Weight Units File Reference is used to record the path to a relevant file that might be an image file documentation specifications etc This field does not function as a hyperlink It s just a static field where a filename or path and filename can be recorded Add Notes allows you to record any additional information 10 2 4 Cust
309. his button or hit the F1 key on your keyboard to access this help document Close Click this button to close the List Keep in mind when closing the list that your groups and column settings will be retained 8 1 4 Context Sensitive Menus The software provides you with a toolbar for quick access to various list features and in addition many of these features can also be accessed via context sensitive menus By right clicking on a column heading a list of available features appears as shown below Note that not all options shown below are available on all screens Quant ae ams Sort ASC Sort DESC D zb F Group By This Column Show Grouping Hide Column Hidden Columns Any changes you make to the list via this menu will be retained when the screen is closed and re opened This menu allows you to Sort ASC Select this option to sort the column in ascending order A through Z or 1 through 10 etc Sort DESC Select this option to sort the column in descending order Z through A or 10 through 1 etc Group By this Column Select this option to group the screen by the selected column Please see Section A Toolbar above for more information on grouping Show Grouping Select this option to show the groups selected for this list screen Please see Section A Toolbar above for more information on grouping 121 InventoryControl Printable Help Hide Columns The list allows you to hide columns by right clicki
310. hpin 4 button located to the right of the field you want to lock This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Adds at one Location for example Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field The Add button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these add transactions to the Pending Transaction List Clicking the Fi button will unlock the field 3 Complete the Item fields To Check In Inventory first enter the Item Number of the inventory item you want to Check In To input an Item Number you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop down list to select an existing item from the Item List Entering an item number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description and Check In Location and will enable the following fields e Quantity unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number Set on the Add or Edit Item screens which fixes the Quantity to a value of 1 e Any of the associated Tracked By fields Serial Number Date Code Lot or Pallet Set on the Add or Edit Item screens A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the item is created Below is an example of the Check In screen with the fields enabled BE Check In CS Data Pending Transaction List 0 ltem Item Number mA 4 ral 1525 W 5th St Description Sp i inch DH Hamster
311. ial number the Serial field will remain on the screen but other fields such as Date Code and Pallet will no longer display If you enter an Item that is not tracked by anything all tracking fields Lot Date Code Serial and Pallet will no longer display e Enter the Transaction Code in the Trans Code field This is a free form text field Enter the code your company has defined for this transaction 479 InventoryControl Printable Help e Enter the Quantity Item i Site i Location i Trans Code Qty H 8 Audit SB 5 24 rm A S Tap OK The Audit Item is entered and the screen resets ready for the next Item Note that when the screen resets only the fields used for the Item you just entered display To reset the screen so that all available fields display tap Reset When you have finished entering Items for the Audit close the Audit screen by tapping the Close button To send the Audit information to the PC use the Send PC Data option See Windows Mobile Device Send PC Data for full details on this process Returning to normal mode on the Windows Mobile Device 1 After sending the Audit data to the PC and processing the data on the PC side on the PC select Tools gt Audit gt End Audit A confirmation message displays 2 Select Yes on the confirmation screen InventoryControl returns to normal mode on the PC 3 Next create a new mobile database then synchronize the database with the Pocke
312. ield of the Add Remove Check In Check Out Adjust and Audit functions It will also determine the locations available in the From Location field of the Move function Only locations within the Site selected in the Source field will be available for these functions Destination determines the locations available in the Move function s To Location field Remember you are selecting Sites on this screen When you select a site you are limiting the inventory functions to locations within that site For information on adding new sites please refer to the Creating a New Site topic For information on adding new locations please refer to the Creating New Locations topic A Note on Importing The site specified in the Destination field of the Select Site screen can impact the Locations into which imported inventory will be recorded When something other than lt all gt is specified as your Source site imported inventory will be put into Locations at the specified Source If you have varying site information you wish to import along with the location and quantity data for each Item Number you must make sure the Source is set to lt all gt before importing data into the Inventory table This topic discusses How to Select Sites Source and Destination Examples 4 6 1 How to Select Sites 1 From the Main Screen select Tools gt Select Site The Select Site screen appears Select Site Source all gt Destination s
313. ier and any Tracked By fields other than Serial Number will remain locked after entering them for the first Move Qty ltem Count 25 F4 Done 348 InventoryControl Printable Help Above having pressed F3 when prompted for Item and then having entered the item number and values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a value of 25 for Qty this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item inputs for the second Move The Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Move transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop While looping on Item all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item The Count is incremented each time an Move is done while looping 7 Press the ENT key to submit the Move transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop d When looping on Item all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be reset Looping on a Tracked By other than Serial Number Here for example F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing an Move for this Item Move 123 Monitor Pallet S ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Move for this Item for more than one Pallet Values entered for Item Location PO Su
314. iews Distributing Enterprise Version of InventoryControl Basic Needs Multiple Sites and Locations Multiple computers running InventoryControl Multiple mobile devices in each Location Preferred suppliers for items Item tracking by serial number and pallet code Pick Receive Move Adjust Add Remove and Audit at the PC and on the mobile devices Sebastian Distributing has been in business for many years and has previously used a different inventory software They have a great deal of inventory in multiple warehouses that they need to manage with InventoryControl Each warehouse will be a site with multiple locations The supervisor of each warehouse will use a computer equipped with InventoryControl but the general manager will be the one who has full administrative privileges In addition they have preferred suppliers they would like to associate with each item in their system and will be creating pick and purchase orders as needed To accommodate all of these needs they have purchased the Enterprise version of InventoryControl Workers in the warehouses will be issued handheld mobile devices to scan barcode labels when receiving goods from suppliers and picking goods for shipment 25 InventoryControl Printable Help Fleet Professional Version of InventoryControl Basic Needs Multiple Sites Multiple Locations One PC running InventoryControl One mobile device at each Site Inventoried and Non Inventoried Items Track some
315. if authentication is required for outgoing mail and the SMTP Port on the Options screen If these are not set an error message will appear For more information on setting these email options on the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic e tems at Minimum Stock Level To help you keep track of items that are in danger of becoming understocked InventoryControl has an automatic notification system built in Click the Items at Minimum Stock Level to view a list of all items that are currently at their minimum stock levels and whose default supplier is the supplier selected for this purchase order To use this feature make sure you turn on the Automatic Notification option via the Options screen then enter a quantity in the Minimum Stock Level field on the Create New or Edit Item screen Location tab 12 Click Save to save this purchase order to the database 12 3 Editing Purchase Orders Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Edit Purchase Order screen allows you to modify an existing purchase order This screen is accessed from the Purchase Order List by highlighting an item in the list then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Purchase Order screen is i
316. ile device installed a menu will appear allowing you to select which device you will be working with If you have only one type the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen On the Mobility Menu select Retreive Data From The Receive Data from PDT function can be accessed via the Mobile Devices gt PDT gt WDT2200 gt Receive Data from PDT menu item Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Receive Data From YWYDT2200 This step will transfer all transactions performed on the mobile device back to the PC where they can then be processed Step 1 of 2 304 InventoryControl Printable Help The following conditions must be true before proceeding e The WDT2200 must be powered on and connected to the PC s serial port e The InventoryControl Log On screen must be displayed on the PDT Logout if the PDT is still running the InventoryControl program If you attempt to Receive Data From PDT while InventoryControl is running on the PDT you will receive a message that you need to logout of the program on the PDT then try again After logging out of inventoryControl on the PDT click the Back button to restart the dialog Click the Next button to start the transfer d If no inventory transactions were performed on the PDT since the last time data was transferred to or from the PDT the following message will be displayed Setup Mobile Device Create Mo
317. ill print both thermal transfer and direct thermal You want a printer that will do both because what you are using the label for will determine if you should use thermal transfer or the direct thermal You may need both kinds of labels available for printing For all kinds of organizations you may want to consider using the cheaper direct thermal labels for identifying individual items because you will put them on the packaging of items that will be discarded by the consumer or on item tags used to identify the item at removal time Use the cheaper label stock when it will be used and discarded It is often cheaper to reprint a few labels on the cheaper stock if one label is damaged than to use the more expensive stock You should label your warehouse locations with labels that will last and can take some abuse because you don t want to have to continually reprint and replace these labels If your labels contain information you want to be permanent such as serial numbers you should use thermal transfer labels on a high quality label stock or perhaps polypropoline and a resin ribbon The importance of the label will determine what stock it is printed on A serial number that you use for returns or contract maintenance needs to be readable for a long time If your labels will be exposed to heat because of the device they are attached to or through exposure to the sun you should use thermal transfer labels For most locations ina fleet vehicle you sho
318. imal 9 15 4 Custom Number 2 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 3 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 4 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 5 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Text 1 varchar 100 Custom Text 2 varchar 100 Custom Text 3 varchar 100 InventoryControl Printable Help Custom Text 4 varchar 100 Custom Text 5 varchar 100 Custom Text 6 varchar 100 Custom Text 7 varchar 100 Custom Text 8 varchar 100 Custom Text 9 varchar 100 Custom Text 10 varchar 100 Customer No varchar 30 Date Added datetime 8 Department varchar 20 Email varchar 250 FAX varchar 20 Home Phone varchar 20 Name varchar 100 Notes varchar 1000 Phone varchar 20 Cell Phone varchar 20 Customer Billing Address varchar 100 1 Customer Billing Address varchar 100 2 Customer Billing City varchar 50 Customer Billing State varchar 50 Customer Billing Postal varchar 10 Code Customer Billing Country varchar 50 Customer Billing Mail varchar 20 Drop Note You may have multiple address information for shipping mailing etc 16 4 2 Inventory Import Format Field Name Data Type Size Precision Scale Date Acquired datetime 8 Date Code varchar 25 Item Description varchar 255 Item Number varchar 31 Location varchar 30 Lot varchar 25 Pallet varchar 25 PO varchar 25 Quantity decimal 9 18 4 Serial Number varchar 25 270 InventoryControl Printable Help Site varchar 50 Supplier Code varchar 30 16 4 3 Item Import Format Field Name Data Type Size Precision Scale Alt Item N
319. important that you do not enter any information into the Sample Company that you do not want to lose The Sample Company is meant for training purposes only and should not be used as your working database Accessing and Using the Sample Company On the Log In screen login as usual making sure you select the Use Sample Database checkbox InventoryControl opens with InventoryControl Wasp Inventory Sample Inc displayed in the title bar Kaz InventoryC ontrol Wasp Inventory Sample Inc le DO Ce Dein InventoryControl Printable Help You can use the software as normal once logged in You can create additional items and add inventory check inventory in and out create purchase orders and pick orders etc On reports the company name and each address line will be followed by trial Mobile devices are not supported by the sample database 1 4 Set Up Cycle Overview After you finish installing your software using the InventoryControl Quick Start Guide as a reference you will need to set up your system by entering information into the software This is referred to as a cycle because in multi warehouse installations you will need to repeat steps 3 7 for each site The set up process may take hours or even days depending on the size of your organization While this may seem overwhelming keep in mind that the return on this time investment will pay off quickly These steps will result in a complete and accurate count of inventory that
320. in the inventory quantity being Removed and press ENT to complete the Remove transaction The Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than zero If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see the following message if you attempt to Remove more quantity than that which is available for this Item at the specified Location Available 83 0000 Not enough qty avail able to complete the transaction ESC Exit Press ESC and enter a value that does not exceed the Available amount If this Item does have Tracked By enabled for Date Code Pallet or Lot fields a screen like the one below will be shown expecting input for each Tracked By field that s enabled Remove 100006 Paint Can Pallet ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field without first inputting a required Tracked By value a screen similar to the following will be displayed Please scan or key in Pallet ESC Exit Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value a Pallet in this example 362 InventoryControl Printable Help Note You can press the F2 key to view the last Serial Number entered If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices options is disabled and a Tracked By value that does not match a value associated w
321. information on the Company Information screen please refer to the 189 10 InventoryControl Printable Help Entering Company Information topic Enter a Reference Number for this Purchase Order optional The Order Date defaults to today s date You can change this date by clicking the button next to the field and selecting a new date Select a Due Date for this Purchase Order You can type in a date or click the button next to the field and select a date Select the preferred Ship Method for this order from the drop down list This list contains several commonly used shipping methods however you can type in a new shipping method if desired The new entry will appear in the drop down list for future purchase orders Select the Payment Method from the drop down list This list contains several commonly used shipping methods however you can type in a new shipping method if desired The new entry will appear in the drop down list for future purchase orders Note If you need to delete a Ship or Payment Method you have entered you can do so on the Manage Ship Methods or Manage Payment Methods screens These screens also allow you to Print Export and Add New methods For more information on the Manage Ship Methods screen please refer to the Managing Shipping Methods topic For more information on the Manage Payment Methods screen please refer to the Managing Payment Methods topic Now you are ready to enter your item information in t
322. ing These numbers are provided by Medical the Supplies manufacturer to Pharmaceuticals indicate from which batch Food products these items were made Date Code track Food the expiration or other use by date Chemicals Manufacturing Supplies Building Supplies Pallet refers to the pallet from which the item was received 63 InventoryControl Printable Help You can choose to have the program automatically create and assign serial numbers each time you add inventory for this item whether manually using the Add Inventory feature or by Receiving Inventory For example you create the item 2233 VZ Laptop and select to track by serial number You the enable automatic serial numbers by performing the steps described here You choose 1000 as your starting number Now when you add inventory to this item InventoryControl will automatically assign serial number to each item starting with 1000 If you add inventory of 500 to this item the serial numbers assign by InventoryControl will be 1000 1500 To enable Automatic Serial Numbers e Click the button to the right of the Serial Number check box The Auto Serial Number Options screen is displayed Automatic 2 Auto Serial Number Options ESCH Serial Numbers Auto Increment Serial Numbers Does not apply to WaspNest Starting Number 1000 Help Cancel Check the Auto Increment Serial Numbers checkbox to have the software automatically assign inc
323. ing out of one or more Sites For example the Site might be Docking 1 with locations of Vehicle 1 Vehicle 2 etc A retail business might have multiple Locations at one Site or multiple Locations within each of several Sites InventoryControl has the flexibility to be configured however it best suits your business needs Remember that though you must have at least one site containing one location you could have multiple sites that contain multiple locations There is no limit to the number of locations you can assign to a site It is important to note that you can have the same Location code defined at more than one Site for instance Warehouse 1 and Warehouse 2 may each have Location codes of Shelf 1 so always pay attention to which Site you are working with when performing Inventory transactions Setting up your locations now will allow you to just pick a location from a list when you begin adding inventory later It is possible however to define locations as you add inventory If you would prefer to do this skip to Step 6 Enter Suppliers If you already have location information contained in another database you may want to use InventoryControl s Import function rather than manually entering in this information For additional information on formatting your Location numbers and descriptions please refer to the topic Barcode Best Practices 1 8 Step Four Add Users Add Users You should enter all users who will be using the s
324. inventory by serial number Pick Receive Move Adjust Add Remove and Audit at the PC and on the mobile devices Rusty s Cable Service has been using a different inventory software They consider the vehicles to be sites with one location and a storage facility is another site with multiple locations Most of their inventory is kept in the vehicles They are looking for a way to easily set up this site location relationship and to keep track of inventory as it comes into the storage facility is transferred to the vehicles and is sold to a customer Their inventory consists of items that will eventually be sold to customers such as cable boxes remotes and various types of cable as well as items that will remain in inventory such as tools and other installation equipment In addition they have non inventory items such as pamphlets and cable guides They want the ability to track cable boxes and remotes by serial number They also want to equip each driver with a mobile deice that can be used to add remove move and adjust items as needed Mid sized Reseller Standard Version of InventoryConirol Basic Needs e One Site Multiple Locations e One PC running InventoryControl e No mobile devices but a barcode scanner is used at the PC e Add Remove Adjust Move and Audit The example used here is an antique reseller but this information applies to many different types of businesses such as second hand shops hobby shops beauty salons etc
325. isplaying the associated transactions created when an Assembly Item was Assembled added Notice that the Assembly Item s Add transaction is listed in the top grid and the associated Remove transactions for each item 118 InventoryControl Printable Help included in the Assembly Item is listed in the bottom grid Transaction Li Tools PYe A Ds Fiter Toggle Print Export To File GroupBy Hidden Columns Print Labels In some cases such as kit removal item assembly and disassembly one transaction e assemble of one item may cause several other transactions removal of component items to occur behind the scene This screen is to provide you with a complete view of the associated transactions The top level of the transaction is listed in the first grid The associated transactions on the component items are shown in the second grid Trans Date Trans Type Item Number Item Description Quantity Entry Date Date Acquired Due Date Cost 3 8 2011 Desktop Unit 200 2 3 8 2011 3 8 2011 Trans Date Trans Type ltem Number Item Description Quantity Entry Date Date Acquired Due Date Cosi 3 011 103 2 3 8 2011 101 101 1 3 8 2011 101 1 3 8 2011 Mouse Remove Remove Remove 3 8 2011 To return to the full list of Transactions click the Close button 8 1 2 Section B Contents List The contents list displays all data related to the selected list Fo
326. ith inventory available at the previously specified Location is entered the following screen will be displayed No item with this tr ackby specific in st ock ESC Exit If Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices is enabled any Tracked By value is allowed Press Esc to Exit the error message and then provide a Tracked By value that matches inventory in stock at the specified Location Looping on Serial Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key An asterisk displays next to the looped field If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item the Qty field will be set to 1 A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number Looping will determine the final count for this Add transaction as you scan or key in one or more Serial Numbers for this Item 1000066 Qty 1 SN Count 0 F4 Done As each SN is keyed in or scanned the Count will be increased Press ENT after inputting each serial number Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Remove screen Notes e When an Item is tracked by Serial Number you can only loop on Serial Number e When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping Looping on Location Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key 363 InventoryControl Printable Help In the example below the F3 key was pressed wh
327. ittle quantity is accidentally entered for an item on a mobile device for example inventory is lost found broken etc and you need to quickly correct the quantity for that item Adjusting is different from an Audit in that the Audit function makes other functions of the software such as adding inventory unavailable to ensure inventory is not added or removed while you are doing the counts All features are still available when adjusting inventory Note An item tracked by Serial Number which has been Checked Out cannot be Adjusted This topic covers Adjusting Inventory Duplicate Serial Numbers Warning 9 7 1 Adjusting Inventory 1 From the Main screen click the Inventory icon The Inventory menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Inventory menu click the Adjust icon The Adjust screen appears 156 InventoryControl Printable Help Z Adjust EENG Data Pending Transaction List o ltem Number Serial Number sales Description Lot Location Date Code E Quantity S Pallet 0 00 St 3 E By Counts By Difference Transaction Code Reason HEI Found sl Notes e Pinal 1 ren i Adjust e canca Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin HU button located to the right of the field you want to lock This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Adds at one Location for example ushpins can be used to l
328. ive Pro and Enterprise Versions Only screens 1 2 On the Add screen enter the data for the Item you want to add In the Location field enter the new Location you want to add Item PO Supplier Qty Reset OK Close FET SE 2 40 Pm A 440 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 Click OK The following message displays i InyentoryGontrol gt Location does not exist wy Do you want to add this new location Location 4 4 Click Yes The fields are now reset in the Add screen If no errors display this indicates that both the addition of the Location and the Item were successful 5 To verify that the addition was successful enter the Site with which the Location you added is associated then tap the Search icon next to the Location field 6 The Search Locations screen displays and the Location you added displays in the Location list Search Locations Location Location 1 Location 2 Location 3 Location 4 HY Search Loc 3s E 2 47 Pm GA S See the Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 441 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 11 6 Windows Mobile Device Adding New Suppliers You can add new Suppliers in InventoryControl on the Windows Mobile Device New Suppliers can only be added in the Add screen Notes e You will only be able to add a Supplier for an Item that is tracked by supplier e The new Sup
329. jet printer You want the barcode label to be high quality because low quality barcodes are 10 InventoryControl Printable Help harder to scan and usually do not last long InventoryControl is bundled with Wasp Labeler which can print to a regular printer or a barcode printer Remember to keep plenty of extra label stock and printer ribbons to make sure you never run out To determine how to best provide good quality labels for daily use consider the kind of printer you are using 2 3 Choosing a Label Printer Organizations that have several hundred new inventory items a week will need to have a dedicated barcode label printer at each site They should use a good quality label media and use the feature built into InventoryControl that automatically prints inventory tags as soon as the item is received on the PC The printer needs to be rates for several hundred labels a day and needs to print fast enough to avoid costly slowdowns that can be caused when waiting to put away items after they are received because the labels are not printed Look for models that can print 4 6 inches per second and can handle media up to 4 wide Wasp s WPL606 line of printers work well in warehouse conditions Many organizations will not need a high end printer but will still save money and will get better quality long lasting labels if they use a desktop barcode label printer These printers allow you to print one or a hundred labels without waste and they are quicke
330. ked By other than Serial Number Here for example F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing a Receive for this Item Receive 123 Monitor Pallet ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next 384 InventoryControl Printable Help An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Receive for this Item for more than one Pallet Values entered for Item Location PO Supplier and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet after entering them for the first Receive 123 Qty Pallet Total Qty 30 00000 F4 Done Above having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first Receive this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Receive Item Location PO and Supplier values for this second Receive will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop While looping on this Tracked By field all that is required for each Receive are values for Qty and Pallet The Total Qty is incremented each time an Receive is submitted while looping 7 Press the ENT key to submit the Receive transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop When looping on a Tracked By field all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be restarted Tips for Speeding Up Data Entry e When y
331. ks the locations may be containers in the truck When deciding how to label each location choose a numbering scheme that can be interpreted when reading just the label For example if you have 7 rows of 5 shelves each and each shelf has four levels your barcode label scheme should look like A010200 or row A shelf 01 level 02 bin 00 If you have inventory on trucks in containers the truck can be a site and each bin in the truck is a location Puta barcode label on the inside of the truck door so the person moving inventory into or out of the truck can just scan and move The barcode label should have the barcode and the human readable text InventoryControl Printable Help description of the location as well A distribution business for example typically places inventory at a specific location in one or more warehouses InventoryControl requires that you define at least one Site containing at least one Location If you have multiple warehouses you can set each one up as a Site then create multiple locations within each site to represent the specific areas where you will be storing inventory For instance you might setup a Site as Warehouse 1 containing Locations Shelf 1 Shelf 2 and Shelf 3 A fleet business might define each vehicle as a Site with multiple Locations bins for example within each vehicle In this case you could setup a Site as Vehicle 1 with Locations of Bin1 Bin2 and Bin3 Or each vehicle could be a single Location operat
332. l p Customer does not exist Se Do you want to add this new customer New Customer 439 InventoryControl Printable Help Click Yes The fields are now reset in the Remove screen If no errors display this indicates that both the removal of the Item and the addition of the Customer were successful To check tap the Search icon i next to the Customer field The Search Customers screen displays and the Customer you added displays in the Customer list See the Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 20 11 5 Windows Mobile Device Adding a New Location You can add new Locations in InventoryControl on the mobile device However you cannot add new Sites New Locations can be added in the Add Remove Move Adjust Pick Pro and Enterprise Versions Only and Receive Pro and Enterprise Versions Only screens on the mobile device Notes You can only add a new Location if the Allow Negative Quantities on the Mobile Device option is enabled on the Options screen on the PC For more information on this option please refer to the Options Screen topic The new Location will not be added unless the data for all other fields is completed correctly and the function Add Remove Move etc is successfully completed Adding a New Location In this example a new Location Location 4 will be added in the Add screen The steps are the same for the Remove Move Adjust and Rece
333. l Information Tab The General Information tab is where you will enter the basic information about the item Please see the screen shot above for an example of this tab To create the item enter information in the provided fields Much of this information is optional You can be as detailed as you need but at a minimum you must enter the Item Number Below are descriptions of each field on this tab The Item Number is often available on a barcode label already attached to the item such as a UPC code or SKU number Using an existing barcode for the Item Number allows you to scan or manually enter the number from each item as it comes in without having to print and affix your own barcode inventory item labels Item numbers in InventoryControl cannot exceed 31 characters Do not use a description as the item number You should enter a numeric value in the Item Number field A description of the item can be entered in the Description field Item Number Required Automatic Item Numbers If you have the Automatic Item Numbers option selected on the Options screen the Item Number field will appear populated with the next number in the sequence For example if you just created item number 1001 the next number will be 1002 For further information on this option please refer to the Options Screen topic A Category is an optional classification you can give to your items This provides you with another way to group your items For example you
334. l Number and you have not entered a Serial Number in the Serial field The Serial Number you entered is not the correct Serial Number by which the Item you entered is tracked A Serial Number that does not exist has been entered in the Serial field If a Serial Number is required you must enter the Serial Number by which the entered Item Number is tracked Sites Site does not exist This message displays if you enter a Site that is not in the database You cannot create Sites on the mobile device You can only create Sites on the PC side You must either select another Site or create the new Site on the PC side download this new data to the device and then select it on in the appropriate screen on your mobile device Stock Messages There is not enough quantity in stock to complete the transaction Quantity remaining 0 This message will display if you attempt to Remove Move or Adjust a greater quantity of an Item than is currently in stock If there is an adequate quantity of the Item at a different Site and Location you can select the Item from that Site and Location If the quantity in all Sites and Locations is less than the amount you are trying to Remove Move or Adjust you will not be able to process this Item until enough a large enough quantity of the Item has been stocked 490 InventoryControl Printable Help Supplier Supplier does not exist Do you want to add this new supplier lt SUPPLIER NAME gt
335. le and set up wireless capabilities on the WPA1000 device perform the following steps 1 If your WPA1000 device is plugged into a computer unplug it You cannot set up WiFi with the device plugged into a computer 2 Close all applications on the WPA1000 3 On the Main screen in the far right lower corner to the right of the keyboard icon there is another icon that may be partially hidden as shown in the graphic below 429 InventoryControl Printable Help Start Tuesday April 12 2011 8 On Tap here to set owner informatidn D S No unread messages No tasks No upcoming appointments WASP BARC TECHNOLOGIE Device unlocked Tap here to sign in to Pocket MS Calendar Contacts Click that icon and make sure Enable wifi card is selected Start ei Tuesday April 12 2011 E On Tap here to set owner informatian No unread messages No tasks No upcoming appointments WASP BARCODE TECHNOLOGIES Device unlocked Tap here to sign in to Pocket MN 2 Ea mre L Enable WiFi Card Calendar Disable WiFi Card 4 Navigate to Start gt Settings gt Connections tab gt Wireless Manager 430 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 11 08 X v i TA Bluetooth Connections E e o Network USB to PC Wireless Cards Manager f Settings Eg 5 A be bottom of the Wireless Manager screen click Menu gt Wifi 6 On the WiFi screen click Connect 7 The
336. lect a previously committed code that describes the transaction Transaction Codes can be any code your business assigns to certain types of adjustment transactions Assigning these codes can help you with reporting as each type of adjustment can breakage return etc can be given it s own code This software does not contain any preset codes This gives you the opportunity to assign a code that best suits your needs and allows for the entry of codes you already use in your business for these types of transactions Enter Notes Optional The Notes field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction Click the Adjust button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List All fields on the screen will be cleared and all but the Item Number field will be disabled You can either select another item to Adjust or you can click Commit on the Pending Transaction List to submit the transaction s The Adjust button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one transaction is posted to the Pending Transaction List ZE Adjust ice fot fa ltem Number Item Descr Site Locati Quantity Serial Number Adjust Type Adjust Reas Lot Date Code Pal 1000 Test Item 100 Aisle 1 1 00 By Counts Found 4 p p Bemove 1 Benas Help Print Receipt On Commit Copies 0 Commi
337. lier screen To further streamline the process you can use a barcode scanner to add information to the scannable fields on the Create New Purchase Order screen including Supplier Purchase Order Number and Item Number The basic flow from purchase order creation to receiving the items is as follows 1 When you need to replenish inventory for an item or items create a purchase order on the Create New Purchase Order screen accessed from e New gt Purchase Stock is low Order After you select a Supplier for this purchase order you can click the Items at Re Order Point button at the Receive PO and Create New PO bottom of the screen mark as closed The system will then aso check for any items for this supplier that are at or below their reorder points and populate PO List the purchase order with those items A newly created Purchase Order has a status of New The status remains New until item quantities are entered on the Receive screen If the order becomes overdue before you receive it the status changes to New Overdue For detailed information creating purchase orders please see the Creating a Purchase Order topic 186 InventoryControl Printable Help The Purchase Order now appears on your Purchase Order List Lists gt Purchase Orders From the Purchase Order List you can Edit or Delete as long as the order has not been partially received the order as needed
338. log any more Hep ok Canca To Addresses The order is sent fo the email address listed in the Customer or Supplier screen If there is no email address listed on the Customer or Supplier screen you will receive an error message when you try to send emails You can add an address to the Customer or Supplier screen and or edit the address listing on these screens at any time See Creating New Suppliers or Creating New Customers for information on the Suppliers or Customers screen From Addresses The order is sent from the email address listed in the Company Information screen If there is no email address listed on the Company Information screen this should be your company email address you will receive an error message when you try to send emails You can add edit your company email address at any time on the Company Information screen See Entering Company Information for more details on the Company Information screen CC Addresses An email is also sent to any CC addresses designated on the Options screen You can choose to ignore the CC address by deselecting the checkbox next to the CC Addresses field on the Email Destination List In order for the email feature to work correctly you must set your SMTP Server User Name and Password if authentication is required for outgoing mail and the SMTP Port on the Options screen If these are not set an error message will appear For more information on setting these email optio
339. lose New Form Edit Field Names Max Row Count i Previously Processed Mobile Data i Show Cost Information During Receiving Show Waring Messages i SQL Server Backup Location B Email H Always Show Email Destination List i Packing Slip CC Emails Pick Order CC Emails Purchase Order CC Emails SMTP Password SMTP Port Yes Check to turm option on T OK Cancel All of these options affect all users Changes made by one user will affect other users who log in If the user accessing the Options screen does not have Administration Privileges setup on the Security screen the Options screen will look like the following 240 InventoryControl Printable Help RS Options z Inventory Automatically assign an item number when Automatic Item Numbers creating a new or duplicating an existing item Automatic New Support Edit Field Names Max Row Count Show Warning Messages J Yes Check to turn option on Help OK Cancel 15 6 2 Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices This option pertains to batch devices only Negative quantities are not allowed on wireless devices This option allows you to remove or move items from inventory on the mobile device even though the quantity of those items may have been at zero according to the database the last time the mobile device was synchronized This option is valuable in a batch proce
340. lows you to delete export or print shipping methods you have entered into the system via the Shipping Method field on the Create New Purchase Order or Create New Pick Order screens You can also add additional new shipping methods on this screen This topic discusses Adding Shipping Methods Deleting Printing Exporting Shipping Methods 12 10 1 Adding Shipping Methods Note Shipping Methods can also be added on the Create New Purchase Order and Create New Pick Order screens by typing in a new method in the Shipping Method field 1 From the Main screen click the Receive Pick icon The Receive Pick menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Receive Pick menu click the Manage Shipping Methods icon The Ship Method List appears displaying all shipping methods entered into the system 206 InventoryControl Printable Help ZS Ship Method List o S es vt b 7 Delete Print Export To File Ship Method Federal Express UBS US Mail DHL Airborne FedEx FedEx Overnight FedEx 5 days 3 The last row on the grid is blank Click in the row and type in the new shipping method 4 Click ENTER to go to the next new row and enter another shipping method 5 Click Save to save your additions or Cancel to close the screen without saving 12 10 2 Deleting Printing Exporting Ship Methods 1 From the Main screen click the Receive Pick icon The Receive Pick menu appears at the bottom of the screen
341. luding removing any records marked as Ignore Record from the Audit screen Pending Transactions List tab the Complete Audit screen will appear For information on using this screen please refer to the Reconciling the Counts topic above If you have reconciled all transactions the following message will appear Audit e Q Are you sure you want to end the Audit 2 Click Yes on the message screen to end the audit The system will go back into regular mode and you will have access to all features on the Inventory menu 285 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 18 Search Function 18 1 Searching for Information The Find screen allows you to easily search for information within the Inventory Control database You can limit your search to a specific table Information you enter into each field in InventoryControl is stored in a database table behind the scenes You can extract this information using the Export Wizard in the database field or even a value within a field on the Find screen Searching for Information 1 From the Main screen select the Find icon A menu of tables from which to search appears 2 Select what you want to search for by clicking on an option in the Find menu In this example we are going to search for Customers You can also access this screen by clicking the Filter button at the top of the List screens Note If the table you select Customers Manufacturers Items etc contains over 1
342. lue a Date Code in this example 320 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on Serial Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key An asterisk displays next to the looped field If track by Serial Number is enabled for this Item the Qty field will be set to 1 A quantity of one is assumed for each Serial Number Looping will determine the final count for this Add transaction as you scan or key in one or more Serial Numbers for this Item 1000066 Qty 1 SN Count 0 F4 Done As each SN is keyed in or scanned the Count will be increased Press ENT after inputting each serial number Press F4 after entering the last Serial Number to the Add screen Notes e When an Item is tracked by Serial Number you can only loop on Serial Number e When an Item is not Tracked By Serial Number you can use F3 to designate a field that will be used for looping The values in every field except Qty will remain locked while looping Looping on Location Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the example below the F3 key was pressed when prompted for Location while doing an Add for this Item Add 123 Monitor Location ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Add for this Item to more than one Location Values entered for Item PO and Supplier if any will remain locked while looping on Location after entering them for the first Add
343. lue and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Press the Enter key after supplying an Item or press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu If the Item entered is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again as shown below Adjust Item 99999999 Entry not found Scan or key in value and press Ent ESC Menu If the Item entered is found in the PDT s database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item Scan or key in a Location value If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item Adjust 100007 Monitor Location AREA 2 ESC Cancel Fi1 Prev F4 Next The Location field is required for all Adjust transactions 4 After entering a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field or Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field or 330 InventoryControl Printable Help Press ESC to cancel transaction and return to the previous screen If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field without first providing a Location value the following message will be displayed Please scan or key in Location ESC Exit Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Location value As shown below if you enter a Location that s not currently in the PDT database you will be prompted to accept or reject the entry as a new value to be added to the database The currently selecte
344. m 169 10 3 REMOVING KE HEMS sees det danse tae leita ee nie ada Hee det eee 170 Chapters Tel ere TEE 174 11 1 Pick Order Ovenlew teas aao diaii gi aada idda a iaiaaeaia i taa 174 11 2 Creating a Pick Order 175 11 3 Editing PICK OAEI EE 179 114 Pick Order List Example ci isc0v eer cetiintva acetic adi NEES ie EEN 180 EEN PICKINQRONGSES ia s5cteth aces oP rastget estat alee A ce eter santnfnetee pieaeostentaate mentees 181 Chapter 12 Purchase Ordersieceiving nnmnnn 185 12 1 Purchase Orders Receiving OVerview ccccccccceeeseeceeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeesaeeesaeeseneeees 185 12 2 Creating a New Purchase Order 188 12 3 Editing Purchase Orders iniii uerai ened siete avi ail el wcities 192 12 4 Purchase Order List Exaimplessiseesctetecescecucevestecey scethas aae aena a ae a aa anena aa aae asalna dainai 193 12 5 Receiving Inventory from Purchase Orders 194 126 P rchase Order FAQ a a ae iene aea aa aaa eaaa ie a aa aa aeaa eain 198 12 7 Deleting Purchase Orders Pick Orders 199 12 8 Receive Pick MENU aleas iraa aan a a eet aaar aa aaraa arae AAE OAE Eada arai rE Ea aau a eed reviaien Ys 200 12 9 Managing Payment Methods AAA 202 12 9 Managing Payment Methods AAA 202 12 9 1 Adding Payment Methode 202 12 9 2 Deleting Printing Exporting Payment Methode 203 12 10 Managing Shipping Methode 206 vi 12 10 2 Deleting Printing Exporting Ship Methode 207 12 11 Formatting PO and Pick Order Numbers eae eeeaaesecaeeseeeee
345. m Labels Browsing to an Existing Label 13 2 1 Editing Labels 1 To edit labels from the Main screen click Labels H SS ZE InventoryControl File Tools Check For Ale 215 InventoryControl Printable Help A list of available labels will appear If you do not see all the label files shown here upon accessing the list expand the menu by clicking the in front of the Labels fields BE Labels Ss Options Label list H Add Assemble Receive Item Label OR tem Label ER Location Label ER Transaction Label Date Code ER Transaction Label Lot H Transaction Label Pallet ER Transaction Label Serial Number lt Create New Label gt gt lt Browse To Other Labels gt Click the New button to open a file browse dialog to select the label file to edit 2 Click on the label you would like to edit Wasp Labeler will open with the selected label displayed You can make changes as needed Please see the Wasp Labeler online help for detailed instructions on editing labels To access the help select Help gt Contents from the Wasp Labeler toolbar 13 2 2 Creating Custom Labels 1 To create custom labels from the Main screen click Labels A list of available labels will appear 2 Select Create New Label to open Wasp Labeler without opening an existing LAB file 216 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 Create your label as desired Please see the Wasp Labeler online help for
346. m list from their existing Excel spreadsheet They will also be tracking some items so they make sure to import this information correctly Refer tot he Item Import Templates found in your installation folder or on your installation CD and to the topics Importing Into the Database and Import Specifics Database Properties 33 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 4 PC Operation Basics 4 1 User Log On The Log On screen appears when InventoryControl is first started and when you select File gt Log Out E i A e gt lt wech WW A EK H x aN Tnv ntoryContral Complete both fields then click OK to logon to the system The User Name field is not case sensitive The Password field is case sensitive Asterisks will be displayed as you type the Password The first time you open InventoryControl you can enter the following information User Name Admin Password blank 34 InventoryControl Printable Help After log on the password can be changed via File gt Change Password The Admin account or any other account with Administration Privilege can use the Security Privileges screen to add Users and set their privileges and reset their passwords For more information on adding users please refer to the Adding Users Editing Security Privileges topic 35 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 2 About the About Screen The About Screen allows you to view and manage licenses and provides prog
347. m the Inventory menu or from the Item and Inventory lists For detailed information on this screen please refer to the Receiving Inventory 200 InventoryControl Printable Help topic Pick The Pick function allows you to designate pick orders for shipping or to close a pick order Pick Orders list inventory that needs to be sent to a customer Pick orders remove inventory from an item in the same way you manually remove inventory via the Remove Inventory screen accessed from the Inventory menu or from the Item and Inventory lists For information creating a new pick order please refer to the Creating a Pick Order topic For information on shipping Pick Orders please refer to the Picking Orders topic For an overview of Pick Orders please refer to the Pick Orders Overview topic Oe Manage Ship Methods This function access a screen that allows you to add delete export or print shipping methods you have entered into the system via the Shipping Method field on the Create New Purchase Order or Create New Pick Order screens For detailed information on this function please refer to the Managing Shipping Methods topic Manage Payment Methods This function access a screen that allows you to add delete export or print shipping methods you have entered into the system via the Shipping Method field on the Create New Purchase Order screen For detailed information on this function please refer to the Managing Payment Methods topic
348. manager of Rusty s Cable Company has set up their sites as vehicles and each vehicle contains basically the same locations There are bins for certain types of cables a bin for remotes a rack for cable boxes etc The configuration for each vehicle is the same For each item they want to designate a primary location within each site vehicle By doing this when a user receives or adds an item using the mobile device or on the PC the primary location will automatically appear on the screen saving the employee from having to search for it The location can be changed to something other than the primary location if needed This is true for picking or removing inventory as well the item will be removed from the primary location by default unless the user changes the location Designating primary locations works for Rusty s Cable Company in conjunction with the Site Configurations they have selected The manager has set a primary location for each item in each site and each mobile device s From To sites are set to a specific vehicle To set up primary locations the manager can simply import items making sure the import file contains a column designating the item as having a preferred location a Y should be in the Supplier column for that item Please refer to the Item Import Templates found in your installation folder or on your installation CD for an example of this Business Type Reseller Items Imported Brady s Bargains imports their ite
349. mbers that are reserved for each For instance if you have up to 60 sites you should reserve 100 to 199 for your sites Each new site you enter will get a number from this range If you want to more closely tie the number to the site add a one or two letter designation to the end of the site number For example use 100US to designate the main US warehouse and 101UK for the warehouse in the United Kingdom If you expect to have a few hundred suppliers reserve 1000 to 2000 for suppliers Manufacturers can have 500 to 599 Items should start at 20000 This range reservation serves two purposes First it allows those who know the ranges to easily distinguish a designation for the warehouse from the designation for an item if all they see is a barcode on a paper or a box Second reserving a range of numbers makes the process of deciding what number to use for new designations much easier If you add a manufacturer and you already used 512 the next is 513 For example if a stray box is presented to the warehouse manager and she sees barcodes with 100US C050100 she knows this box was stocked in the US warehouse on row C shelf 05 bin 01 00 The box may also have a barcode with 20104 which she knows is the item number and can be used to put the item back into inventory Without these barcodes the box might have to be opened to identify the item and then someone would have to track where it came from and where to put it away Another thing to consider whe
350. mble Please select the sites that Roger Dodger can access Select All Select None Site Description User can access all current and future sites Save Cancel Click OK when you have selected all privileges to which you want this user to have access These selections can later be changed by any user who has Administration Privilege If you have more than one Site you can limit this user s access to whichever sites you want To do this select the Sites to which you want this user to have access Click Select All to quickly give the user access to all sites Click the User can access all current and future sites to automatically give this user access to any sites you may add in the future Click Save to save your changes to this user 16 3 3 Editing User Profiles on the Security Privileges Screen 1 On the Security Privileges screen highlight the user name you want to edit in the User List You can now change the selections in the Privileges screen by selecting or de selecting checkboxes An existing user s information can be updated by any user with Administration Privilege In addition to the ability to change other values this is where an Administration user can reset a Password for a user that has forgotten it If you want to change the user name or personal information highlight the user name in the User List and click Edit gt Update User The Update Existing User screen will a
351. mer from the drop down list Select lt New gt from the Customer drop list to open the Create New Customer screen The Notes field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction 5 After you have completed entering the information click the Remove button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List All fields on the Remove screen will be cleared and all but the Item Number field will be disabled You can either select another item to be removed or you can click Commit on the Pending Transaction List to submit the transaction s The Remove button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields Click the Remove button to continue Removing the kit item If no additional information 171 InventoryControl Printable Help such as serial numbers is needed for any of the associated component items you can click Commit at this point to complete the remove process If additional information is needed for one or more items this Remove screen appears aa foe Data Pending Transaction List 1 You have selected to remove kit item 1005 B100 Gift Basket Quantity 1 The list below displays the items that will be removed for the kit item Type ltem Number Quantity Removed Qty Stocking Unit Description Inventory 1004 2 0000 0 Track by serial number inventory 1001 1 0000 1 0000 Component Details ltem Number Serial Numbe
352. ming inventory transactions e Source and or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT Please use the Site Config function to Select Source and Destination Sites ESC Exit Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function For more information on configuring sites on the PDT please refer to the topic WDT2200 Configuring Sites Topics discussed in this section are Removing Kit Items Looping on Serial Number Looping on Location Looping on Item Number Looping on Track Bys Other than Serial Number Removing Kit Items 1 The Remove Kit function can be accessed by pressing the 2 key on the Main Menu The Remove screen appears Remove Hem 123 Scan or key in value and press Ent 359 InventoryControl Printable Help Press ESC for Menu Press the PDT s Enter key after supplying an Item or press the PDT s ESC key to return to the Main Menu If the Item entered is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again as shown below Remove Item 9999999 Entry not found Scan or key in value and press Ent ESC Menu If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the Item Enter the Quantity you want to remove This is the how many
353. mpany Name v Operator e Value Wasp ES Parenthesis D Logical Add Simplified Help Cancel The Advanced Find screen consists of seven input fields and a Filter Expression panel that displays the resulting filter as you build it These fields are described below e Table is used to select the table you want to search e Parenthesis open and close can be used to control the order in which criteria will be processed The inner most pair of parentheses in any filter expression are evaluated first e Field is used to select the field in the listed table to be searched 288 InventoryControl Printable Help Operator is a comparison operator used to evaluate an expression Comparison Operator lt gt gt gt lt lt Like Not Like Is Null Is Not Null Meaning not equal greater than or equal greater than less than or equal is similar to value is not similar to value any value Like and Not Like are used for text pattern matching They can only be used with plain text fields not with dates The following characters used within the text value have a special meaning for the Like and Not Like operators LIKE Operator _ underscore Meaning matches any single character matches zero or more characters of any value Escapes the special characters gives them their normal meaning Examples LIKE _ inch matches 2 inch 3 inch etc LIKE Eric W mat
354. ms Report 282 InventoryControl Printable Help 17 5 Reviewing the Not Counted Items Report This software contains several audit reports that allow you to review count and discrepancy information Most of these reports are useful for review after the audit is completed and are discussed later in this topic The Not Counted Items Report however should be reviewed before you reconcile your counts This report lists any items for which quantity was not entered into the system either through the Audit screen on the PC or via the mobile devices By reviewing this report you can quickly determine if any items were missed during the audit To View the Not Counted Items Report 1 Click the Reports icon in the main functions section of the Main Screen The Reports Selection screen appears displaying all Audit reports 2 Highlight the Not Counted Items Report and click OK or just double click the report The report opens in the Report Viewer For more information on viewing reports please refer to the Report Viewer topic 3 Review the report and add counts for any items that were missed After you have entered any additional quantities into the system you are ready to reconcile your counts 17 6 Reconciling the Counts The next step in the audit process is to reconcile your counts against those that were already in the system You can view this screen and reconcile as you go along or you can wait until all counts are entered and reconcile
355. ms at more than one Site select lt all gt You can only select ALL or 1 specific site For example if you have 5 sites you cannot select 2 to be a Source You can either select 1 or all Destination If more than one Site is defined on the system and you have selected a specific Site in the Source Site field you can select one of the Sites listed in the Destination drop down list This determines which Sites will be shown in the Destination Site list of the mobile device s Site Configuration function and which locations will be listed in the Move To list This field will be grayed out with a value of lt all gt as shown above if only one Site is defined in InventoryControl or if a value of lt all gt has been specified for the Source Site If a specific Site has been selected for the Source Site that same site will be the default value for Destination Site but you can change the Destination Site to a different value using the drop down list Source Site lt all gt This value is forced to lt all gt when there is only one Site setup in the system A Specific Site A Specific Site Destination Site lt all gt This value is forced to lt all gt when lt all gt is specified as the Source Site Destination Site is the Same as the Source Site A Different Site The Source Sites Listed in the Mobile Device Site Configuration will Include All Sites The Specified Source Site The Speci
356. n All O Specify Filter Purchase Order All O Specify Filter Ei O Minimally Required None Item Number all O Specify Filter Pick Order All Specify Filter None TT Include Items not in a Location Step 1 of 2 lt Back Next gt Cancel Filter Records allows you to specify which data will be used to create the PDT database By filtering the records to include only those that are needed at the PDT memory is conserved as is the time necessary to do transfers between the PC and the PDT The default values shown above apply no filtering to your data All Items will be selected including those which are not yet in a Location d If the specified filters produce no eligible Items or Sites no data will be transmitted to the PDT when a Send Data to PDT is attempted An error will display on the PDT to verify send Data to PDT 295 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Select the Site Location Item Numbers Customers Suppliers Purchase Orders Pro and Enterprise Versions Only and Pick Orders Pro and Enterprise Versions Only to be downloaded to the device then click OK Select the Specify Filter button if you will be limiting the data Click the Hand icon to access the Find screen to search for data The data you select on the Find screen will be entered in the text box for that section and only that data will be sent to the mobile device Please refer to the Searching for Information topic for more informa
357. n 6 After you have completed entering the information click the Remove button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List All fields on the Remove screen will be cleared and all but the Item Number field will be disabled You can either select another item to be removed or you can click Commit on the Pending Transaction List to submit the transaction s The Remove button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one Remove is posted to the Pending Transaction List FE Remove EES Data 7 ltem Number Item Description Site Locati Quantity Serial Number Customer Number Custo 1004 Track by serial number 100 Aisle 1 1 00 1001 Remove Remove All Help Print Receipt On Commit Copies 0 Commit Discard j At any time you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error 7 If you want to print a receipt of this transaction enter the number of receipts in the Print receipt on Commit Copies field 8 Click Commit to submit the transaction s to your database 143 InventoryControl Printable Help 9 4 Moving Inventory The Move Inventory screen allows you to move inventory quantity for an item from one Location to another When you create an item you can add which locations it may be When you then add inventory quantity to
358. n 286 e Mile e ne E EE 288 Chapter J9 WD T2200 EE 291 19 1 AWD TO Setup the DEVi ss ccticciecscxkiedceseheresnechaseede skid ey ra teestusqcathesicccessirasteeehineeetie ee 291 19 2 WDT2200 Creating the PDT Database cccececeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeesaeeeeaeeneneeees 294 19 3 WDT2200 Sending Data to DDT 299 19 4 WDT2200 Receiving Data from DDT 304 19 5 WDT2200 Data CyCle i eurai iat a a a A a E a a a a aiene 307 RSR NR EE ere Un e E EE 307 19 7 WDT2200 Resetting the Device nnne 308 19 8 WDT2200 Setting the Date and Time teense ee aeeeeaaeseeaeeseeeeesaeeeeaeeneeeeees 310 CRT ENEE EE Un METTEG 313 Cla R RRE 314 19 41 WDT2200 About Screen EE 315 19 12 WDT2200 Site Configuration 0 cccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseceeeceaeeesaaeseeeeeseeeeesaeessaeeseeeees 315 19 138 WDT2200 Adding Inventory 0 ccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeeeeeaeeesaaeeseaeeseeeesaeeesaeseaeeees 317 19 14 WDT2200 Details Gcreen cece ccecceeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeee eee aeeeeaaeeeceeecaaeeecaaeseeaeeseeeeesaeessaeneeneeees 325 19 14 1 Viewing Details for Items with Tracked By options disabled cccceeceeeeeeeesteeeeneeeees 325 19 14 2 Viewing Details for Items with One or More Tracked By Options Enabled 00 327 19 15 WDT2200 Adjusting INVENtOry 00 2 eee cece ee eene eee e tena ee eet EEEE SEn EARE EEEE E RE EA EELE EARR ESE 329 19 16 WDT2200
359. n You can then edit the cost This only changes the cost that is shown automatically the next time you add an item The List Price and Sale Price fields on the Create New Item screen are for information purposes only These fields are not used on any reports What is the Cost for Order Units Per Supplier In the Professional and Enterprise versions of InventoryControl you are able to specify multiple Order Units per Supplier of an item When you enter an Order Unit that is different from the Stocking Unit you are telling the system that you are ordering in one unit but when the items are received they will be broken into the different units For example if you order your Barcode Laser Scanners in boxes of 5 but your stocking unit is Each you need to specify the cost of a box of 5 when you create the Order Unit Settings on the Create New or Edit Item screen Manage Suppliers tab as shown in the image below 19 InventoryControl Printable Help Order Unit Settings Order Unit Code Count Order Unit Cost Order Unit Pref How is Zero Cost Inventory Handled If inventory is added or received at 0 that quantity is ignored for average price and valuation purposes The only way stock gets added at 0 is if you import inventory or specify a 0 cost at add or receive time 50 scanners x 300 15 000 from the 1st 50 scanners x 320 16 000 from the 8th 1 scanner was found and added to inventory at 0 50 scanners x
360. n click the Mobility icon If you have more than one type of mobile device installed a menu will appear allowing you to select which device you will be working with If you have only one type the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen On the Mobility Menu select Setup Mobile Setup Device Create PDT Database Send Data To Receive Data Process Mobile The Wasp WDT2200 Communication Wizard screen appears with the Setup WDT2200 tab displayed 291 InventoryControl Printable Help Wasp Mobile Device Communication Wizard Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Check Mobile Device Connection The wizard has failed to find a WDT2200 device connected to a COM port If you want to reset the device back to factory default first power off the device then hold down CMD Left Arrow Power buttons simultaneously and choose 3 COLD START Please note that cold starting a device will wipe all data off the device Do not do this if you have transactions on the device that have not been retrieved from the mobile device If you know the COM Settings on the unit you may select the correct values and click the Test Specified Settings button to verify the connection If the test fails or you don t know what the COM settings are on the device you can just click the Auto Detect COM Port Settings button to do an automatic search Please note that this process
361. n optionally select tasks from the On Save section You can select to e Print Receipts When this is selected when you click Save all receipts entered for this Receive screen will print This means that if you received this order in two separate shipments and entered two separate receipts in the Receipt Number field both receipts will print e Print Labels When this is selected when you click Save labels will print for the received items e Close This PO When this is selected when you click Save the selected Purchase Order will be marked as closed You would want to use this when you have received all items from the purchase order e Create Backorder if necessary When this is selected after you click Save a backorder will be created for any items that have not been received on this Purchase Order When a backorder is created you will see the order on the Purchase Order List with the status of New and BO appended to the end of the order number 8 Click Save to save your changes The Received Quantity field for each item will go up by the amount you entered as received When you click Save the on hand quantities for the items you just received will increase by the amounts you entered If you partially received the order the order s status will change to In Process Quick Scan Entry This feature opens a screen that allows you to quickly type in or scan in information When you click the Quick Scan Entry button a screen simil
362. n a new Manufacturer is typed into the Manufacturer field you will receive a message asking if you want to save the value as a new Manufacturer Type Pro and Enterprise Versions Only When you access the Create New Item screen by selecting New gt Item gt Assembly this field will automatically be set to Assembly If you accessed it any other way you can select Assembly from the Type drop down The Item To Be Tracked By section contains check boxes which determine whether the Serial Number Lot Date Code and or Pallet of an item will be used to track its movement through your inventory For a more detailed explanation of Item to be tracking fields please refer to the topic Identifying Tracking Needs Tracked By When you are creating your item it is important that you determine how you want 91 InventoryControl Printable Help to track each item Typically small items that are all the same may not need to have any Track Bys selected Items such as printers may need to be tracked by Serial Number so returns and maintenance can be properly tracked Medical supplies or food may need to be tracked by Date Code and or Lot If you choose to track by one or more of these fields you will be prompted to complete them each time you perform a transaction such as check out move remove add etc on this item For example if you are tracking item 2233 VZ Laptop by serial number Now you want to move a quantity of 5 of this item fr
363. n creating your numeric representation for locations and items is that some devices only support a reduced set of characters Some mobile devices such as the WDT2200 do not have a keyboard that can support lower case letters or the entire range of special characters With these devices if your item number is 10000 1 you will not be able to type the item number or scan in the number from a barcode because the parentheses character is not supported All o Our internal barcode labels use Code 128 which supports both lower and upper case characters all numbers and many special characters InventoryControl uses the symbology called Code 128 for all the pre built labels All the scanners and mobile devices Wasp supplies can read Code 128 Best practices suggest you use Code 128 because it supports all numbers upper and lower case characters and most special characters It also reduces the size of most common barcodes InventoryControl Printable Help 2 2 What is a Barcode A barcode is a graphical representation of a set of numeric or alphanumeric characters that can be read by a barcode scanner 1234 l Wis Whse1 becomes e1 123 becomes Assigning a permanent barcode to each site location item supplier and customer creates an environment where a mobile device can be used to easily keep track of inventory movements and alleviates the problem of data entry errors Barcodes get wider with the amount of numbers and characters you w
364. n entered until F4 is used to exit the loop While looping on Item all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item The Count is incremented each time a Pick is done while looping 7 Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop d When looping on Item all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be reset 378 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on a Tracked By other than Serial Number Here for example F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing a Pick for this Item Pick 123 Monitor Pallet id ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Pick for this Item for more than one Pallet Values entered for ltem Location PO Supplier and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet after entering them for the first Pick 123 Qty Pallet Total Qty 30 00000 F4 Done Above having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first Pick this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Pick Item Location PO and Supplier values for this second Pick will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop While looping on this Tracked B
365. n first entering data for speed then turn it on later to avoid confusion when using it infrequently 15 6 16 Edit Field Names When this option is enabled users setup with Administrative Privileges on the Security screen can edit the names of some labels and tool tips in the software You might want to change a field name if your business calls one of the functions or fields something different than the default values Or you might want to change the tool tip if you want to give special instructions to your users For detailed instructions on how to edit fields once this option is enabled please refer to the Editing Field Names topic 15 6 17 Max Row Count This option allows you to specify the maximum number of rows to be displayed on most lists The number of rows can be limited to improve performance If you notice that it takes more than a few seconds for your list screens to appear you can reduce the number of rows to speed this up A value of 0 indicates all rows should be displayed Values between 1 and 99 are invalid 100 is the smallest maximum that can be specified Transaction List The Transaction List is handled differently than other lists due to the usually large amount of listings In the case of the transaction list e if O is entered the transaction list is limited to 10 000 rows e if there is a maximum set either higher or lower than 10 000 the list will be limited to the number of rows specified For exampl
366. n header as well as the header for all reports and pre defined labels The information on this screen should be completed first when setting up your software This topic covers Entering Company Information Entering Multiple Address Types Deleting an Address Type 15 2 1 Entering Company Information 1 From the Main screen click the Administration icon The Administration Menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Administration Menu click the Company Info icon The Company Information screen appears z Company Information E Company Name Addresses Address Type State Corporate Address X Address 1 Postal Code Address 2 Country City Phone Email Fax Website Help OK Cancel 227 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 Type in the requested information The Company Name field is mandatory all other fields on this screen are optional 4 Click OK to save your changes 15 2 2 Entering Multiple Address Types This software provides you with the ability to enter a Billing Address Receiving Address and or Shipping Address for your company and to create new address types as well You can enter an address for each site that might have inventory shipped to it from purchase orders To enter multiple address follow the steps below 1 On the Company Information screen enter your company name Select what type of address you will be entering from the Address Type drop down menu or type
367. n is not enabled you will not be allowed to enter a Quantity larger than the amount shown in the database e The Allow Negative Quantities option also must be enabled before you can add a new Location in this screen If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see a warning message if you attempt to Remove quantity from a Location that does not exist in the PDT database The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to the PDT About screen 453 InventoryControl Printable Help New Locations can only be created during Remove when the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press ESC to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings e For more information o
368. n one adjust for this Item for more than one Pallet Values entered for Item Location PO Supplier and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet after entering them for the first adjust 123 Qty Pallet S Total Qty 30 00000 F4 Done Above having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first adjust this screen is ready to receive inputs for another adjust Item Location PO and Supplier values for this second adjust will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop While looping on this Tracked By field all that is required for each adjust are values for Qty and Pallet The Total Qty is incremented each time an adjust is submitted while looping KE Press the ENT key to submit the adjust transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop When looping on a Tracked By field all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be restarted 335 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 16 WDT2200 Auditing Inventory Audit allows you to count the Quantity of one or more Items in your inventory when in Audit Mode Before you can conduct an audit using the mobile device you must download a new database created while InventoryControl is in audit mode For more information on turning
369. n the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction Press the ENT key to accept the new value or the ESC key to Cancel the creation of a new Location If this Item does not have Tracked By enabled for the Date Code Pallet or Lot fields a screen like the one above will be shown prompting the entry of Qty Audit 100007 Monitor Qty ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next Key in the inventory quantity at this Location and press ENT or F4 to complete the Audit transaction The Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than or equal to zero If this Item does have Tracked By enabled for Date Code Pallet or Lot fields screens like the one below will be shown expecting input for each Tracked By field that s enabled Audit 100007 Monitor Date Code ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field without first inputting a required Tracked By value a screen similar to the following will be displayed Please scan or key in Date Code ESC Exit 338 InventoryControl Printable Help Press Esc to Exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value a Date Code in this example When the you ar
370. n this option please refer to the Options Screen topic Inventory can also be removed at the PC See the Removing Inventory topic for more information Removing Inventory 1 From the Main Menu tap the Remove icon The Remove screen appears Remove Item i Site ln i Location i Customer Ly i Date Code yy Serial a Pallet IESSEN a Remove EI 3 56 PM Lo E You can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering Alphanumeric Data on the Windows Mobile Device for details or use the Search function In this example Mouse 1001 is being removed from Site 1 Location 2 454 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Enter the Item Number to be removed in the Item field Item 1001 i Site i Location i id Customer Li i E Oty Ze EES 3 56 pm Note that once the Item Number is selected the Remove screen displays only the fields that are necessary for adding this particular Item For example if you enter an Item that is tracked by serial number the Serial field will remain on the screen but other fields such as Date Code and Pallet will no longer display If you enter an Item that is not tracked all tracking fields PO Supplier Lot Date Code Serial and Pallet will no longer display 3 Enter the Site and Location from which this Item should be removed Item i Site i Location i Customer Es i a Remove EI 3 57 PM Lo E 455 InventoryControl Printable Help 4
371. n your inventory For example you might create an Item entry for Mouse Wireless Then you can add inventory or quantity to that item If you are using the Enterprise or Professional version of this software you can also create items that are non inventory This is useful if you need to create an item for marketing pamphlets counter displays or anything you need to have but for which you don t need to track quantity What is a Non Inventory Item A non inventory item is anything you order or receive but do not want to track the location and quantity of An example of a non inventory item might be marketing materials like a product flyer that is taken to trade shows or put in product boxes Once you are out you may never buy more of that item and you don t need to know how many are left You may need to include non inventory items on a purchase order and verify receipt to have a payment paper trail but you do not need to keep track of the item after it is received InventoryControl allows you to add non inventory items onto purchase orders in the Pro and Enterprise versions Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen When you are setting up your software for the first time you may want to import your items rather than adding them one at a time through this screen For information on importing information into your d
372. name of the backup in the Restore From File field or you can click Browse to search for a file By default backup files are located in C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 1 MSSQL Backup 4 Click OK to perform the database restore Important Notes The network version does NOT browse the file system on the local machine Instead of the local machine file system the file system on the machine where the database is installed will be displayed If you receive an error when trying to restore the database that states not all connections to the database are closed make sure no other users are logged in to the system Close InventoryControl and try to restore again 237 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 6 Options Screen The Options screen is where you can turn off and on some automatic processes for inventory functions and control how the software performs in certain situations Note This topic lists all options available in the Professional and Enterprise version of InventoryControl Not all options are available in the Standard version of InventoryControl or in WaspNest Inventory For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen This topic covers the following Accessing the Options Screen Inventory Options Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices Batch devices only Allow Over Pick Allow Over R
373. nd the country The manager Pat will be the primary user of the InventoryControl software and will keep track of inventory movements by running reports Pat will also serve as the system administrator and will take care of maintaining user profiles creating backups and other administrative tasks Pat should set herself up with administrative privileges upon accessing the system for the first time This will set up one administrator besides the default administrator profile Changes to Pat s user profile do not go into effect until she logs back in again After setting herself up in the system Pat should log out of InventoryControl then log back in using her new user name and password Since Pat will have access to all sites the User can access all current and future sites option should be checked As Pat adds Sites she will automatically have permission to all of them Below is an example of Pat s Security privileges E Security Privileges a Eile Edit User List _ Security Settings Admin User i Example Pat Privileges Select All Select None Add Inventory J Edit EI Adiust Inventory v Labels Administration Privilege J Move F Allow Mobile Device Login 7 New This administrator has 4 Allow PC Login v Pick the ability to access all v Audit 7 Process Mobile Device Data screens and functions J Backup and Restore J Receive in the system v Build Assembly 7 Remove Inventory 7 Check In 7 Reports
374. ned if an unknown Supplier is entered on the Add Inventory or Create New Purchase Order screen 242 InventoryControl Printable Help The Create New Customer screen will be opened if an unknown Customer is entered on the Remove Inventory Create New Pick Order or Check Out Inventory screens When the Automatic New option is disabled A prompt will ask you if you want to continue to the appropriate Create New screen Sometimes when data input has a high error rate this is more desirable as it allows the user to verify the number entered 15 6 8 Automatic Notification of Low Order Items When this option is enabled the software will notify you if the tem Stock Level List contains items that have a Quantity value equal to or less than the Min Stock Level value set for that item and location on the Create New Item or screen Location tab This notification appears for the location level only This notification will appear immediately after logging in to the software 15 6 9 Decimal Places This option allows you to set the number of decimal places to display in numeric fields where this is possible All values entered in numeric fields are stored to the number of Decimal Places allowed by this option at the time you entered the value but screens and reports will always display numeric values to the number of Decimal Places currently allowed by this option If the number of decimal places currently allowed by this option is greater than t
375. nformation back to the PC then repeat the entire process beginning with by creating a second database to do Moves from Source Site 1 to Destination Site 3 Alternately if your device has enough memory to hold a database containing records for all of your Items at all Sites you can specify a Source value of lt all gt and then control Source Site and Destination Site on the mobile device see WDT2200 Site Configuration for more information From Specify lt all gt or use lt More gt from the drop list to find a specific Location at the Source Site that denotes the first in a range of Locations that will be included in the mobile database The last 10 Locations used will be also be listed in the From drop list Specifying lt all gt will include all Locations for the specified Source Site in the mobile Database To Specify lt all gt or click the Hand icon to find a specific Location at the Source Site that denotes the last in a range of Locations that will be included in the mobile database The last 10 Locations used will also be listed in the To drop list Specifying lt all gt will include all Locations for the specified Destination Site in the mobile Database A specific value can be used for From even though lt all gt is used for To For example From Bin 50 used with To lt all gt would select Bin 50 through whatever the largest Bin number is Similarly a specific value can be used for To in combination with From
376. ng Inventory 1 From the Main Menu tab the Adjust icon The Adjust screen displays Item i Site T Location C i Date Code Serial EE Pallet Trans Code iesse Reason i By Count Cs a ien SE 3 06 pu L S Note You can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering Alphanumeric Data on the Windows Mobile Device for details or use the Search function 473 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Enter the Item Number in the Item field In the example below quantity for item 1001 at Site 1 Location 3 is being adjusted because one of these items is broken Adjust Item i Site 9 Location Ir i Trans Code Reason i 8Y Adjust E 3 08 Pm A Note that once the Item Number is selected the Adjust screen displays only the fields that are necessary for adding this particular Item For example if you enter an Item that is tracked by serial number the Serial field will remain on the screen but other fields such as Date Code and Pallet will no longer display If you enter an Item that is not tracked all tracking fields PO Supplier Lot Date Code Serial and Pallet will no longer display 3 Enter the Site and Location for the Item you want to adjust 474 InventoryControl Printable Help Item 1001 i Trans Code Reason 8Y Adjust EI 3 08 Pm A 4 Enter the Transaction Code in the Trans Code field You can type any code directly into this fi
377. ng on a column label and selecting Hide Column This enables you to hide information you do not usually need When you hide a column it will remain hidden until you manually return it to the List screen by following the instructions below Show Hidden Columns You can quickly view the columns you have hidden by right clicking on any column and selecting Show Hidden Columns or by clicking the Show Hidden button A pop up screen similar to the one below appears listing all columns that are not currently visible Hidden Columns Oldest Date Acquired You can return these columns to the full List screen by clicking on a listing in the Hidden Columns screen and dragging it back to the column labels section on the List screen 122 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 2 Item List Example The Item List displays all items you have entered in the system Below is an example of this screen Rem List Tools es pe Ee IS A A p PYTeaeVvea amp amp aune r A H Fiter Toggle New Edit Delete Duplicate eck Ir eck 0 Mo d move Print Export To File Group Bu Hidden Columns Inventoried Item Number Description Total Availab Total Checked D Total In House On Order Committed Cost Averag ListPrice Sale Price Lo F Nondnventory2 i 0 00 0 00 0 00 i 12 00 0 00 20 00 i 10 TrackBy DateCod 0 00 0 00 0 00 500 12 00 0 00 20 00 20 00 F T 1234567890 No TrackBy Item 205 00 0 00 205 00 69 70 500 12 00 10 00 2
378. ng picked meaning the inventory is being readied for shipping to the customer the quantities that are removed from inventory for each item on the order are entered in the Pick screen At this time the quantities are checked and you cannot pick more than you actually have in inventory unless the Over Pick option is enabled on the Options screen Picking Orders 1 From the Main screen click the Receive Pick icon The Receive Pick menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Receive Pick menu click the Pick button The Pick screen appears ZZ Pick Lola Pick Order Information Order Number Pick Date Kl ae Notes sii Type Item No Stocking Unit Description Requested Qty Previously Picke Quantity Record Iq 4 gofo gt bil Help Close 3 Select which pick order you will be working on from the Order Number drop down list The most recently selected orders will appear in the list or select lt More gt to view the Pick Order List When you select an Order Number the information for the selected picking order populates the screen 181 InventoryControl Printable Help Pick Pa pne AOE Order Number Ship Date 00002 Boom Br D 00002 Notes j Pi pick ref 123 Notes on Pick Order 00002 x 6 18 2007 9 32 57 AM es alla lType Item No _ Stocking Unit Description Requested Qty _ Previously Picke Quantity EI INVENTORY 1 Item TrackBy 100 00 20 00 20 00 Location
379. ng your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Assembly items are created when you combine two or more existing items or multiple quantity of one item to create a new item You will use the Assembly item type when you want to build several of the new items to have on hand in your inventory You can create Assembly Items using Inventoried Non Inventoried Items that are not tracked in inventory but that you want to have a record of For instance you can create an item for marketing pamphlets or instruction booklets items and other Assembly items Kit Items vs Assembly Items While these two item types are used to accomplish similar goals the grouping of items they are used for different reasons Assembly Items are a collection of items that once grouped are considered to be a new single item The inventory quantities for the individual component items are reduced at the time the Assembly Items are built and the quantity for the Assembly Item is increased You can build several Assembly Items and keep them on hand in your inventory In addition you can move and check in out Assembly Items Kit Items are a collection of items that are sold together but are listed separately in the transaction similar to a bill of goods and continue to be tracked as separate items A Kit Item is created at the time of sale You cannot Add inventory in order to have multiple Kit
380. nication Wizard opens with the Mobile Device Setup tab selected If this is the first install of the program on the mobile device the software will automatically send the Platform Program and a Clean Database to the mobile device Once the mobile device has been found the Setup Mobile Device tab displays the following information 394 InventoryControl Printable Help Wasp Mobile Device Communication Wizard Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Check Mobile Device Connection The communication wizard has detected a Windows Mobile CE device connected to the PC The InventoryControl program does not exist on the mobile device If you want to install the program and required components to the mobile device select the desired install option s and click the Install button to proceed Select the install option titled Platform Program and Clean Database if you are setting up the device for the first time or after a cold reboot After the installation has completed click the Next button to continue Platform Program and Clean Database Program and Clean Database Program Only Install Step 1 of 1 Mobile device type WindowsCE e If this is the first time you are setting up the device you can skip this screen by clicking the Next button The platform program and a clean database are automatically sent to the device e If there was a problem with th
381. not enabled when one of the standard address types Corporate Receiving etc is selected 1 On the Company Information screen select the address type you want to delete by choosing from the Address Type drop down menu 2 Click the Delete button A confirmation screen will appear 3 Select Yes on the confirmation screen to delete the information for the selected Address Type Note You cannot delete addresses that are part of active Pick Orders 229 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 3 Adding Users Editing Security Privileges The Security Privileges screen allows those users setup as Administrators in the system to add users set privileges and or delete users Note for WaspNest Users The Security Privileges feature is not available in WaspNest Inventory For more information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen A user with Administration Privileges called an Admin User can add new users and make changes to existing users security options We recommend that at least one Admin user in addition to the default Admin user be added to the system soon after installation This topic covers Accessing the Security Privileges Screen Adding Users on the Security Privileges Screen Editing User Profiles on the Security Privileges Screen Making Users Inactive Copying User Security Profiles Security Privileges Definiti
382. nputs for another Add Item Location PO and Supplier values for this second Add will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop While looping on this Tracked By field all that is required for each Add are values for Qty and Pallet The Total Qty is incremented each time an Add is submitted while looping 323 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Press the ENT key to submit the Add transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop When looping on a Tracked By field all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be restarted Tips for Speeding Up Data Entry e When you create a new item if the Category Manufacturer UOM or any combination of pinnable fields will be used on a large number of items create one item with those fields then pin the fields Now the information will be retained in those fields so you don t have to keep re entering it for each new item e Make sure you have the Close New Forms option turned off on the InventoryControl Options screen so the New Item screen or any other screen where new information is added stays open after each new item is saved 324 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 14 WDT2200 Details Screen The Details function is used to display Location and Quantity information for any Item in the PDT s dat
383. ns he or she is about to perform The Source Site will determine the locations available in the Location field of the Add Remove Adjust and Audit functions It will also determine the locations available in the From location field of the Move function The Destination Site will determine the locations available in the Move function s To location field No inventory transactions can be performed on the PDT until Source and Destination Sites have been selected in Site Config This must be done at least once following after sending a new mobile database to the device 315 InventoryControl Printable Help Configuring Sites 1 The Site Config function can be accessed by selecting the 6 key on the PDT Main Menu or the 3 key if the PDT is in Audit Mode Site Config Source Dest Site Select Select Fi Sre F2 Dest ESC Menu 2 Select a Source Site by pressing the F1 key Source Site Warehouse 1 Press Ent to accept ESC to cancel F1 Prev F4 Next Above the site WAREHOUSE 1 can be accepted as the Source Site by pressing the key to accept the value or Press the F4 key to scroll to the next Site in the PDT database or Press the F1 key to scroll to the next Site in the PDT database or Press the Escape key to cancel When a Source Site is selected a screen similar to the one below will appear Site Config Source Dest Site Warehouse 2 Select F1 Sre F2 Dest ESC Menu 3 Select a Destination Site by
384. ns on the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic For more information on creating pick orders please refer to the Creating a Pick Order topic For more information on creating purchase orders please refer to the Creating a Purchase Order topic 213 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 13 Creating Editing Printing Labels 13 1 Selecting a Label Printer The Labels menu provides access to pre built labels contained in the software or allows you to create new labels Printing Editing Creating Browsing Labels 1 Select a Label Printer From the Main Screen click Options gt Select Label Printer The Select Label Printer screen appears Ka Select Label Printer me Se Select the printer used to print labels This printer will be the label printer for this user until itis changed Printer Name _ VMware Virtual Printer Microsoft XPS Document Writer Snagkt 8 Help OK f Cancel 2 All printers currently connected to this computer will appear Highlight the printer you want to use then click OK You can now begin printing labels 214 InventoryControl Printable Help 13 2 Using the Labels Menu The software allows you to select from several pre built labels that can be printed the list screens or edited from the Labels menu You can also create your own unique labels from the Labels menu The following topics are covered in this section Editing Labels Creating Custo
385. nsactions Please make sure that the mobile device is connected and powered on Click the Nep button to start sending data Step 1 of 2 401 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 After checking to make sure the device is connected to your PC click Next A status bar will appear as the data is transferred A confirmation message appears after the transfer is complete Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Send Data to WindowsCE Data transfer complete You are now ready to use InventoryControl with the mobile device After you are finished working with the device you can click on the Mobile Device to PC tab to start retrieving the information that you ve collected on mobile device 13 Click Finish to close the Wizard screen 14 On the mobile device you will see a message similar to the following x Click OK to process the data records from the PC to be inserted into the application database InyentoryGontrol Click OK to insert the records into the mobile database InventoryControl will start automatically on the device after the transfer You can now perform transactions on the mobile device After you have performed transactions on the mobile device you need to send the data back to the PC 402 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 8 3 Batch Windows Mobile Device Sending the Database from the PC As you add change or remove data from
386. nstructions for Setting Date and Time on a Cold Started WDT2200 1 Press and hold the Command key until the following system menu is displayed 1 RUH 3 CDN 5 ERA 7 CPY 2 Press the 8 key to select 8 SET 3 Press the 1 key to select 1 DATE amp TIME 2 TER 4 DIR 6 T P 8 3ET 4 Overwrite the Date shown with today s date in the format mm dd yyyyy You can use the right arrow key to correct any entry errors or press the Enter and advance to setting the Time of Day key to accept the current date 5 Overwrite the Time shown with the current time of day in the format hh mm ss using values of 0 through 12 for Midnight through Noon and 13 through 23 for the hours of 1 00 PM through 11 00 PM 6 Press the 5 key to select 5 EXIT InventoryControl Printable Help 7 Press the Escape key to exit the system menu and return to the default power on prompt You should now perform the Setup Device function to load the InventoryControl program to your WDT2200 Instructions for Setting Date and Time on a WDT2200 That Already Has InventoryControl Installed 1 If the InventoryControl Main Menu is currently displayed 1 fAdd 6 Site Config Stage LOGOUT select 8 LOGOUT to exit to the InventoryControl Log On screen InventoryControl User Password 2 From the Log On screen power off the WDT2200 by pressing and holding the power g key until no text is displayed on the screen 3 With the WDT2200 powered
387. nt to calculate this however you should make sure that the Cost you enter is the cost for one whole Stocking Unit either Feet or Inches in our example Keep in mind that you can enter a new cost on the Add Inventory screen if you purchase this item at a discount Cost Method Cost Method does not apply to Kit items 165 InventoryControl Printable Help This is a calculated value that averages the cost paid for the current Quantity This will be blank when you are entering a new item but will appear when you are viewing the Edit Item screen for an item that has inventory quantity If you have 20 quantity of this item at cost 10 00 and add another 30 quantity at cost 8 00 Average Cost 20 x 10 00 30 x 8 00 50 8 80 Average Cost Removes are calculated using the inventory calculation method you specified For example if you are using the FIFO method if you later remove 5 5 of the 10 00 items will be removed first Average Cost 15 x 10 00 30 x 8 00 45 8 67 When calculating Average Cost the software does not include records that have an average cost of zero When you run an Inventory Cost Report the software does include zero cost quantities when calculating Total Cost List Price This field specifies a manufacturer s list price for an item This field is for your information only and is not included on any reports Sale Price This field specifies the price at which you sell an item This field i
388. ntering data in the General Information tab click the Additional tab this tab is optional 77 InventoryControl Printable Help E Create New Customer Ex General Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Phone Extension Fax Cell No Home No Email Notes Add Notes Help Save Close The Additional tab provides optional fields where you can record the manufacturer s Phone Extension Fax Cell No Home No and Email In addition you can create notes on this manufacturer on this tab by clicking the Add Notes button For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs see Using Custom Fields When you have finished adding information click the OK Save button The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen e When the Close New Form option is turned off Click Save to commit your entry or click Close to exit the form e When the Close New Form option is turned on Click OK to commit your entry and exit the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry For more information about the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic 78 79 InventoryControl Printable Help InventoryControl Printable Help 5 8 Creating New Suppliers The Create New Supplier screen allows you to add a new supplier to your database A supplier is typically the company or organization from which you obtain an It
389. ntity will reside The Move function allows you to move that inventory from the originally assigned location to another By moving inventory in the software you can easily keep accurate records of where all of your inventory is currently located Note Make sure the PDT s date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions Move transactions can also be performed on the PC s Move screen Source and or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT Please use the Site Config function to Select Source and Destination Sites ESC Exit Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function For more information on configuring sites on the PDT please refer to the topic WDT2200 Configuring Sites The following topics are discussed in this section Moving Inventory Looping on Serial Number Looping on Location Looping on Item Number Looping on Track Bys Other than Serial Number Moving Inventory The Move function can be accessed by pressing the 3 key on the PDT Main Menu Press the PDT s Enter key after supplying an Item or press the PDT s ESC key to return to the Main Menu Move Item 123 343 InventoryControl Printable Help Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu If th
390. ntoryControl will automatically assign serial number to each item starting with 1000 If you add inventory of 500 to this item the serial numbers assign by 92 InventoryControl Printable Help InventoryControl will be 1000 1500 To enable Automatic Serial Numbers a Click the button to the right of the Serial Number check box The Auto Serial Number Options screen is displayed 3 Auto Serial Number Options el Auto Increment Serial Numbers Starting Number 1000 Help Cancel Check the Auto Increment Serial Numbers checkbox to have the software automatically assign incremented serial numbers Enter a Starting Number This number determines the number at which the serial number sequence starts Since this option is applied at the Item level each Item in the program may have its own unique series of serial numbers d Click OK to accept your entries This section contains check boxes which act much like the Tracked By boxes but contains a different set of fields PO Supplier and Customer which are always available for use even if they are not required For example if the option is not apply to enabled for the Supplier Code field a user adding inventory can enter a value for WaspNest Supplier Code if he knows it or skip entering a value if he doesn t If this option is enabled a value for Supplier Code is required to complete the transaction Cost specifies the amount your company paid to get this item into in
391. o Manual Local Service Ch Windows Co EH arted Manual Local Service T Windows D Properties pred Automatic D Local Syste Ze emt ee Help Extended Standard Opens the properties dialog box for the current selection On the Properties screen select the Log On tab 422 InventoryControl Printable Help Log on as Allow service to interact with desktop Ihis account Password Confirm password 4 Select the This account checkbox and then the Browse button Log on as Local System account Allow service to interact with desktop This account Password seceeeesesesese Confirm password Gegeeeegegeeeegeeeg 5 Enter the printer name in the box provided then click the Check Names button 423 10 InventoryControl Printable Help Select this object type User or Built in security principal Erom this location Enter the object name to select examples Click OK On the Log On tab enter the password and confirmed password then click Apply e rope tog Gi Log on as Local System account Allow service to interact with desktop This account Name will appear here Password seceeceseseeese Confirm password seececesesesese Help me configure user account log on options Click the Apply button A confirmation message similar to the following will appear The acco
392. obile device type WindowsCE 232 Make sure the device is attached to the PC then click Next The data uploaded from the Windows Mobile Device is sent to an XML file Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Receive Data From WindowsCE232 Data transfer completed successfully You may now click the Finish button to exit this wizard or the Back button if you have additional transactions to receive from another mobile device When you close this window a screen titled Pending Uploads will open allowing you to accept the mobile transactions into the PC database You can always manually start this function at any time by selecting Process Mobile Device Data under Mobility on the main window Step 2 of 2 410 InventoryControl Printable Help The Pending Uploads screen will display to allow you to process the uploaded data in the XML file See the Windows Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 20 8 5 Batch Pending Uploads Screen This function does not apply to WaspNest Inventory This screen is used when uploading a batch file from a mobile device Users with a wireless connection will not use this screen Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Pending Uploads screen all
393. ock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field The Add Adjust etc button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these transactions to the Pending Transaction List Clicking the Fi button will unlock the field Complete the Item fields To input an Item Number you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop down list to select an existing item from the Item List You can use the drop down list of any enabled field to select an existing value for that field Entering an item number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description and enables the following fields e Location filtered by Site e Quantity e Any of the associated Track By fields Any of the associated Track By fields Serial Number Date Code Lot or Pallet A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the Item is created 157 InventoryControl Printable Help Below is an example of the screen with the fields enabled Data Pending Transaction List 0 Item Itern Number 100002 II Quantity 0 00 Sit Description Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Reason Positive X I E Location S E3 By Counts By Difference Track By Serial Number Date Code 4 Lot 4 Pallet 4 Transaction Code es LEI Notes otes E3 Adjust Selecting a Reason from the drop down list allows you
394. od used in previous versions of InventoryControl The legacy method uses FIFO and manages cost by location and track by level How do I determine my Stocking Unit The quantity of an item on all screens and reports is counted using the Stocking Unit you specify or eaches ea if you do not specify a unit The stocking unit can be entered for each item on the New or Edit Item screen s Additional tab shown below ZS Edit tern 101 101 L General Location Settings ltem Measurements Stocking Unit Ea Dimension Unit Width Weight Unit When you enter the stocking unit you need to pick the smallest unit of measure that you will ever use to remove a whole item A good test to use when deciding what the stocking unit should be is to ask yourself how you count and refer to one unit Think about what your answer would be if you were asked to count how many of this item you have If the answer is 100 feet of rope for example feet or ft is the stocking unit If the answer is 20 scanners then ea is the stocking unit because each is common when the unit itself is not a standard unit of measure If the answer is 100 boxes or nails then box or bx is the stocking unit 17 InventoryControl Printable Help We will address what you do if you remove in partial quantities or purchase the item in larger quantities than the stocking unit later in this topic What is the Cost for my item When
395. om on location to another You will be prompted to enter a unique and valid serial number for each laptop you are moving so that your inventory can be accurately tracked Tracked By options cannot be changed after you add inventory to the item If you need to change a tracked by item you will have to remove all inventory from that item delete the item and create a new record Serial Numbers Equipment such as must be unique printers and radios or Serial for each item anything for which you Number and limit you to need to know which managing one specific item you are item at a time using These numbers are provided by Medical the Supplies manufacturer to Pharmaceuticals indicate from which batch Food products these items were made Date Code track Food the expiration or other use by date Chemicals Manufacturing Supplies Building Supplies Pallet refers to the pallet from which the item was received You can choose to have the program automatically create and assign serial Automatic numbers each time you add inventory for this item whether manually using the Serial Add Inventory feature or by Receiving Inventory For example you create the Numbers item 2233 VZ Laptop and select to track by serial number You the enable Does not automatic serial numbers by performing the steps described here You choose apply to 1000 as your starting number Now when you add inventory to this item WaspNest Inve
396. om Text and Custom Numbers and Dates Tab For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs see Using Custom Fields 10 2 5 Saving the New Item When you have finished adding information click the OK Save button The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen When the Close New Form option is turned off Click Save to commit your entry or click Close to exit the form When the Close New Form option is turned on Click OK to commit your entry and exit the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry For more information about the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic 169 InventoryControl Printable Help 10 3 Removing Kit Items This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Remove screen allows you to remove a kit item from the database This can be considered the same as shipping inventory You can designate which customer this inventory was shipped to on this screen The Remove function uses FIFO First in First Out to determine what inventory is removed first If you Add 5 of Item 123 to Location Bin 1 for example then another 5 come in on another day you will have ten of that item When you later remove 3 of Item 123 the fir
397. on 140 InventoryControl Printable Help SS Remove ea d Data Pending Transaction List 0 item Number Serial Number gt 4 m Description Lot W E Date Code E Quantity Pallet 1 00 gt zc s Maximum 0 00 bg Remove Date Customer Monday September 08 2008 By LE vi 4 Notes S E3 f Remove Pin All Unpin All Help Cancel To prevent fields from clearing click the Pushpin 4 button located to the right of the field you want to lock for subsequent transactions This is helpful when you have to perform multiple removes at one Location for example Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly remove inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field The Remove button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these remove transactions to the Pending Transaction List Clicking the Fi button will unlock the field 3 Complete the Item fields Enter the Item Number of the item from which you want to remove inventory To enter an Item Number you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop down list to select an existing item from the first 10 Items shown there or select lt more gt to select an Hem from the Item List You can only Remove quantity from items with quantity greater than 0 The Item Number list on this screen will not dis
398. on the group name the arrow next to the name is now pointing in the opposite direction and the information on the screen is reorganized Location Item Number Item Desc Site ti Q Location LOCS 7 no track Site 1 LOCH Location Loc 2 Item All Tr Site 1 Location Loc 1 7 no track Site 1 Loc 1 Z no track Site 1 Loc 1 Deleting Groups If you no longer want to display information in a particular group you can easily ungroup the data For instance if you have created a group for Location but now wish to remove it you can do so by clicking on the group name and dragging it down into the column header section Let go of your cursor anywhere in the column header section and the group disappears 117 InventoryControl Printable Help S ltem Number Item Desc Site Location uu tity Oldes Latest Pallet Lot PO Date Location LOCS 7 no track Site 1 LOCH 1 00 6 1872 6 18 20 Location Loc 2 Item All Tr Location Loc 1 rg no track Site 1 Loc 1 1 00 6 18 72 6 18 20 7 no track Site 1 Loc 1 3 00 6718 2 6 18 20 po The information contained in that group still appears on the display screen but it is no longer grouped together Drag a column header here to group by that column Item Number Item Desc Site Loca Quantity Dldes Latest Pallet Lot PO Date Code Supplier Code Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Be 5 item
399. on the Options screen to accumulate all of the picks on the pick slip For more information on this option please refer to the Options Screen topic After entering the pick quantities click Save to update the amounts on the screen Inventory is removed for those items you marked as picked Click Close to close the screen Quick Scan Entry 183 InventoryControl Printable Help This feature opens a screen that allows you to quickly type in or scan in information When you click the Quick Scan Entry button a screen similar to the one shown below appears E Pick Quick Entry ltem No 1005 Description Location Site 1 Loc 1 Serial Number 1009 Lot Date Code Pallet Quantity 1 00 Request Qty Picked Qty Available Qty You can scan the barcode label on the item and the fields on the Quick Scan Entry screen will populate with the scanned information Click the Pick button then scan the next item and the screen clears and repopulates with the new information This is an easy method for quickly marking items as picked 184 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 12 Purchase Orders Receiving 12 1 Purchase Orders Receiving Overview This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Purchas
400. on the audit mode on the PC please refer to the topic Auditing Your Inventory For more information on creating the database please refer to the topic WDT2200 Creating the PDT Database Notes Audits can also be done at the PC Make sure the PDT s date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions If Source and or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT Please use the Site Config function to Select Source and Destination Sites ESC Exit Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function For more information on configuring sites on the PDT please refer to the topic WDT2200 Configuring Sites Topics discussed in this section Auditing Inventory Looping on Serial Number Looping on Location Looping on Item Number Looping on Track Bys Other than Serial Number Auditing Inventory 1 The Audit function can be accessed by selecting the 1 key on the PDT Main Menu 2 Press the Enter fy key after supplying an Item or press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu 336 InventoryControl Printable Help Audit Item 123 Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu If the Item you entered is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again
401. on the list Click on a listing to highlight it then click the button that accesses the desired function For example if you want to edit Item 10002 use your mouse to click on that listing in your Item List then click the Edit button Arranging Columns You can arrange the columns in the list into any order you wish To change the order click on a column heading and drag it somewhere else on the list For example if you want to make Location the first column in your Inventory List click on the Location column heading and drag it to the first column in the list as shown below Item Desc Site Quantity Oldes me 5 item All Tr Site 1 1 00 6718 2 7 no track Site 1 1 00 6 1872 7 no track Site 1 LOCH 1 00 6 18 2 H no track Site 1 Loc 1 3 00 6 18 2 After you drop the column into its new position the list will reorganize with the Group information appearing first Loca Item Number Item Desc Site Quantity Oldes Latest Pallet Lot PO Date Code Supplier Code Min Stock Level Max Stock Level Be i i 6 18 20 pal i Loci 7 no track Site 1 1 00 6 1872 6 18 20 1 20 00 100 00 Loch 7 no track Site 1 1 00 6718 2 6 18 20 20 00 100 00 Loci 7 no track Site 1 3 00 6 18 72 6 18 20 po i 20 00 100 00 120 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 1 3 Section C Buttons Help EA g Close 7 This section contains the following buttons Help F1 Click t
402. ons Business Examples 15 3 1 Accessing the Security Privileges Screen 1 To access the screen from the Main screen click the Administration icon The Administration Menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 Click the Security icon on the Administration Menu The Security Privileges screen appears Note The Receive Pick Build Assembly and Disassemble Privileges are only available to Pro and Enterprise Version Users 230 InventoryControl Printable Help D I Security Privileges File Edit User List Ea WI EA mA e EA EI A Ea e De d EA EA wv Ww WU e Site Description bi 100 Main Warehouse When you first access this screen you will see a user listed as Admin User as shown in the screen shot above This is the default Admin User and this user cannot be changed or deleted The Admin User profile allows you to access the system for the first time after installation and setup your system The password for this user can be changed if needed 15 3 2 Adding Users to the Security Privileges Screen 1 On the Security Privileges screen click File gt Add User The Add New User screen appears ZE Add New User First Name Last Name Title Department Manager User Name Password Email Status Active B 231 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 First Name Last Name a User Name used when logging on to the system a Password and Status
403. ons screen please refer to the Options Screen topic Below is an example of the Custom Texts tab found on the screens mentioned above General Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Texts Custom Text 1 Custom Text 2 Custom Text 3 Custom Text 4 Custom Text 5 Custom Text 6 Custom Text 7 Custom Text 8 Custom Text 9 Custom Text 10 Help Save Close J Note The fields seen above are not visible when the Edit Field Names option is turned off and no customizations have been applied Custom Numbers fields will accept values ranging from 999999999999999 9999 to 999999999999999 9999 22 InventoryControl Printable Help Custom Dates will be displayed in the same format as found elsewhere in the product day of the week month dd ccyy Example In this example with the Edit Field Names option enabled we have clicked on the Custom Text 1 label on the Custom Texts tab of the Create New Customer screen to edit it The Form field is grayed out because this label only occurs on the Customer screen ZE customize Field x New Name Premium Form Customer Tool tip Enter Y if this is a Premium account Visible Required Set To Default Help OK Cancel Click OK to save the customization or Cancel to abort When the Edit Field Names option is subsequently disabled the Customer Screen gt Custom Texts tab appears as shown below z Create New Customer G
404. oping will need to be restarted 372 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 21 WDT2200 Picking Kit Items This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only When a pick order is actually being picked that is the inventory is being readied for shipping to the customer the quantities that are removed from inventory for each item on the order are entered in the Pick screen Notes e Make sure the PDT s date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions e H Source and or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT Please use the Site Config function to Select Source and Destination Sites ESC Exit Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function For more information on configuring sites on the PDT please refer to the topic WDT2200 Configuring Sites The topics discussed in this section are Picking Inventory Looping on Serial Number Looping on Location Looping on Item Number Looping on Track Bys Other than Serial Number Picking Inventory 1 From the Main Menu press 9 The Pick screen appears Pick Order Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu 373 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Enter the Pick Order number then press the Ent key Press
405. or click Close to exit the form e When the Close New Form option is turned on Click OK to commit your entry and exit the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry For more information about the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic 56 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 2 Creating New Customers The Create New Customer screen allows you to add a new customer to your database When you are setting up your software for the first time you may want to import your customers rather than adding them one at a time through this screen For information on importing information into your database please refer to the Import Into Database topic Adding a Customer 1 From the Main screen select New gt Customer OR From the Main screen select Lists gt Customer On the Customer List select the New icon The Create New Customer screen appears E Create New Customer x General Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Customer No 11113 Name Company Name Department Date Added Wednesday May 23 2007 Jv Address Address Type Customer Billing e Address 1 Address 2 Mail Stop City State Postal Code Country Help Save Close Note This screen is opened automatically when Checking Out or Checking In inventory and a new customer name is entered 2 Type in the customer information The Customer No and Address Type fields are required all other fields are o
406. or more inventory Locations It is usually a building but it might also be a fleet vehicle with one or more bins that can be defined as inventory Locations within that vehicle For more information on Locations please refer to the Creating New Locations topic It is not uncommon to use this product with only one Site defined A minimum of one Site is required Adding a New Site 1 From the Main screen select New gt Site OR From the Main screen select Lists gt Site On the Site List select the New icon The Create New Site screen appears Es Create New Site Em General Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Site Description Notes Add Notes Help Save Close Enter a Site and Description Description allows you to enter a description of the Site This is useful when the Site value is vague For example Site H7 could be described as Hangar 7 Notes is a text field available to record any additional information you might have about this Site Click the Add Notes button to edit the Notes field 55 InventoryControl Printable Help For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs see Using Custom Fields When you have finished adding information click the OK Save button The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen e When the Close New Form option is turned off Click Save to commit your entry
407. or the tracking fields you specified The three optional tracking fields are always available when Adding and Removing items and can be filled out as needed You can also select to make these optional fields required on the Create New Item screen When you select to use one of the optional fields by selecting it on the Create New Item screen the field becomes required for that item You can select tracking fields on the Edit Item screen as long as no inventory has been added to the item Serial Number is the most common and is different from the rest of the tracking fields Serial Numbers must be unique for each piece of inventory When an item is tracked by serial number a unique serial number must be entered for each individual piece of that item you enter into inventory When the item is removed or moved the system will also require the serial number This allows the location and movement of the item to be tracked exactly The other tracking fields are not required to be unique If you are tracking by lot you could add 100 items with lot number 206 Date Code is used if the item has an expiration date or production date that is important for recalls or tracking Do not use the Date Code field to track when an item is added to InventoryControl Each Add transaction in InventoryControl is time stamped to allow you to track when an item was added To track when an item is added view the Transaction List Main Screen gt Lists gt Transactions or run th
408. order and they will be inserted into the current order The quantity in the Reorder Quantity field on the Location tab will be used for the quantity requested on the purchase order 198 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 7 Deleting Purchase Orders Pick Orders Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen You can quickly delete a Purchase Order or Pick Order from the Purchase Order or Pick Order List Only orders with a status of New can be deleted Once the status changes to In Process meaning the order is partially received or partially picked the order can no longer be deleted however these can still be edited or closed Deleting Purchase Orders Pick Orders 1 From the Main screem select Lists gt Purchase Orders or Lists gt Pick Orders depending on which type of order you want to delete The List screen appears 2 On the List screen highlight the order you want to delete then click the Delete button If this order cannot be deleted has a status of In Process a warning message will appear notifying you If the order can be deleted a confirmation message will appear 3 Click Yes on the confirmation message to delete the order 199 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 8 Receive Pick Menu This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only
409. ormed transactions add move etc and need to send the data back to the PC Note This applies to batch devices only If you are using a wireless connection you will not need to retrieve information from the mobile device Your mobile device will be connected directly to the database and any changes additions you make on the mobile device will immediately update the database For information about using a wireless connection please refer to the topic Using a Mobile Device with a Wireless Connection Sending Data to the PC 1 On the InventoryControl Main Window click the Mobility icon If you have more than one type of mobile device installed a menu will appear allowing you to select which device you will be working with If you have only one type the Mobility Menu for that device will appear at the bottom of the screen On the Mobility Menu select Get Data From be B SS E Setup Mobile Create Mobile Send Data To Get Data From Process Mobile The Wasp Mobile Device Communication Wizard screen displays with the Mobile Device to PC tab displayed 409 InventoryControl Printable Help Wasp Mobile Device Communication Wizard Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Receive Data From WindowsCE232 This step will transfer all transactions performed on the mobile device back to the PC where they can then be processed Step 1 of 2 M
410. ory the customer wants to check out To input an Item Number you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop list to select an existing Item from the Item List Entering an Wem Number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description field and enables the following fields 153 InventoryControl Printable Help e Location filtered by Site e Quantity unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number Set on the Add or Edit Item screens which fixes the Quantity to a value of 1 e Any of the associated Tracked By fields Serial Number Date Code Lot or Pallet Set on the Add or Edit Item screens A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the item is created Below is an example of this screen with the fields enabled E Check Out Data Pending Transaction List 0 Customer Customer 11111 e LA Cambridge Academy a ltem Item Number 1000221 Quantity 1 00 Sit A Description Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Maximum 12 0000 Location A ALoct A Track By Serial Number Date Code 4 Lot 4 Pallet 4 Due Date Default Custom None Ise Notes Da Check Out He Cancel _ The Maximum value shows the greatest quantity of this Item that can be Checked Out Complete the Track By fields As mentioned above the Track By fields are enabled based on the Item Number you enter If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item these fields will be disabled Track
411. ose selected via the filters specified This can be employed when you expect to use the mobile device to Add quantity for Items that have never been inventoried before The mobile device user can specify previously defined Locations or create new Locations while adding the previously Location less Items 400 InventoryControl Printable Help 9 After you have made your filter selections click the Next button The following message appears Create Database P 4re you sure you want to create the mobile database If you have created mobile database before it will be replaced by the new one that s about to be generated Click YES to proceed NO to cancel 10 Click Yes to create the database The wizard displays a confirmation message that the database has been successfully created Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Create Mobile Database For YYindowsCE Create mobile database completed successfully Please click the Next button to proceed 11 Click the Next button The PC to Mobile Device tab displays Note at the bottom of the screen the wizard indicates there are two steps on this tab Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Send Data to WindowsCE This step will send mobile database to the portable device Once it is completed you should be able to start using the mobile device to collect data and perform tra
412. otal Checked Out Total In House 123456789012345678901234567000 105 00 105 00 223456789012345678901 234567000 47 00 4700 em D are sess e m i Current Page No 1 Total Page No 3 Zoom Factor 100 The Status Bar in this example reports the current page being viewed the total number of pages and the current zoom factor The left panel shows the report tree that shows how the report is organized and allows you to chose specific nodes The ReportViewer Tool Bar provides the following functions Go to First Page takes you to the beginning of the report Go to Previous Page Go to Next Page _ Go to Last Page takes you to the end of the report Print Report launches the Print dialog 221 InventoryControl Printable Help L Refresh updates the report with current data EI Export Report allows you to save the report as your choice of any of the following formats Adobe Acrobat Reader pdf file Microsoft Excel xls file Microsoft Word doc file or Rich Text Format rtf file 2 Toggle Group Tree OFF ON When this is turned off it will increase the width of the Report display by turning off the Group Tree area at the left of the ReportViewer screen When it is on it will restore the Group Tree display at the left of the ReportViewer screen the default display LO Zoom allows you to scale the Report display via a drop list of percentages Page Width Whole Page 400 300 200 150
413. ote For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The process of Disassembling Assembly Items will reduce your inventory for the Assembly Item and increase your inventory of the associated sub items You will be Removing inventory for the Assembly Item and Adding inventory to the sub items unless the sub item has been marked to be scrapped Scrapping an item means that inventory will be reduced for that item during the Disassembly process You can mark the sub item as Always Scrap during the Assembly Item creation process so that it will always be scrapped when disassembled This is useful for packaging materials such as boxes that will not be returned to inventory To Disassemble Assembly Items 1 From the Main screen click Inventory 2 On the Inventory menu click Disassemble The Disassemble screen will appear SS Disassemble LL e Data Pending Transaction List o tem Number Serial Number RE KA EA v Description Lot s LEI Location Date Code 4 LE Quantity Pallet 1 0 4 Wel Maximum 0 Date Disassembled Customer Wednesday September 03 2008 Di L sl 4 Notes L 3 5 Pina UnpinA Disassemble l Help 0 Cancel 107 InventoryControl Printable Help Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin 4 button located to the right of the field you
414. ou create a new item if the Category Manufacturer UOM or any combination of pinnable fields will be used on a large number of items create one item with those fields then pin the fields Now the information will be retained in those fields so you don t have to keep re entering it for each new item e Make sure you have the Close New Forms option turned off on the InventoryControl Options screen so the New Item screen or any other screen where new information is added stays open after each new item is saved 385 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 20 Windows Mobile Device 20 1 Windows Mobile Device Data Cycle Batch Device No Wireless Connection PC 1 Windows Mobile Device Setup Setup Device 3 Create Mobile Database Created on PC 4 Synchronize Mobile Device Download PC to Windows Mobile Device Mobile Device 5 Get Data from PC on Windows Mobile Device 6 Use Mobile Device 7 Send Data to PC from Windows Mobile Device PC 8 Synchronize Mobile Device Upload Windows Mobile Device to PC 9 Process Mobile Device Data 20 2 Windows Mobile Device Data Cycle Wireless Connection PC Windows Mobile Device Wireless Setup Mobile Device Use Mobile Device 386 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 3 Windows Mobile Device Interface p My Device e Recycle Bin WASP BARCODE TECHNOLOGIES a desktop Ed InventoryCo ntrol Once the database has been sent to the mobile device i
415. ou want to remove in the Item field or tap the i icon to access the Find screen Please refer to the Search Function topic for information on using the Find screen The Remove screen changes when a Kit item is selected Remove Item Customer Cl 83 Remove 3 Dr 11 20 a i S 3 You can optionally enter a customer number or search for a customer 4 Enter the quantity you want to remove and click OK The quantity is the number of Kits you want to remove The Remove Kit screen appears 459 InventoryControl Printable Help Remove Kit Site Location Lot Date Code Serial Pallet Oty a 87 Remove Jo B 11 32 m L This is where you will select the Kit s component items to remove 5 Enter the Item of the component item or tap the i icon to view the Kit Info screen Only items contained in this Kit will appear D Can L mmes The Kit Info screen displays all component items for this Kit item The Item is the item number of the component item The Total Qty is the total quantity of this item in this kit multiplied by the quantity you want to 460 InventoryControl Printable Help remove If there are 5 items in the kit and you have indicated you want to remove 12 60 will display here 5 x 12 60 If there are 10 items in the kit and you want to remove 12 120 will display here 10 x 12 120 Undo will undo all of the transactions for that component item and re
416. our locations are shelves attach a label to each shelf to identify it 1 10 Step Six Enter Suppliers Enter Suppliers Suppliers are those businesses or individuals from which you will be obtaining your inventory Your business might require that each Item in your inventory have an associated supplier You can have one supplier or many providing you with inventory If you already have supplier information contained in another database you may want to use InventoryControl s Import function rather than manually entering in this information View Business Examples 1 11 Step Seven Print the Supplier Report Print the Supplier Report If you have chosen to import your suppliers or manually enter all suppliers prior to adding items you should print and review the Supplier Report to make sure all the information was entered correctly To run the Supplier Report from the Main screen select the Reports icon On the Select Report screen double click Supplier Report 1 12 Step Eight Create Items Create Items Items represent the actual material or good that you will have in your inventory The item is a classification that contains information such as manufacturer suppliers a description of the item and unit of measure information The item is not part of your inventory until you add quantity to it and specify a location for it For example you might create an Item entry for Mouse Wireless Then you can add inventory or quantity to th
417. out inventory decreases the quantity of that item that you have on hand but does not remove the inventory from your database since it is assumed the inventory will be checked back in The check out function is useful if you lease equipment to customers or have a need to temporarily loan out inventory You can only check out inventory that has been added This means that when you create an item you must add inventory quantity to it before you can check out that item to a customer Remember that inventory is the amount or quantity of an item You can add inventory to an item either on the Add Inventory screen or by Receiving inventory To Check Out Inventory 1 From the Main menu click the Check Out icon The Check Out screen appears Customer Item Site Location Quantity Default Note You can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering Alphanumeric Data on the Window Mobile Device for details or use the Search function 2 Enter the Customer to whom this piece of inventory will be checked out Click the i icon to search for a customer 3 Enter the Item you want to check out Click the i icon to search for a item 4 Enter the Site and Location of the item you want to check out Click the i icon to search for a site or location 5 Enter the Quantity you want to check out You cannot check out more than you have available in stock 6 Select the due date for this item from the drop down menu Yo
418. ows you to select and validate data for upload into the InventoryControl database on the PC This data has previously been collected from one or more mobile devices Using the Pending Uploads Screen 1 This screen will automatically appear after transferring data from the mobile device to the PC OR From the Mobility Menu click Process Mobile b B d od P Setup Mobile Create Mobile Send Data To Get Data From Process Mobile Step 1 Upload Selection is the first screen presented 411 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 Pending Uploads Step 1 Upload Selection Select the user to upload WindowsCE232_20070531_193130_ EN Type Quantity Customers 0 Suppliers 0 Locations 1 1 Transactions 2 Use the Upload Selection screen to select one of the sets of data that has been downloaded from a mobile device There may be several files in the list depending on how many mobile devices you use and how often you do this step to process accumulated files We recommend that you always select the oldest file and process those transactions first The example above shows transactions uploaded from WindowsCE232 on May 31 2007 at 19 31 30 The device WindowsCE232 has been selected from the drop down list that displays all the mobile devices that have transferred mobile data to the PC but have not yet been uploaded into the InventoryControl database 3 Click Next If you had a new addition customer location et
419. p Bits 4 E Change Portable Settings Transfer Programs You must load the mobile device program onto each device you will be using This procedure only needs to be performed once for each new mobile device Data will not be lost however if this transfer is made multiple times on the same mobile device Click the Transfer Program To Mobile Device button below to transfer the program Transfer Program To Mobile Device Step 1of 1 4 Normally you should not have to make changes to the values set by the Auto Detect function but changes can be made to the COM Port Settings if necessary Specify the Serial Port to which your PDT is connected The Serial Port drop list will display COM1 through COMn where n is the highest address found on your system Specify the Baud Rate at which your PC is to communicate with the PDT Itis recommended that you use the default value of 19200 reducing the Baud Rate to lesser values only if you encounter difficulty transferring files Specify the Parity and Stop Bits for the serial port if it is not defined with the defaults shown above None and 1 respectively If InventoryControl is not already installed you will receive the following message Information DY The InventoryControl program does not exist on the mobile device Would you like to install it now 5 Click Yes to install the program While it is loading you will see a status bar and the device will beep occa
420. p the Mobile Device 394 WMD Site Configuration eeeeeeeeeeeee 437 WMD Troubleshooting AA 485 Working with Lists 0 cceccceesseeeeseeeeeeeeeees 112 WPA1000 Troubleshooting Wireless CONNECTION aseene e eene unne eE 426
421. play or accept numbers that do not have quantity Entering an Item Number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description field and enables the following fields e Quantity unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number Set on the Add or Edit Item screens which fixes the Quantity to a value of 1 e Location e Any of the associated Tracked By fields The Track By fields do not apply to WaspNest Inventory Serial Number Date Code Lot or Pallet Set on the Add or Edit Item screens A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the item is created 141 InventoryControl Printable Help e Customer e Notes Below is an example of the Remove screen with the fields enabled ZE Remove ci foe letz Data Pending Transaction List 0 ltem Number Serial Number lE wm m Description Lot Track by serial number 100 s fs Location ian Date Code 100 Aisle 1 LEI 05 05 2010 Quantity Pallet 00 N 12 DE Maximum 1 00 Remove Date D Customer Monday September 08 2008 By 4 el D Notes f d Remove Pinal Unpin Al Help i Cancel You can use the drop down list of any enabled field to select an existing value for that field Note If the Automatic New option is enabled on the Options screen the Create New Customer screen will be opened automatically if an unknown Customer is entered If the Automatic New option is turned off when an unknown Custome
422. plier will not be added unless the data for all other fields is completed correctly and the Add is successfully completed Adding New Suppliers In this example a new Supplier will be added to the database while an Item is added 1 On the Add screen enter the data for the Item you want to add 2 Inthe Supplier field enter the new Supplier you want to add Item 1000 Site Site 1 PO Supplier New Supplier Serial Y Add SE n Pm DA S 3 Click OK The following message displays InyentoryGontrol gt Supplier does not exist Do sy you want to add this new supplier New Supplier 442 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 Click Yes The Item and the new Supplier are added and the fields are now reset in the Add screen If no errors display this indicates that both the addition of the Supplier and the Item were successful 5 To verify the supplier was added tap the Search icon next to the Supplier field The Search Suppliers screen displays and the Supplier you added displays in the Supplier list See the Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 20 11 7 Windows Mobile Device Adding Inventory The Add inventory function is used to add quantity to any item setup in the database Inventory can also be added at the PC See the Adding Inventory and Importing into the Database topics for more information Adding Inventory 1 From the Main
423. port lt J Customer By Postal Code Report lt Customer By State Report lt J Customer Remove History Report E e Item Reports SJ Item By Category Report lt J ltem By Manufacturer Report SJ ltem By Supplier Report lt J ltem Reorder by Item Total Report J Item Reorder by Location Report SJ Item Summary Report SJ Item Transaction History Report SJ Out of Stock Items By Location Report _ SEO ee ET Help Cancel 2 Highlight the desired report then click the OK button or double click on the report name The report opens in the Report Viewer For more information on viewing reports please refer to the Report Viewer topic Selecting lt Browse To Other Reports gt lets you select the RPT file you want to open by browsing your drives 220 InventoryControl Printable Help 14 2 Report Viewer The Report Viewer presents reports in an interactive environment that permits keyword searches printing and export to Adobe Acrobat Reader pdf Microsoft Excel xls Microsoft Word doc or Rich Text Format rtf files The Report Viewer is accessed by selecting a report name from the Report Selection screen ZE Report Viewer fo d oa Sla gt Nji B M K Ne BusinessObjects Del f Main Report 0 Site 2 R Inventory By Location Report Informatics Inc Site Site 1 Location Loc 1 tem Number Description Total Available T
424. ppear populated with the selected user s information 233 3 InventoryControl Printable Help Type in new data as needed then click the OK button You will be returned to the Security Privileges screen Click OK on the Security Privileges screen to save your changes If you change your own security privileges the changes will not go into effect until the next time you log on Note If you select Cancel you will exit the screen without saving changes made to the Privileges section on the currently selected user Changes previously made to other users will be saved A message will appear asking if you want to discard changes Select Yes to close the screen without saving the changes or No to save any changes d The Admin User is unique in that its user name and privileges cannot be changed Only the password can be changed for the Admin user 15 3 4 Making Users Inactive Admin Users can mark users as Inactive meaning all privileges are revoked and the user s login will be inactivated On the Security Privileges screen highlight the user name you want to make inactive in the User List Select Edit gt Update User The Update Existing User screen appears Select Inactive from the Status drop down menu Click OK on the Update Existing User screen You will be returned to the Security Privileges screen Select OK on the Security Privileges screen 15 3 5 Copying User Security Profiles If you have multiple users who will
425. pplier and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet after entering them for the first Move 123 Qty Pallet 7 Total Qty 30 00000 F4 Done 349 InventoryControl Printable Help Above having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first Move this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Move Item Location PO and Supplier values for this second Move will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop While looping on this Tracked By field all that is required for each Move are values for Qty and Pallet The Total Qty is incremented each time an Move is submitted while looping KE Press the ENT key to submit the Move transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop When looping on a Tracked By field all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be restarted 350 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 18 WDT2200 Removing Inventory The Remove function allows you to remove quantity from any item in the database Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item Items must first be imported or entered on the Add Item screen before you can add quantity or remove quantity Inventory is also removed when you pick items for a Pick Order Applies to Pro and Ent
426. pressing the F2 key Dest Site 316 InventoryControl Printable Help Warehouse 3 Press Ent to accept ESC to cancel F1 Prev F4 Next Above the site WAREHOUSE 3 can be accepted as the Destination Site by pressing the ENT key to accept the value or Press the F4 key to scroll to the next Site in the PDT database or Press the F1 key to scroll to the next Site in the PDT database or Press the ESC key to cancel 4 Use F1 or F2 again to change your Site selections or press ESC to return to the Main Menu if you are done making your Site selections Note In this example the Source and Destination Sites are different Every inventory transaction will be for Items at the Source Site s Locations except for Moves where the To Locations will be limited to those at the Destination Site All Moves will be from Warehouse 2 locations to Warehouse 3 locations Had Warehouse 2 been selected as both the Source Site and the Destination Site all Moves would be from locations within Warehouse 2 to other locations within Warehouse 2 19 13 WDT2200 Adding Inventory The Add function is used to add quantity to any item defined in the PDT database Notes Adds can also be done at the PC Make sure the PDT s date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions If Source and or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT the following message will be displayed the first time you a
427. ption on the Options screen For more information on enabling this option please refer to the Options Screen topic Only inactive transactions are eligible for archive These are transactions that no longer impact the current inventory For instance if you added a quantity of 10 to a specific item number and all of those have since been removed the initial add transaction is inactive and will be archived if it occurred before the date specified Archiving is useful to keep your database running quickly by storing unused information Archiving Transactions 1 From the Main screen click Tools gt Archive Transactions The Archive Transactions screen appears RA Archive Transactions ES Archive all inactive transactions before the specified date Transaction Date Gr 1 2003 EN Help OK Cancel 2 Setthe Transaction Date to the date before which inactive transactions will be archived or leave it at the default date 3 Click OK to archive the selected inactive transactions or click Cancel to close the screen without archiving any data 4 If desired you can run the Transaction History Archived Report to review the archived transactions 249 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 8 Editing Field Names When the Edit Field Names option is enabled on the Options screen users setup with Administrative Privileges on the Security screen can edit some field and function names Editing Field Names is useful
428. ptional The customer name and address can then be selected when creating 57 InventoryControl Printable Help Pick Orders Pro and Enterprise versions only If you have the Automatic Customer Numbers option selected on the Options screen the Customer No field will appear populated with the next number in the sequence For further information on the this option please refer to the Options Screen topic The software provides you with the ability to enter a Billing Address Receiving Address and or Shipping Address for your customers To enter multiple address follow the steps below a On the Company Information screen enter your company name Select what type of address you will be entering from the Address Type drop down menu b Enter the remainder of the address information then click OK You will be returned to the Administration Menu c Click the Company Info icon again The Company Information screen will reappear populated with the information you just entered d Select a different address type of the Address Type drop down menu The address lines Address 1 and 2 City State Postal Code and Country will clear while all other company information will remain on the screen e Enter the new address information then click OK Repeat these steps for each address type 3 When you have finished entering data in the General Information tab click the Additional Information tab this tab is optional 58 InventoryCont
429. quired field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field The Add button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these add transactions to the Pending Transaction List Clicking the E button will unlock the field 2 Complete the Item fields Enter the Item Number of the item you want to audit To enter an Item Number you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop down list to see the first 10 items in the database select lt more gt on the drop down list to see all items in the Hem List You cannot create a new item during an audit Entering an Wem Number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description field and enables the following fields e Location e Quantity unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number Set on the Add or Edit Item screens which fixes the Quantity to a value of 0 or 1 e Any of the associated Tracked By fields Serial Number Date Code Lot or Pallet Set on the Add or Edit Item screens A Tracked By field is enabled or disabled at the time the item is created Items tracked by serial number that are checked out cannot be audited Below is an example of the Audit screen enabled 281 InventoryControl Printable Help SE Audit acon Data Pending Transaction List 0 Item Item Number 100002 sl Quantity 1 00 Sab A Description Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch Location x a Track
430. r SI z Description Lot s Quantity e Date Code 1 00 4 gt Location Pallet 5 DI Maximum 0 00 w Pin All Unpin All Remove Hep Cancel This Remove screen displays all items tied to this Kit Item Those items that appear checked as in the example above are ready to be removed Items that are not checked need additional information usually a Track By or Location if inventory is kept at more than one location In the Item Number field enter the Item Number or highlight an unchecked item in the display screen The selected item s information will populate the screen Enter any missing information usually a Track By such as Serial Number When you are tracking by serial number click on the Serial Number drop down to see a list of all unique serial numbers associated with the selected item You can also scan this information Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin HU button located to the right of the field you want to lock This is helpful when you have to enter multiple serial numbers for example Pushpins 172 InventoryControl Printable Help can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field This feature is especially useful when scanning serial numbers Clicking the d button will unlock the field 8 Click the Next button to continue You will be returned to
431. r Menu Above the asterisk indicates the intention to loop on Item Values entered for Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By fields other than Serial Number will remain locked after entering them for the first Audit Qty Item Count 25 F4 Done Above having pressed F3 when prompted for Item and then having entered the item number and values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a value of 25 for Qty this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item inputs for the second Audit The Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Audit transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop While looping on Item all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item The Count is incremented each time an Audit is done while looping 7 Press the ENT key to submit the Audit transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop When looping on Item all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be reset 341 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on a Tracked By other than Serial Number Here for example F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing an Audit for this Item Audit 123 Monitor Pallet S ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates th
432. r and cheaper than using a standard printer Wasp s WPL305 line of printers work great for smaller volumes of printing A laser printer using standard sheets of labels may work great where product turnover is slow conditions are well controlled or new items are not added often In this case use the included Labeler software to indicate what label stock is being used Labeler ships with many standard label templates pre configured Pre print a few pages more than what you have in stock to prepare for new items 11 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 4 Designing and Labeling Sites and Locations 2 4 1 What is a Site The term Site is used to describe any grouping of locations where you plan to store and track inventory Usually a site is a warehouse building but it can be an office a truck or a field etc Site design may be simple if your entire inventory is stored your two warehouses If this is the case you can just use the name of the warehouse as the site description Use a simple site number like W100 in case you ever need to type the site number into a handheld device For the site number you can use any easily identifiable information about the site like its address or its designation like 140010th or W1400 Since this product only has two levels of location tracking you need to design your sites to describe all the levels above the actual physical location of the inventory If you have trucks that are tied to a warehouse you can mak
433. r example if you selected Inventory all Inventory entered in the system will display here if you selected Manufactures all manufacturers will display here etc Item Number tem Description Location l Latest Da Pallet Date Code Supper Code 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100 tem tracked by Everything 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch New 18 00 2 22 2007 3 23 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch New 1 00 3 5 2007 3 5 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch RRR1 10 00 3 5 2007 3 5 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch mz 1 00 3 23 2007 3 23 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch L2 55 00 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch 20 999999 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch AH 10 00 5 23 2007 5 23 2007 1000028 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch AL 1 00 5 5 2007 1000028 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch LOCI 20 00 5 5 2007 1000028 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch WilYouEx LocLonge 22 00 5 5 2007 100002a Hamster Finge
434. r is entered a prompt will ask if you want to use the Create New screen For more information on the enabling and disabling the Automatic New option please refer to the Options screen topic 4 Complete the Track By fields The Track By fields do not apply to WaspNest Inventory As mentioned above the Track By fields are enabled based on the Item Number you enter If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item these fields will be disabled Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen Since you can only remove existing quantity if the Tracked By item you are removing is not in the list make sure you have the right Item Number and Location The Tracked By fields will only show values that are possible for the selected Item Number and Location If an item with a given Serial Number is not in the list it may be Checked Out and thus not removable If you still do not see the Tracked By information you expect you should make sure the selected Item Number at the 142 InventoryControl Printable Help selected Location exists and has quantity Also check that you are using the right Site 5 Enter the Customer Select a Customer from the drop down list Select lt New gt from the Customer drop list to open the Create New Customer screen The Notes field allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transactio
435. r selections click the Next button The following message appears 406 InventoryControl Printable Help Create Database d re you sure you want to create the mobile database If you have created mobile database before it will be replaced by the new one that s about to be generated Click YES to proceed NO to cancel 5 Click Yes to create the database The wizard displays a confirmation message that the database has been successfully created Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Create Mobile Database For Y indowsCE Create mobile database completed successfully Please click the Next button to proceed 6 Click the Next button The PC to Mobile Device tab displays Note at the bottom of the screen the wizard indicates there are two steps on this tab Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Send Data to WindowsCE This step will send mobile database to the portable device Once it is completed you should be able to start using the mobile device to collect data and perform transactions Please make sure that the mobile device is connected and powered on Click the Next button to start sending data Step 1 of 2 Next gt Cancel Note Make sure you have the InventoryControl application closed on the mobile device before clicking Next on this tab Otherwise you will receive a warning messa
436. r the name of an outgoing mail server that supports SMTP for delivering notification emails Enter the name of the same outgoing mail server that is setup in your own email program If you do not was InventoryControl to send notification emails leave this field blank 15 6 29 SMTP SSL TSL Turn this option on for all SMTP servers that require SSL or TSL including GMail SMTP servers Note on using GMail To use a GMail SMTP server to send out mail from InventoryControl 1 Go to www gmail com and setup your gmail account 2 Have your IT department open port 587 and 465 on your computer 3 Turn on the SMTP SSL TSL option and set up the other SMTP related options on the Options screen 247 InventoryControl Printable Help The GMail SMTP server address is smtp gmail com The SMTP user should be yourgmailname gmail com don t forget gmail com The SMTP Password is your Gmail account password Please be aware that you need to turn this option on for all SMTP servers that require SSL or TSL not just for GMail SMTP servers 15 6 30 SMTP User If your SMTP server requires authentication to send outgoing mail enter the user name here If it does not require authentication leave this field blank 248 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 7 Archiving Transactions The Archive Transaction feature allows you to archive inactive transactions prior to a specified date This date defaults to the value specified when you enabled this o
437. ram version details Note All screen shots in this help file are of InventoryControl Professional Edition The screens in other versions of InventoryControl and in WaspNest Inventory may differ For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Using Viewing the About Screen 1 From the Main Screen click Help gt About The About screen appears Version 5 0 Build 9 2 2008 308 Demo Version Copyright 1995 2008 Wasp Barcode Technologies This product is licensed to Tester Wasp 0670 20615 48645 46789 Wamina This program is protected by copyright law and intemational treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any part of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law This screen displays your version and basic license information 2 Click the Licenses button to view additional licenses and your mobile device licenses Below is an example of the Licenses screen 36 InventoryControl Printable Help 999 PC License s 5 Mobile License s 0779 60213 62640 52985 Windows Mobile CE Device Installed WDT 2200 Device Installed 3 Click OK to return to the About screen 4 Click OK to close the About screen 37 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 3 Main Screen The Main screen is
438. rather than adding them one at a time through this screen For information on importing information into your database please refer to the Import Into Database topic Adding Locations 1 From the Main Screen click New gt Location OR From the Main Screen click Lists gt Location Then click the New icon on the Location List The Create New Location screen will appear Es Create New Location Ex General Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Site Location Description Notes Add Notes Help Save Close 2 Selecta site from the Site drop down menu then enter the name of your new Location The Site and Location fields are both required 74 InventoryControl Printable Help You can type in the name of a new site in the Site field A message will appear asking if you want to add it to your database Select Yes to add it The Create New Site screen will appear allowing you to setup the new site Complete this screen the click OK to return to the Create New Location screen For detailed information on entering a new site please refer to the Creating a New Site topic Description allows you to enter a description of the Location This is useful when the Location value is vague For example Location A7B2 could be described as Aisle 7 Bin 2 Click the Add Notes button to add additional information to this record For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs se
439. re expressed in Dimension Units e Width is the width of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units e Height is the height of one Unit of Measure expressed in Dimension Units e Weight Unit is the increment to be used for mass Examples ounce pound ton milligram gram kilogram metric ton etc 100 InventoryControl Printable Help e Weight is the mass of one Unit of Measure expressed in Weight Units e Manager is used to record the name of someone who manages this inventory item e File Reference is used to record the path to a relevant file that might be an image file documentation specifications etc This field does not function as a hyperlink It s just a static field where a filename or path and filename can be recorded e Add Notes allows you to record any additional information 7 2 6 Manage Suppliers Tab This tab allows you to identify which suppliers you will use for this item and enter detailed supplier information such as unit of measure General Location Settings Additional Manage Suppliers Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates List of Suppliers for This Item Supplier Code Name Default Make this the default supplier while ordering this item V Show Active only New Remove Help Save Close Adding Suppliers to an Item To use this tab you must first select suppliers for this item in the Supplier screen To do this 1 Click the New button at the bottom of the list The fiel
440. ready to add inventory or quantity to those items at specific locations Adding inventory is often referred to as receiving inventory You can think of this step as stocking the InventoryControl program with the inventory that is in your warehouse Remember that inventory is not the same thing as items even though inventory is made of items Adding inventory to an item means you are adding quantity to that item When you are adding inventory you will enter information specific to your inventory such as Location Quantity and Cost as well as specific tracked by information such as serial number date codes and pallet codes Each time you add inventory for an Item the transaction is stored separately in InventoryControl allowing for multiple Locations and cost averaging If you already have inventory information contained in another database you may want to use InventoryControl s Import function rather than manually entering in this information A Note on Importing Inventory If you choose to import your inventory you MUST run a backup of your system BEFORE you import the inventory data Name the backup file something that indicates it was run immediately prior to importing inventory so you can easily identify it if needed later If you find errors on your import file after you import inventory you will need to restore this backup to return the system to the pre import state your other information will be there After restoring you can fix
441. reate llsers ceccccsceceeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeecaaeeseaaesaeeecaaeeeeaaesdaeeseaeeesaaesseaaesseeeeseeeesaeseeeeeeee 4 1 6 Step Two Enter Company Information 4 1 7 Step Three Define Sites and Locatons 4 UM e Lee RTE 5 1 9 Step Five Print Location Labels Eu 6 1 10 Step Six Enter Suppliers ue 6 1 11 Step Seven Print the Supplier Heport 6 1 12 Step Eight Create Items ce cececeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeee cere eeeaaeeeeeeesegeeeeaaesdeeeeseeeeseaaeeseaeeseeeeseeesaeeneneeee 6 1 13 Step Nine Print Item Labels AA 7 1 14 Step Ten Add INVENTO 00 2 ceeeceecceceneeeeeee cece ee aaisan eadi aa aai a a Aa a aaae aa Aaa a aaa aaa AE SNES 7 1 15 Step Eleven Print the Inventory by Location Report ssssssssssessrssrssrrssirssrrsssrnssrnssrnssrnssrnnsrnesnnne 8 Chapter 2 Introductory Materials AA 9 2 1 Barcode Best Practices nonae ee EES EES 9 22 What isa Ba Od EE 10 2 3 Choosing a Label Pinter 11 2 4 Designing and Labeling Sites and Locations cccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaeeeeaaeseeneeseaeeesaeeeeaeeeenees 12 2 43 UNE 12 24 2 Whaat iS a LOCATION Pesene k i a iia ea th vay eed acne dia aan 12 2 4 3 Labeling Sites and Locations 12 2 5 Identifying Tracking Neede uttu nt tnnt n utun atnn ttnn ntnnnnnn nnn nnnn nnne nea 14 2 6 Labeling Hems ensina iasa a e NEA aA NAE aN E Na Ea ahaa Naaa 15 2 7 Using Cost Tracking and Average Costing EA 16 ue Be Een Ee EE 22 2 9 System Administrator Information cc
442. reating on the WDT2200 294 Database Restoring eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 237 Database Gample sseeeeeeeeseeesrnesrresreeneens 2 Decimal Places sns eran n n 238 Deleting Purchase and Pick Orders 199 Designing and Labeling Sites and Locations 12 Details Screen WDT2200 nsssnnsnssnnanneee 325 DISASSOMDIY ee ceeceeeseteceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeee 107 E Edit Field Names esneneeneeneennernernerrnernernene 238 Edit Transactions Screen eene 415 Editing Cusiomers 86 Editing Assembly eme 84 Editing Field Names AA 250 Editing eme oaeen rini anie iia 84 Editing Kit tems 85 Editing Locations sssini enuia 85 Editing Manufacturers s es 86 Editing Pick Orders cscccccsssseeeeenees 86 179 Editing Purchase Orders 87 192 Editing Sites cceecececeeeeeeseeseeeeeeneeeeeaeenenees 85 Editing Suppliers cccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeseeeeeees 86 Editing USCIS ea e AE 230 Email Distribution UIei 213 Enforce Date Code as a True Date 238 Entering Company Information s seseeeeee 227 Example Companies 25 Examples Overview ccccecceeeteeeeseeeeeeeees 25 Examples Sites and Locations 30 Examples Suppliers cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 32 EXPONO 2 dedi ne dian 263 Exporting a Text File 2 263 497 InventoryControl Printable Help F FAQ Purchase Orders A 198 Field Names Editing a se 250 PIP Oop in e saad sen s
443. rectly you must set your SMTP Server User Name and Password if authentication is required for outgoing mail and the SMTP Port on the Options screen If these are not set an error message will appear For more information on the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic e Close this Pick Order Marks this order as closed Select this option after all items for the order have been picked Note on the Packing Slip for Session Option By default the packing slip that can be printed and or emailed upon saving displays only items picked in the current pick session If you want to pick multiple times and print a packing slip that displays all the picks for this pick order including items picked previously you can select to do so on the Options screen For example Assume Pick Order 001 a quantity of 5 for item ABC and a quantity of 4 for item XYZ Today pick 2 of item ABC and 2 of item XYZ and ship them The packing slip will display 2 ABC and 2 XYZ Tomorrow pick the other 3 of item ABC and 2 of item XYZ and ship them The packing slip has 3 ABC and 2 XYZ This would also be exactly the same if both picks and ships were done on the same day If however pick what have in the morning and dont ship it and a shipment comes in that day or the next and complete the order before shipping anything will want all of the items picked throughout the day to display on one packing slip To do this the option must be set
444. red for this item on the New Item Edit Item screen The stocking unit represents how you stock this item in your inventory For instance if you stock the unit in boxes of 10 Box of 10 would display in the Stocking Unit field on this screen For more information on creating items please refer to the Creating New Items topic Description This field populates after the item number is entered and cannot be changed on this screen If you need to change the description you can do so on the Edit Item screen 9 After you have entered all items for this order you can optionally select to Print on Save If this box is checked a copy of this order automatically prints when you Click the Save button Email on Save If this box is checked a copy of this order is automatically sent to the email address listed in the Customer screen for this customer when you click the Save button If you have selected to view the Email Destination List selected on the Options screen the list will appear allowing you to select email addresses or change email addresses as needed If you have selected not to view the list the order will automatically be sent to the email address listed in the Customer screen from the email address listed in the Company Information screen Please note that if the email addresses are not entered on the Customer or Company Information screens you will receive an error message when you try to send emails An email is also sent to an
445. red information is entered in the appropriate fields The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one Add is posted to the Pending Transaction List ae Add Loe es Data H E E ae ee ltem Number Rem Description Site Locati Quantity No of Labels Date Acquired Serial Number Cost 1004 Track by serial number 100 Aisle 1 1 00 19 8 2008 1001 0 00 4 II b Remove J Remove All f e Help Print Receipt On Commit Copies D Idi Print Label f Commit J m Discard el At any time you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error 138 8 InventoryControl Printable Help If you want to print a receipt of this transaction enter the number of receipts in the Print receipt on Commit Copies field Select the Print Label checkbox to tell InventoryControl to print the number of labels in the No of Labels field The file used to print this label is named AddTransactionltemLabel lab and can be customized through the Labels feature If the Print Labels box is not checked when you click Commit but there is a quantity in the No of Labels field you will see the following message Warning ES 2 You have entered information on No of Labels To Print but the Print Labels option is not selected Are you sure that you want to ignore the previously entered information and NOT to print any labels for the newly added inventory ae
446. remented serial numbers Enter a Starting Number This number determines the number at which the serial number sequence starts Since this option is applied at the Item level each Item in the program may have its own unique series of serial numbers Click OK to accept your entries This section contains check boxes which act much like the Tracked By boxes but contains a different set of fields PO Supplier and Customer which are always available for use even if they are not required For example if the option is not enabled for the Supplier Code field a user adding inventory can enter a value for Supplier Code if he knows it or skip entering a value if he doesn t If this option is d se enabled a value for Supplier Code is required to complete the transaction Require the User to Fill Out Does not Cost specifies the amount your company paid to get this item into inventory This is an optional tool to help you track your average cost Cost handling in InventoryControl is designed to show you the average cost and current value of your inventory You can use this cost information for other purposes as well such as determining pre tax and purchase order totals and receiving totals This amount represents your cost for purchasing one of the stocking units for this item If one Barcode Laser Scanner costs 300 00 you will enter 300 into the cost field If you have items in your inventory that are sold in fractional quantities 64
447. ress the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop 370 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on Item Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the following example F3 was pressed when prompted for Item Pick Item i Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Above the asterisk indicates the intention to loop on Item Values entered for Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By fields other than Serial Number will remain locked after entering them for the first Pick Qty Item Count 25 F4 Done Above having pressed F3 when prompted for Item and then having entered the item number and values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a value of 25 for Qty this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item inputs for the second Pick The Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Pick transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop While looping on Item all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item The Count is incremented each time a Pick is done while looping KE Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop d When looping on Item all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be p
448. rev F4 Next 355 InventoryControl Printable Help An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Remove for this Item to more than one Location Values entered for Item PO and Supplier if any will remain locked while looping on Location after entering them for the first Add Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a Qty of 10 were entered this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Add PO Supplier and Tracked By values if any for this second Remove will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop if any 123 Qty Location Total Qty 10 00000 F4 Done While looping on Location all that is required for each Remove are values for Qty and Location The Total Qty field is incremented each time a Remove is submitted while looping Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop Looping on Item Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the following example F3 was pressed when prompted for Item Remove Item j Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Above the asterisk indicates the intention to loop on Item Values entered for Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By fields other than Serial
449. rner of the screen to apply the setting and close the Scanner Control Panel screen 391 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 7 Windows Mobile Device Entering Alphanumeric Data You can enter letters and numbers in fields on the mobile device by using the device s key pad using the keyboard or by scanning barcodes Regardless of the method you use to enter data note that once you enter data in the first field and move to the next field only the fields that are relevant to the data you entered will display For example if you enter an Item that is tracked by serial number the Serial field would remain on the screen but other fields such as Date Code and Pallet would no longer display If you enter an Item that is not tracked all tracking fields PO Supplier Lot Date Code Serial and Pallet will no longer display Using the Device s Key Pad The method for using your device s numeric or alphanumeric keypad is documented in the user manual for that device Please refer to that documentation for full details Using the Software Keyboard Tap the keyboard icon Ce at the bottom of the screen The keyboard options menu displays Hide Input Panel To open the keyboard select Keyboard The keyboard Input Panel displays ese 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 l abl a wle r tlylulilolp t 1 Cap alelalclalnl OK shift z x c v b n m 7 COE Ee H erdel Tap in the field in which you want to enter data
450. rol Printable Help E Create New Customer ka General Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Phone Extension Fax Cell No Home No Email Notes Add Notes Help Save Close The Additional Information tab provides optional fields where you can record the customer s Phone Extension Fax Cell No Home No and Email In addition you can create notes on this customer on this tab by clicking the Add Notes bution For information about the Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs see Using Custom Fields When you have finished adding information click the OK Save button The system behaves differently at this point depending on your settings on the Options screen e When the Close New Form option is turned off Click Save to commit your entry or click Close to exit the form e When the Close New Form option is turned on Click OK to commit your entry and exit the form or Cancel to exit the form without saving your entry For more information about setting the Close New Form option on the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic 59 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 3 Creating New Inventory and Non Inventory Items The Create New Item screen allows you to add a new Item to your database and to specify how you want to track each item by Serial Number Lot Date Code and or Pallet What is an Item Items represent the actual material or good that you will have i
451. rol Printable Help Tip Setting up the 3200 and 3250II to Print to a Bluetooth Printer 8 9 Navigate to Start gt Programs gt Bluetooth gt Bluetooth PowerON Select Bluetooth Module Power ON gt OK Navigate to Start gt Programs gt Bluetooth gt Bluetooth Printer Select the black and white icon that displays at the bottom left of the mobile device screen Make sure your bluetooth printer is on then select Inquiry on the mobile device When your bluetooth printer shows in the list select it then select OK A popup screen appears prompting for your pin number Enter your pin number and select OK Select your printer then select OK A popup screen appears prompting you to select a channel Enter 7 then OK Now your mobile device is ready to print to your bluetooth printer To verify click the bottom icon again The status should display lt your printer id gt Running on COM Tip Setting up the 22001 to Print to a Bluetooth Printer 1 Enable Bluetooth on the WDT3200II by navigating to Start gt Programs gt Bluetooth gt Bluetooth PowerON Navigate to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Bluetooth Device Make sure your bluetooth printer is turned on Click the Scan Device button on the WDT3200II Your Bluetooth printer should show in the list of found devices At the prompt enter the pin number for your Bluetooth printer Double click the device name with the printer icon in front of it
452. rompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be reset 371 InventoryControl Printable Help Looping on a Tracked By other than Serial Number Here for example F3 was pressed when prompted for Pallet while doing a Pick for this Item Pick 123 Monitor Pallet s ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Pick for this Item for more than one Pallet Values entered for Item Location PO Supplier and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet after entering them for the first Pick 123 Qty Pallet x Total Qty 30 00000 F4 Done Above having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first Pick this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Pick Item Location PO and Supplier values for this second Pick will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop While looping on this Tracked By field all that is required for each Pick are values for Qty and Pallet The Total Qty is incremented each time an Pick is submitted while looping z i Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop When looping on a Tracked By field all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Lo
453. roperly tracked Medical supplies or food may need to be tracked by Date Code and or Lot Transaction Code TransCode Transaction Codes can be any code your business assigns to certain types of Adjustment transactions Assigning these codes can help you with reporting as each type of adjustment breakage return etc can be given it s own code This software does not contain any preset codes to give you the opportunity to assign a code that best suits your needs and to allow the entry of codes you already use in your business for these types of transactions Transaction codes are entered on the Adjust screen 494 Index A About Steen tite then teased 36 About Screen WD T 200 315 Adding Inventory 000 2 ee eeeeeeeeteeeeeenteeeeeeenteeeeteee 135 Adding Inventory on the WDT2200 317 Adding Inventory on the WMD 443 Adamo Met 54 Adding Users to Gecuiy eee 230 Adjusting Inventory on the WDT2200 329 Admin Information ccccceeecceeeeeeeeseeeeneees 24 Administration Menu Overview s s 225 Administrator Functions Backing Up the RE 236 Adusting Inventory Amounts sssseeeeeeeeeeeeen 156 Adusting Inventory on the WDT2200 336 Advanced End 288 Alerts MOU iss deeg E ege EEN de 52 Allow Negative Quantities on the Mobile Device Eeer 238 Allow Over Pick 238 Allow Over Hecehye 238 Always Show Email Destination List 238 Archiving Transachons 249 Assembly
454. rprint Reader inch WH L10 3 00 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 5 5 2007 100022 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A amp Locl 12 00 2 22 2007 2 22 2007 1000224 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch A A amp Loc3 41 00 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 1000228 Hamster Fingerprint Reader inch KK 10 00 5 22 2007 5 22 2007 Ka 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 171 2002 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 1 1 2002 171 2002 1 1 2002 171 2002 KKK KEE EK saan orem BR ro Fee enn inant Record Iq 4 tor 6s Mut m 119 InventoryControl Printable Help Sorting Columns Most of the columns that appear in the lists can be sorted ascending or descending The columns sort ascending by default To change the sort order click on the column heading An arrow will appear next to the column name to let you know in which direction the information is sorted The example below shows the Last Name column sorted Ascending Last Name Cricket Dixson Fromage Gabbard Herman Huffman Juniper Melroast Melville Nugent Selecting a Listing You can quickly scroll through the listings using the buttons directly below the contents list Keep in mind that you can also use the Filter button to limit the items that appear in the list see Section A Toolbars above The list screens can display up to 1000 lines of information at a time If your list contains more than 1000 items you must create a filter to show the items not
455. s If you will be printing from network printer you will need to manually enable InventoryControlRF to locate your printer For instructions on how to do this please refer to the section Enabling InventoryControl RF to Communicate with your Network Printer below OR Yes I will be printing with a Laser Mobile Printer select this option if you will be printing to a laser mobile printer You will need to enter a COM Port and Baud Rate for this printer Click Finish to complete the setup process OR Yes will printing with a Receipt Mobile Printer select this option if you will be printing to a receipt mobile printer You will need to enter a COM Port and Baud Rate for this printer Click Finish to complete the setup process 20 9 2 Enabling InventoryControl RF to Communicate with your Network Printer 1 On your PC navigate to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services 421 InventoryControl Printable Help HA gt Control Panel All Control Panelltems Administrative Tools Organize v E Open Ki Favorites Name EC Desktop al Component Services Ip Downloads 2 Computer Management S Recent Places Data Sources ODBC gt desktop ini 3 Libraries Event Viewer Ei Document Ka Internet Information Services IS Manager a Music fa iSCSI Initiator E Pictures E Local Security Policy E Videos ET Performance Monitor fam Print Management i Computer amp Local Disk CH system Configuration
456. s check quantity or determine where to move an item The Search Results section automatically expands displaying the requested data gt Filter Search Results Inventory Site 1000 Example Site 1 1001 Another E Site 1 lt gt Ze Detais SE 2 31 Pm JA You can view details for only one field or for a combination of fields For example if you select only an Item Number and leave all other fields blank the Details screen will display the total quantity of the Item Number in all Sites and Locations If you select an Item Number and a specific Site the Details screen will display the quantity of that Item at the specified Site only You can scroll right to left through the data using the bar at the bottom of the results grid 3 You can expand the Filter section again by tapping the blue arrow or by clicking the Show Filter button Enter new Filter information then click Inventory or Transactions to view the search results To clear the fields and find details for another Item select the Reset button 4 To close the Details screen and return to the InventoryControl main menu click the Close button See the Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 447 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 11 9 Windows Mobile Device Checking Out Inventory The Check Out screen allows you to check out or assign inventory to customers for a specified length of time Checking
457. s From 218 Lists Purchase Order List Example 131 193 Lists Site List Example aeee 125 Lists Supplier List Example 129 Lists Transaction List Example s1aaseea 132 Lists Working With A 112 Location Labels Printing 218 Location List Example sseeseeseeeeeeresnen 126 Locations Adding on the WMD osses 440 Locations Creating New 74 Locations Designing and Labeling 12 Locations Editing cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 85 Locations Business Examples eeeesseee 30 LOGGING Oni iia ntact tien anes 1 34 Logging On to the WDT 2200 307 LOGGING el 48 Low Stock Level Notification 0 cceee 51 M Main Screen Overview eese 38 Manage Licenses eeeeeeeeeeererresrenseren 36 Manage Payment Methode 202 Manage Shipping Methode 206 Manually Adding Irmvemtonm 135 Manufacturer List Example sseesseesseeseene 128 Manufacturers Editing 0 cccceeeseeeees 86 Manufacturers New 76 Max ROW Count 238 499 InventoryControl Printable Help Mobile Device Wireless Connection 418 Mobile Device Setup WDT2200 00s00 291 Mobile Devices Edit Transactions 415 Mobile Devices Pending Upload Screen 411 Mobile Devices Gupported 24 Mobile Devices Troubleshooting Wireless Connections esseeseeseeese eseese ereere 426 Moving Average ssssssssssssrrserrnesrrennesrennssennns 16 Moving Imventorn 1
458. s case put the item s barcode on the container in which the item is stored on the shelf The label should have the item name as well as a number representing the item encoded as a barcode as in the example shown below 20104 It is important not to use a text description or abbreviation as the item number because a numbering scheme is more flexible and easier to encode to a small barcode Most labeling software can be set up to use a number for the barcode and to print the description or item name under the barcode InventoryControl allows you to print your item barcodes as the inventory comes in or pre print barcodes from the Item List screen to apply If you pick a numbering scheme and stick to it you will find that you start to recognize the numbers as easily as the names The specific numbering scheme you use to identify the items can start at 1000 and count up if that is what you want Some companies assign all or part of the SKU number they are issued as the item number Because item models may change over time or sub models may become available you may need to use a numbering scheme that can adapt without losing the item s identity Many companies allow gaps in the numbering scheme to allow for this growth and for changes For instance one item number is 19500 and another is 19600 When an optional feature is added to the 19500 it is assigned 19510 since both are kept in inventory The 19600 item is discontinue and another model takes its pla
459. s field defaults to 1 You cannot enter negative values in this field Order Unit Select the Order Unit from the drop down field or select lt New gt to enter a new Unit You may want to enter a new unit here that is not an eaches or Stocking Unit measurement For example if you want to order 1 box of an item and this item ships in boxes containing 15 units the eaches or Stocking Unit measurement is 15 but for ordering purposes you could create a new unit that is BOX containing 15 units You would then order 1 box rather than 15 units to avoid confusion for the supplier You can setup multiple Order Unit types for each supplier on the Create New Edit Item screen Manage Suppliers tab This allows you to enter units based on the suppliers method of shipping whether the supplier ships in boxes of 15 pallets of 50 etc For instance you could set up a Box and Pallet Order Unit on the Suppliers tab so that when you create a Purchase Order for that item to go to the supplier you can quickly select whether you want a box or a pallet For more information on the Add Item screen Manage Suppliers tab please refer to the Creating New Items topic Cost The cost will populate based on the Order Unit selected You can also type in a new cost here Line Total This field calculates based on the Quantity multiplied by the cost 11 After you have entered all items for this order you can optionally select to Print on Save If this box
460. s for your information only and is not included on any reports Min Stock Min Steek Ne available for Kit items Max Stock l E Ne available for Kit items Reorder Qty Not available for Kit items Total The total on hand amount minus committed quantities for all component items Shippable Committed is inventory that is contained on a pick order 10 2 2 Kit Information Tab This tab is where you will indicate which items you want included in this Kit General Kit Information Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Type Item Number Quantity Stocking Unit Total In House Description Inventory 1 00 Help Save Close 166 InventoryControl Printable Help To select items to include in your Kit Item 1 Inthe Type drop down select Inventory Non Inventory or Assembly FE Create New Item e General Kt Infomation Addition Type ltem Num Non Inventory Assembly PN J lt 2 2 Inthe Item Number field select which item you want to add to this assembly If you select Full List the Item List will be filtered by the Type you selected i e if Non Inventory is selected only non inventory items will appear on the Item List If Assembly is selected only Assembly items will appear in the List E Create New Item General Kit information Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Type em Number Quantity Stocking Unit Total Inventory
461. s of In Process Overdue For detailed information on the Picking Order screen please refer to the Picking Orders topic 174 InventoryControl Printable Help 5 After the order is fully picked it has a status of Completed You can have InventoryControl automatically email the packing slip to the customer 11 2 Creating a Pick Order This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Pick orders are created to designate certain inventory to be shipped to a customer On the Create New Pick Order screen you are creating an order that tells your staff to get the order ready and what inventory to include These orders can be sent to the mobile devices although pick orders cannot be created on mobile devices After the order has been picked you need to mark it as ready to be shipped on the Pick Order screen accessed from the Receive Pick menu At this point the inventory is removed from the system For more information on the Pick Order screen please refer to the Shipping Pick Orders topic We recommend you review the Pick Ship Overview before creating pick orders for the first time Creating New Pick Orders 1 From the Main screen select New gt Pick Order OR From the Main screen click Lists gt Pick Order On the Pick Order List click the N
462. s of the component items e The Committed counter applies to Assembly Inventory and Non Inventory items only is the number that has been committed to a pick order e The Total Shippable applies to Kit Items only is the total on hand amount minus committed quantities for all component items Committed is inventory that is contained on a pick order 5 3 3 Location Settings Tab When you have completed the General Information tab click the Location Settings tab This tab allows you to enter all locations where this item will be in inventory and to designate a primary location You can assign items to more than one location This tab uses the List functionality for grouping ordering filtering and deleting 66 InventoryControl Printable Help General Location Settings Additional Manage Suppliers Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Y Filter Group By Delete To finish adding a new record please press enter key or down arrow button Click on Filter toolbar button to bring up filter row and to bring up group row please click on Grouping toolbar button jan Site Location Quantity Max Stock Level Min Stock Level Reorder Oty i 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Record Iq 4 KRAH Hep D a Complete the fields on this screen as described below e Primary Location Select this checkbox if this will be the primary location at this site for this item A primary location can be selected for each Site yo
463. s that are sold together but are still considered separate inventory items As opposed to Assembly Items you cannot add inventory move or check out in Kit Items While Assembly Items can be created in advance pre assembled and kept in inventory Kit Items are created at pick or sale time Location Locations are contained with a Site and represent the place where inventory is kept A location is typically shorthand for a physical place such as a shelf in your warehouse Commonly used conventions include Location codes like this 010205 for Row Shelf Bin Another example would be to create Site labeled Warehouse 1 containing a Locations labeled Bin1 and Bin 2 Move The Move function allows you to move inventory from one location to another Non Inventory Item A non inventory item is anything you order or receive but do not want to track the location and quantity of An example of a non inventory item might be marketing materials like a product flyer that is taken to trade shows or put in product boxes Once you are out you may never buy more of that item and you don t need to know how many are left You may need to include non inventory items on a purchase order and verify receipt to have a payment paper trail but you do not need to keep track of the item after it is received InventoryControl allows you to add non inventory items onto purchase orders in the Pro and Enterprise versions Order Unit This is the supplier s unit
464. s the number of storage bytes consumed internally this value should be ignored when determining whether or not a decimal value will be truncated use Precision and 276 InventoryControl Printable Help Scale instead to make this assessment Size can and should be used for all other Data Types int Integer whole number data from 2 63 9223372036854775808 through 2 63 1 9223372036854775807 money Monetary data values from 2 63 922 337 203 685 477 5808 through 2 63 1 922 337 203 685 477 5807 with accuracy to a ten thousandth of a monetary unit This data type is limited to a maximum of four decimal points Use a period to separate partial monetary units like cents from whole monetary units For example 2 15 specifies 2 dollars and 15 cents d Comma separators are not allowed varchar Variable length non Unicode data with a maximum of 8 000 characters 277 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 17 Performing an Audit 17 1 Auditing Your Inventory As many business owners know keeping accurate counts of inventory is a critical part of maintaining a well run business For instance if an inventory item is listed in the system as having met its reorder point but the quantity in the system is based on an inaccurate count your business could end up wasting money on reordering inventory that was not in danger of being depleted On the other hand if your system lists plenty of inventory for an item that is actu
465. saeeeeaeeseeeeess 210 12 12 Emak DIStHOUTON LIST TE 213 Chapter 13 Creating Editing Printing Labele 214 13 1 Selecting a Label Printer AAA 214 13 2 Using ET ENEE 215 13 2 1 Editing LabelSs ionsit acvtits asic EE EE 215 13 2 2 Creating Custom Labele 216 13 2 3 Browsing to an Existing Label 217 13 3 Printing Labels from the List SCre NS ceccccceeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeaaeeeeneeseeaeeeeeaeseeeeeseeeeesaeeesaeeeaeeees 218 Chapter 14 Reportsxcutiacte ih a ee tan teal thereat rae Pati tht tea theres 220 PAT MAREPO ME SCISCHOMN ege eebe Ee ee Ee EES 220 E Ropon ViOWON E 221 Chapter 15 Administration cccccceescececeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeecaaeeeeaeecaeeecaaeeeeaaesceeeseaeeeseaaeseeeeeseaeesiaeeesnaeenenees 225 15 1 Administration Menu 225 15 2 Company Information Gecreen nne 227 15 2 1 Entering Company Information 227 15 2 2 Entering Multiple Address Types ccc cccccceeseeceeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeaeeseeeeeeceaeeseaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeeeaes 228 15 2 3 Deleting an Address Type eiieeii aneno n ae EEEa AEAEE ENAERE E RAEE EErEE Ak 229 15 3 Adding Users Editing Security Privileges seseseesneereesrnesrrssrrssinssinssrnssrnssrnnssrnnstnssrnasrnnsrnnnnnnt 230 15 3 1 Accessing the Security Privileges Screen ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeeeeas 230 15 3 2 Adding Users to the Security Privileges Screen ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeceeeeeseaeeeeeaaeeeeneeeaas 2
466. se of these fields is optional If they are left blank TrackBy Qty will equal Qty at Loc in the Details display In the example below having specified a value for the Tracked By field Pallet in addition to Location Details is reporting a Qty at Loc of 17 00000 and a TrackBy Qty for the specified Pallet of 4 00000 10067 LOC AISLE 1 Qty at Loc 17 00000 TrackBy Qty 4 00000 F1 Prev ENT OK If the TrackBy Qty is zero for an Item that has one or more Tracked By options enabled no quantity matching the TrackBy values you just specified exists for the Item at the specified Location 3 Press F4 to advance to the next field or Press F1 to return to the previous field or Press the Enter key to return to the Details function for another query 328 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 15 WDT2200 Adjusting Inventory The Adjust function allows you to modify the quantity of existing items Adjust is like a mini Audit and will update the quantity using FIFO First In First Out to make the total equal to the quantity you enter here The Adjust function is useful if too much or too little quantity is accidentally entered for an item on a mobile device for example inventory is lost found broken etc and you need to quickly correct the quantity for that item Adjusting is different from an Audit in that the Audit function makes other functions of the software such as adding inventory unavailable to ensure inventory is not ad
467. se refer to the Options Screen topic 7 3 Building Assembly Items This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note This feature is not available in WaspNest Inventory or the Standard version of InventoryControl For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen After you create your Assembly Items see the Creating An Assembly Hem topic you can build your Assembly Items as needed using the Assembly feature Building Assembly Items can be thought of as the manufacturing portion of the Assembly Item feature When you Build an Assembly Item the on hand amounts for the sub items are reduced by the number needed to make the Assembly Item and the on hand amount for the Assembly Item is increased Assembling Building Assembly Items increases inventory for the Assembly Item in the same way that Adding increases inventory for other item types Building an Assembly Item is a two part process First you will select which Assembly Item you want to build add inventory to next you will remove the sub items from inventory In other words since your Assembly item is made up of other items you have to remove the sub items in order to add inventory to the Assembly Item Adding vs Assembling Keep in mind that while you can use the Add feature to add inventory to an Assembly item doing this will not affect the inven
468. seees 230 Security Setting Site Security 0 ee 230 Security Green 230 Selecting Reports sssesseeeeereerrssrrssresrreens 220 Selecting Sites 2 0 0 eee eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeetees 45 Serial Numbers Automat 73 Setting Security Privileges cccceeerees 230 Setup Company Information ceeee 227 Shipping Methods Managing sssssssaseaaaa 206 Show Cost Information During Receiving 238 Show Warning Messages aeee 238 Site Configuratino WDT 2200 315 Site Configuration on the WMD 437 Site List Example 0 ccccceeeseeeceeeeeseeeeees 125 Site Securty a eech 230 Sites Creating New 55 Sites Designing and Labeling 000s100s1e01 12 Sites Editing ccc eee eee eects seeeeeeeeeeteeees 85 Sites Selecting eee eee cee eeeneceeeeeeeteeteeees 45 Sites and Locations Business Examples 30 Sites Business Examples 30 501 InventoryControl Printable Help SMTP Password eeeeeeeeeeeesesn 238 SMTREOR heier anar 238 SMTP E 238 SMTP GGLIT L eener nres erreneren 238 SMTP tUset s20 tte atari ian tees 238 Software Updates Checking For 49 SQL Server Backup Location 238 Stock Level Notice of Low 51 Supplier List Example sssnsnnnneeennneeene nenne 129 Suppliers Adding New on the WMD 442 Suppliers Business Examples s nnnaase1ae 32 Suppliers Ednimg neern eenean 86 Suppliers New 80 Supported Mobile De
469. selection Check In Applies to the Item and Inventory List screens only Highlight a listing that is Checked Out then click the Check In button The Check In screen allows you to Check In inventory that has previously been Checked Out to one or more customers While checking in inventory does not actually add inventory quantity to an item it does free up that inventory to be checked out to another customer if needed or to be included in a pick order For more information please refer to the Checking In Inventory topic Check Out Applies to the Item Inventory and Customer List screens only Highlight a listing then click the Check Out button The Check Out screen allows you to check out or assign inventory to customers For more information please refer to the Checking Out Inventory topic Move Applies to the Location and Inventory List screens only Highlight a listing then click the Inventory Move button The Move screen allows you to move inventory quantity for an item from one Location to another When you create an item you can add which locations it may be When you then add inventory quantity to the item you select in which location that quantity will reside The Move function allows you to move that inventory from the originally assigned location to another By moving inventory in the software you can easily keep accurate records of where all of your inventory is currently located For more information please refer to th
470. sembly Items are a collection of items that once grouped are considered to be a new single item Assembly Items are pre assembled and kept in stock o Kit Kit items are a collection of items that are grouped or picked at the time they are sold 177 InventoryControl Printable Help o Manual Use this option to add one time items such as shipping and handling to an order Manual items cannot be picked on the mobile devices e Item Number Enter the Item Number of the item you want to add to the order To enter an Item Number you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop down list to see the first 10 items in the database select lt more gt on the drop down list to see all items in the Item List You can create a new item by selecting lt New gt or by entering an unknown item number When either of these two situations occur the Create New Item screen appears For more information on creating items please refer to the Creating New ltems topic When you enter an Item Number the Description field populates Request Qty Enter the requested number of this item This value can also be scanned You cannot enter negative numbers You can enter any item held in your inventory in any amount on this screen Actual on hand amounts are not checked at this point so you are not limited to creating pick orders for the quantity of items in your inventory Stocking Unit This field displays the stocking unit ente
471. set the quantity processed back to zero Doubleclick on the desired item The Remove Kit screen will reappear with the selected item populated in the Item field 6 Enter the Site Location and any Track Bys for this item 7 Enter the Quantity you want to remove 8 Click OK to remove the item Now you can select another component item to remove 20 11 14 Windows Mobile Device Receiving Inventory The Receive inventory function is used to add quantity to an item from a purchase order Purchase Orders are created on the PC For more information on creating Purchase Orders please refer to the Creating a Purchase Order topic Inventory can also be received at the PC Manual items cannot be received on the mobile devices Please refer to Creating a Purchase Order for more information on Manual items Receiving Inventory on the Windows Mobile Device 1 From the Main Menu tap the Receive icon The Receive screen displays Receive gt Details Y Receive SH uer au Note On the Receive screen you can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering 461 InventoryControl Printable Help Alphanumeric Data on the Windows Mobile Device for details or use the Search function Enter or search for the PO number that contains the item you are receiving PO 0001 i Item gt Details Site Location Date Code Pallet Lot Serial Quantity T 27 Receive 916 rr Enter the number of t
472. sionally 293 InventoryControl Printable Help Sending file Ml4WDT exe to WDT2200 please wait 1320 Of 151968 bytes When the install has completed the following confirmation message will appear Install Program 1 The wizard has successfully installed the InventoryControl program on the mobile device 6 Click OK on the confirmation message After the first install of InventoryControl you can resend the program at any time by connecting the device and clicking the Transfer Program to Mobile Device button 7 Next you need to create the mobile database For more information please refer to the WDT 2200 Creating the PDT Database topic 19 2 WDT2200 Creating the PDT Database After you send the InventoryControl program to your mobile device you will need to create a mobile version of the database so you can transfer the data from the pc to the mobile device You will also need to create a new database each time you want to send changes from the PC to the mobile device Create PDT Database builds the database that will be transferred to the PDT Note If there are inventory transactions on the PDT which have not yet been transferred to the PC you should Receive the Data from PDT first For more information on receiving data from the PDT please refer to the WDT2200 Receiving Data from the PDT topic Sending a new database first will result in losing the data on the PDT Creating the Database 1 If you are
473. ssed when prompted for Location while doing an Adjust for this Item Add 123 Monitor Location ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next An asterisk indicates the intention to do more than one Adjust for this Item to more than one Location Values entered for Item PO and Supplier if any will remain locked while looping on Location after entering them for the first Adjust Tracking fields are needed only for any Tracked By options enabled for the Item entered In the example below F3 was pressed when prompted for Location and then values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a Qty of 10 were entered this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Adjust PO Supplier and Tracked By values if any for this second Adjust will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop if any 123 Qty Location Total Qty 10 00000 F4 Done While looping on Location all that is required for each Adjust are values for Qty and Location The Total Qty field is incremented each time an Adjust is submitted while looping Press the ENT key to submit the Adjust transaction and continue looping or press the F4 key to exit the loop Looping on Item Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the following example F3 was pressed when prompted for Item 333 InventoryControl Printable Help Adjust Item Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Above the asterisk in
474. ssemble Pro and Enterprise Versions Only This icon opens the Build Assembly screen Build Assembly allows you to add inventory to your Assembly Items The Build process adds inventory to the Assembly Item while decreasing inventory for the component items For more information on the Assemble screen please refer to the Building Assembly Items topic Disassemble Pro and Enterprise Versions Only This icon opens the Disassemble screen Disassemble allows you to decrease inventory for your Assembly Items The Disassemble process removes inventory for the Assembly Item while increasing inventory for the component items For more information on the Disassemble screen please refer to the Disassembling Assembly Items topic Audit This icon starts the Audit Mode of the software Audit Mode allows you to check the counts of all your inventory while disabling other features such as add and remove to make sure inventory counts in the system do not change while you are performing the audit If you are using mobile devices you can use them simultaneously with the PC to perform an audit For more information on Auditing please refer to the Auditing Your Inventory topic 134 InventoryControl Printable Help 9 2 Manually Adding Inventory The Add Inventory screen allows you to manually add quantity to items already entered into your database Inventory is the amount or quantity of a particular item Items must first be imported or entered on the
475. ssing environment If you have more than one mobile device a situation might arise where some inventory is Added on one mobile device for a location The next mobile device comes along and sees the inventory ready for Remove but since both devices have not been synchronized to the PC the second device does not show that inventory exists In this case if Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices is turned off mobile devices would have to synchronize before the item could be removed Leaving this option turned on allows mobile device users to do their job in the field but opens up the possibility of error The responsibility for confirmation of batch processing on multiple mobile devices falls to the PC user Many safeguards and methods of verifying the recurring data have been added to help facilitate this effort See the Pending Uploads topic for more information To enable this option select the Yes checkbox 241 InventoryControl Printable Help 15 6 3 Allow Over Pick When this option is selected users can mark more inventory as picked than is indicated on the Pick Order This applies to the PC and mobile devices 15 6 4 Allow Over Receive When this option is selected users can mark more inventory as received than is indicated on the Purchase Order This applies to the PC and mobile devices 15 6 5 Automatic Customer Number This options allows you to enable automatic generation of a Customer Number when you are creating
476. st Enter an Order Date for this order This date defaults to today but you can change this date by clicking the down arrow and selecting a new date Enter a Due Date for this order You can type in a date in this field or click the down arrow to select a date Enter a Reference Number for this Pick Order optional Select the preferred shipping method for this order in the Ship Via field from the drop down list This list contains several commonly used shipping methods however you can type in a new shipping method if desired The new entry will appear in the drop down list for future purchase orders Note If you need to delete a Ship Method you have entered you can do so on the Manage Ship Methods screen This screen also allows you to Print Export and Add New methods For more information on the Manage Ship Methods screen please refer to the Managing Shipping Methods topic Enter any notes you want to associate with this order in the Notes field Now you are ready to enter your item information in the Line Item Details section Complete this information as follows e Type Select the type of item that needs to be picked Options are o Inventory This item is in your inventory database Use this to pick existing items o Non Inventory This item is not in your inventory database Use this to pick items that you do not want to appear in your inventory database such as marketing fliers or business cards o Assembly As
477. st below displays the items that will be added back into inventory Type Ite Always Scrap Quantity Removed Qty Stocking Unit Description Inventory 1003 1 0000 0 Test ltem 3 Winventory 1002 1 0000 1 Test ltem 1002 4 II r Component Details ltem Number Serial Number z LE Description Lot 4 Quantity e Date Code 1 00 4 r Maximum 1 00 Pallet Location 4 Scrap item due to a d Sr Pin AIl Unpin All Add Help Cancel The Add screen lists all component items for this Assembly Item Items that appear with a green checkmark are ready to be added Items that are not checked need additional information usually a Track By Note If this Assembly Item has been modified the View Config History button shown below will appear at the top of the screen 109 InventoryControl Printable Help EZ GIS Data Pending Transaction List 0 You have selected to disassemble assembly item 1007 Quantity Sak View Config The list below displays the items that will be added back into inventory History Type Ite Always Scrap Quantity Removed Qty Stocking Unit Description Inventory 1005 1 0000 0 test tem Inventory 1003 1 0000 0 Test ltem 3 Inventory 1002 1 0000 0 Test tem 1002 p gt a d SE mg Bagage e Click this button to view a list of all previous configurations The View Config History screen appears ZE ViewConfigHistory a fog The following is a his
478. st record of the file you are importing does not contain actual data Import cannot remove subtotals section headers or any other records within the file that do not match the format of the actual data records These must be removed before you attempt the import 258 InventoryControl Printable Help Click Next when you are ready to proceed The Step 3 Field Mapping screen appears Z Import Wizard FIII _ Step 3 Field Mapping Map data from the text file to corresponding fields in the destination table Field Mapping Import Data C Map To Addre Map from Site Site Site To Site x Location Location Description Description smn E i Preview of data from C Users Admin Desktop Inventory Locations Locations csv Site Location Description T WH Warehouse WH2 Warehouse WH3 Warehouse lt Back Next gt Cancel The Field Mapping screen allows you to associate columns which occur within your imported data file and corresponding fields within the table into which data will be written Depending on the contents of your original database not every column in your imported data needs to be mapped to a corresponding field in the program The object is to bring over at least the required fields and any others that may be of use Note If the First Row Contains Column Heading checkbox was checked in Step 2 the Import Wizard automatically compares the import file s Impor
479. st set of 5 will be subtracted from inventory before the second set Removing Inventory from an Item 1 From the Main screen click the Inventory icon The Inventory menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Inventory menu click the Remove icon The Remove screen appears OR 1 From the Main Screen select Lists gt Item The Item List appears 2 On the Item List highlight an item in the grid then click the Remove icon ZE Remove KS Data Pending Transaction List 0 ltem Number Serial Number 1005 sl L Description Lot B100 Gift Basket 4 Location Date Code 3 H Quantity e Pallet 1 00 lf 4 Maximum 1 00 Remove Date i Customer Kee Monday September 08 2008 By LE el LEI Notes Ss r Remove fa Una Help 0 Cancel 170 InventoryControl Printable Help To prevent fields from clearing click the Pushpin 4 button located to the right of the field you want to lock for subsequent transactions This is helpful when you have to perform multiple removes at one Location for example Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly remove inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field The Remove button does not have to clicked between each scan to post these remove transactions to the Pending Transaction List Clicking the F button will unlock the field 3 Complete the Item fields Ent
480. storing your database please refer to the Restoring the Database topic Note Each time you Audit your inventory a backup file is automatically created with the date time included in the file name For more information on performing an Audit please refer to the Auditing Your Inventory topic Note for Remote Installations If you have installed your database on a remote PC Server a PC Server other than the one where you are running InventoryControl you can specify a folder on that PC Server to which the backup file will be saved This option is set on the Options screen For more information on designating a backup folder please refer to the Options Screen topic Backing Up Your Database 1 From the Main screen click the Administration icon The Administration Menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Administration Menu click Backup The Backup Database screen appears Ea Backup Database Ex Backup File InventoryControl Jun 19 2007 0305 bkp X Help OK Cancel 3 Enter a name for this backup in the Backup File field It is a good idea to specify a name that will help you select the right backup file later if you need to restore the database Adding the date in the file name is a good way to know which file is the latest By default the backup file is written to C Program Files Microsoft SQL Server MSSQL 1 MSSQL Backup Use the Browse button to select a different location 4 Click OK to
481. sync that data back to the PC and you will have to correct the quantity on the Edit Transaction screen Enter the Location of this item then press F4 Press F1 to return to the previous screen and select a different item Pick 1001 Monitor Location 001 ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next If a track by other than Serial Number is required you will enter it now Pick 1001 Monitor Date Code DC 1234 ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next Picks are always calculated in Eaches meaning the quantity in which you stock them as opposed to the quantity in which they are shipped to you which may differ Enter how many of this item you will be picking Pick 1001 Monitor EA Qty 1 ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next If this item is tracked by Serial Number or Lot you will be required to enter the numbers codes now 1001 EA QTY 1 SN 100023021 Qty 4 100 F4 Done F2 Last SN When looping on serial number note that the Qty field displays how many serial numbers exist for this item and how many you have entered so far In the example above 4 serial numbers have been entered out of a possible 100 4 100 You can press F2 to display the last serial 375 InventoryControl Printable Help number entered 10 Press F4 to complete the transaction Note If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see a warning message if you attempt to Pick quantity from a Location that does not exist in the PDT dat
482. t These same relationships apply when using Create New Location Create New Supplier Create New Manufacturer Create New Hem or Add Inventory 7 The Customer table s fields are not related to fields within any of the other tables 268 InventoryControl Printable Help 16 4 Import Specifics This topic lists all Field Names Data Types and Sizes for the fields that can be imported The import wizard contained in this software can automatically map the columns in your import files to the correct column in the database To do this however the column header must match one that the wizard is looking for and the data type must be correct Below is the header and data type the import wizard is expecting Modify your csv or txt file with the correct column header to simply the import process The order in which your columns are arranged in your file does not matter You can also find a csv file with the header and one row of sample data on the installation cd that came with this product The imported file formats discussed in this topic are Customer Inventory Item Location Manufacturer Supplier Data Type Definitions are listed after the Table Properties 16 4 1 Customer Import Format Column Header Data Type Size Precision Scale Cell No varchar 20 Company Name varchar 50 Custom Date 1 datetime 8 Custom Date 2 datetime 8 Custom Date 3 datetime 8 Custom Date 4 datetime 8 Custom Date 5 datetime 8 Custom Number 1 dec
483. t Discard At any time you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error using the Remove or Remove All buttons If you want to print a receipt of this transaction enter the number of receipts in the Print receipt on Commit Copies field 159 InventoryControl Printable Help 10 Click Commit to submit the transaction s to your database 9 7 2 Duplicate Serial Numbers Warning If you are tracking the item by Serial Number and the system detects an item with the same serial number in a location other than the one you selected on the Adjust screen when you click the Adjust button you will receive a warning message that states You are trying to adjust an item that is tracked by serial number We have found that serial number at a different location Do you want to adjust the item at that location to 0 so you can movie it to this location Select Yes on this message to adjust the quantity of the item to 0 at the location detected by the software The quantity adjustment will be made in the location detected by the software and the item will automatically be moved to the location you selected on the Adjust screen The transaction will appear on the Pending Transaction List Select No if you think you have selected the incorrect location The Adjust transaction will not appear on the Pending Transaction List and you will be able to correct the location on the Adjust screen
484. t Values entered for Item Location PO Supplier and any other Tracked By fields will remain locked while looping on Pallet after entering them for the first Remove 365 InventoryControl Printable Help 123 Qty Pallet x Total Qty 30 00000 F4 Done Above having entered a value for Pallet and a value of 30 for Qty on the previous screen for the first Remove this screen is ready to receive inputs for another Remove Item Location PO and Supplier values for this second Remove will be the same as those supplied at the beginning of the loop While looping on this Tracked By field all that is required for each Remove are values for Qty and Pallet The Total Qty is incremented each time a Remove is submitted while looping 7 Press the ENT key to submit the Remove transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop When looping on a Tracked By field all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be restarted 366 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 20 WDT2200 Picking Inventory for Orders This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only When a pick order is actually being picked that is the inventory is being readied for shipping to the customer the quantities that are removed from inventory for each item on the order are entered in the
485. t 10 varchar 100 Email varchar 250 Extension varchar 10 FAX varchar 20 Mail Stop varchar 20 Name varchar 50 Notes varchar 1000 Phone varchar 20 Postal Code varchar 10 State varchar 50 Web Site varchar 255 273 16 4 6 Supplier Table Properties Field Name Data Type Size Precision Scale Address 1 Address 2 City Contact Cell No Contact Ext Contact FAX Contact Name Contact Phone Country Custom Date 1 Custom Date 2 Custom Date 3 Custom Date 4 Custom Date 5 Custom Number 1 Custom Number 2 Custom Number 3 Custom Number 4 Custom Number 5 Custom Text 1 Custom Text 2 Custom Text 3 Custom Text 4 Custom Text 5 Custom Text 6 Custom Text 7 Custom Text 8 Custom Text 9 Custom Text 10 Email Extension FAX Mail Stop Name Notes Phone Postal Code State Supplier Code Web Site varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar datetime datetime datetime datetime datetime decimal decimal decimal decimal decimal varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar varchar 100 100 50 20 10 1000 20 10 50 30 255 274 InventoryControl Printable Help InventoryControl Printable Help 16 4 7 Data Type Definitions e The maximum sizes permitted by the data types defined below are greater than the field lengths used in the database Refer to the siz
486. t Data Column heading to the Map To column heading If a match is found the Import Wizard populates the Field Mapping Import Data Column and Map To values You may change the mapping for any column if necessary Special Note for Importing Items When importing into the Item table there are seven Map To fields which allow you to use the Import Data Columns for the purpose of enabling or disabling the Item To Be Tracked By or Require the user to fill out options found on the Create New Item and Edit Item screens For more information on these options please refer to the Create New Item topic Tracked By or Required Option is Tracked By or Required Option is Enabled For This Record Disabled For This Record True False T F Yes No 259 InventoryControl Printable Help These values are case insensitive but they are the only values allowed Anything else will be rejected by Import The default value is False The Map To fields to which data columns containing these True False values can be mapped are named as follows in the Map To drop list Date Code Track by Lot Track by Pallet Track by Serial Number Track by Customer Required 7 PO Required Supplier Required 2 If for example you wanted every item being imported to be tracked by Serial Number you could create a new column in your source data that contains the word yes in every cell of that column If you chose to name this column TrackSer in your source
487. t PC 480 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 Close the mobile version of InventoryControl then restart the application The mobile version of Mobilelnventory opens in normal mode See the Windows Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 481 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 11 19 Windows Mobile Device Searching for Information You can use the Search function to enter data in many of the Inventory Control fields Whenever the Search function is available the Search icon displays next to a field To Search 1 Enter full or partial information in the field you want to search or leave it blank Tap the Search icon to open the Search screen Item i Site i Location sd i Supplier i Date Code Serial ee Pallet ener Y Add SE s2 PM DA S Note When searching for Items you can enter full or partial Item Numbers Serial Number If applicable This option is not available on the Add or Receive screens Alternate Item Number Description All The Search screen opens The example below is of the Search Items screen 482 InventoryControl Printable Help Description Alt Se 101 101 Desktop Mouse Desktop The title of the screen is specific to the field you select For example if you select the Search icon next to the Item field the Search Items screen opens If you select the Search icon next to the Site field th
488. t and Baud Rate for this printer Click Finish to complete the setup process After the install is complete click the Next button at the bottom of the screen The Create Mobile Database tab displays 397 InventoryControl Printable Help Setup Mobile Device Create Mobile Database PC to Mobile Device Mobile Device to PC Create Mobile Database For WindowsCE This step allows you to specify filters for a subset of the InventoryControl data The filter will then be used to generate the mobile database which will be loaded onto the mobile device The performance of the portable device is improved by sending down only the data you need for impending tasks Specify Filters Site Customer Gource wl A Minimally Required Destination e Supplier s Al O Minimally Required Location Al Specify Filter Purchase Order All Specify Filter E O Minimally Required Lei None Item Number A O Specify Filter Pick Order A O Specify Filter None C Include Items not in a Location Step 1 of 2 lt Back Next gt Cancel This tab allows you to filter the information that will be sent to the mobile device if desired Filtering helps save memory space on the mobile device by allowing you to select only the data you need to load onto the device as opposed to loading all available data You can load all data if desired Select the Site Location Item Numbers Customers Suppliers Purchase Ord
489. t pinned in the field is entered Once you pin the field you cannot change the data entered in the field until the field is unpinned Remember that once you close a screen the field will no longer be pinned when you re open that screen Pinning Fields To pin a field tap the field name Site Location Saal i Supplier i Reset OK Close ay ag SB 3 41 rm The entire field turns grey This indicates the field is now pinned Whatever information that has been entered in this field will remain until the screen is closed Unpinning Fields To unpin the field click the field name again The field will no longer be grey and you may now change the information in the field 438 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 11 4 Windows Mobile Device Adding New Customers You can add new Customers in InventoryControl on the Windows Mobile Device only in the Remove screen The new Customer will not be added unless the data for all other fields is completed correctly and the inventory is successfully removed Adding a Customer on the Remove Screen In this example a new Customer will be added and an Item will be removed 1 On the Remove screen enter the data for the Item you want to remove 2 Inthe Customer field enter the new Customer you want to add Remove Item i Site i Location customer few Cure Oty a Remove SE 3 00 PM Lo E 3 Click OK The message below appears InyentoryGontro
490. t to save the value as a new Manufacturer Type Pro and Enterprise Versions Only When you access the Create New Item screen by selecting New gt Item gt Kit this field will automatically be set to Kit If you accessed it any other way you ican select Kit from the Type drop down Tracking it not available for Kit items Component items can be tracked Item to be Tracked By Cost specifies the amount your company paid to get this item into inventory This is an optional tool to help you track your average cost Cost handling in InventoryControl is designed to show you the average cost and current value of your inventory You can use this cost information for other purposes as well such as determining pre tax and purchase order totals and receiving totals This amount represents your cost for purchasing one of the stocking units for this item If one Barcode Laser Scanner costs 300 00 you will enter 300 into the cost field If you have items in your inventory that are sold in fractional quantities you will need to decide which stocking unit to use For example if you have Rope as an item and it costs you 0 12 a foot you would enter 12 in the Cost field and Feet as the Stocking Unit entered on the Additional tab If you rarely sell the rope in exact multiples of feet you may want to enter your Stocking Unit as Inches since this is the lowest unit measured and enter your cost per inch in the Cost field It is up to you how you wa
491. t will be ready for conducting inventory operations For more information on setting up your device please refer to the Windows Mobile Device Setup Mobile Device topic Tap the device s InventoryControl icon with the stylus to start the application An hour glass icon displays while the application opens A The Logon screen displays InyentoryGontrol Log On UserName _ Password fo Build No 4 052907 Enter your user name and password then tap OK Orre first time you log on to InventoryControl on your mobile device enter Admin in the User Name field and leave the Password field blank After you have sent the database from the PC to the mobile device user names and passwords that are stored on the PC will be downloaded to the mobile device Once this has occurred you must use your normal user name and password to log on to the mobile 387 InventoryControl Printable Help version of InventoryControl For more information on sending the database to the mobile device please refer to the Windows Mobile Device Sending New Data from the PC topic Below is an example of the InventoryControl Main Menu InyentoryGontrol a lnventoryC 3 gt E 5 00 Pm GA 388 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 4 Windows Mobile Device Default Settings The Windows Mobile version of InventoryControl offers several time saving features Site Configuration If your company uses the same two Sites for all inventor
492. taining one field called FirstName The values in this field are Fred Frederick and Sam Example Table Field WEL Whole Find Search Word Only All Result Option Option 2 records Fred Frederick 3 records Fred Frederick Sam 2 Customer 1 record Fred Customer 287 InventoryControl Printable Help 18 2 Advanced Find The Advanced Find screen allows you to search a table in the database using multiple values and logical expressions This screen is useful when the table you are searching contains a lot of data You can enter several parameters by which to filter your search When you use this screen you will construct a filter which limits the information you are searching for to certain parameters Using the Advanced Find Screen 1 2 From the Main screen click the Find icon A menu of tables from which to search appears Select what you want to search for by clicking on an option in the Find menu In this example we are going to search for Customers Note If the table you select Customers Manufacturers Items etc contains over 1000 pieces of data you will automatically be taken to the Advanced Find screen If you are not automatically taken to the Advanced Find screen the Find screen will appear Select the Advanced button on the Find screen The Advanced Find screen appears Advanced Find x h Filter Expression Table Customer v Parenthesis Field Co
493. te If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see a warning message if you attempt to Remove quantity from a Location that does not exist in the PDT database The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to the PDT About screen New Locations can only be created during Remove when the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press ESC to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction The Allow Negative Quantities option applies to batch devices only Mobile devices that are communicating with the database via a wireless connection will not allow negative quantity transactions regardless of the option settings 361 6 InventoryControl Printable Help If this Item does not have Tracked By enabled for the Date Code Pallet or Lot fields a screen like the one below will be shown prompting the entry of Qty Remove 100007 Paint Can Qty ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next Key
494. tem Number Fields can be looped or pinned by pressing the F3 key In the following example F3 was pressed when prompted for Item 383 InventoryControl Printable Help Receive Item i Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu Above the asterisk indicates the intention to loop on Item Values entered for Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By fields other than Serial Number will remain locked after entering them for the first Receive Qty ltem Count 25 F4 Done Above having pressed F3 when prompted for Item and then having entered the item number and values for Location PO Supplier any Tracked By s and a value of 25 for Qty this screen is ready to receive Qty and Item inputs for the second Receive The Location PO Supplier and any Tracked By values just specified will be used with every Receive transaction entered until F4 is used to exit the loop While looping on Item all that is required for each transaction here are values for Qty and Item The Count is incremented each time a Receive is done while looping 7 Press the ENT key to submit the Receive transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop d When looping on Item all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be reset Looping on a Trac
495. ter 1 rather than 10 InventoryControl will do the math behind the scenes and break the shipment down to 10 for you Item 1002 i gt Details box 10 10 Location i Receive S19 gt 12 09 PM La E Note If this item were tracked by serial number the quantity would be entered in eaches since you can only have 1 item per serial number If you enter a quantity that is higher than the quantity entered on the Purchase Order a warning will appear You can continue with the higher quantity if you so choose 6 When all required information is entered tap OK The Item s is marked as Received and the Receive screen resets ready for the next Item to be received Tapping the Reset button clears all fields and restores all available fields to the Receive screen display 7 When you are finished with the Add screen tap Close to return to InventoryControl main menu See the Windows Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 464 InventoryControl Printable Help 20 11 15 Windows Mobile Device Picking Items for Orders The Pick inventory function is used to remove quantity from an item as it is added to a pick order Pick Orders are created on the PC when an order comes in from a customer For more information on creating Pick Orders please refer to the Creating a Pick Order topic Inventory can also be picked at the PC Manual items cannot be picked on the mobile devices Please ref
496. tetime 8 Custom Date 3 datetime 8 Custom Date 4 datetime 8 Custom Date 5 datetime 8 Custom Number 1 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 2 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 3 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 4 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 5 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Text 1 varchar 100 Custom Text 2 varchar 100 Custom Text 3 varchar 100 Custom Text 4 varchar 100 Custom Text 5 varchar 100 Custom Text 6 varchar 100 Custom Text 7 varchar 100 Custom Text 8 varchar 100 Custom Text 9 varchar 100 Custom Text 10 varchar 100 Description varchar 255 Location varchar 30 Notes varchar 1000 Site varchar 50 272 InventoryControl Printable Help 16 4 5 Manufacturer Table Properties Field Name Data Type Size Precision Scale Address 1 varchar 100 Address 2 varchar 100 City varchar 50 Contact Cell No varchar 20 Contact Ext varchar 10 Contact FAX varchar 20 Contact Name varchar 50 Contact Phone varchar 20 Country varchar 50 Custom Date 1 datetime 8 Custom Date 2 datetime 8 Custom Date 3 datetime 8 Custom Date 4 datetime 8 Custom Date 5 datetime 8 Custom Number 1 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 2 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 3 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 4 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 5 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Text 1 varchar 100 Custom Text 2 varchar 100 Custom Text 3 varchar 100 Custom Text 4 varchar 100 Custom Text 5 varchar 100 Custom Text 6 varchar 100 Custom Text 7 varchar 100 Custom Text 8 varchar 100 Custom Text 9 varchar 100 Custom Tex
497. the Check Out button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List All fields on the screen will be cleared and all but the Customer and Item Number fields will be disabled You can either select another item to be added to the Pending Transaction List or you can click Commit to submit the transaction s The Check Out button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one transaction is posted to the Pending Transaction List Data Pending Transaction List 1 l Item Number Item Description Site Location Customer Quantity Serial Number 100022 Hamster Fingerprint Reader A A Loc1 Cambridge Academy 1 00 Print Receipt At any time you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error 8 Check the Print Receipt option to print a receipt when the transactions are Committed 9 Click Commit to submit the transaction s to your database or Discard to close without submitting the transactions 155 InventoryControl Printable Help 9 7 Adjusting Inventory Amounts The Adjust Inventory screen allows you to modify the quantity inventory amount of existing items Adjust is like a mini Audit and will update the quantity using FIFO First In First Out to make the total equal to the quantity you enter here The Adjust function is useful if too much or too l
498. the Remove screen where you can enter another item for removal if needed 9 If you want to print a receipt of this transaction enter the number of receipts in the Print receipt on Commit Copies field 10 Click Commit to submit the transaction s to your database 173 InventoryControl Printable Help Chapter 11 Pick Orders 11 1 Pick Order Overview This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Version users only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen Pick Orders are orders that you create when inventory is requested by a customer and needs to be taken picked from your warehouse store storage facility etc and shipped to the customer InventoryControl allows you to create a pick order that can then be automatically emailed to the warehouse and or printed for reference The basic flow of pick orders is as follows 1 2 Your business receives a request for inventory through an invoice a sales slip etc A pick order for the requested merchandise is entered on the Create New Pick Order screen You can enter any item in any quantity on this screen Actual on hand amounts are not checked at this point You can choose to email the order and or print the order These two actions occur when you click the Save button A newly created Pick Order has a status of New The status remains New
499. the inventory quantity being Removed and press ENT to complete the Remove transaction The Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than zero If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see the following message if you attempt to Remove more quantity than that which is available for this Item at the specified Location Available 83 0000 Not enough qty avail able to complete the transaction ESC Exit Press ESC and enter a value that does not exceed the Available amount If this Item does have Tracked By enabled for Date Code Pallet or Lot fields a screen like the one below will be shown expecting input for each Tracked By field that s enabled Remove 100006 Paint Can Pallet ESC Cancel Fi Prev F4 Next Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field without first inputting a required Tracked By value a screen similar to the following will be displayed Please scan or key in Pallet ESC Exit Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By value a Pallet in this example If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices options is disabled and a Tracked By value that does not match a value associated with inventory available at the previously specified Location is entered the following screen will be displayed No
500. the item number You should enter a numeric value in the Item Number field A description of the item can be entered in the Description field Item Number Required Automatic Item Numbers If you have the Automatic Item Numbers option selected on the Options screen the Item Number field will appear populated with the next number in the sequence For example if you just created item number 1001 the next number will be 1002 For further information on this option please refer to the Options Screen topic A Category is an optional classification you can give to your items This provides you with another way to group your items For example you could create a Category called laptops and assign that category to any laptop items you have You might have multiple items representing different makes and models of laptops If you assign the category Laptops to all of those items you can then Category jgroup your list by Category and quickly see all laptop items You can create new Categories by typing in the desired name in the Category field You will receive a message asking if you want to save the new Category Select Yes to save Categories you have already created will appear in a drop down list Checkout This field specifies the default period in days that this Item can be checked out Length to a customer This is the entity that manufactured the item This field is optional and provides another way to sort and group your items Whe
501. the new items to have on hand in your inventory Audit Auditing your inventory means you are counting the inventory you actually have on hand and comparing that number with what is listed in the software This allows you to ensure you have actual counts in the system Audit Mode allows you to check the counts of all your inventory while disabling the Add Remove Move Adjust Check In and Check Out features to make sure inventory counts in the system do not change while you are performing the audit If you are using mobile devices you can use them simultaneously with the PC to perform an audit by downloading the database in audit mode to each device Audit Mode features a simple Audit screen that allows you to enter your counts for inventory in each location and compares these to the counts already in the system You can then view the Complete Audit screen to review any discrepancies between your counts and what was in the system At the click of a button you can reconcile the counts or you can select certain transactions to accept or reject This software also comes equipped with several Audit Reports that allow you to review a variety of information at a glance Barcode A barcode is graphical representation of a set of numeric or alphanumeric characters that can be read by a barcode scanner For a detailed explanation of barcodes please refer to the topic What is a Barcode Build Assembly Pro and Enterprise versions only The function that
502. the order e Enter a supplier or suppliers for an item and enter that supplier s shipping unit of measures this information will also automatically appear Preferred suppliers are entered on the Create New or Edit Item screen Manage Suppliers tab Supplier unit of measure information is entered on the Create New or Edit Supplier screen e Create a template for your purchase order numbers so that they will be automatically generated for each purchase order you create These templates are set up on the Formatting PO and Pick Order Numbers screen e Make sure you enter a minimum stock level for your items and enable the Automatic Notification option This enables InventoryControl to notify you of items that have reached their reorder point in a report broken down by location Minimum stock levels are entered on the Create New or Edit Item screen General tab The Automatic Notification option is enabled on the Options screen e Enter email addresses for your suppliers If email addresses are entered you can select the Email on Save option at the bottom of the Create New Purchase Order screen to automatically send notification emails to the supplier attached the current PO In addition you can enable InventoryControl to send notification emails to PO managers receiving or anyone for whom you 185 InventoryControl Printable Help have entered an email address You can enter email addresses for your suppliers on the Create New or Edit Supp
503. then use your stylus to select the characters on the keyboard To close the keyboard tap the keyboard icon S at the bottom of the screen v Keyboard Select Hide Input Panel 392 InventoryControl Printable Help Scanning If you have information such as an Item Number Site or Location in barcode format and your mobile device has a barcode scanner you can scan the barcode to enter the data in a chosen field Tap in the field in which you want to enter data then scan the barcode by aiming the scanner at the barcode and pressing the scan button 7 If you find that the scanner is not responding you may need to enable the scanner 20 8 Setup and Synchronization Information Batch Devices 20 8 1 Batch Windows Mobile Device Synchronization The synchronization process involves actions on both the PC and the mobile device side Whenever data is added or edited on the PC it is necessary to synchronize the PC database with the mobile database before the updated data will be reflected on the mobile device The same is true for additions and changes made on the mobile device The databases on the mobile device and the PC must be synchronized before the changes made on the mobile device database will be reflected in the PC database Note This applies to batch devices only If you are using a wireless connection you will not need to retrieve information from the mobile device Your mobile device will be connected directly to the
504. through the Labeler software 4 3 3 Section C Main Functions This section displays the primary functions of this software To access any of these functions 1 Click on an icon A menu of options for that function appears at the bottom of the screen section D described below 2 Click on an icon in the menu to access that function Available menu options are Administration This option provides access to basic administrative functions such as adding users to the system maintaining user security profiles backing up and or restoring the database importing exporting information and maintaining your company information Inventory This option provides access to the inventory features of the software From this menu you can add or remove inventory move inventory from one location to another adjust inventory amounts and audit all inventory in your system Reports This option opens the Reports screen allowing you to select from a wide range of available reports Mobility This option does not apply to WaspNest Inventory This option provides access to your mobile device options Pick Receive This option does not apply to WaspNest Inventory Pro and Enterprise Versions Only This options provides access to the pick receive features of the software 4 3 4 Section D Context Sensitive Menus The bottom of the Main Screen will display a menu based on the selection you make from the Main Functions icons Note Security does
505. till do not see the Tracked By information you expect you should make sure the selected Item Number at the selected Location exists and has quantity Also check that you are using the right Site Enter where you want the inventory moved After Tracked By information is entered choose the To Location where the Inventory is being moved The Notes fields allows you to add and store additional information that describes the transaction 146 InventoryControl Printable Help 6 After you have entered the information on the screen click the Move button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List All fields on the screen will be cleared and all but the Item Number field will be disabled You can either select another item to be added to Pending Transaction List or you can click Commit on the Pending Transaction List to submit the transaction s The Move button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one move is posted to the Pending Transaction List Data Pending Transaction List 1 Item Number Item Description Site Location To Site To Location Quantity Serial 100022 Hamster Fingerprint Reader A A Loc1 A A L22 2 00 At any time you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error 7 Check the Print Receipt option to print a receipt wh
506. tings Additional Manage Suppliers Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates List of Suppliers for This Item Supplier Code Name Default Active Make this the default supplier while ordering this item Remove v Show Active only Remove Help Save Close 70 InventoryControl Printable Help Adding Suppliers to an Item To use this tab you must first select suppliers for this item in the Supplier screen To do this a Click the New button at the bottom of the list The fields to the right of the Supplier screen are enabled Select a Supplier Code from the drop down list You can also select New Supplier from the list to create a new supplier Enter the SKU number for this item in the Supplier Item SKU field Enter the description of this item given by the supplier in the Supplier Item Description field Enter the number of days lead time the supplier needs to process orders for this item in the Lead Time in days field The lead time is the time from the requisition date to the delivery date For example if you need the item by the 15th of the month and the supplier requires 5 days to deliver the order you would enter 5 here to ensure the order is sent to the supplier timely The Status field displays the supplier s current status Active or Inactive You can change the status by making a new selection from the drop down menu You can make this the default supplier for this item by checkin
507. tion Exvamples A 46 4 7 LOGGING OU wees aes Anes havi a avai ae ead kd inden ane Ai ee ee ee a a 48 4 8 1 Disabling the Automatic Version Check Feature ssssssesssessiesrissrissrissrrrssrissrinsrnssrnnsrnnsnnne 49 48 2 Performing a Manual Check aeccsssdccseattcycatiseecetentuntegteveisedetary Aa ra aeea chev aE Aara aeaa TaS Eke aa 50 4 9 Item Stock Level List Green 51 LIOA CT abdul leita 52 AA 1 tele lege EE 54 Chapter 5 Creating New Data 55 5 1 Creating a New Gite Anke 55 5 2 Creating New Customers suvini irran ideia aniei iai aa aata aati ai a aatia i aaa 57 5 3 Creating New Inventory and Non Inventory tems cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeeeeeeess 60 5 3 1 Accessing the Create New Item Gcreen nnn nnna 61 5 3 2 General Information Tabs mers sentie eebe ees these ugeet eege cess Geeks Zegk ee 62 5 3 3 Location Settings TaD GEET 66 EE elei EI Bleu e TE Le GE 68 5 3 5 Manage Suppliers Tab 70 5 3 6 Custom Text and Custom Numbers and Dates Tab 72 5 3 7 Saving BANN EC HE 72 5 6 Automatic Serial Numbers iiiki kiiisid iiaii ii ened taaa cd vag sa enieeedh ca iaaii dakidala iia a S 73 5 7 Creating New Locations esseesssesseessneessntsntsntstntstnttnnetnnetnnesnnsttusennsennnsnnennsetnsetnnennsenssrenanennn ent 74 5 8 Creating New Manutachurers 76 5 8 Creating NEw Suppliers aasia aeaa aa aaa a aaa aaa e NEIEN SES ac 80 Chapten6 Editing BE EE 84 6 1 Edrng FEMS uereta etea a i ae E a a a e
508. tion Tab When you have finished entering information on the Assembly tab click the Additional tab The Additional Information tab provides optional fields where other information about the Item can be recorded An example of this tab is shown below 99 InventoryControl Printable Help General Location Settings Additional Manage Suppliers Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates ltem Measurements Stocking Unit Dimension Unit Length Width Height Weight Unit Weight Manager File Reference Notes Add Notes Hep save 1 Close Complete the fields on this tab as described below e Stocking Unit is the portion by which the quantity will be tracked At the item level this should be Eaches meaning you should enter how you want each item of this type to be measured Examples bag barrel basket block bottle box carton container drum gallon jar pack package pallet section tub vial etc You will have the opportunity on the Managing Suppliers tab to enter the Order Unit used by the supplier for shipping purposes Box Pallet Lot etc The Order Unit will be used when creating Purchase Orders rather than the Eaches UOM that is entered on this tab Please see the Managing Suppliers Tab section below e Dimension Unit is the increment to be used for Length Width and Height Examples inch foot yard millimeter centimeter meter etc e Length is the length of one Unit of Measu
509. tion on the Find screen Select the Minimally Required checkbox to only send data that is required for normal operation For example if you select to send all Items but don t want to send all locations only those locations designated as Primary Locations for individual items will be sent Or if you don t want to send all Suppliers but some Suppliers are entered on the Item screen Managing Suppliers tab for items only those suppliers entered on the Item screen will be sent Tips for Filtering Information The default values apply no filtering to your data All Items will be selected including those which are not yet in a Location Site Source Specify lt all gt or one of the Sites listed in the drop down list This determines which Sites will be shown in the Source Site list on the WDT2200 This is the Site for all inventory transactions to be performed by the device If you want the device s database to include Items at more than one Site select lt all gt You can only select ALL or 1 specific site For example if you have 5 sites you cannot select 2 to be a Source You can either select 1 or all Destination If more than one Site is defined on the system and you have selected a specific Site in the Source Site field you can select one of the Sites listed in the Destination drop down list This determines which Sites will be shown in the Destination Site list of the WDT2200 Site Configuration function and which locations will
510. tion on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Create New Item topic 6 2 Editing Assembly Items Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Edit Assembly Items screen allows you to modify an existing assembly item This screen is accessed from the Item List by highlighting an assembly item in the list then clicking the Edit button on the toolbar For more information on using the List screens see the Working with Lists topic The Edit Assembly Items screen is identical to the New Assembly Hem screen except all the information previously entered for the item appears on the screen You can change any of this information For information on using each tab of the screen please refer to the Create an Assembly Item topic When editing assembly items there are two points to keep in mind 1 You will need to sync the mobile device in order for the changes to be transferred 2 The change of configuration will not impact mobile transactions already done on the device Example You create an assembly item with two component parts Item 1 and Item 2 Later you edit the assembly item to have three component parts Item 1 Item 2 and Item 3 84 InventoryControl Printable Help 6 3 Editing Kit Items Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Note For information on the ben
511. tion screen select Tools gt Site Configuration InyentoryGontrol Site Configuration LU oct The Site Configuration screen displays Site Gonfiguration Source Site od Dest Site a Se site Config 3 gt E 3 50 rw A S You can enter the data by scanning using the device s key pad or using the device s keyboard Click here for more information about entering data 2 Enter the Source Site The Source Site field is used as the default for Add Remove Move from Adjust and Details fields 437 InventoryControl Printable Help 3 Enter the Destination Site The Dest Site field is used as the default for Move to 4 Tap OK After you have configured the Sites you will see that the appropriate fields are pre populated with the selected sites in all the device s InventoryControl screens 20 11 3 Windows Mobile Device Pinning Fields Pinning can be used to lock values you have entered in any field Pinning enables you to enter repeated information rapidly without having to re enter repetitive data After a field is pinned you can manually enter data or you can use a scanner to rapidly Add Remove Move Adjust etc by repeatedly scanning barcodes For example if you need to add the same inventory Item Number multiple times you can pin the Item field and perform continuous Adds without having to re enter the Item Number for each Add Note Before pinning a field make sure the data you wan
512. to track why this adjustment is being made The Reason also determines if the quantity is positive or negative for By Difference adjusts Found Return Negative Breakage Lost When to select the By Counts or By Difference check boxes By Count indicates that the Quantity you are entering is the total count of that item at the specified Location For instance if the software shows that you have 3 of Item A at Location 1 but you have counted 5 you should enter 5 By Difference indicates that the Quantity you are entering is the change you want to see in the Quantity for that Item at that Location For instance if you just damaged 2 of Item A at Location 1 you can enter 2 set the Reason to Breakage and the total will be adjusted downward by 2 4 Complete the Track By fields The Track By fields are enabled based on the Item Number you enter If there are no Track Bys set for the selected item these fields will be disabled Track By fields are enabled or disabled at the time the item is entered on the Create New Item screen or when editing an item on the Edit Item screen When an item is tracked by Serial Number 0 and 1 are the only valid values for Quantity 158 InventoryControl Printable Help Enter the Quantity After you have specified the Item Location and Track Bys you should input the total Quantity you are adding to the item Enter the Transaction Code This field allows you to type a new or se
513. tory amounts for the sub items You should only use Add if you want to add inventory to an Assembly Item due to a return you can also use the Adjust feature for this To increase your inventory for an Assembly Item and decrease your inventory for the sub items use the Assembly feature To Assemble Items 1 From the Main screen click the Inventory icon 2 From the Inventory menu click Assembly The Build Assembly screen appears 103 InventoryControl Printable Help K ae Assemble Le fos ez Data Pending Transaction List 0 ltem Number Serial Number si 4 Description Lot Location Date Code E Quantity Pallet 1 00 LE LEI Maximum 0 No of Labels 1 A Cost e Date Built Wednesday September 03 2008 y E Notes D 4 Ltr Assemble Pinal 1 een Al Help Cancel Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin HU button located to the right of the field you want to lock This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Builds at one Location for example Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field The Build Assembly button does not have to be clicked between each scan to post these transactions to the Pending Transaction List If any additional information such as serial numbers is needed for one or more sub items tied to this
514. tory of how this assembly item has ever been set up if you think the current assembly item configuration doesnt apply to what you have you may choose a different configuration from the history list 9 3 2008 2 23 23 PM Current Type ke Always Scrap Quantity Stocking Unit Description 9 3 2008 9 27 50 AM S gt j Inventory 1005 1 0000 test item Inventory 1003 1 0000 Test item 3 Inventory 1002 1 0000 Test Item 1002 Help l Use This Configuration Cancel To switch to a previous configuration highlight a listing and click the Use This Configuration button 11 In the Item Number field enter the Item Number or highlight an item in the display screen The selected item s information will populate the screen 12 Select a location for this item if there is only one location or that item has a primary location this will appear in the Location field 13 Select the Scrap checkbox if you want to scrap or discard this item This means the inventory for this item will not be increased You would use this if the item is damaged or you do not want to return it to your inventory for some reason You can also optionally enter a reason if you choose to scrap this item 14 Enter any missing information usually a Track By such as Serial Number You can also scan this information Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin 4 button located to the right of the field 110 15 16 InventoryControl Printabl
515. transaction and return to the previous screen Add 123 Monitor Location Warehouse ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next If you press F4 to advance to the Supplier field without first providing a Location value the following message will be displayed Please scan or key in location ESC Exit Press ESC to Exit the error message and then provide the required Location value If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press the ESC key to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists only at a Site other than the currently selected Source Site InventoryControl must treat that value as a new Location for the Source Site Select a different Source Site in Site Config if that s where you intended to perform this transaction When a Location value has been entered press F4 to advance to the next required field Add 123 Monitor Supplier ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next PO and Supplier values might be required for this Item if track bys were set when the item was created If not the fields can be left empty or values may be entered optionally For more information on Track by fields please refer to the topic Creating New ltems Press F4 to advance to the next data entry field Supplier ACME New entry Press ENT to accept or ESC to cancel Ent OK 319 InventoryControl Printable Help ESC Cancel As shown above if yo
516. ttempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT Please use the Site Config function to Select Source and Destination Sites ESC Exit 317 InventoryControl Printable Help Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu then select the 6 key to go to the Site Config function For more information on configuring sites on the PDT please refer to the topic WDT2200 Configuring Sites The following topics discussed in this section are Adding Inventory Looping on Serial Number Looping on Location Looping on Item Number Looping on a Track By Tips for Speeding Up Data Eniry Adding Inventory 1 From the Main Menu press the 1 key The Add screen appears Add ltem 123 Scan or key in value and press Ent Press ESC for Menu 2 Press the Ent key after supplying an Item or press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu Add ltem 9999999 Entry not found Scan or key in value and press Ent ESC Menu If the Item entered is not found in the PDT s database you will be prompted to try again as shown above If the Item entered is found in the database the Item s Description will be displayed beneath the ltem 318 InventoryControl Printable Help Scan or key in a Location value The Location field is required for all Add transactions Enter a Location and press F4 to advance to the next data entry field Press F1 to go back to the previous data entry field Press ESC to cancel
517. type of data format in which each piece of data is separated by a comma This is a popular format for transferring data from one application to another because most database 114 InventoryControl Printable Help systems are able to import and export comma delimited data For example data pulled from a database and represented in comma delimited format looks something like the following Each column value is separated by a comma from the next column s value and each row starts a new line Adams Jane 46 female New York Doe John 32 male California Jones Sam 13 male Texas Smith Mary 64 female Louisiana When data is represented in comma delimited format they also are referred to as comma separated values abbreviated CSV When the Export button is selected a screen appears allowing you to specify where the exported data will be saved on your computer An example of the Export screen is shown below e e vn Export To File ES Savein E Desktop e Ers Di E Name Size Type Date modif a Recent Places L Admin A Public T A Computer A Network Desktop P a D QB company Inventory Ce a File Folder File Folder A InstallReady Shortcut dy MobileInventory4 Shortcut A a R Shortcut al Shortcut RE 1 46 KB 813 bytes KK Network File name e v Cancel Save as type Comma Separated files Make sure you save this to a location you can remember You must also choose a name for
518. u do not cause the system to have incorrect inventory amounts for the component items You cannot Add Non inventory or Kit items Manually Adding Inventory 1 From the Main screen click on the Inventory icon The Inventory menu appears at the bottom of the screen 2 On the Inventory menu click Add Inventory The Add Inventory screen appears OR 1 From the Main screen select Lists gt Item The Item List appears 2 On the Item List highlight an item in the grid then click the Add icon 135 InventoryControl Printable Help l ZER Lola Des Pending Transaction List 0 Item Number Serial Number J Description Lot E Location Date Code 7 Quantity Pallet 1 00 gd D No of Labels Supplier Code pas 1 4 el WW Cost Ref EA LEI Date Acquired Customer Monday September 08 2008 By Lz LEI Notes D Add Pin All Unpin All Note To prevent fields from clearing click the pushpin 4 button located to the right of the field you want to lock This is helpful when you have to perform multiple Adds at one Location Pushpins can be used to lock the values in all but one required field so that a scanner can be used to rapidly add inventory just by repeatedly scanning barcodes into that field The Add button does not have to be clicked between each scan to post these add transactions to the Pending Transaction List Clicking the F b
519. u can choose the Default date today s date No Due Date or Custom select your own due date Below is an example of the 448 InventoryControl Printable Help Due Date drop down menu Pallet Quantity 7 If you are printing receipts enter the number of receipts you want to print 8 Click OK to check out the selected item 20 11 10 Windows Mobile Device Checking In Inventory The Check In screen allows you to Check In inventory that has previously been Checked Out to one or more customers While checking in inventory does not actually add inventory quantity to an item it does free up that inventory to be checked out to another customer or to be included in a pick order You can only check out inventory that has been added This means that when you create an item you must add inventory quantity to it before you can check out that item to a customer Remember that inventory is the amount or quantity of an item You can add inventory to an item either on the Add Inventory screen or by Receiving inventory To Check In Inventory 1 From the Main menu Click the Check In icon The Check In screen appears Item See i Customer i Date Code li Serial Pallet e Site Location i No of Receipt EEN Note You can enter characters manually scan in data see Entering Alphanumeric Data on 449 InventoryControl Printable Help the Window Mobile Device for details or use the Search function
520. u enter a Location or Supplier that s not currently in the PDT database you will be prompted to accept or reject the entry as a new value to be added to the database The currently selected Source Site will be displayed when you are about to create a new Location Press the ENT key to accept the new value or the ESC key to Cancel the creation of a new Location or Supplier Add 123 Monitor Qty ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next Key in the inventory quantity being added and press Enter to complete the Add transaction The Qty value entered must be numeric and it must be greater than zero NO TRACK BY FIELDS If this Item does not have enabled for the Date Code Pallet or Lot fields a screen like the one above will be shown prompting the entry of Qty TRACK BY FIELDS If this Item does have enabled for Date Code Pallet or Lot fields a screen like the one below will be shown expecting input for each Tracked By field that s enabled In this example Date Code is required for this item Add 123 Monitor Date Code ESC Cancel F1 Prev F4 Next Key in or scan values for each of the Tracked By fields pressing F4 to advance to the next data entry field If you press F4 to advance to the next data entry field without first inputting a required Tracked By value a screen similar to the following will be displayed Please scan or key in Date Code ESC Exit Press ESC to exit the error message and then provide the required Tracked By va
521. u have setup in the system When you select a primary location when you Receive quantities of that item from a purchase order they will automatically be assigned to that location Also when you Pick quantities of that item for pick orders they will automatically be removed from that location You can change these locations when picking and receiving if necessary In addition the primary location will appear in any location fields on the Add inventory screen for example however you can change the location if needed Only one primary location can be selected per site e Site and Location Click in the box and select a Site and Location from the drop down list Only sites and locations you have previously selected will appear in this list Select More to view the Site or Location List You can also select New Location or New Site to access the Create New screen These represent the site and the location where the inventory will reside e Quantity This number is populated from the Inventory for this item This number displays how many of this item is currently in stock at the selected site and location If you are creating a new item this field will be blank 0 e Max Stock Level Enter the maximum number of this item that you want to have in stock for the selected site and location This number can be 0 or a positive number negative numbers are not allowed e Min Stock Level Enter the minimum number of this item that you want to hav
522. uired information on the Check In screen click the Check In button to add the transaction to the Pending Transaction List All fields on the screen will be cleared and all but the Item Number field will be disabled You can either select another item for Check In or you can click Commit on the Pending Transaction List to submit the transaction s The Check In button will not be enabled until all required information is entered in the appropriate fields The Commit button will not be enabled until at least one Check In is posted to the Pending Transaction List 150 InventoryControl Printable Help Data Pending Transaction List 1 Item Number Item Description Site Location Customer Quantity Serial Number Ld 100002 Hamster Fingerprint Reader A A4 L11 1 00 Pin ce At any time you can review the Pending Transaction List and remove any transactions that were entered in error using the Remove and Remove All buttons Check the Print Receipt option to print a receipt when the transactions are Committed Click Commit to submit the transaction s to your database 151 InventoryControl Printable Help 9 6 Checking Out Inventory The Check Out screen allows you to check out or assign inventory to customers for a specified length of time Checking out inventory decreases the quantity of that item that you have on hand but does not remove the inventory from your database since it is assumed t
523. uld use thermal transfer If the majority of your labels are disposable any cheap stock will work fine Often the major issue is how to apply the label to the item so that the scanner can read the barcode Make sure the barcode is attached to a flat surface in a place w here it will not get scratched or damaged Before you label your locations you need to come up with a numbering scheme for each location and item In InventoryControl there are two fields that describe where the item is Site and Locations 13 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 5 Identifying Tracking Needs Sometimes it is important to be able to associate an exact item or range of items with an exact customer serial number date code or shipment date This can be important for support and maintenance purposes or for recalls Often larger cost items that have a warranty or support contract are tracked by serial number so that if the item is sent back for maintenance you can be sure you are not fixing a product that is out of warranty Some items need to be tracked by lot or date code because the batch they are in is important or they are perishable InventoryControl allows you to specify up to four required tracking fields Serial Number Lot Date Code and Pallet and three optional tracking fields PO Supplier and Customer Selecting a tracking field means that when you process an add remove move audit pick or receive for this item you will be forced to specify a value f
524. umber varchar 30 Category varchar 255 Checkout Length int 4 Cost money 8 Custom Date 1 datetime 8 Custom Date 2 datetime 8 Custom Date 3 datetime 8 Custom Date 4 datetime 8 Custom Date 5 datetime 8 Custom Number 1 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 2 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 3 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 4 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Number 5 decimal 9 15 4 Custom Text 1 varchar 100 Custom Text 2 varchar 100 Custom Text 3 varchar 100 Custom Text 4 varchar 100 Custom Text 5 varchar 100 Custom Text 6 varchar 100 Custom Text 7 varchar 100 Custom Text 8 varchar 100 Custom Text 9 varchar 100 Custom Text 10 varchar 100 Customer Required char 1 Date Code Track By char 1 Description varchar 255 Dimension Unit varchar 50 File Reference varchar 255 Height varchar 50 Item Number varchar 31 Length varchar 50 List Price money 8 Lot Track By char 1 Manager varchar 50 Manufacturer varchar 50 Max Stock Level decimal 9 15 4 Min Stock Level decimal 9 15 4 Notes varchar 1000 271 InventoryControl Printable Help Pallet Track By char 1 PO Required char 1 Reorder Qty decimal 9 15 4 Sale Price money 8 Serial Number Track char 1 By Supplier Required char 1 Supplier Code varchar 30 Supplier Name varchar 50 Unit of Measure varchar 10 Weight varchar 50 Weight Unit varchar 50 Width varchar 50 16 4 4 Location Table Properties Field Name Data Type Size Precision Scale Custom Date 1 datetime 8 Custom Date 2 da
525. unt lt account name gt has been granted the Log On As A Service right Click OK on this message A message similar to the following will appear The new logon name will not take effect until you stop and restart the service 424 11 Click OK again to close out of the screen InventoryControl Printable Help 12 On the Services screen right click Wasp Inventory Windows Services and select Stop then right click again and select Start Name Description Status Startup Typ i Thread Ordering S Provides or Manual the service chu AutoConnect ThinPrint p Manual rt the service o j A TPM Base Services Enables acc Manual GA UPnP Device Host Allows UPn Manual oe Wer EE GA User Profile Service This service Started Autom asp Invento ervices Haste ie In a T Sh Virtual Disk Provides m Manu Gi YMware Snapshot WMwvare Sn Manu e VMuvare Tools Ser Provides su Started Si Volume Shadow C Manages an i Extended A Sa iVasp Ire on uia en Ty SA WebClie Manual GA Windows Stop Manual A Window Pause Started Automatic GA Window Beenie Started Automatic BCE Bastar Manual Sa Window Manual A Window All Tasks gt Manual C Window Manual Tage Refresh GA Window Started Manu oh Window Properties Started Auto alee m i e Help Standard Autorn pry Windows Service on Local Computer Now you will be able to choose which n
526. up in the system Note WaspNest Inventory only allows you to have one site E Site List Lo fe Tools P azea Ger d Filter Toggle New Edit Delete Duplicate Print Export To File Group Bu Show Hidden Columns Site Description a Suite 12 m DD Dev Division DDKK Dock K KK Meeting Plano QA QQ Rest RRR Site 1 Test Record Iq 4 10f 34 gt NM The Site List screen allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print the list of Sites For detailed information regarding each of these options refer to the Working with Lists topic 125 InventoryControl Printable Help 8 5 Location List Example The Location List displays all locations you have setup in your system Below is an example of the Location List i Ki Location List Tools oe ve W l A M E ch 7 Do mm Wo dr U Filter New Edit Delete Duplicate Move Print Export To File Group Bu Show Hidden Columns Site Location Description Location LES Source Site Location UNE Source 111 222 Loc 234 Location2 555 555 set m m 888 LOCI 99 99 Comb A 11 11 4 20 20 A 30 AAA 4 Er 4 L11 A L22 A 4 Locl D A LOC2 A 4 Loc3 B 22 22 B 25 25 B L11 DD cc DD DD DD LCC DDK 100 100 DDK 200 200 DDK BB S Record qd 4 Lo 84 gt pi Help Close The Location List screen allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print the
527. update upon application startup This check will be performed every 15 calendar days and must have internet connection for this to work Yes Check to turn option on 3 Click OK to save your changes and to Close the Options screen The option is now disabled You can manually check for updates as needed 4 8 2 Performing a Manual Check From the Main Screen click Help gt Check for Updates File Tools Conterts Index Search Update License Check or Updates About The system will automatically check for a newer version and notify you if one is available This procedure can be performed at any time 50 InventoryControl Printable Help 4 9 Item Stock Level List Screen The software can automatically notify you of under stocked items broken down by location By enabling the Automatic Notification of Low Order Item on the Options screen the software will display the Item Stock Level List when you first start up the system This screen contains items that have a Quantity value equal to or less than the Reorder Quantity value set for that item and location on the Location tab of the Create New or Edit Item screen For more information on enabling and disabling this options please refer to the Options Screen topic In order for items to appear on this screen a Reorder Quantity must be entered on the Location tab of the Create New Item screen or after the item is created on the Edit Item screen
528. usly Processed Mobile Data 245 15 6 19 Show Cost Information During Receiving ssessssssssrssrrssrrssrrssrnssrrnssrnssrnssrnssrnnsrnnsrnnsrnssnns 246 15 6 20 Show Warning Messages 246 viii 15 6 21 SQL Server Backup Location 00 e eee cece eeeeeeeeeeee cee eeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaeeseaaeseeeeeesaeeseaeeeeeeeeaes 246 15 6 23 Packing Slip CC Email 247 159 6 24 Pick Order CG EMAS e aar e e aaar a a a a T a aa a eaa a Ead aeda AR EAEra 247 15 6 25 Purchase Order CC Email 247 15 6 26 SM IP Password ME 247 15027 OM TA EE 247 15 60 28 SMTP Servet nenti ia a deer a vies a aia aaie ad iai ia EAA ai 247 15 6 29 SMTP SSL T SL treat nae a ceded eae aed dtd ait 247 15 630 SMTP User ege Gennes cies aa taa ee age a de Se le 248 15 7 Archiving Transactions e i108 scald i EE ESA NEE ENE ETENE NEER 249 15 8 Editing Field Names aaeeea oaa a a E E aa aaa a a aE aa EE aaa ia 250 15 9 T Editing Field Namas e E E EEA 250 15 8 2 Resetting Field Names to their Default Values 00 cee ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneneeeeaas 252 159 RE Eer e EE 253 Chapter 16 Importing EXporting cccccceeeceeseeeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeaeesceeeecaaeeeeaaeseceeecaaeeesaaaeseeeeceaeeeeeesenaeeeenees 256 16 1 Importing Into the Database AAA 256 16 4 1 Tips tor Importing Data icici sae iene ea nic ieee eae ene 256 16 1 2 How to Import RE 257 16 1 3 Required Import we EE 261 16 1 4 Handling Import Error 261 16 1 5 Notes on Importing
529. utton will unlock the field Complete the Item fields Enter the Item Number of the item to which you want to add inventory if you accessed this screen from the Item List this field will already be populated To enter an Item Number you can type or scan the value into the field or you can use the drop down list to see the first 10 items in the database select lt more gt on the drop down list to see all items in the Item List or you can create a new item Entering an Wem Number populates the Item Number field as well as the Description field and enables the following fields e Location e Quantity unless the item is Tracked By Serial Number Set on the Add or Edit Item screens which fixes the Quantity to a value of 1 136 InventoryControl Printable Help e Cost e Date Acquired e Any of the associated Track By fields Serial Number Date Code Lot or Pallet Set on the Add or Edit Item screens A Track By field is enabled or disabled at the time the item is created Note The Track By fields are not available in WaspNest Inventory Below is an example of the screen with all fields enabled Data Pending Transaction List 0 item Number Serial Number z 4 1001 Description Lot Pe Track by serial number i A Location Date Code 4 Quantity Pallet 4 4 You can use the drop down list of any enabled field to select an existing value for that field or select lt New gt from the Item Numb
530. ve Yes Source Site 1 Dest Site 1 c 2004 2011 Wasp Barcode Technologies http Awww waspbarcode com Information on this screen includes e Application title InventoryControl or InventoryControlRF e Version number and build number e Setting for the Allow Negative Numbers on the Mobile Device option This option is set on the Options screen in the PC version of InventoryControl For more information on this option please refer to the Options Screen topic Note Negative quantities are NOT allowed on a wireless connection regardless of the settings on the Options screen e Source Site and Destination Site These are the sites and locations to which the mobile device will default when moving adding etc inventory These are set on the PC For more information on 436 InventoryControl Printable Help setting the Source and Destination Sites please refer to the Selecting Sites topic Note Setting Source and Destination sites is NOT available on a wireless connection e Copyright information e The Wasp Barcode website address 20 11 2 Windows Mobile Device Site Configuration InventoryControl provides a time saving feature for companies who use the same two Sites for all inventory transactions on the mobile device On the Site Configuration screen you can set up your device to automatically include these Sites in the appropriate fields in InventoryControl Configuring Site 1 To access the Site Configura
531. ve in 2 GC m Ob Name ooo Size Type Date modif Recent Places ij Admin A Public wal d Computer A Network pe EE QB company Inventory File Folder File Folder InstallReady Shortcut re ae es Shortcut d Shortcut i cut Computer 1 46 KB ols bytes A e Network File name X Save as type Comma Separated files v Cancel Make sure you save this to a location you can remember You must also choose a name for your file on this screen After you have made your selections click Save to export your data A confirmation message will appear when your data has been successfully exported by the system 209 InventoryControl Printable Help 12 11 Formatting PO and Pick Order Numbers Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen To make creating Purchase Orders and Pick Orders easier InventoryControl allows you to set up auto generated numbers This allows you to quickly create sequential numbers by clicking the Generate button on the Create New Purchase Order and Create New Pick Order screens InventoryControl allows you to enter custom text dates and or counters in any combination to create a unique identifier that is meaningful to your business You should set up your numbers to contain a date field followed by a serialized count field at the very least
532. ve screen resets ready for the next Item to be received Tapping the Reset button clears all fields and restores all available fields to the Receive screen display 467 InventoryControl Printable Help 7 When you are finished with the Add screen tap Close to return to InventoryConitrol main menu See the Windows Mobile Device Troubleshooting topic if you encounter errors while using this function 20 11 16 Windows Mobile Device Picking Kit Items The Pick inventory function is used to remove quantity from an item as it is added to a pick order Pick Orders are created on the PC when an order comes in from a customer requesting inventory For more information on creating Pick Orders please refer to the Creating a Pick Order topic Note If the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is disabled you will see a warning message if you attempt to Pick quantity from a Location that does not exist in the PDT database The Allow Negative option must be set on the PC prior to creating the database You can check the state of this option on the PDT by using the 7 key on the Main Menu to go to the PDT About screen New Locations can only be created during Pick when the Allow Negative Quantities on Mobile Devices option is enabled If you are prompted to confirm a new Location that you believe should already exist in the database press ESC to cancel then return to the Main Menu to check Site Config If the Location you entered exists
533. ventory This is an optional tool to help you track your average cost Cost handling in InventoryControl is designed to show you the average cost and current value of your inventory You can use this cost information for other purposes as well such as determining pre tax and purchase order totals and receiving totals Require the User to Fill Out Does not This amount represents your cost for purchasing one of the stocking units for this item If one Barcode Laser Scanner costs 300 00 you will enter 300 into the cost field If you have items in your inventory that are sold in fractional quantities you will need to decide which stocking unit to use For example if you have Rope as an item and it costs you 0 12 a foot you would enter 12 in the Cost field and Feet as the Stocking Unit entered on the Additional tab If you rarely sell the rope in exact multiples of feet you may want to enter your Stocking Unit as Inches since this is the lowest unit measured and enter your cost per inch in the Cost field It is up to you how you want to calculate this however you should make sure that the Cost you enter is the cost for one whole Stocking Unit either Feet or Inches in our example Keep in mind that you can enter a new cost on the Add Inventory screen if you purchase this item at a discount 93 Cost Method Average Cost Min Stock Level InventoryControl Printable Help For a detailed description for using Cost Tracking
534. ventory as well as your corporate address and other business addresses Having these addresses entered will save you and your employees a lot of time when creating purchase orders and pick orders and when moving picking receiving adding and removing inventory 1 7 Step Three Define Sites and Locations Define Sites and Define Locations Now you are ready to begin entering sites and locations into the database Locations are the areas into which you will assign inventory while sites contain the various locations Usually a site is a warehouse or other building but it can be an office a truck a field etc We suggest creating one site for each building or structure that contains inventory InventoryControl requires that you define at least one site containing at least one location You can also have multiple sites that contain multiple locations There is no limit to the number of locations you can assign to a site View Business Examples Note WaspNest Inventory only supports one Site A location is typically shorthand for a physical place such as a shelf in your warehouse Commonly used conventions include Location codes like this 010205 for Row Shelf Bin For the purposes of keeping track of your inventory items your locations should represent the placement within the site If your site is a warehouse the locations are shelves or racks If your site is a building the locations may be offices If you have a fleet of truc
535. ves the employee the time it would take to filter through inventory in all sites For detailed information on the Site Configuration screen on the PC please see the topic Selecting Sites For detailed information on the Site Configuration screen on the mobile device please see the topic WDT2200 Site Configuration or Windows Mobile Device Site Configuration In addition since Rusty wants his employees to be able to scan sites and locations he makes sure his Site Location Codes are short sets of numbers and characters and his Site Location Descriptions are longer more detailed descriptions of the code For example a Site Code is VEH1234 and the Site Description is VIN 789001234 White Ford Econoline Business Type Reseller One Site Multiple Locations Brady s Bargains has multiple locations at one site The store itself is set up as the site with locations consisting of areas on the sales floor and areas within a storage area The manager manually inputs the site and locations using the Create New Site and Create New Location screen Though they will not be using mobile devices they do have a barcode scanner at the PC that will be used to scan labels on items Knowing this they make sure they set up their Site and Location codes to be scanner friendly They have set up their Site Code as 100 and the Site Description as Main Store Their Location Codes follow the pattern of SFA2R12 with Location Descriptions of Sales Floor Aisle 2 Rack 12
536. vices 24 SYNC WMD 393 System Administrator Information 24 T Tracking Coste 16 Transaction Code List ccccccseeeseeeees 238 Transaction List Example s s 132 Transactions Archiving neeese 249 Troubleshooting the WMD 485 Troubleshooting Wireless Connection 426 U Update License Screen sssssssnnssseeneseeee eene 43 Updates Software Checking For 49 Users Adding to Security ceeeeeeee 230 Users Editing in Gecuttv 230 Users Making Inactive 230 V VEH In EE 16 Viewing Reports ceeceseeeeeesteeeeeenaes 220 221 Ww WDT2200 About Green 315 WDT2200 Adding Irmventonm eee 317 WDT2200 Adjusting Inventory 329 WDT2200 Audting Invenmtonm eee 336 WDT2200 Creating the PDT Databasse 294 WDT2200 Data Cyole n 307 WDT2200 Details Green 325 WDT2200 Interface 314 WDT2200 Logging Om 307 WDT2200 Main Mem 313 WDT2200 Moving Inventory eee 343 WDT2200 Picking Inventory eee 367 WDT2200 Picking Kit Items 000aeeeneanea 373 WDT2200 Receiving Data from the PDT 304 WDT2200 Receiving Inventory 380 WDT2200 Removing Imventorny 351 WDT2200 Removing Kit Items aaaaseeaan 359 502 InventoryControl Printable Help WDT2200 Resetting A 308 WDT2200 Sending Data to the PDT 299 WDT2200 Setting the Date and Time 310 WDT2200 Setup
537. w Manufacturer 2C General Additional Custom Texts Custom Numbers and Dates Name Address Address Type Manufacturer Billing D Address 1 Address 2 Mail Stop City State Postal Code Country Phone Fax Email Web Site Note This screen is opened automatically from the Create New Item screen when a new 76 3 InventoryControl Printable Help manufacturer name is entered Enter information on this screen as needed The Name and Address Type fields are required all other fields are optional The software provides you with the ability to enter a Billing Address Receiving Address and or Shipping Address for your manufacturers To enter multiple address follow the steps below a On the Company Information screen enter your company name Select what type of address you will be entering from the Address Type drop down menu Enter the remainder of the address information then click OK You will be returned to the Administration Menu Click the Company Info icon again The Company Information screen will reappear populated with the information you just entered Select a different address type of the Address Type drop down menu The address lines Address 1 and 2 City State Postal Code and Country will clear while all other company information will remain on the screen Enter the new address information then click OK Repeat these steps for each address type When you have finished e
538. welers US Mail Net 15 6 1 2007 PO PO070523 0000010 05 23 20 ref 5 30 CostCo DHL 1 10 Net 30 6 1 2007 PO POO070523 0000010 05 23 20 ref 6 deBoulle deBoulle Diamond and Jewelry FedEx COD 21101 PO 20 05 17 20 Wasp Costco 20 30 CostCo FedEx Overn COD 8 17 20 PO 20 05 17 20 30 30 CostCo US Mail Net 30 PO 2 05 15 20 100 Tiffany amp Co Po 3 05 17 20 Test Long Supplier This is a long Supplier Name to test the L PO 4 05 17 20 Test Long Supplier This is a long Supplier Name to test the L PO 5 05 17720 Test Long Supplier This is a long Supplier Name to test the L PO P0070323 0000010 03 23 20 123 100 Tiffany amp Co Federal Expre 1 10 Net 30 PO PO070323 0000040 03 23 20 1000 100 Tiffany amp Co Federal Expre 1 10 Net 30 PO P0070327 1 03 27 20 100 Tiffany amp Co Federal Expre 1 10 Net 30 PO P0070329 03 29 20 100 Tiffany amp Co Federal Expre 1 10 Net 30 PO POO70515 0000010 05 15 20 999 100 Tiffany amp Co Airbome Net 15 Record I4 4 10f 18 gt bi l Help Close Notice the red flags next to some of the orders on the list These red flags indicate that the order is past due The status may be New Past Due or In Process Past Due Overdue orders will appear at the top of the list by default but you can reorder the list as needed The Purchase Order List allows you to Edit create New Copy Delete Show Filter Export or Print the list of Purchase Orders For detailed information r
539. will allow you to start using InventoryControl to manage your day to day business Keep in mind that you can continue to use your previous inventory tracking software while you are setting up InventoryControl The transition to InventoryControl should take place when you are ready to count your inventory and enter the counts into the software Before starting this process set aside a day or two when you can stop using the old system and transition over to InventoryControl The audit or inventory counting step must be done when you are not receiving or shipping goods Plan to perform the audit on a weekend or after hours for example Set Up Cycle 1 Design your barcode labeling system and designate barcode label ranges 2 Import or input sites locations suppliers manufacturers and customers into InventoryControl 3 Print barcodes and label sites and locations 4 Import or input items making sure to designate additional tracking needs like serial number or lot 5 Use your handheld or a report to do a complete inventory audit 6 Using the audit results print barcode labels for items and label every item 7 Determine the best method of handheld use for your company and implement it If the initial setup process seems daunting there are organizations that specialize in evaluating your needs and setting up your warehouse for you using InventoryControl If you need to find an organization in your area to help with this process ple
540. y CC addresses designated on the Options screen You can choose to ignore the CC address by deselecting the checkbox next to the CC Addresses field on the Email Destination List Below is an example of the Email Destination List 178 InventoryControl Printable Help FE Email Distribution List x From To supplier mysupplier com Li CC self mybusiness com example mybusiness com BCC Don t show this dialog any more Help e OK Cancel In order for the email feature to work correctly you must set your SMTP Server User Name and Password if authentication is required for outgoing mail and the SMTP Port on the Options screen If these are not set an error message will appear For more information on setting these email options on the Options screen please refer to the Options Screen topic For more information on the Email Distribution List please see the Email Distribution List topic 10 Click Save to save this order to the database A newly created pick order has a status of New The status remains New until pick quantities are entered on the Pick screen If the order becomes overdue before it begins to be picked the status changes to New Overdue 11 3 Editing Pick Orders Pro and Enterprise Versions Only Note For information on the benefits of upgrading your version of InventoryControl or WaspNest Inventory please select Help gt Benefits of Upgrading on the Main screen The Edit Pick Ord
541. y field all that is required for each Pick are values for Qty and Pallet The Total Qty is incremented each time an Pick is submitted while looping z i Press the ENT key to submit the Pick transaction and continue looping or Press the F4 key to exit the loop When looping on a Tracked By field all items entered should have the same Tracked By requirements If a different Tracked By field is required you will be prompted to enter the information before continuing Looping will need to be restarted 379 InventoryControl Printable Help 19 22 WDT2200 Receiving Inventory This function applies to Pro and Enterprise Versions only This screen allows you to select which purchase order you are receiving on and to mark individual items on that purchase order as received into a specific location Notes e Picks can also be done at the PC e Manual items cannot be received on the mobile devices Please refer to Creating a Purchase Order for more information on Manual items e Make sure the PDT s date and time are set correctly before performing inventory transactions e H Source and or Destination sites are not specified during on the database you sent to the PDT the following message will be displayed the first time you attempt to perform an inventory transaction on the PDT Please use the Site Config function to Select Source and Destination Sites ESC Exit Press the Escape key to return to the Main Menu then select the 6 key
542. y on a mobile device the cost will transfer as either the Item Cost or the Average Cost depending on the selection made on the Options screen Keep in mind that there is no way to change the price after the handheld transactions are processed on the PC If you have the Enterprise or Pro version and the inventory is received against a PO on the handheld the item cost is calculated from the cost on the PO If the final cost is different from what was put on the PO you can edit the handheld transactions as described above How is Cost Handled when Importing Inventory Inventory does not import with a cost If you intend to use cost you should manually add your inventory using the Add screen and specify the cost Usually you can calculate the average cost of your existing inventory and it is recommended that you use the average cost number to start with 21 InventoryControl Printable Help 2 8 Using Custom Fields InventoryConirol allows you to create custom fields on your Items Sites etc This enables you to capture information that is specific to your business needs The Custom Texts and Custom Numbers and Dates tabs can be found on each of the following screens Create New Customer Create New Manufacturer Create New Item Create New Site Create New Location Create New Supplier Note The Edit Field Names option on the Options screen must be enabled in order to enter custom text numbers and dates For more information on the Opti
543. y purpose in the Site Configuration screen you can set up your device to automatically include these Sites in the appropriate fields in InventoryControl Pinning Pinning can be used to lock the values in any field This enables you to enter repeated information rapidly without having to manually re enter repetitive data 20 5 Windows Mobile Device Rebooting If your device locks up you can perform a warm reboot This will reset the device and should return it to normal functioning A warm reboot will not affect your data To perform a warm reboot gently insert a pin into the Reset hole on the back of the device then remove the pin The device will reset 20 6 Windows Mobile Device Enabling the Scanner Before you use InventoryControl on your Windows Mobile Device for the first time you may need to enable the scanner If at any time the scanner on your mobile device stops functioning this procedure should also restore its functionality Enabling the Scanner 1 Tap the Start icon at the bottom left corner of the device screen 2 Select Settings gt Control Panel IF Programs gt Ze Favorites gt O Documents gt E Control Panel E Network and Dial up Connections d W Taskbar and Start Menu 389 InventoryControl Printable Help The Control Panel screen displays Ne x 0 O Bluetooth Certificates Device 2 B CPU Speed Date Time Device Management Dialing Display
544. you input cost for an item into the New or Edit Item screen the cost is your cost for purchasing one of the stocking units If one barcode laser scanner costs 300 you would enter 300 into the cost field If you remove fractional quantities of an item the cost should still be for one whole stocking unit Let s use rope as an example Normally the rope is sold in increments of a foot so the Stocking Unit is ft Each foot costs 0 12 making the cost 12 cents Continuing the rope example assume that exact multiples of feet are rarely sold In this case you could change the stocking unit to inches since that is the lowest unit or measure Since InventoryControl does not do the math for you when determining the quantity you are adding and the cost at add time you should choose one that makes it easiest for you to add and remove Regardless of the stocking unit you choose the cost should be entered for one whole stocking unit How is Cost handled when Add Inventory on the PC When inventory is added on the PC it is assigned a cost for each 1 unit If you add 20 scanners in the Add screen the cost will automatically default to the Item Cost the cost you entered on the New or Edit Item screen gt General tab ZE Add Data Pending Transaction List D Item Number Serial Numbe 101 Lel 2 Description Lot 101 1 Location Date Co 1 1 X A 2011013 Quantity Pallet 1 00 2 L 1 No of Labels Supplier Code d
545. you specified For example if you are using the FIFO method if you later remove 5 5 of the 10 00 items will be removed first Average Cost 15 x 10 00 30 x 8 00 45 8 67 When calculating Average Cost the software does not include records that have an average cost of zero When you run an Inventory Cost Report the software does include zero cost quantities when calculating Total Cost This field specifies a manufacturer s list price for an item This field is for your information only and is not included on any reports This field specifies the price at which you sell an item This field is for your information only and is not included on any reports This field specifies the minimum stock level you wish to maintain for this item This field specifies the maximum stock level you wish to maintain 94 InventoryControl Printable Help L Leg TI O Reorder Qty This field specifies the quantity at which you want to reorder inventory Note The Minimum Stock Level Maximum Stock Level and Reorder Quantity fields found on this tab represent these levels at the item level only meaning these are the stock levels for this item throughout all locations If you want to maintain these levels by location you can do so on the Location Settings tab described below The Total Available counter is the sum of Total Checked Out and Total In House The Total Checked Out counter is the quantity of this item that is currently Checked Out
546. your file on this screen After you have made your selections click Save to export your data A confirmation message will appear when your data has been successfully exported by the system 115 InventoryControl Printable Help Print Print allows you to print the list When this button is selected a standard Page Setup screen appears allowing you to enter margins An example of this screen is shown below Page Setup xa Paper Size Letter 8 x 11 in 7 Source Auto Select z Orientation Margins inches a Portrait Left 1 Righ 1 Landscape Top 1 Bottom 1 Cancel Click the OK button on the Page Setup screen to print the list The list will print to your default printer Group By The list screens provide you with the capability of grouping the displayed information so you can view data in a way that is most easy to read for you You can have one group two groups or many groups depending on how you want to view your information For instance if you want all inventory on the Inventory List to be displayed grouped by location you can quickly set this up To see the grouping options click the Group By button The top of the list screen expands to display the group selections as shown below kiA Inventory List ZS A amp BRBS r A Filter Toggle Checkin CheckOut Move Add Remove Print ExportToFile Group Du Hidden Columns Drag a column header here to group by that column tem Number Item D
547. ystem and you can assign specific rights to each user that limit their activities to certain functions It is a good idea to give each user his or her own user name and password rather than sharing a single user profile as this allows you to keep track of who performs specific functions in the system InventoryControl keeps a detailed transaction history of every action performed in the software Each time an item is added removed moved etc the transaction is logged by InventoryControl and is listed with the user name of the person who performed the transaction the date time of the transaction and the type of transaction on the Transaction List Main Screen gt Lists gt Transaction List View Business Examples InventoryControl Printable Help 1 9 Step Five Print Location Labels Print Location Labels If you have set up more than one location and you will be using a mobile device with an integrated barcode scanner it is a good idea to create Location labels for each location you have entered into the system This allows you to quickly scan a barcode label when auditing or adjusting inventory at that location or when adding removing picking or receiving inventory to or from that location For ideas and examples of how to configure your labels click here You can print labels automatically after creating your locations or you can print from the Location List After printing your labels attach them to each location For example if y

There - Wasp Barcode Technologies

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents